ibmf state of good repair upgrades

IBMF STATE OF GOOD REPAIR UPGRADES

City of North Las Vegas, Nevada

SPECIFICATIONS

For

14-092

December 26, 2013

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 01100 SUMMARY

SECTION 01250 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

SECTION 01290 PAYMENT PROCEDURES

SECTION 01310 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

SECTION 01322 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION

SECTION 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

SECTION 01781 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

SECTION 01782 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

SECTION 01820 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

SECTION 02055 SOILS

SECTION 02060 AGGREGATE

SECTION 02315 EXCAVATION AND FILL

SECTION 02320 BACKFILL

SECTION 02324 TRENCHING

SECTION 02721 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE

SECTION 02741 PAVING

SECTION 02765 PAVEMENT MARKING

SECTION 033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

SECTION 051200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

SECTION 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS

SECTION 075419 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) MEMBRANE ROOFING

SECTION 083613 DOORS

SECTION 087100 FINISH HARDWARE

SECTION 092900 GYPSUM BOARD

SECTION 099113 EXTERIOR PAINTING

SECTION 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING

SECTION 099600 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS

SECTION 13125 PREFABRICATED METAL SECURITY BOOTH

SECTION 14999 PANTOGRAPH LIFT

SECTION 230513 MOTORS AND CONTROLLERS

SECTION 230529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV i

TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

(CONTINUED)

SECTION 230548 VIBRATION ISOLATION

SECTION 230553 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION

SECTION 230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

SECTION 230800 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC

SECTION 237413 DIRECT EVAPORATIVE COOLING SECTION

SECTION 238106 PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS

SECTION 238126 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS

SECTION 260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

SECTION 263110 PHOTOVOLTAIC SYSTEM INTEGRATED MOUNTING SYSTEM

SECTION 271100 CABINETS, ENCLOSURES AND RACKS

SECTION 271300 COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING

SECTION 271500 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING

SECTION 280500 ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 280513 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

SECTION 280514 FIBER OPTICS

SECTION 280526 SYSTEM SIGNAL GROUNDING

SECTION 280528 RACEWAYS AND BOXES

SECTION 281300 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM

SECTION 281500 ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS

SECTION 281650 DURESS ALARM SYSTEM

SECTION 282300 VIDEO SURVELILLANCE (CCTV) SYSTEM

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV ii

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 01100

SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this

Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Work covered by the Contract Documents.

2. Type of the Contract.

3. Work phases.

4. Use of premises.

5. Owner’s Occupancy Requirements.

6. Work restrictions.

7. Specification formats and conventions.

1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. Project Identification: Security Upgrades at the Integrated Bus Maintenance Facility,

City of North Las Vegas NV.

B. Owner: The Regional Transportation Commission, 600 S. Grand Central Parkway,

Suite 350, Las Vegas, NV 89106-4512.

C. Engineer; URS 811 Grier Drive, Las Vegas, NV 89119.

D. Resident Engineer: Regional Transportation Commission, 600 S. Grand Central

Parkway, Las Vegas NV 89106-4512.

E. This work shall consist of but not be limited to the following:

1. On-site and Building Improvements, including: excavation, trenching, utilities protection, concrete paving, paving, piping and conduits, sidewalk protection, landscaping, security equipment, HVAC work, door repair work, trench plating/protection, pull strings, hangers/supports and security devices.

2. The work shall be coordinated in and around the Bus Schedules and Operations as well as the Building systems and operations and shall not negatively impact the overall operations of the site.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

01100 - 1

SUMMARY

08/07/2013

1.4 WORK PHASES

The work for this Contract shall be phased as necessary to coordinate with Bus

Schedules and Operations.

1.5 USE OF PREMISES

A. General: Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner and Bus Operator to identify a suitable area –as required – for the storage of materials, staging area. Contractor’s use of existing premises is limited by the operations of vehicles, passenger service and transfers and shall be clearly defined based on the Contractor’s proposed work sequence.

1.6 WORK SEQUENCE

A. Before commencing Work, submit a schedule showing the sequence, commencement dates and completion dates for the Owner’s review and approval.

1.7 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. General: Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner and Bus Operator to identify a suitable area –as required – for the storage of materials, staging area. Contractor’s use of existing premises is limited by the operations of vehicles, passenger service and transfers and shall be clearly defined based on the Contractor’s proposed work sequence.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not used)

END OF SECTION 01100

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

01100 - 2

SUMMARY

08/07/2013

SECTION 01250

CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL




Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after Contract award.

1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

A. The Regional Transportation Commission of Southern Nevada (RTC) will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on a form designated by

Resident Engineer.

1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS

A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract

Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and

Specifications.

1. Proposal Requests issued by the Resident Engineer are for information only. Do not consider them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.

2. Within time specified in Proposal Request after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the

Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

01250 - 1


08/07/2013

b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to Resident Engineer. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised drawings or specifications.

1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.

2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.

5. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

6. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.

C. Proposal Request Form: Use form included designated by Resident Engineer.

1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, the Resident Engineer will issue a

Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on form included per GC 24.

1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

A. Construction Change Directive: the Resident Engineer may issue a Construction

Change Directive. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the

Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the

Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

01250 - 2


08/07/2013

1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)


RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

01250 - 3


08/07/2013

SECTION 01290

PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL




Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment.


1. Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract.

2. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements governing preparation and submittal of Contractor's Construction

Schedule and Submittals Schedule.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the

Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing

Contractor's Applications for Payment.

1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of

Contractor's Construction Schedule. The Schedule shall be in a format approved by the

Resident Engineer.

1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. b. Submittals Schedule. c. Contractor's Construction Schedule.

2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Resident Engineer no more than 15 days after

Notice to Proceed.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

01290 - 1

PAYMENT PROCEDURES

08/07/2013

B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each

Specification Section.

1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of

Values: a. Project name / number and location. b. Contractor's name and address. c. Date of submittal.

2. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value.

1) Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent.

3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the

Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate.

4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.

5. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If specified, include evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing.

6. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.

7. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the

Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at

Contractor's option.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

01290 - 2

PAYMENT PROCEDURES

08/07/2013

8. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change

Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.

1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Resident Engineer and paid for by Owner.

1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial

Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

B. Payment Application Times: Progress payments shall be submitted to the Resident

Engineer as stated in GC 29. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the last day of each month.

C. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA format or similar format.

D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Resident Engineer will return incomplete applications without action.

1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's

Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.

2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application.

E. Transmittal: Submit 2 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for

Payment to Resident Engineer by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. All copies shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.

1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application.

F. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from every entity who is lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment.

1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item.

2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers.

3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers.

4. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to Owner.

G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:

1. List of subcontractors.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

01290 - 3

PAYMENT PROCEDURES

08/07/2013

2. Schedule of Values.

3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final).

4. Products list.

5. Schedule of unit prices.

6. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final).

7. List of Contractor's staff assignments.

8. List of Contractor's principal consultants.

9. Copies of building permits.

10. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work.

11. Initial progress report.

12. Report of preconstruction conference.

13. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.

14. Performance and payment bonds.

15. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance.

16. Initial settlement survey and damage report if required.

H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of

Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.

1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.

2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

I. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:

1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.

2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.

3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.

4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims."

5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens."

6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment."

7. Evidence that claims have been settled.

8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.




RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

01290 - 4

PAYMENT PROCEDURES

08/07/2013

SECTION 01310

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Coordination Drawings.

2. Administrative and supervisory personnel.

3. Project meetings.

4. Requests for Interpretation (RFIs).


1. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting Contractor's Construction Schedule.

2. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the

Contract.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI: Request from Contractor seeking interpretation or clarification of the Contract

Documents.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the

Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work.

Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

01310 - 1


08/07/2013

4. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical.

B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required.

C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule.

2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values.

3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.

4. Delivery and processing of submittals.

5. Progress meetings.

6. Preinstallation conferences.

7. Project closeout activities.

8. Startup and adjustment of systems.

9. Project closeout activities.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittal log: Prepare a detailed submittal log per CSI and submit this document to the Resident Engineer not more than 30 Days after Notice to Proceed.

B. Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated for each facility and by separate entities.

1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base

Coordination Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems. b. Indicate required installation sequences. c. Indicate dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings and make specific note of dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to

Architect for resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

01310 - 2


08/07/2013

2. Sheet Size: At least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 40 inches (750 by 1000 mm).

3. Number of Copies: Submit three opaque copies of each submittal. Resident

Engineer will return one copy. a. Submit five copies where Coordination Drawings are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Resident Engineer will retain four copies; remainder will be returned.

4. Refer to individual Sections for Coordination Drawing requirements for Work in those Sections.

C. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of construction award, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at

Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.

1. Superintendent: The Contractor shall designate a superintendent who shall be authorized to act on behalf of the Contractor, to receive contract modifications, and be responsible for informing others in Contractor’s employ or subcontractors of changes to the Work. a. Superintendent shall not be replaced by Contractor except in case of emergency as approved by the Owner. Any subsequent substitution, if approved, will require full-time presence on-site of Contractor’s project manager in addition to superintendent. b. Superintendent shall be present at Site for a minimum of eight (8) hours each day that construction work is progressing, or that is a normal business day until all punch list items have been completed. The superintendent shall also be present at the Site during all work performed at other than the above listed times. c. The Contractor shall arrange to have the superintendent available by cellular phone and/or radio on a 24-hour a day, seven days a week basis throughout the term of the construction contract.

1.6 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Resident

Engineer and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times.

2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.

3. Minutes: Resident Engineer to record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, within three days of the meeting.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

01310 - 3


08/07/2013

B. Preconstruction Conference: Owner shall schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Resident Engineer, and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at

Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.

1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Resident Engineer, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Contractor to discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. c. Designation of key personnel and their duties. d. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. e. Procedures for RFIs. f. Procedures for testing and inspecting. g. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. h. Distribution of the Contract Documents. i. Submittal procedures. j. Preparation of Record Documents. k. Owner's occupancy requirements. l. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. m. Parking availability. n. Office, work, and storage areas. o. Equipment deliveries and priorities. p. First aid. q. Security. r. Progress cleaning. s. Working hours.

3. Minutes: Record and distribute meeting minutes.

C. Pre installation Conferences: Contractor to conduct a pre installation conference at

Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction at least 1 week prior to the start of each activity.

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Resident Engineer of scheduled meeting dates.

2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: a. The Contract Documents. b. Related RFIs. c. Related Change Orders.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

01310 - 4


08/07/2013

d. Purchases. e. Deliveries. f. Submittals. g. Review of mockups. h. Possible conflicts. i. Compatibility problems. j. Time schedules. k. Weather limitations. l. Manufacturer's written recommendations. m. Warranty requirements. n. Compatibility of materials. o. Acceptability of substrates. p. Temporary facilities and controls. q. Space and access limitations. r. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. s. Testing and inspecting requirements. t. Installation procedures. u. Coordination with other work. v. Required performance results. w. Protection of adjacent work. x. Protection of construction and personnel. y. Access to utility easements by utility companies.

3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions.

4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present.

5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests.

1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of the Owner and the Resident

Engineer, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting.

Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule.

Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

01310 - 5


08/07/2013

1) Review schedule for next period. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:

1) Interface requirements.

2) Sequence of operations.

3) Status of submittals.

4) Deliveries.

5) Off-site fabrication.

6) Access.

7) Site utilization.

8) Temporary facilities and controls.

9) Work hours.

10) Hazards and risks.

11) Progress cleaning.

12) Quality and work standards.

13) Status of correction of deficient items.

14) Field observations.

15) RFIs.

16) Status of proposal requests.

17) Pending changes.

18) Status of Change Orders.

19) Pending claims and disputes.

20) Documentation of information for payment requests.

3. Minutes: Record the meeting minutes.

4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.

1.7 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFIs)

A. Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract

Documents, and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.

1. RFIs shall originate with the Contractor. RFI’s submitted by entities other than

Contractor will be returned with no response.

2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in

Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.

B. Frivolous RFIs. Contractor will be assessed the cost of the Resident Engineer and design professional's time and materials for unnecessary or frivolous RFIs.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

01310 - 6


08/07/2013

C. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and the following:

1. Project name.

2. Date.

3. Name of Contractor.

4. Name of Resident Engineer.

5. RFI number, numbered sequentially.

6. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.

7. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.

8. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.

9. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the

Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.

10. Contractor's signature.

11. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product

Data, Shop Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. a. Supplementary drawings prepared by Contractor shall include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments.

D. Hard-Copy RFIs: Form at end of this Section.

1. Identify each page of attachments with the RFI number and sequential page number.

E. Software-Generated RFIs: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above.

1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.

F. Resident Engineer's Action: Submit RFIs to Resident Engineer. Resident Engineer will review each RFI, determine action required, and return it. Allow seven working days for response for each RFI. RFIs received after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.

1. The following RFIs will be returned by the Resident Engineer without action: a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract

Documents. d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. e. Requests for interpretation of actions on submittals. f. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors.

2. Action may include a request for additional information, in which case time for response will start again.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

01310 - 7


08/07/2013

3. Action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract

Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to

Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures." a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract

Time or the Contract Sum, notify Resident Engineer in writing within 5 days of receipt of the RFI response.

G. On receipt of Resident Engineer's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Resident Engineer within five days if Contractor disagrees with response.

H. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly. Include the following:

1. Project name.

2. Name and address of Contractor.

3. Name and address of Resident Engineer.

4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted.

5. RFI description.

6. Date the RFI was submitted.

7. Date response was received.

8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change

Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate.




RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

01310 - 8


08/07/2013

SECTION 01322

PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1. Periodic construction photographs.


1. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting photographic documentation.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site and building with notation of vantage points marked for location and direction of each photograph. Include same label information as corresponding set of photographs.

B. Construction Photographs: Submit three prints of each photographic view.

1. Format: 8-by-10-inch full-color image prints on 8 ½ inch by 11 inch single-weight commercial-grade photographic paper, enclosed back to back in clear plastic sleeves that are punched for standard 3-ring binder.

2. Identification: On back of each print, provide an applied label or rubber-stamped impression with the following information: a. Name of Project. b. Contract Number c. Phase. d. Orientation of view. e. Date photograph was taken. f. Name and address of photographer. g. Photographer’s numbered identification of exposure.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

01322 - 1

PHOTOGRAPIC DOCUMENTATION

08/07/2013

3. Digital Images: Submit a complete set of digital image electronic files with each submittal of prints on CD-ROM. Identify electronic media with date photographs were taken. Submit images that have same aspect ratio as the sensor, uncropped.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Photographer Qualifications: An individual who has been regularly engaged as a professional photographer of construction projects and is acceptable to the Owner.

1.5 USAGE RIGHTS

A. Obtain and transfer copyright usage rights from photographer to Owner for unlimited reproduction of photographic documentation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA

A. Digital Images: Provide images in uncompressed TIFF format, produced by a digital camera with minimum sensor size of 4.0 megapixels, and at an image resolution of not less than 1024 by 768 pixels.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS

A. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in focus, to clearly show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areas will not be accepted.

1. Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each photographic location.

B. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take photographs monthly as evidence of existing project conditions. Select vantage points to show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken.


RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

01322 - 2

PHOTOGRAPIC DOCUMENTATION

08/07/2013

SECTION 01600

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products.


1. Division 1 Section "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified.

2. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for Contract closeout.

3. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and installations specified to be warranted.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for

Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

01600 - 1


08/07/2013

B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by

Contractor.

C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product List: Submit a list, in tabular from, showing specified products. Include generic names of products required. Include manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each product.

1. Coordinate product list with Contractor's Construction Schedule and the

Submittals Schedule.

2. Form: Tabulate information for each product under the following column headings: a. Specification Section number and title. b. Generic name used in the Contract Documents. c. Proprietary name, model number, and similar designations. d. Manufacturer's name and address. e. Supplier's name and address. f. Installer's name and address. g. Projected delivery date or time span of delivery period. h. Identification of items that require early submittal approval for scheduled delivery date.

3. Initial Submittal: Within 30 calendar days after date of commencement of the

Work, submit 5 copies of initial product list per submittal log. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from Contract requirements. a. At Contractor's option, initial submittal may be limited to product selections and designations that must be established early in Contract period.

4. Completed List: Within 60 calendar days after date of commencement of the

Work, submit 5 copies of completed product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from Contract requirements.

5. Resident Engineer’s Action: Resident Engineer will respond in writing to

Contractor within 15 days of receipt of completed product list. Architect's response will include a list of unacceptable product selections and a brief explanation of reasons for this action. Architect's response, or lack of response, does not constitute a waiver of requirement to comply with the Contract

Documents.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

01600 - 2


08/07/2013

B. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification

Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Substitution Request Form: Use form provided by Owner.

2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery. j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract

Sum. k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated. l. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.

3. Resident Engineer’s Action: If necessary, Resident Engineer will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within 7 calendar days of receipt of a request for substitution. Resident Engineer will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 work days of receipt of request, or 7 calendar days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

01600 - 3


08/07/2013

a. Form of Acceptance: Change Order. b. Use product specified if Resident Engineer cannot make a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated.

C. Comparable Product Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration.

Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include

Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Resident Engineer’s Action: If necessary, Resident Engineer will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Resident Engineer will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal

Procedures." b. Use product specified if Resident Engineer cannot make a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated.

D. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in

Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.


A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Delivery and Handling:

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces.

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

01600 - 4


08/07/2013

C. Storage:

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.

2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.

3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weather-tight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.

4. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms.

5. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment.

6. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.

7. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.

1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.

2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract

Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner.

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution.

1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed.

2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using appropriate form properly executed.

3. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties.

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout

Procedures."

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

01600 - 5


08/07/2013

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract

Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection.

5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is Architect's.

6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the

Specifications establish "salient characteristics" of products.

B. Product Selection Procedures:

1. Product: Where Specifications name a single product and manufacturer, provide the named product that complies with requirements.

2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements.

3. Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements.

4. Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements.

5. Available Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2

"Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.

6. Available Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2

"Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.

7. Product Options: Where Specifications indicate that sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide the specified product or system. Comply with provisions in

Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for consideration of an unnamed product or system.

8. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

01600 - 6


08/07/2013

of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by the other named manufacturers.

9. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product that complies with other specified requirements. a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items. b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.

2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Timing: Resident Engineer will consider requests for substitution if received within 10 calendar days after the Notice to Proceed. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Resident Engineer.

B. Conditions: Resident Engineer will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied,

Resident Engineer will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Resident Engineer and Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.

2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract

Documents.

3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results.

4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.

5. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction

Schedule.

6. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction.

7. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.

8. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.

9. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.

10. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

01600 - 7


08/07/2013

consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

A. Conditions: Resident Engineer will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Resident Engineer will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the

Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the

Work.

2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.

4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.

5. Samples, if requested.



RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

01600 - 8


08/07/2013

SECTION 01770

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL




Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Inspection procedures.

2. Warranties.

3. Final cleaning.


1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for

Payment for Substantial and Final Completion.

2. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning of Project site.

3. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings,

Record Specifications, and Record Product Data.

4. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements.

5. Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing

Owner's personnel.

6. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for the Work in those Sections.

1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of

Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.

1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.

2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.

3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

01770 - 1

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

08/07/2013

4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.

6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise

Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions.

8. Complete startup testing of systems.

9. Submit test/adjust/balance records.

10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements.

11. Advise Owner of changeover in utilities.

12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance.

13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.

14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion to the

Resident Engineer no more than 72 Hours prior to the scheduled Inspection. On receipt of request, Resident Engineer will either proceed with inspection or notify

Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Resident Engineer will prepare the Certificate of

Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on

Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected and the full use of the facility must be recognized prior to the issuance of substantial completion certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final

Completion.

1.4 FINAL ACCEPTANCE

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of

Final Completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment

Procedures."

2. Submit certified copy of Project Manager’s Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by

Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.

4. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

01770 - 2

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

08/07/2013

5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems.

6. The Contractor shall complete all open punch list items identified during substantial completion within 30 Calendar Days prior to the issuance of Final

Acceptance.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Resident Engineer will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Resident Engineer will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

1.5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first.

2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.

3. Include the following information at the top of each page: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Resident Engineer. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number.

1.6 WARRANTIES

A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of

Substantial Completion is indicated. The Contractor shall warranty all work for a minimum of 1 year from the date of Final Acceptance - unless otherwise stated.

B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.

C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

01770 - 3

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

08/07/2013

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive

8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) paper.

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title

"WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.

D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning.

Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, eventextured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

01770 - 4

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

08/07/2013

disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. f. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. g. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. h. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. i. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, visionobscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. j. Remove labels that are not permanent. k. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. l. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. m. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. n. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. o. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. p. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction. q. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. r. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report.

D. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully.


RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

01770 - 5

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

08/07/2013

SECTION 01781

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record

Documents, including the following:

1. Record Drawings.

2. Record Specifications.

3. Record Product Data.


1. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures.

2. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements.

3. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record

Documents of the Work in those Sections.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1. Number of Copies: Submit copies of Record Drawings as follows: a. Initial Submittal: Submit one set of plots from corrected Record CAD

Drawings and one set of marked-up Record Prints. Resident Engineer will initial and date each plot and mark whether general scope of changes, additional information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable.

Resident Engineer will return plots and prints for organizing into sets, printing, binding, and final submittal. b. Final Submittal: Submit one set of marked-up Record Prints, one set of

Record CAD Drawing files, one set of Record CAD Drawing plots, and three copies printed from record plots. Plot and print each Full Size

Drawings, whether or not changes and additional information were recorded.

1) Electronic Media: CD-R.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

01781 - 1


08/07/2013

B. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.

C. Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal.

1. Where Record Product Data is required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit marked-up Product Data as an insert in manual instead of submittal as Record Product Data.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue- or black-line white prints of the Contract

Drawings and Shop Drawings.

1. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up Record Prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.

2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations below first floor. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. k. Changes made following Project Manager’s written orders. l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.

3. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

01781 - 2


08/07/2013

4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings.

6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

B. Record CAD Drawings: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial

Completion, review marked-up Record Prints with Resident Engineer. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings, as follows:

1. Format: Same CAD program, version, and operating system as the original

Contract Drawings.

2. Format: DWG.

3. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on Record

Prints. Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable.

4. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect through Resident Engineer for resolution.

5. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of CAD Drawings of the Contract

Drawings for use in recording information. a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of

CAD Drawings as they relate to the Contract Drawings.

C. Newly Prepared Record Drawings: Prepare new Drawings instead of preparing

Record Drawings where Resident Engineer determines that neither the original

Contract Drawings nor Shop Drawings are suitable to show actual installation.

1. New Drawings may be required when a Change Order is issued as a result of accepting an alternate, substitution, or other modification.

2. Consult Resident Engineer for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations required to record the actual physical installation and its relation to other construction. Integrate newly prepared Record Drawings into Record Drawing sets; comply with procedures for formatting, organizing, copying, binding, and submitting.

D. Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT

RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location.

1. Record Prints: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.

2. Record Transparencies: Organize into unbound sets matching Record Prints.

Place transparencies in durable tube-type drawing containers with end caps.

Mark end cap of each container with identification. If container does not include a complete set, identify Drawings included.

3. Record CAD Drawings: Organize CAD information into separate electronic files that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each CAD file.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

01781 - 3


08/07/2013

4. Identification: As follows: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect and Resident Engineer. e. Name of Contractor.

2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.

3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made.

4. For each principal product, indicate whether Record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as Record

Product Data.

2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

01781 - 4


08/07/2013

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for

Project Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project

Record Documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and

Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction.

Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record

Documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Resident

Engineer's reference during normal working hours.


RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

01781 - 5


08/07/2013

SECTION 01782

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL




Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory.

2. Emergency manuals.

3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.

4. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials, finishes and systems and equipment.


1. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals.

2. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals.

3. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for preparing Record Drawings for operation and maintenance manuals.

4. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for the Work in those Sections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction.

B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Initial Submittal: Submit 2 draft copies of each manual at least 15 days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion of the requested equipment systems .

Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Resident Engineer will return

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

01782 - 1


08/07/2013

one copy of draft and mark whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable.

B. Final Submittal: Submit two copies of each manual in final form at least 15 days before final inspection. Resident Engineer will return copy with comments within 15 days after final inspection.

1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Resident Engineer’s comments.

Submit 3 copies of each corrected manual within 15 working days of receipt of

Resident Engineer’s comments.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more than one factory-authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate information furnished by representatives and prepare manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY

A. Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following:

1. List of documents.

2. List of systems.

3. List of equipment.

4. Table of contents.

B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.

C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.

D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual.

E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and

Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems."

2.2 MANUALS, GENERAL

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

01782 - 2


08/07/2013

equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:

1. Title page.

2. Table of contents.

3. Manual contents.

B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information:

1. Subject matter included in manual.

2. Name and address of Project.

3. Name and address of Owner.

4. Date of submittal.

5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor.

6. Name and address of Resident Engineer.

7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.

C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.

1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set.

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.

1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-

280-mm) paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system. b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION

AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.

2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, crossreferenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual.

3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

01782 - 3


08/07/2013

4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) white bond paper.

5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text. a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts. b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.

2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:

1. Type of emergency.

2. Emergency instructions.

3. Emergency procedures.

B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:

1. Fire.

2. Flood.

3. Gas leak.

4. Water leak.

5. Power failure.

6. Water outage.

7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure.

8. Chemical release or spill.

C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.

D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Instructions on stopping.

2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.

3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits.

4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.

5. Special operating instructions and procedures.

2.4 OPERATION MANUALS

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information:

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

01782 - 4


08/07/2013

1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.

2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.

3. Operating standards.

4. Operating procedures.

5. Operating logs.

6. Wiring diagrams.

7. Control diagrams/Operating Logic.

8. Piped system diagrams.

9. Precautions against improper use.

10. HVAC Drawings.

11. Approved Coordination Drawings, as required.

12. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.

B. Descriptions: Include the following:

1. Product name and model number.

2. Manufacturer's name.

3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.

4. Equipment function.

5. Operating characteristics.

6. Limiting conditions.

7. Performance curves.

8. Engineering data and tests.

9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Startup procedures.

2. Equipment or system break-in procedures.

3. Routine and normal operating instructions.

4. Regulation and control procedures.

5. Instructions on stopping.

6. Normal shutdown instructions.

7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.

8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.

9. Special operating instructions and procedures.

10. Spare/critical parts and functions.

D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.

E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification.

F. HVAC Systems, as installed including all devices.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

01782 - 5


08/07/2013

2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number.

2. Manufacturer's name.

3. Color, pattern, and texture.

4. Material and chemical composition.

5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:

1. Inspection procedures.

2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.

3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.

4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.

5. Repair instructions.

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services.

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents.

For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

01782 - 6


08/07/2013

C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:

1. Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins.

2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly.

3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.

4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures:

1. Test and inspection instructions.

2. Troubleshooting guide.

3. Precautions against improper maintenance.

4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.

5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.

6. Demonstration and training videotape, if available.

E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment.

1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.

2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance.

F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.

G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent.

H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

01782 - 7


08/07/2013

B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated.

C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.

E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems.

F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in

Record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.

1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals.

2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared Record Drawings in Division 1

Section "Project Record Documents."

G. Comply with Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation.


RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

01782 - 8


08/07/2013

SECTION 01820

DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

PART 1 - GENERAL




Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing

Owner's personnel, including the following:

1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment.

2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment.

3. Demonstration and training videotapes.


1. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for requirements for pre instruction conferences.

2. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for demonstration and training for products in those Sections.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Instruction Program: Submit two copies of outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module.

1. At completion of training, submit two complete training manuals for Owner's use.

B. Qualification Data: For facilitator – name, address and qualifications.

C. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of instruction time.

D. Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and documentation of performance-based test.

E. Demonstration and Training Videotapes: Submit two copies within seven days of end of each training module.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

01820 - 1


08/07/2013

1. Identification: On each copy, provide an applied label with the following information: a. Name of Project. b. Name and address of photographer. c. Name of Resident Engineer. d. Name of Contractor. e. Date videotape was recorded. f. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and elevation or story of construction.

2. Transcript: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) paper, punched and bound in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered binders. Mark appropriate identification on front and spine of each binder. Include a cover sheet with same label information as the corresponding videotape. Include name of Project and date of videotape on each page.

3. Video Tape each individual session as directed by the Resident Engineer.


A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for this Project, and whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful learning performance.

B. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training.

C. Photographer Qualifications: A professional photographer who is experienced photographing construction projects.

D. Pre-instruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to demonstration and training including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction.

2. Review and finalize instruction schedule and verify availability of educational materials, instructors' personnel, audiovisual equipment, and facilities needed to avoid delays.

3. Review required content of instruction.

4. For instruction that must occur outside, review weather and forecasted weather conditions and procedures to follow if conditions are unfavorable.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

01820 - 2


08/07/2013

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations.

B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time, and course content.

C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Architect.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM

A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual

Specification Sections, and as follows:

1. Motorized doors, including overhead coiling and sectional doors.

2. Maintenance equipment, including vehicle lifts, paint booth equipment and systems, vehicle wash equipment and systems, parts and tool lifts, fueling equipment and systems, and traffic control devices.

3. Fire-protection systems, including fire alarm and fire-extinguishing systems.

4. Gas detection systems.

5. Automated Fare Retrieval systems.

6. Vehicle management systems.

7. Intrusion detection systems.

8. Conveying systems, including parts and tool lifts and cranes.

9. HVAC systems, including air-handling equipment, air distribution systems and terminal equipment and devices.

10. HVAC instrumentation and controls.

11. Electrical service and distribution, including transformers switchboards, panelboards and motor controls.

12. Packaged engine generators, including transfer switches.

13. Lighting equipment and controls.

14. Communication systems, including voice and data equipment.

B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module.

Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following:

1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following: a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

01820 - 3


08/07/2013

c. Operating standards. d. Regulatory requirements. e. Equipment function. f. Operating characteristics. g. Limiting conditions. h. Performance curves.

2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail: a. Emergency manuals. b. Operations manuals. c. Maintenance manuals. d. Project Record Documents. e. Identification systems. f. Warranties and bonds. g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.

3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable: a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages. b. Instructions on stopping. c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems. f. Special operating instructions and procedures.

4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable: a. Startup procedures. b. Equipment or system break-in procedures. c. Routine and normal operating instructions. d. Regulation and control procedures. e. Control sequences. f. Safety procedures. g. Instructions on stopping. h. Normal shutdown instructions. i. Operating procedures for emergencies. j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. m. Special operating instructions and procedures.

5. Adjustments: Include the following: a. Alignments. b. Checking adjustments. c. Noise and vibration adjustments. d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

01820 - 4


08/07/2013

6. Troubleshooting: Include the following: a. Diagnostic instructions. b. Test and inspection procedures.

7. Maintenance: Include the following: a. Inspection procedures. b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. d. Procedures for routine cleaning e. Procedures for preventive maintenance. f. Procedures for routine maintenance. g. Instruction on use of special tools.

8. Repairs: Include the following: a. Diagnosis instructions. b. Repair instructions. c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. d. Instructions for identifying parts and components. e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a combined training manual.

B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location.

3.2 INSTRUCTION

A. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules, to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for number of participants, instruction times, and location.

B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.

1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants.

C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.

1. Schedule training with Owner with at least fourteen days' advance notice.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

01820 - 5


08/07/2013

D. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner. Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use.


RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

01820 - 6


08/07/2013

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

SECTION 02055

SOILS

A. Subsoil materials and topsoil materials.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 02060 - Aggregate.

B. Section 02311 - Rough Grading.

C. Section 02320 - Backfill.

D. Section 02324 - Trenching.

E. Section 02923 - Landscape Grading.

F. Section 02930 - Exterior Plants.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. AASHTO T180 - Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 10-lb (4.54 kg)

Rammer and an 18-in. (457 mm) Drop.

B. ASTM D 1557 - Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures

Using 10 pound (4.54 Kg) Rammer and 18 inch (457 mm) Drop.

C. ASTM D 2487 - Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes.

D. ASTM D 2922 - Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods

(Shallow Depth).

E. ASTM D 3017 - Moisture Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear

Methods (Shallow Depth).

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Samples: Submit, in air-tight containers, 2-pound sample of each type of fill to testing laboratory.

B. Materials Source: Submit name of imported materials source.


RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

02055 - 1

SOILS

08/07/2013

A. Perform Work in accordance with Uniform Standard Specifications for Public

Works’ Construction Off-Site Improvements, Clark County Area, Nevada, latest edition and Clark County Public Works Supplements.

B. Maintain one copy on site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSOIL MATERIALS

A. Subsoil: Conforming to Uniform Standard Specifications for Public Works’

Construction Off-Site Improvements, Clark County Area, Nevada, latest edition and Clark County Public Works Supplements.

2.2 TOPSOIL MATERIALS

A. Topsoil Type: Conforming to Uniform Standard Specifications for Public Works’

Construction Off-Site Improvements, Clark County Area, Nevada, latest edition and Clark County Public Works Supplements.

2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing and Analysis of Subsoil Material: Perform in accordance with Uniform

Standard Specifications for Public Works’ Construction Off-Site Improvements,

Clark County Area, Nevada, latest edition and Clark County Public Works

Supplements.

B. Testing and Analysis of Topsoil Material: Perform in accordance with Uniform



Supplements.

C. If tests indicate materials do not meet specified requirements, change material and retest.

D. Provide materials of each type from same source throughout the Work.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SOIL REMOVAL

A. Excavate subsoil and topsoil as required for construction. Strip topsoil to whatever depth it may occur in designated areas.

B. Remove lumped soil, boulders, and rock.

C. Stockpile excavated material in area designated by the owner and remove excess material not being used, from site.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

02055 - 2

SOILS

08/07/2013

3.2 STOCKPILING

A. Stockpile materials on site at locations designated by Owner

B. Stockpile in sufficient quantities to meet Project schedule and requirements.

C. Separate differing materials with dividers or stockpile apart to prevent mixing.

D. Prevent intermixing of soil types or contamination.

E. Direct surface water away from stockpile site to prevent erosion or deterioration of materials.

F. Material shall be stockpiled on impervious material and covered over with same material, until disposal.

3.3 STOCKPILE CLEANUP

A. Remove stockpile, leave area in a clean and neat condition. Grade site surface to prevent free standing surface water.


RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

02055 - 3

SOILS

08/07/2013

PART 1 - GENERAL


SECTION 02060

AGGREGATE

A. Aggregate materials for fill, drainage, and grading purposes.


A. Section 02311 - Rough Grading.

B. Section 02320 - Backfill.

C. Section 02324 - Trenching.

D. Section 02721 - Aggregate Base Course.


1.3 REFERENCES

A. AASHTO M147 - Materials for Aggregate and Soil-Aggregate.

B. AASHTO T180 - Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 10-lb (4.54 kg)


C. ASTM C 136 - Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.

D. ASTM D 1557 - Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures


E. ASTM D 2487 - Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes.

F. ASTM D 2922 - Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods

(Shallow Depth).

G. ASTM D 3017 - Moisture Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear


H. ASTM D 4318 - Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Samples: Submit, in air-tight containers, 2-pound sample of each type of aggregate to testing laboratory.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

02060 - 1

AGGREGATE

08/07/2013

B. Materials Source: Submit name of imported materials suppliers.


A. Perform Work in accordance with Uniform Standard Specifications for Public


B. Maintain one copy on site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COARSE AGGREGATE MATERIALS

A. Aggregate Base Courses Type 1 and Type II: Conforming to Uniform Standard

Specifications for Public Works’ Construction Off-Site Improvements, Clark

County Area, Nevada, latest edition and Clark County Public Works

Supplements.

B. Aggregate for Bituminous Courses: Conforming to Uniform Standard



Supplements.

C. Gravel Mulch (Decomposed Granite): Coarse Stone: washed stone; free of shale, clay, friable material and debris; graded in accordance with ASTM C 136; within the following limits:

Sieve Size Percent Passing

3 inches

2 inches

1.5 inch

100

90 to100

70 to 100

3/4-inch

3/8-inch

No. 8

No. 200

0 to 50

0 to 10

0 to 5

0 to 3

D. Aggregate for Portland Cement Products: Conforming to Uniform Standard



Supplements.


RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

02060 - 2

AGGREGATE

08/07/2013

A. Aggregate Material - Testing and Analysis: Perform in accordance with Uniform



Supplements.

B. If tests indicate materials do not meet specified requirements, change material or material source and retest.

C. Provide materials of each type from same source throughout the Work.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 STOCKPILING

A. Stockpile materials on site at locations designated by Owner.

B. Stockpile in sufficient quantities to meet Project schedule and requirements.

C. Separate differing materials with dividers or stockpile apart to prevent mixing.

D. Direct surface water away from stockpile site so as to prevent erosion or deterioration of materials.

E. Materials shall be stockpiled on impervious material and covered over with same material, until disposed of.

3.2 STOCKPILE CLEANUP

A. Remove stockpile, leave area in a clean and neat condition. Grade site surface to prevent free standing surface water.


RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

02060 - 3

AGGREGATE

08/07/2013

SECTION 02315

EXCAVATION AND FILL

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Excavating for roads, parking areas, and site grading; paving and landscaping and excavating for foundations and site structures.


A. Section 02055 - Soils

B. Section 02060 – Aggregate

C. Section 02320 – Backfill

D. Section 02324 – Trenching

E. Section 02923 – Landscape Grading

F. Section 02930 – Exterior Plants

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Samples: Submit, in air-tight container, 2 pound sample of each type of fill to testing laboratory, as directed by the Owner.

B. Materials Source: Submit name of imported materials source

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Identify required lines, levels, contours and datum locations.

B. Locate, identify and protect utilities that remain from damage.

C. Notify utility company to remove and relocate utilities.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

02315 - 1

EXCAVATION AND FILL

08/07/2013

D. Protect plant life, lawns, rock outcroppings and other features remaining as a portion of final landscaping.

E. Protect bench marks, survey control points, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, parking lots, bumpers and curbs from excavating equipment and vehicular traffic.

3.2 EXCAVATING

A. Underpin adjacent structures which may be damaged during excavating work.

B. Excavate subsoil to accommodate building foundations, slabs on grade, paving, parking lots, site structures and construction operations.

C. Compact disturbed load bearing soil in direct contact with foundations to original bearing capacity; perform compaction in accordance with Section 02320 and 02324.

D. Slope banks with machine to angle of repose or less until shored.

E. Do not interfere with 45 degree bearing splay of foundations.

F. Grade top perimeter of excavating to prevent surface water from draining into excavation.

G. Hand trim excavation; Remove loose matter.

H. Remove lumped subsoil, boulders and rock up to 1/3 cubic yard measured by volume from site.

I. Notify Owner of any unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected Work in area until notified to resume Work.

J. Correct areas over excavated with backfill and compact replacement as specified for authorized excavation or replace with fill concrete as directed.

K. Stockpile excavated material in area designated on site in accordance with Section

02060; remove excess or unsuitable material from site.

L. Provide steel roadway plates of sufficient strength in the parking lot area of excavation to assure traffic flow is not interrupted.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Provide visual inspection of bearing surfaces.

B. Perform work in accordance with Uniform Standards Specifications for Public Works’

Construction Off-Site Improvements, Clark County Area, Nevada, latest edition and

Clark County Public Works Supplements.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

02315 - 2

EXCAVATION AND FILL

08/07/2013

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Prevent displacement of loose soils from falling into excavation; maintain soil stability.

B. Protect bottom of excavations and soil adjacent to and beneath foundation from freezing.

C. Protect structures, utilities and other facilities from damage caused by settlement. lateral movement, undermining, washout and other hazards created by earth operations.


RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

02315 - 3

EXCAVATION AND FILL

08/07/2013

SECTION 02320

BACKFILL

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Site filling and backfilling, fill under slabs on grade, fill under paving, fill under sidewalks, and fill under parking lots consolidation and compaction as scheduled.


A. Section 02055 - Soils

B. Section 02060 – Aggregate

C. Section 2315 – Excavation and Fill

D. Section 02324 – Trenching

E. Section 02923 – Landscape Grading

F. Section 02930 – Exterior Plants

1.3 REFERENCES

A. AASHTO T180 – Moisture-Density Relations of Soils using a 10-lb (4.54 kg) Rammer and an 18-in. (457 mm) Drop.

B. ASTM D 1556 – Density of Soil in Place by the Sand Cone Method

C. ASTM D 1557 – Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures

Using a 10 pound (4.54 kg) Rammer and 18-in. (457 mm) Drop.

D. ASTM D 2922 – Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods

(Shallow Depth).

E. ASTM D 3017 – Moisture Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear


F. ASTM D 4253 – Maximum Index Density AND Unit Weight of Soils Using a Vibratory

Table .

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

02320 1

BACKFILL

08/07/2013

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Samples: Submit, in air-tight container, 2 pound sample of each type of fill to testing laboratory, as directed by the Owner.

B. Materials Source: Submit name of imported materials source

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FILL MATERIALS

A. Aggregate Base Courses Type 1 and Type II – As specified in Section 02060.

B. Structural Fill: Conforming to Uniform Standard Specifications for Public Works’



C. Concrete: Lean concrete conforming to Section 03300 with compressive strength of

150 pounds per square inch.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Very subdrainage, damproofing or weatherproofing installation has been inspected.

B. Verify structural ability of unsupported walls to support loads imposed by fill.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Compact subgrade to density requirements for subsequent backfill materials.

B. Cutout soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction in place. Backfill with

Aggregate Base Course Type II fill and compact to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent fill materials.

C. Scarify and proof roll subgrade surface to a depth 8 inches to identify soft spots; fill and compact to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent fill materials.

3.3 BACKFILLING

A. Backfill areas to contours and elevations with unfrozen materials.

B. Systematically backfill to allow for maximum time for natural settlement. Do not backfill porous, wet, frozen, spongy subgrade surfaces.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

02320 2

BACKFILL

08/07/2013

C. Place and compact backfill materials to Uniform Standard Specifications for Public


D. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage other work.

E. Maintain optimum moisture content of backfill materials to attain required compaction density.

F. Backfill against supported foundation walls. Do not backfill against unsupported foundation walls.

G. Backfill simultaneously on each side of unsupported foundation walls until support are in place.

H. Make gradual grade changes. Blend slope into level areas.

I. Remove surplus backfill materials from site.

J. Leave fill material stockpile areas free from excess fill materials.

3.4 TOLERANCES

A. Top Surface of Backfilling Under Paved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations.

B. Top Surface and General Backfilling: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations.


A. Compaction testing will be in accordance with ASTM D 1557.

B. If tests indicate work does not meet specified requirements, remove work, replace and retest.

C. Frequency of Tests: In accordance with Uniform Standard Specifications for Public

Works’ Construction Off-Site Improvements, Clark County Area, Nevada, latest edition and Clark County Public Works Supplements

3.6 PROTECTION OF UNFINISHED WORK

A. Reshape and re-compact fills subjected to vehicular traffic.

B. Provide required metal traffic plates to protect this work.


RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

02320 3

BACKFILL

08/07/2013

PART 1 - GENERAL


A.

SECTION 02324

TRENCHING

Excavating trenches for utilities from 5 feet outside building to municipal utilities; compacted fill from top of utility bedding to subgrade elevations; and backfilling and compaction.


A. Section 02060 - Aggregate.

B. Section 02230 – Site Clearing.

C. Section 02315 - Excavation and Fill.

D. Section 02320 – Backfill.


F. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete materials.

G. Section 17125 - Raceway and Boxes.

1.3 REFERENCES



B. ASTM D 1556 - Density of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method.

C. ASTM D 1557 - Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures


D. ASTM D 2922 - Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods

(Shallow Depth).

E. ASTM D 3017 - Moisture Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Utility: Any buried pipe, duct, conduit, or cable.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

02324 - 1

TRENCHING

08/07/2013

A. Submit details of sheeting and bracing proposed for use to A/E for review.

1.6 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Verify Work associated with lower elevation utilities is complete before placing higher elevation utilities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FILL MATERIALS

A. Approved Fill Material: As specified in and in accordance with the Uniform

Design and Construction Standards for Potable Water Systems and Design and

Construction Standards for Waste Water Collection Systems, latest editions.

B. Structural Fill: As specified Per RTC Sunset Maintenance Facility, Clark County,

Nevada geotechnical report; bore hole locations, findings of subsurface materials and recommendations.

C. Concrete: Structural concrete conforming to Section 03300 with a compressive strength of 150-pounds per square inch.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 LINES AND GRADES

A. Grades:

1. Lay pipes true to lines and grades indicated.

2. Maintain grade alignment of pipe by use of string line parallel with grade line and vertically above centerline of pipe. Establish line on level batter boards at intervals of not more than 25 feet. Batter boards shall span trench and be rigidly anchored to substantial posts driven into ground on

3. each side of trench. Set three adjacent batter boards before laying pipe to provide check on grades and line. Determine elevation and position of string line from elevation and position of offset points or stakes located along pipe route. Pipe shall not be laid using side lines for line or grade.

As alternative means of establishing alignment and grade, utilize "Laser-

Beam" instrument with competent operator.

B. Location of Pipe Lines:

1. Location and approximate depths of proposed pipe lines shall be as

2. shown on Drawings.

Owner reserves right to make changes in lines, grades, and depths of pipe lines and manholes.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

02324 - 2

TRENCHING

08/07/2013

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations.

B. Protect plant life, lawns, rock outcropping and other features remaining as a portion of final landscaping.

C. Protect bench marks, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from excavating equipment and vehicular traffic.

D. Maintain and protect above and below grade utilities which are to remain.

E. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction in place. Backfill with approved material and compact to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent backfill material.

3.3 EXCAVATING

A. Excavate subsoil required for utilities to municipal utilities.

B. Cut trenches sufficiently wide to enable installation and allow inspection.

Remove water or materials that interfere with Work.

C. Do not interfere with 45-degree bearing splay of foundations.

D. Hand trim excavation. Hand trim for bell and spigot pipe joints. Remove loose matter.

E. Remove lumped subsoil, boulders, and rock up to 1/3-cubic yard, measured by volume.

F. Correct areas over excavated areas with backfill and compact replacement as specified for authorized excavation or replace with fill concrete as directed.

G.

3.4 TRENCHING

A.

Stockpile excavated material in area designated on site and remove excess material not being used, from site.

Excavations:

1. Excavate so that pipe can be laid and jointed properly. Make trench so that pipe can be laid to alignment and depth as shown on Drawings; excavate only so far in advance of pipe laying as permitted by Owner.

Excavation shall not be more than 2 feet wider at bottom than outside diameter of pipe or structure. If there is no interference with construction or adjacent property, and if soil permits, side walls of excavation may be sloped starting at a point 2 feet above top of pipe.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

02324 - 3

TRENCHING

08/07/2013

2.

3.

4.

Excavate trench to depth required to provide uniform and continuous bearing and support for pipe on bedding material at every point between joints, except where pipe slings or other lifting tackle are withdrawn.

Excavation Below Grade: a. Where excavation indicates that the subsurface materials at the bottom of the trench are in a loose or soft state, the Contractor b. shall be advised to excavate to a depth where suitable material is encountered, as directed by the Owner.

Where the bottom of the trench has been excavated by mistake to a greater depth than required, the Contractor shall refill this area using approved material. No additional compensation shall be given to the Contractor. Refilling with earth to bring the bottom of the trench to the proper grade will not be permitted.

Excavation within 24 inches of existing utilities shall be governed by the respective utility.

B.

3.5 SHEETING AND BRACING

A.

Trenching in Advance of Pipe Laying: Trench for pipe lines shall not be opened for distance of more than 200 feet at any one time, unless authorized by Owner.

At no time will more than 50 feet of trench be left open at end of a working day.

Provide protection of open trench, as reviewed by Owner.

General:

1. Sheeting and bracing of excavations shall conform to latest statutes of

State of Nevada governing safety of workers in construction industry.

When necessary, install sheeting and bracing to prevent ground movement that may cause damage or settlement to adjacent structures, pipelines, and utilities. Repair damage due to settlement because of

2. failure to use sheeting or because of inadequate bracing, or through negligence or fault in any other manner.

Shore, sheet, brace, or slope sides of trenches in unsuitable, loose, or soft material, 5 feet or more in depth, or otherwise support by means of sufficient strength to protect employees working within.

B. Sheeting Requirements:

1. Where excavations are made with vertical sides which require supporting, sheeting and bracing shall be of sufficient strength to sustain sides of excavations and shall prevent movement which could in any way injure

2.

Work or adjacent structures, or diminish working space sufficiently to delay Work. Take precautions where there is additional pressure due to presence of other structures.

Select sheeting and bracing of sufficient dimensions and strength to

3. adequately support sides of trenches and excavations. Submit details of sheeting and bracing proposed for use to Owner for review.

Timber sheeting shall conform in quality to select structural Douglas Fir lumber and shall be sound, live timber, free from sap, large checks, shakes, loose or decayed knots, worm holes, and other imperfections which may impair its strength or durability.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

02324 - 4

TRENCHING

08/07/2013

4.

5.

In wet excavation, use grooved sheeting to prevent passage of soil. Fill voids between sheeting and face of excavation with suitable material rammed in place.

Remove sheeting and bracing before completion of Work, unless otherwise directed in writing by Owner. Cut off sheeting which is left in place 18 inches below original ground surface or as directed by Owner.

Untreated wood will not be allowed to be left in place.

3.6 BACKFILLING

A. Backfill trenches to contours and elevations with unfrozen fill materials.

B. Systematically backfill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not backfill over porous, wet, frozen, or spongy subgrade surfaces.

C. Approved Fill Material: Place and compact material in equal continuous layers not exceeding 8-inches compacted depth.

D. Employ placement method that does not disturb or damage foundation perimeter drainage, utilities in trench.

E. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density.

F. Remove surplus fill materials from site.

G. Leave fill material stockpile areas completely free of excess fill materials.

3.7 TOLERANCES

A. Top Surface of Backfilling Under Paved Areas: Plus or minus 0.08-foot from required elevations.

B. Top Surface of General Backfilling: Plus or minus 0.08-foot from required elevations.


A. Compaction testing will be performed in accordance with ASTM D 1556, ASTM D

1557, AASHTO T180, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 3017.

B. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace, compact, and retest.

C. Frequency of Tests: As specified in and in accordance with the Uniform Design and Construction Standards for Potable Water Systems and Design and

Construction Standards for Waste Water Collection Systems, latest editions.

3.9 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

02324 - 5

TRENCHING

08/07/2013

A. Reshape and recompact fills subjected to vehicular traffic during construction.

3.10 SCHEDULE

A. Sanitary Piping: Cover pipe and bedding with approved fill material, in 8-inch lifts, compacted to 95 percent.

B. Duct Bank: Cover duct and bedding with approved fill material, to subgrade elevation, compacted to 95 percent.


RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

02324 - 6

TRENCHING

08/07/2013

PART 1 - GENERAL


SECTION 02721

AGGREGATE BASE COURSE

A. Aggregate base course.


Section 02060 – Aggregate. A.

B. Section 02320 – Backfill.

C. Section 02324 – Trenching.

D. Section 02842 - Parking Bumpers.


1.3 REFERENCES



B. ASTM D 698 - Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures,

Using 5.5 pound (2.49 Kg) Rammer and 12 inch (304.8 mm) Drop.

C. ASTM D 1557 - Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures

Using 10 pound (4.54 Kg) Rammer and an 18 inch (457 mm) Drop.

D. ASTM D 2167 - Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Rubber Balloon

Method.

E. ASTM D 2922 - Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods

(Shallow Depth).

F. ASTM D 3017 - Moisture Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

02721 - 1


08/07/2013

A. Aggregate Fill Type: As specified in Uniform Standard Specifications for Public


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify substrate has been inspected, gradients and elevations are correct, and is dry.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Correct irregularities in substrate gradient and elevation by scarifying, reshaping, and re-compacting.

B. Do not place fill on soft, muddy, or frozen surfaces.

3.3 AGGREGATE PLACEMENT

A. Spread aggregate over prepared substrate to a total compacted thickness listed on the drawings.

B. Place aggregate in maximum 4, 6, or 8-inch layers and roller compact to specified density.

C. Level and contour surfaces to elevations and gradients indicated.

D. Add small quantities of fine aggregate to coarse aggregate as appropriate to assist compaction.

E. Add water to assist compaction. If excess water is apparent, remove aggregate and aerate to reduce moisture content.

F. Use mechanical tamping equipment in areas inaccessible to compaction equipment.

3.4 TOLERANCES

A. Flatness: Maximum variation of 1/4-inch measured with 10 foot straight edge.

B. Scheduled Compacted Thickness: Within 1/4-inch.

C. Variation from Design Elevation: Within 1/2-inch.


A. Compaction testing will be performed in accordance with ASTM D 698.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

02721 - 2


08/07/2013

B.

C.

If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest.

Frequency of Tests: Per Owner’s requirements.


RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

02721 - 3


08/07/2013

SECTION 02741

PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL


Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, Division 2 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

1. Cold milling of existing hot-mix asphalt pavement.

2. Hot-mix asphalt patching.

3. Hot-mix asphalt paving.

4. Asphalt surface treatments.

1. Document: Uniform Standard Specifications for Public Works’ Construction Off-

Site Improvements, Clark County Area, Nevada, latest edition and Clark County

Public Works Supplements.

2. Section 02055 – Soils

3. Section 02721 – Aggregate Base Course

4. Section 02765 – Pavement Marking

1.3 DEFINITION

A. Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 8 for definitions of terms.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include technical data and tested physical and performance properties.

1. Job-Mix Designs: As specified in Uniform Standard Specifications for Public


B. Material Certificates: For each paving material, from manufacturer.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, Nevada

02741 - 1

PAVING

12/06/2013

C. Material Test Reports: For each paving material.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE & WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: As specified in Uniform Standard Specifications for Public


B. Installer Qualifications: As specified in Uniform Standard Specifications for Public


C. Testing Agency Qualifications: As specified in Uniform Standard Specifications for

Public Works’ Construction Off-Site Improvements, Clark County Area, Nevada, latest edition and Clark County Public Works Supplements.

D. Regulatory Requirements: As specified in Uniform Standard Specifications for Public

Works’ Construction Off-Site Improvements, Clark County Area, Nevada, latest edition and Clark County Public Works Supplements. Measurement and payment provisions and safety program submittals included in standard specifications do not apply to this

Section.

E. Warranty of Construction: Provide as a minimum a 12 month material and labor warranty on all materials installed.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver pavement-marking materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken and bearing manufacturer's labels containing brand name and type of material, date of manufacture, and directions for storage.

B. Store pavement-marking materials in a clean, dry, protected location within temperature range required by manufacturer. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if subgrade is wet or excessively damp, if rain is imminent or expected before time required for adequate cure, or if the following conditions are not met:

1. Prime Coat: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F (15.6 deg C).

2. Tack Coat: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F (15.6 deg C).

3. Slurry Coat: Comply with weather limitations in ASTM D 3910.

4. Asphalt Base Course: Minimum surface temperature of 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and rising at time of placement.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, Nevada

02741 - 2

PAVING

12/06/2013

5. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F (15.6 deg C) at time of placement.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AGGREGATES

A. General: As specified in Uniform Standard Specifications for Public Works’



B. Coarse Aggregate: As specified in Uniform Standard Specifications for Public Works’



C. Mineral Filler: As specified in Uniform Standard Specifications for Public Works’



A. Asphalt Binder: As specified in Uniform Standard Specifications for Public Works’



B. Asphalt Cement: As specified in Uniform Standard Specifications for Public Works’



C. Prime Coat: As specified in Uniform Standard Specifications for Public Works’



D. Tack Coat: As specified in Uniform Standard Specifications for Public Works’



E. Fog Seal: As specified in Uniform Standard Specifications for Public Works’



F. Water: Potable.

2.3 MIXES

A. Hot-Mix Asphalt: As specified in Uniform Standard Specifications for Public Works’



RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, Nevada

02741 - 3

PAVING

12/06/2013

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that subgrade is dry and in suitable condition to begin paving.

B. Proof-roll subgrade below pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.

1. Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction [, repeating proof-rolling in direction perpendicular to first direction]. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph (5 km/h).

2. Proof roll with a loaded 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than

15 tons (13.6 tonnes).

3. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as determined by Architect, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed.

C. Proceed with paving only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

D. Verify that utilities, traffic loop detectors, and other items requiring a cut and installation beneath the asphalt surface have been completed and that asphalt surface has been repaired flush with adjacent asphalt prior to beginning installation of imprinted asphalt.

3.2 PATCHING

A. Hot-Mix Asphalt Pavement: Saw cut perimeter of patch and excavate existing pavement section to sound base. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches, extending 12 inches (300 mm) into adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut excavation faces vertically. Remove excavated material. Recompact existing unbound-aggregate base course to form new subgrade.

B. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to vertical surfaces abutting or projecting into new, hot-mix asphalt paving at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal. /sq. yd. (0.2 to 0.7 L/sq. m).

1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving.

2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings.

Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces.

C. Patching: Fill excavated pavements with hot-mix asphalt base mix for full thickness of patch and, while still hot, compact flush with adjacent surface.

D. Patching: Partially fill excavated pavements with hot-mix asphalt base mix and, while still hot, compact. Cover asphalt base course with compacted, hot-mix surface layer finished flush with adjacent surfaces.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, Nevada

02741 - 4

PAVING

12/06/2013

3.3 REPAIRS

A. Leveling Course: Install and compact leveling course consisting of hot-mix asphalt surface course to level sags and fill depressions deeper than 1 inch (25 mm) in existing pavements.

1. Install leveling wedges in compacted lifts not exceeding 3 inches (75 mm) thick.

B. Crack and Joint Filling: Remove existing joint filler material from cracks or joints to a depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm).

1. Clean cracks and joints in existing hot-mix asphalt pavement.

2. Use emulsified-asphalt slurry to seal cracks and joints less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) wide. Fill flush with surface of existing pavement and remove excess.

3. Use hot-applied joint sealant to seal cracks and joints more than 1/4 inch (6 mm) wide. Fill flush with surface of existing pavement and remove excess.

C. For repairs to concrete paving, please refer to applicable portions of Unified Facilities

Criteria (UFC) 3-270-03, found at the following website: www.wbdg.org/ccb/DOD/ UFC / ufc_3_270_03 .pdf

A. General: Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material from substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive paving.

B. Herbicide Treatment: Apply herbicide according to manufacturer's recommended rates and written application instructions. Apply to dry, prepared subgrade or surface of compacted-aggregate base before applying paving materials.

1. Mix herbicide with prime coat if formulated by manufacturer for that purpose.

C. Prime Coat: Apply uniformly over surface of compacted unbound-aggregate base course at a rate of 0.10 to 0.25 gal. /sq. yd. (0.45 to 1.1 L/sq. m). Apply enough material to penetrate and seal but not flood surface. Allow prime coat to cure.

1. If prime coat is not entirely absorbed within 24 hours after application, spread sand over surface to blot excess asphalt. Use enough sand to prevent pickup under traffic. Remove loose sand by sweeping before pavement is placed and after volatiles have evaporated.

2. Protect primed substrate from damage until ready to receive paving.

D. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to surfaces of existing pavement at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal. /sq. yd. (0.2 to 0.7 L/sq. m).

1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving.

2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings.

Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, Nevada

02741 - 5

PAVING

12/06/2013

3.5 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PLACING

A. Machine place hot-mix asphalt on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off.

Place asphalt mix by hand to areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation of mix. Place each course to required grade, cross section, and thickness when compacted.

1. Place hot-mix asphalt base course in number of lifts and thicknesses indicated.

2. Place hot-mix asphalt surface course in single lift.

3. Spread mix at minimum temperature of 250 deg F (121 deg C).

4. Begin applying mix along centerline of crown for crowned sections and on high side of one-way slopes unless otherwise indicated.

5. Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls and tears in asphalt-paving mat.

B. Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 10 feet (3 m) wide unless infill edge strips of a lesser width are required.

1. After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend rolling to overlap previous strips. Complete a section of asphalt base course before placing asphalt surface course.

C. Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand tools to remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix asphalt to prevent segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface.

3.6 JOINTS

A. Construct joints as specified in Uniform Standard Specifications for Public Works’



3.7 COMPACTION

A. General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or with vibratory-plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers.

1. Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F (85 deg C).

B. Breakdown Rolling: Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade, and smoothness. Correct lay down and rolling operations to comply with requirements.

C. Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling while hot-mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot-mix asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to the following density:

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, Nevada

02741 - 6

PAVING

12/06/2013

1. Average Density: 96 percent of reference laboratory density according to

ASTM D 6927 or AASHTO T 245, but not less than 94 percent nor greater than

100 percent.

2. Average Density: 92 percent of reference maximum theoretical density according to ASTM D 2041, but not less than 90 percent nor greater than 96 percent.

D. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt is still warm.

E. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to proper alignment. Bevel edges while asphalt is still hot; compact thoroughly.

F. Repairs: Remove paved areas that are defective or contaminated with foreign materials and replace with fresh, hot-mix asphalt. Compact by rolling to specified density and surface smoothness.

G. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and hardened.

H. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become marked.

A. Pavement Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the following tolerances:

1. Base Course: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).

2. Surface Course: Plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), no minus.

B. Pavement Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within the following tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge applied transversely or longitudinally to paved areas:

1. Base Course: 1/4 inch (6 mm).

2. Surface Course: 1/8 inch (3 mm).

3. Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to crown. Maximum allowable variance from template is 1/4 inch (6 mm).

A. Fog Seals: Apply fog seal at a rate of 0.10 to 0.15 gal. /sq. yd. (0.45 to 0.7 L/sq. m) to existing asphalt pavement and allow to cure. With fine sand, lightly dust areas receiving excess fog seal.

B. Slurry Seals: Apply slurry coat in a uniform thickness according to ASTM D 3910 and allow to cure.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, Nevada

02741 - 7

PAVING

12/06/2013

1. Roll slurry seal to remove ridges and provide a uniform, smooth surface.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Thickness: In-place compacted thickness of hot-mix asphalt courses will be determined according to ASTM D 3549.

C. Surface Smoothness: Finished surface of each hot-mix asphalt course will be tested for compliance with smoothness tolerances.

D. In-Place Density: Testing agency will take samples of uncompacted paving mixtures and compacted pavement according to ASTM D 979.

1. Reference maximum theoretical density will be determined by averaging results from four samples of hot-mix asphalt-paving mixture delivered daily to site, prepared according to ASTM D 2041, and compacted according to job-mix specifications.

2. In-place density of compacted pavement will be determined by testing core samples according to ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726. a. One core sample will be taken for every 1000 sq. yd. (836 sq. m) or less of installed pavement, with no fewer than 3 cores taken. b. Field density of in-place compacted pavement may also be determined by

ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726.

E. Replace and compact hot-mix asphalt where core tests were taken.

F. Remove and replace or install additional hot-mix asphalt where test results or measurements indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.

3.11 DISPOSAL

A. Except for material indicated to be recycled, remove excavated materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.

1. Do not allow milled materials to accumulate on-site.


RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, Nevada

02741 - 8

PAVING

12/06/2013

Item

No.

001

002

003

RTC FA TAG#

No Tag

No Tag

No Tag

Color Key

1 Severe (Out of Service)

2 Critical (Not Out of Service)

3 Minor (In Service)

4 Standard (In Service)

5 Missing Items

6 Could Not Test

IBMF Fixed Route Equipment Operation Checklist

Description

Asphalt Pavement

Concrete Apron

Commercial Driver Lot

Fixed Route Maintenance - Sitework

Location

North roadway, Parking lots - see drawing

IBMF central areas. See drawing for Areas 1-6

Notes

Uneven surface, cracks

Cracks, breakage

Uneven surface, cracks

Totals

0

3

0

0

0

0

Comments see photos & drawing see photos & Drawing

Color

Code

2

2

2

L:\Jacobs PMC\Asset Lists\2013.04.26 - IBMF Inventoried Equipment Lists\IBMF Inventoried Equipment 04 28 13Rev3 Page 1 of 1

IBMF FIXED ROUTE BUILDING

ASPHALT AND CONCRETE AREAS

PHOTO NO. 1

Ashpalt Area 1

PHOTO NO. 2 PHOTO NO. 3

PHOTO NO. 4 PHOTO NO. 5 PHOTO NO. 6



PHOTO NO. 1

Ashpalt Area 2





Ashpalt Area 2

PHOTO NO. 1

Ashpalt Area 3





PHOTO NO. 13

Ashpalt Area 3




PHOTO NO. 1

Ashpalt Area 4


IBMF FIXED ROUTE BUILDING

ASPHALT AND CONCRETE AREAS

PHOTO NO. 1

Concrete Apron Area 1





PHOTO NO. 13






PHOTO NO. 25






PHOTO NO. 37






PHOTO NO. 49






PHOTO NO. 61






PHOTO NO. 73





PHOTO NO. 1






PHOTO NO. 13






PHOTO NO. 25






PHOTO NO. 37






PHOTO NO. 49






PHOTO NO. 61






PHOTO NO. 73






PHOTO NO. 85



PHOTO NO. 88

PHOTO NO. 1






PHOTO NO. 13






PHOTO NO. 25





PHOTO NO. 34

PHOTO NO. 1






PHOTO NO. 13






PHOTO NO. 25






PHOTO NO. 37






PHOTO NO. 49





PHOTO NO. 1






PHOTO NO. 13






PHOTO NO. 25






PHOTO NO. 37






PHOTO NO. 49






PHOTO NO. 61






PHOTO NO. 73






PHOTO NO. 85






PHOTO NO. 97


PHOTO NO. 1






PHOTO NO. 13






PHOTO NO. 25






PHOTO NO. 37






PHOTO NO. 49






PHOTO NO. 61






PHOTO NO. 73






PHOTO NO. 85






PHOTO NO. 97













PART 1 - GENERAL


SECTION 02765

PAVEMENT MARKING

A. Striping paint for marking on existing asphalt and concrete pavements, new asphalt, coated asphalt, or for restriping; brush, roller, or spray applied.


A. Section 02741 – Asphalt Paving.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's printed product data sheets.


A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing Work of this Section with minimum three years documented experience.

1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Apply marking paint in dry weather when pavement and atmospheric temperatures are minimum 50 degrees F and are anticipated to remain above

50 degrees F for four hours after completing application.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Neyra Industries, Inc., "PermaLine, Marking Paint".

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Marking Paint:

1. High solids, water based acrylic latex, containing ultraviolet resistant

2. pigments.

Colors: White, yellow, and blue...

PART 3 - EXECUTION

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

02765 - 1

PAVEMENT MARKING

08/07/2013

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Inspect existing pavement surfaces for conditions and defects that will adversely affect work and which cannot be put into an acceptable condition through normal preparatory work.

B. Do not place marking over unsound pavements. If condition exists, notify A/E.

C. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of surface as suitable for installation.

D. Verify that new asphalt is complete, has been accepted by A/E, and cured minimum of 14 days.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Layout marking using guide lines, templates, and forms.

B. Thoroughly clean surfaces free of dirt, sand, gravel, oil and other foreign matter.

C. Protect adjacent curbs, walks, fences, and other items from receiving marking paint.

D. Verify that pavement coating has been accepted by A/E and has cured minimum

24 hours under drying conditions in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply marking paint in accordance with manufacturer's instructions at rate of one gallon per 150 square feet by power spray, brush, or roller; one gallon per 450 lineal feet of 4-inch wide stripes.

B. Apply stripes straight and even, as indicated.

C. Apply stripes and other markings in widths and colors indicated.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Remove overspray, spills, or drips from surfaces other than those requiring marking paint.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Barricade marked areas until marking paint is dried and ready for traffic. Area may be opened to traffic in approximately six hours or in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.


RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

02765 - 2

PAVEMENT MARKING

08/07/2013

SECTION 033000

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL


Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this

Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following:

2. Slabs-on-grade/Trenches

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.

C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement.

D. Qualification Data: For Installer, manufacturer & testing agency

E. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

033000 - 1


12/06/2013

2. Admixtures.

4. Steel reinforcement and accessories.

7. Adhesives.

8. Semirigid joint filler.

F. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with requirements:

1. Aggregates.

G. Field quality-control reports.

H. Minutes of preinstallation conference.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE & WARRANTY

A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACIcertified Concrete Flatwork Technician.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed

Concrete Production Facilities."

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing program.

2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength

Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade I.

Testing Agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete

Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade II.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer.

E. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the

Contract Documents:

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

033000 - 2


12/06/2013

1. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5.

2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."

F. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.

G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following: b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer.

2. Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control, concrete finishes and finishing, hot-weather concreting procedures, curing procedures, construction contraction and isolation joints, and joint-filler strips, semirigid joint fillers, forms and form removal limitations, shoring and reshoring procedures, anchor rod and anchorage device installation tolerances, steel reinforcement installation, floor and slab flatness and levelness measurement, concrete repair procedures, and concrete protection.

H. Warranty of Construction: Provide as a minimum a 12 month material and labor warranty on all materials installed.


A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. Avoid damaging coatings on steel reinforcement.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.

1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.

2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with

DOC PS 1, and as follows: a. High-density overlay, Class 1 or better. b. Medium-density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill-release agent treated and edge sealed.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

033000 - 3


12/06/2013

c. Structural 1, B-B or better; mill oiled and edge sealed. d. B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1 or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.

B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

C. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch (19 by 19 mm) , minimum.

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420) , deformed.

B. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184/A 184M, fabricated from ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60

(Grade 420) , deformed bars, assembled with clips.

C. Welded wire reinforcing not allowed

A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420) , plain-steel bars, cut true to length with ends square and free of burrs.

B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete.

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project:

1. Portland cement: ASTM C 150, Type V where in contact with earth/ on-grade and

Type II for all others; gray. Supplement with the following: a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F. b. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.

2. Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C 595, Type IP, portland-pozzolan cement.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 3S coarse aggregate or better, graded.

Provide aggregates from a single source with documented service record data of at least 10 years' satisfactory service in similar applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious materials.

Size: (25 mm) nominal.

2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

033000 - 4


12/06/2013

C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.

2.5 ADMIXTURES

A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.

2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.

3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.

4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.

5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,

Type G.

6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.

C. Granular Fill: Clean mixture of crushed stone or crushed or uncrushed gravel;

ASTM D 448, Size 57, with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and 0 to

5 percent passing a No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve.

D. Fine-Graded Granular Material: Clean mixture of crushed stone, crushed gravel, and manufactured or natural sand; ASTM D 448, Size 10, with 100 percent passing a 3/8inch (9.5-mm) sieve, 10 to 30 percent passing a No. 100 (0.15-mm) sieve, and at least

5 percent passing No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve; complying with deleterious substance limits of ASTM C 33 for fine aggregates.

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete.

1. Products : Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Axim Italcementi Group, Inc.

; CATEXOL CimFilm. b. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems ; Confilm. c. ChemMasters ; SprayFilm. d. Conspec by Dayton Superior ; Aquafilm. e. Dayton Superior Corporation ; Sure Film (J-74). f. Edoco by Dayton Superior ; BurkeFilm. g. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company ; Eucobar. h. Kaufman Products, Inc.

; Vapor-Aid. i. Lambert Corporation ; LAMBCO Skin. j. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.

; E-CON. k. Meadows, W. R., Inc.

; EVAPRE. l. Metalcrete Industries ; Waterhold.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

033000 - 5


12/06/2013

m. Nox-Crete Products Group ; MONOFILM. n. Sika Corporation ; SikaFilm. o. SpecChem, LLC ; Spec Film. p. Symons by Dayton Superior ; Finishing Aid. q. TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation ; TK-2120 TRI-FILM. r. Unitex ; PRO-FILM. s. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.

; Certi-Vex Envio Set.

B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd.

(305 g/sq. m) when dry.

C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork.

B. Semirigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a

Type A shore durometer hardness of 80 per ASTM D 2240.

C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059/C 1059M, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.

D. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit requirements, and as follows:

1. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete.

2.8 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.

B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows:

1. Fly Ash: 25 percent.

2. Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent.

3. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

033000 - 6


12/06/2013

4. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan and Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent portland cement minimum, with fly ash or pozzolan not exceeding 25 percent.

5. Silica Fume: 10 percent.

6. Combined Fly Ash, Pozzolans, and Silica Fume: 35 percent with fly ash or pozzolans not exceeding 25 percent and silica fume not exceeding 10 percent.

7. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolans, Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag, and

Silica Fume: 50 percent with fly ash or pozzolans not exceeding 25 percent and silica fume not exceeding 10 percent.

C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of cement.

D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

2. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50.

3. Use corrosion-inhibiting admixture in concrete mixtures where indicated.

2.9 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS

A. Footings/ Foundation: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4500 psi (31 MPa) at 28 days.

2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45.

3. Slump Limit: 3 ½” plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm) .

4. Air Content: 5.5 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-1/2inch (38-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size.

5. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-inch

(25-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size.

B. Slabs-on-Grade: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4500 psi (31 MPa) at 28 days.

2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 520 lb/cu. yd.

(309 kg/cu. m)

3. Slump Limit: 3 ½” plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm) .

4. Air Content: 5.5 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-1/2inch (38-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size.

5. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-inch

(25-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size.

6. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3 percent.

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

033000 - 7


12/06/2013

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to

ASTM C 94/C 94M and furnish batch ticket information.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C) , reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C) , reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

B. Project-Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer.

1. For mixer capacity of 1 cu. yd.

(0.76 cu. m) or smaller, continue mixing at least 1-

1/2 minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of batch is released.

2. For mixer capacity larger than 1 cu. yd.

(0.76 cu. m) , increase mixing time by 15 seconds for each additional 1 cu. yd.

(0.76 cu. m) .

3. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating

Project identification name and number, date, mixture type, mixture time, quantity, and amount of water added. Record approximate location of final deposit in structure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel

Buildings and Bridges."

2. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and other conditions.

3. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated.

3.2 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS

A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and curing and protection operations need to be maintained.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

033000 - 8


12/06/2013

1. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that supports weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 70 percent of its 28-day design compressive strength.

2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores.

B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent.

C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect.

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would reduce bond to concrete.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.

1. Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M, where indicated.

D. Steel Reinforcement welding not allowed.

3.4 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.

1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.

2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete.

3. Locate joints for slabs in the middle third of spans.

4. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

5. Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

033000 - 9


12/06/2013

C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows:

1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) . Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.

2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch (3.2-mm-) wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.

1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface unless otherwise indicated.

2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) or more than

1 inch (25 mm) below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in

Section 079200 "Joint Sealants," are indicated.

3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together.

E. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated.

Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.

B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Architect.

C. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301.

1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mixture.

D. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.

1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

033000 - 10


12/06/2013

2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to

ACI 301.

3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches (150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.

1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.

2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.

3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.

4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.

5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and opentextured surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

F. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:

1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement.

Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water.

Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete.

Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

3.6 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, to receive a rubbed finish, to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete.

C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed finished as-cast concrete where indicated:

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

033000 - 11


12/06/2013

1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process.

2. Grout-Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency of thick paint to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix one part portland cement to one and one-half parts fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding admixture and water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces. Scrub grout into voids and remove excess grout. When grout whitens, rub surface with clean burlap and keep surface damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours.

3. Cork-Floated Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply a stiff grout. Mix one part portland cement and one part fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding agent and water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces. Compress grout into voids by grinding surface. In a swirling motion, finish surface with a cork float.

D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3.7 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull-floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 1/4 inch (6 mm) in one direction.

1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated and to receive concrete floor toppings or to receive mortar setting beds for bonded cementitious floor finishes.

C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture.

1. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to receive trowel finish and to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or sandbed terrazzo.

D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

033000 - 12


12/06/2013

1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated, exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-finish coating system.

2. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft. (3.05-m-) long straightedge resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) .

E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces indicated or where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method. While concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.

1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel-finished floor surfaces.

F. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.

G. Slip-Resistive Finish: Before final floating, apply slip-resistive aggregate finish where indicated and to concrete stair treads, platforms, and ramps. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions and as follows: spread (12 kg/10 sq. m) of dampened slip-resistive aggregate over surface in one or two applications. Tamp aggregate flush with surface, but do not force below surface.

2. After broadcasting and tamping, apply float finish.

3. After curing, lightly work surface with a steel wire brush or an abrasive stone and water to expose slip-resistive aggregate.

H. Dry-Shake Floor Hardener Finish: After initial floating, apply dry-shake floor hardener to surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:

1. Uniformly apply dry-shake floor hardener at a rate of 100 lb/100 sq. ft.

(49 kg/10 sq. m) unless greater amount is recommended by manufacturer.

2. Uniformly distribute approximately two-thirds of dry-shake floor hardener over surface by hand or with mechanical spreader, and embed by power floating.

Follow power floating with a second dry-shake floor hardener application, uniformly distributing remainder of material, and embed by power floating.

3. After final floating, apply a trowel finish. Cure concrete with curing compound recommended by dry-shake floor hardener manufacturer and apply immediately after final finishing.

3.8 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

033000 - 13


12/06/2013

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.

D. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Water. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moistureretaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm) , and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings. b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive penetrating liquid floor treatments. c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moistureretaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer.

4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat.

Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

033000 - 14


12/06/2013

A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month(s). Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased.

B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joint clean and dry.

C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches (50 mm) deep in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.


A. Testing and Inspecting: Contractor will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Testing and Inspecting: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and inspections and to submit reports.

C. Inspections:

1. Steel reinforcement placement.

2. Headed bolts and studs.

3. Verification of use of required design mixture.

4. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing.

5. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature.

6. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and slabs.

D. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to

ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd.

(4 cu. m) , but less than 25 cu. yd.

(19 cu. m) , plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd.

(38 cu. m) or fraction thereof.

2. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd.

(76 cu. m) or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day. a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressivestrength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

3. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

033000 - 15


12/06/2013

4. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

5. Concrete Temperature: ASTM 1064/C temperature is 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each composite sample.

6. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

7. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M. a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. b. Cast and field cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.

8. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratorycured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. a. Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.

9. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete.

10. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa) .

11. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and

Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in

Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28day tests.

12. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.

13. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect.

Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect.

14. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

033000 - 16


12/06/2013

15. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents.


RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

033000 - 17


12/06/2013

SECTION 051200

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL




Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Structural steel.

2. Bolts.

3. Grout.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting" and

Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings" for surface-preparation and priming requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Structural Steel: Elements of the structural frame indicated on Drawings and as described in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation.

1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

051200 - 1


08/07/2013

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.

1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data.

2. Include embedment Drawings.

3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain.

4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip-critical, high-strength bolted connections.

5. Indicate locations and dimensions of protected zones.

6. Identify demand critical welds.

C. Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) and Procedure Qualification Records

(PQRs): Provide according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for each welded joint whether prequalified or qualified by testing including the following:

1. Power source (constant current or constant voltage).

2. Electrode manufacturer and trade name, for demand critical welds.

D. Qualification Data: For Installer, fabricator, shop-painting applicators, professional engineer, and testing agency.

E. Welding certificates.

F. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.

G. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties.

H. Product Test Reports: For the following:

1. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis.

2. Tension-control, high-strength, bolt-nut-washer assemblies.

3. Shop primers.

4. Nonshrink grout.

I. Survey of existing conditions.

J. Source quality-control reports.

K. Field quality-control and special inspection reports.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

051200 - 2


08/07/2013


A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality

Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD, or is accredited by the IAS Fabricator Inspection Program for Structural Steel (AC 172).

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality

Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category ACSE.

C. Shop-Painting Applicators: Qualified according to AISC's Sophisticated Paint

Endorsement P1 or to SSPC-QP 3, "Standard Procedure for Evaluating Qualifications of Shop Painting Applicators."

D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to

AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

1. Welders and welding operators performing work on bottom-flange, demandcritical welds shall pass the supplemental welder qualification testing, as required by AWS D1.8/D1.8M. FCAW-S and FCAW-G shall be considered separate processes for welding personnel qualification.

E. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:

1. AISC 303.

2. AISC 341 and AISC 341s1.

3. AISC 360.

4. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."


A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.

1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.

B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact.

1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes repackaging and seals containers.

2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use.

3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating

ASTM F 1852 fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

051200 - 3


08/07/2013

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections required by the Contract

Documents to be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, to withstand loads indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated.

1. Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated and

AISC 360.

2. Use Load and Resistance Factor Design; data are given at factored-load level.

2.2 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS

A. Channels, Angles Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M

B. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M

C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or Type S, Grade B.

1. Weight Class: Standard.

2. Finish: Galvanized.

D. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.

2.3 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS

A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M) , Type 1, heavyhex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, (ASTM A 563M, Class 8S) heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) , Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish.

1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325 (ASTM F 959M, Type 8.8) , compressible-washer type with plain finish.

B. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, straight.

1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy-hex carbon steel.

2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel.

3. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) , Type 1, hardened carbon steel.

4. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.

C. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy-hex carbon steel.

2. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) , Type 1, hardened carbon steel.

3. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

051200 - 4


08/07/2013

D. Eye Bolts and Nuts: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A 108,

Grade 1030.

E. Sleeve Nuts: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A 108, Grade 1018.

2.4 PRIMER

A. Low-Emitting Materials: Paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's (formerly, the California

Department of Health Services') "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of

Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental

Chambers."

B. Primer: Comply with Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior

Painting." Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings."

C. Primer: SSPC-Paint 25, Type I, zinc oxide, alkyd, linseed oil primer.

D. Primer: SSPC-Paint 25 BCS, Type I, zinc oxide, alkyd, linseed oil primer.

E. Primer: SSPC-Paint 23, latex primer.

F. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

G. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780/A 780M.

2.5 GROUT

A. Metallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, factory-packaged, metallic aggregate grout, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a

30-minute working time.

B. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," and to AISC 360.

1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated.

2. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up.

3. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/A 6M and maintain markings until structural steel has been erected.

4. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

051200 - 5


08/07/2013

5. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-priming operations.

B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.

1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in

AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.

D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads.

E. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to

SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning" or SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning".

F. Welded Door Frames: Build up welded door frames attached to structural-steel frame.

Weld exposed joints continuously and grind smooth. Plug-weld fixed steel bar stops to frames. Secure removable stops to frames with countersunk machine screws, uniformly spaced not more than 10 inches (250 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

G. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to pass through steel members.

1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning.

2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces.

3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work.

2.7 SHOP CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's

"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.8/D1.8M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303 for mill material.

2.8 SHOP PRIMING

A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

051200 - 6


08/07/2013

1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches (50 mm) .

2. Surfaces to be field welded.

3. Surfaces of high-strength bolted, slip-critical connections.

4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing).

5. Galvanized surfaces.

6. Surfaces enclosed in interior construction.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards:

1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning."

2. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

3. SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning."

4. SSPC-SP 11, "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal."

5. SSPC-SP 14/NACE No. 8, "Industrial Blast Cleaning."

6. SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

7. SSPC-SP 10/NACE No. 2, "Near-White Blast Cleaning."

8. SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning."

9. SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."

C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.038 mm) . Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.

2. Apply two coats of shop paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first.

D. Painting: Prepare steel and apply a one-coat, nonasphaltic primer complying with

SSPC-PS Guide 7.00, "Painting System Guide 7.00: Guide for Selecting One-Coat

Shop Painting Systems," to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm) .

2.9 GALVANIZING

A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.

1. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work unless they function as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.

2. Galvanize lintels, shelf angles, and welded door frames attached to structuralsteel frame and located in exterior walls.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

051200 - 7


08/07/2013


A. Testing Agency: Contractor will engage a qualified testing agency to perform shop tests and inspections.

1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections.

B. Bolted Connections: Inspect and test shop-bolted connections according to RCSC's

"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

C. Welded Connections: Visually inspect shop-welded connections according to

AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:

1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.

2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted.

3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.

4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.

D. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect shop-welded shear connectors according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows:

1. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous 360degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector.

2. Conduct tests according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify, with certified steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements.

1. Prepare a certified survey of existing conditions. Include bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

051200 - 8


08/07/2013

and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until cast-in-place concrete has attained its design compressive strength.

3.3 ERECTION

A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to

AISC 303 and AISC 360.

B. Baseplates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates.

1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required.

2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate.

3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout.

4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.

C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC 303, "Code of Standard

Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

D. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that are in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.

1. Level and plumb individual members of structure.

2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure is completed and in service.

E. Splice members only where indicated.

F. Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless approved by Engineer of Record.

Finish thermally cut sections within smoothness limits in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

G. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts.

3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for

Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

051200 - 9


08/07/2013

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.8/D1.8M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.

2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs where indicated, back gouge, and grind steel smooth.

3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for

Steel Buildings and Bridges," for mill material.


A. Special Inspections: Contractor will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections:

1. Verify structural-steel materials and inspect steel frame joint details.

2. Verify weld materials and inspect welds.

3. Verify connection materials and inspect high-strength bolted connections.

B. Testing Agency: Contractor will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

C. Bolted Connections: Inspect and test bolted connections according to RCSC's

"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

D. Welded Connections: Visually inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

1. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field welds according to

AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted. c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.

E. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field-welded shear connectors according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows:

1. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous 360degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector.

2. Conduct tests according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

051200 - 10


08/07/2013

3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean areas where galvanizing is damaged or missing and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.

B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean exposed areas where primer is damaged or missing and paint with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool cleaning.

C. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Section 099113

"Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

D. Touchup Priming: Cleaning and touchup priming are specified in Section 099600

"High-Performance Coatings."


RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

051200 - 11


08/07/2013

SECTION 055000

METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

1. Miscellaneous steel framing and supports.

5. Metal floor plate and supports.

6. Elevator pit sump covers.

7. Structural-steel door frames.

8. Miscellaneous steel trim.

10. Wire rope parking garage guards.

11. Loose bearing and leveling plates.

B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:

2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry.

3. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete for applications where they are not specified in other Sections.

A. Product Data: For the following:

2. Metal nosings and treads.

4. Grout. documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating cost for each product having recycled content. indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements of the

California Department of Public Health's (formerly, the California Department of

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

055000 - 1

METAL FABRICATIONS

12/06/2013

Health Services') "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile

Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Small-Scale

Environmental Chambers."

C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for all miscellaneous metal installations. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For ladders, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

A. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

2.2 METALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

B. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

C. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

D. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304.

E. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with

ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.

F. Rolled-Stainless-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 793.

G. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, cold-formed steel tubing.

H. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.

I. Zinc-Coated Steel Wire Rope: ASTM A 741.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

055000 - 2

METAL FABRICATIONS

12/06/2013

1. Wire-Rope Fittings: Hot-dip galvanized-steel connectors with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to minimum breaking strength of wire rope with which they are used.

J. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise indicated.

K. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T6.

L. Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, Alloy 6061-T6.

M. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F. bronze).

No. C84400 (leaded semired brass).

P. Nickel Silver Castings: ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C97600 (20 percent leaded nickel bronze).

2.3 FASTENERS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or

ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum.

2. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel.

3. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening nickel silver.

4. Provide bronze fasteners for fastening bronze.

B. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip galvanized per ASTM F 2329.

A. Low-Emitting Materials: Paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's (formerly, the California

Department of Health Services') "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of

Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental

Chambers."

B. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 099113 "Exterior Painting.",

Section 099123 Interior Painting."

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

055000 - 3

METAL FABRICATIONS

12/06/2013

C. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.

D. Water-Based Primer: Emulsion type, anticorrosive primer for mildly corrosive environments that is resistant to flash rusting when applied to cleaned steel, complying with MPI#107 and compatible with topcoat.

E. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat.

F. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

G. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with

ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.

H. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

I. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of

3000 psi.

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges.

Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

C. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended.

D. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

E. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

055000 - 4

METAL FABRICATIONS

12/06/2013

F. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches o.c.

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work.

B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction.

C. Fabricate steel pipe columns for supporting wood frame construction from steel pipe with steel baseplates and top plates as indicated. Drill or punch baseplates and top plates for anchor and connection bolts and weld to pipe with fillet welds all around.

Make welds the same size as pipe wall thickness unless otherwise indicated.

A. Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch bolts, spaced not more than 6 inches from ends and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

B. For cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets to support angles from backup masonry and concrete.

C. Galvanize shelf angles located in exterior walls.

D. Prime shelf angles located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer.

E. Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to cast-in-place concrete.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM

A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible.

B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work.

C. Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

055000 - 5

METAL FABRICATIONS

12/06/2013

A. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe 1/4-inch wall-thickness steel shapes, as indicated.

1. Cap bollards with 1/4-inch thick steel plate.

B. Fabricate bollards with 3/8-inch thick steel baseplates for bolting to concrete slab. Drill baseplates at all four corners for 3/4-inch anchor bolts.

C. Fabricate sleeves for bollard anchorage from steel pipe with 1/4-inch- thick steel plate welded to bottom of sleeve.

D. Prime bollards with zinc-rich primer.

2.10 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.

2.11 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS

A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated.

B. Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.

C. Prime loose steel lintels located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer.

2.12 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES

A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.

A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

2.14 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

055000 - 6

METAL FABRICATIONS

12/06/2013

B. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.

1. Shop prime with universal shop primer unless zinc-rich primer is indicated.

C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below:

1. Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

"Commercial Blast Cleaning."

Performance Coatings": SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

4. Other Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

D. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application

Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction.

E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

055000 - 7

METAL FABRICATIONS

12/06/2013

3.2 INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS

A. Fill metal-capped bollards solidly with concrete and allow concrete to cure seven days before installing.

B. Anchor bollards to existing construction with expansion anchors, anchor bolts, or as shown. Provide four 3/4-inch bolts at each bollard unless otherwise indicated.

C. Anchor bollards in concrete with pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete in formed or core-drilled holes. Fill annular space around bollard solidly with nonshrink grout.

D. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has cured.

E. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water.

3.3 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.

B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with nonshrink grout. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.


RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

055000 - 8

METAL FABRICATIONS

12/06/2013

SECTION 075419

POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) MEMBRANE ROOFING

DISCLAIMER: Johns Manville is not to be used as a substitute for professional engineering design and documentation required by building code, contract or applicable law. This message and any associated documents are confidential and only intended for the recipients of this message.

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. PVC Adhered membrane roofing system.

B. Cover board.

C. Roof insulation.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS:

A. Division 05 Section "Steel Decking" for furnishing acoustical deck rib insulation.

B. Division 06 Section "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, cants, curbs, and blocking.

C. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof penetration flashings, flashings, and counterflashings.

D. Division 07 Section "Manufactured Roof Expansion Joints."

E. Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties" for roof drains.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to the following publications for definitions of roofing work related terms used in this Section:

1. ASTM D 1079 “Terminology Relating to Roofing and Waterproofing.”

2. Glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual."

3. Roof Consultants Institute “Glossary of Roofing Terms.”

B. Sheet Metal Terminology and Techniques: SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal

Manual.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

075419 - 1

POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) MEMBERANE ROOFING

08/07/2013

1.4 DESIGN CRITERIA

A. General: Installed roofing membrane and base flashing systems shall remain watertight; and resist specified wind uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure.

B. Material Compatibility: Roofing materials shall be compatible with one another under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing system manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

C. Wind Uplift Performance: Roofing system shall be identical to systems that have been successfully tested by a qualified testing and inspecting agency to resist wind uplift pressure calculated in accordance with ASCE-7.

1. Field-of-Roof Uplift Pressure: -34.98 lbf/sq. ft.

2. Perimeter Uplift Pressure: -58.70 lbf/sq. ft.

3. Corner Uplift Pressure: -88.34 lbf/sq. ft.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s product data sheets for each product to be provided.

B. Detail Drawings: Provide roofing system plans, elevations, sections, details, and details of attachment to other Work, including:

1. Membrane terminations.

2. Tapered insulation, including slopes.

3. Crickets, saddles, and tapered edge strips, including slopes.

4. Insulation fastening patterns.

C. Verification Samples: Provide for each product specified.

D. Maintenance Data: Refer to Johns Manville’s latest published documents on www.specJM.com.

E. Guarantees: Special guarantees specified in this Section.


A. Installer Qualifications: Qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and is eligible to receive the specified manufacturer's guarantee.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Qualified manufacturer that has UL listing for roofing system identical to that used for this Project.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent testing agency with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented in accordance with

ASTM E 548.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

075419 - 2


08/07/2013

D. Test Reports:

1. Roof drain and leader test or submit plumber’s verification.

2. Roof deck fastener pullout test.

E. Source Limitations: Obtain all components from the single source roofing system manufacturer guaranteeing the roofing system. All products used in the system shall be labeled by the single source roofing system manufacturer issuing the guarantee.

F. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Roofing materials shall comply with the fire-testresponse characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method below by UL, FMG, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A; ASTM E 108, for application and roof slopes indicated.

2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119, for fire-resistance-rated roof assemblies of which roofing system is a part.


A. Deliver roofing materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions for storage.

B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer.

C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when current and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and guarantee requirements.

1.9 GUARANTEES

A. Provide manufacturer's system guarantee equal to Johns Manville's Peak Advantage

No Dollar Limit Roofing System Guarantee.

1. Single-Source special guarantee includes, roofing membrane, accessories, roof insulation, fasteners, cover board, walkway products, manufacturer’s expansion

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

075419 - 3


08/07/2013

joints, manufacturer’s edge metal products, and other single-source components of roofing system marketed by the manufacturer.

2. Guarantee Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Installer’s Guarantee: Submit roofing Installer's guarantee signed by Installer, covering

Work of this Section, including all components of roofing system, for the following guarantee period:

1. Guarantee Period: Two Years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING MEMBRANE - PVC

A. PVC Sheet: ASTM D 4434, Type III, fabric reinforced that contains KEE (Elvaloy) to reduce plasticizer migration. Basis of Design: JM PVC

1. If the membrane does not contain KEE, then a post installation coating is required to mitigate plasticizer migration..

2. Certification, by letter, stating that the formulation has a minimum 15 years of performance history in North America.

3. Thickness: 80 mils, nominal

2.2 AUXILIARY ROOFING MATERIALS – SINGLE PLY

A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with membrane roofing.

1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall meet VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's sheet flashing of same material, type, reinforcement, thickness, and color as sheet membrane. Basis of Design: JM PVC Detail Strip

C. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's unreinforced sheet flashing of same material as sheet membrane. Basis of Design: JM PVC Detail Membrane

D. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard solvent-based bonding adhesive for membrane, and solvent-based bonding adhesive for base flashings. Basis of Design:

JM PVC Membrane Adhesive (Low VOC)

E. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's recommended slip sheet, of type required for application.

F. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars, with anchors. Basis of Design: JM Termination Systems

G. Metal Battens: Manufacturer's standard aluminum-zinc-alloy-coated or zinc-coated steel sheet, prepunched. Basis of Design: Membrane Battens

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

075419 - 4


08/07/2013

H. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening membrane to substrate, and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer. Basis of

Design: High Load Fasteners and Plates

I. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, termination reglets, cover strips, sealants, and other accessories. Basis of Design: JM

PVC Pourable Sealer, JM PVC Pipe Boots, JM PVC Penetration Pan, JM PVC

Reversible Corners, JM PVC Inside Corners, JM PVC T-Joint Patch, JM PVC

Membrane Cleaner, JM PVC-Coated Metal, JM PVC Sealant and JM Single Ply Caulk or architect pre approved equals

2.3 AUXILIARY ROOFING SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Expansion Joints: Provide factory fabricated weatherproof, exterior covers for expansion joint openings consisting of flexible rubber membrane, supported by a closed cell foam to form flexible bellows, with two metal flanges, adhesively and mechanically combined to the bellows by a bifurcation process. Provide product manufactured and marketed by single-source membrane supplier that is included in the

No Dollar Limit guarantee. Basis of Design: Expand-O-Flash

B. Coping System: Manufacturer’s factory fabricated coping consisting of a base piece and a snap-on cap. Provide product manufactured and marketed by single-source membrane supplier that is included in the No Dollar Limit guarantee. Basis of Design:

Presto-Lock Coping

C. Fascia System: Manufacturer’s factory fabricated fascia consisting of a base piece and a snap-on cover. Provide product manufactured and marketed by single-source membrane supplier that is included in the No Dollar Limit guarantee. Basis of Design:

Presto-Tite Fascia

D. Metal Flashing Sheet: Metal flashing sheet is specified in Division 07 Section "Sheet

Metal Flashing and Trim."

2.4 WALKWAYS

A. Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, slip-resisting, surfacetextured walkway pads sourced from membrane roofing system manufacturer. Basis of Design: JM PVC Walkpad

2.5 COVER BOARD

A. High-Density Polyisocyanurate: High-density polyisocyanurate technology bonded inline to mineral-surfaced, fiber glass reinforced facers with greater than 125 lbs of compressive strength. Basis of Design: Invinsa Roof Board

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

075419 - 5


08/07/2013

2.6 ROOF INSULATION

A. General: Provide preformed roof insulation boards that comply with requirements and referenced standards, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes and of thicknesses indicated.

B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Basis of Design: ENRGY 3

1. Provide insulation package with R Value greater than minimum required by applicable code.

2.7 TAPERED INSULATION

A. Tapered Insulation: ASTM C 1289, provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per 12 inches, unless otherwise indicated. Basis of

Design: Tapered ENRGY 3

2.8 INSULATION ACCESSORIES

A. General: Roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use and compatible with membrane roofing.

B. Provide factory preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated. Basis of

Design: Tapered Pre-Cut Cricket Tapered Pre-Cut Miter Tapered Fesco Edge Strip

C. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate, and furnished by roofing system manufacturer. Basis of Design: UltraFast

Fasteners and Plates

D. Urethane Adhesive: Manufacturer’s two component urethane adhesive formulated to adhere insulation to substrate. Basis of Design: JM Two-Part Urethane Insulation

Adhesive

E. Wood Nailer Strips: Comply with requirements in Division 06 Section " Miscellaneous

Rough Carpentry ."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements affecting performance of roofing system.


RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

075419 - 6


08/07/2013

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean and remove from substrate sharp projections, dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation in accordance with roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.3 RE-ROOF PREPARATION

A. Remove all roofing membrane, surfacing, coverboards, insulation, fasteners, asphalt, pitch, adhesives, etc.

1. Remove an area no larger than can be re-roofed in one day.

B. Tear out all base flashings, counterflashings, pitch pans, pipe flashings, vents and like components necessary for application of new membrane.

C. Remove abandoned equipment curbs, skylights, smoke hatches, and penetrations.

1. Install decking to match existing as directed by Owner's Representative.

D. Raise (disconnect by licensed craftsmen, if necessary) all HVAC units and other equipment supported by curbs to conform with the following:

1. Modify curbs as required to provide a minimum 8" base flashing height measured from the surface of the new membrane to the top of the flashing membrane.

2. Nail top of flashing and install new metal counterflashing prior to re-installation of unit.

3. Perimeter nailers must be elevated to match elevation of new roof insulation.

E. Immediately remove all debris from roof surface. Demolished roof system may not be stored on the roof surface.

F. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.4 INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate installation of roof system components so insulation and cover board is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.

B. Comply with roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installation of roof insulation and cover board.

C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

075419 - 7


08/07/2013

D. Install insulation boards with long joints in a continuous straight line with end joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch (6 mm) with like material.

E. Install one or more layers of insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall thickness is 2 inches or greater, install 2 or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches in each direction.

F. Trim surface of insulation boards where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does not restrict flow of water.

G. Install tapered edge strips at perimeter edges of roof that do not terminate at vertical surfaces.

H. Mechanically Fastened with Subsequent Layers Adhered Insulation: Secure first layer of insulation to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type to deck type.

1. Fasten first layer to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof.

2. Install subsequent layers in a two-part urethane adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer’s instruction.

I. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.5 COVER BOARD INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so cover board is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.

B. Comply with membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof cover board.

C. Install cover board with long joints of cover board in a continuous straight line with end joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch (6 mm) with cover board.

1. Cut and fit cover board within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations.

D. Trim surface of cover board where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does not restrict flow of water.

1. Install tapered edge strips at perimeter edges of roof that do not terminate at vertical surfaces.

E. Adhered Cover Board: Adhere cover board to substrate as follows:

1. Install in a two-part urethane adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer’s instruction.


RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

075419 - 8


08/07/2013

3.6 ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install roofing membrane in accordance with roofing system manufacturer's written instructions, applicable recommendations of the roofing manufacturer and requirements in this Section.

B. Start installation of roofing membrane in presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel.

C. Where roof slope exceeds 1/2 inch per 12 inches, contact the membrane manufacturer for installation instructions regarding installation direction and backnailing

D. Cooperate with testing and inspecting agencies engaged or required to perform services for installing roofing system.

E. Coordinate installing roofing system so insulation and other components of the roofing membrane system not permanently exposed are not subjected to precipitation or left uncovered at the end of the workday or when rain is imminent.

1. Provide tie-offs at end of each day's work to cover exposed roofing membrane sheets and insulation with a course of coated felt set in roofing cement or hot roofing asphalt with joints and edges sealed.

2. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system.

3. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.


3.7 ADHERED ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

A. Install roofing membrane over area to receive roofing in accordance with membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll roofing membrane and allow to relax before installing.

1. Install sheet in accordance with ASTM D 5036 and roofing system manufacturer’s written instructions.

B. Start installation of roofing membrane in presence of membrane roofing system manufacturer's technical representative.

C. Accurately align roofing membrane and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.

D. Bonding Adhesive: Apply solvent-based bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of roofing membrane at rate required by manufacturer and allow to partially dry before installing roofing membrane. Do not apply bonding adhesive to splice area of roofing membrane.

E. Mechanically fasten roofing membrane securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeter of roofing.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

075419 - 9


08/07/2013

F. Apply roofing membrane with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.

G. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap roofing membrane, and hot-air weld side and end laps of roofing membrane according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation.

1. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut edges of roofing membrane.

2. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily and repair seam sample areas. a. Remove and repair any unsatisfactory sections before proceeding with

Work.

3. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing membrane that do not meet requirements.

H. Spread sealant or mastic bed over deck drain flange at deck drains and securely seal roofing membrane in place with clamping ring.

I. Install roofing membrane and auxiliary materials to tie in to existing roofing.

J. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.8 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates in accordance with membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Apply solvent-based bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow to partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to seam area of flashing.

C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with sheet flashing.

D. Clean seam areas and overlap and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Weld side and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation.

E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through termination bars.


3.9 WALKWAY INSTALLATION

A. Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Adhere with compatible adhesive and heat weld walkway products to substrate according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. – PVC

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

075419 - 10


08/07/2013



A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform roof tests and inspections and to prepare test reports.

B. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's Registered Roof

Observer (RRO) to inspect roofing installation on completion and submit report to

Architect.

C. Repair or remove and replace components of roofing system where test results or inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.

3.11 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.

B. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.


RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

075419 - 11


08/07/2013

SECTION 083613

SECTIONAL DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes electrically operated sectional doors.

1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel supports.

A. Product Data: For each type and size of sectional door and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of sectional doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

083613 - 1

SECTIONAL DOORS

12/06/2013

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

A. General Performance: Sectional doors shall comply with performance requirements specified without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction and without requiring temporary installation of reinforcing components.

B. Structural Performance, Exterior Doors: Capable of withstanding the design wind loads.

1. Design Wind Load: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 20 lbf/sq. ft. acting inward and outward.

2. Testing: According to ASTM E Retain "Windborne-Debris Impact Resistance"

Paragraph below if required. The IBC establishes criteria for buildings in hurricane-prone locations. Retain only one of four wind-zone options below; retain last option only for glazed garage doors.

C. Windborne-Debris Impact Resistance: Provide sectional door panels that pass missileimpact and cyclic-pressure tests according to existing door construction.

D. Seismic Performance: Sectional doors shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

2.2 DOOR ASSEMBLY

A. Sectional Door: Sectional door formed with hinged sections and fabricated according to DASMA 102 unless otherwise indicated.

1. Manufacturers: Match existing door manufacturer.

B. Installed R-Value: Match existing door panels.

C. Weatherseals: Adjust as required to be fitted to bottom and top and around entire perimeter of door.

1. Match existing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install sectional doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and as specified.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

083613 - 2

SECTIONAL DOORS

12/06/2013

B. Tracks: Provide sway bracing, diagonal bracing, and reinforcement as required for rigid installation of track and door-operating equipment.

C. Accessibility: Install sectional doors, switches, and controls along accessible routes in compliance with regulatory requirements for accessibility.

D. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion.

E. Touch-up Painting: Immediately after welding galvanized materials, clean welds and abraded galvanized surfaces and repair galvanizing to comply with

ASTM A 780/A 780M.

3.2 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain sectional doors.


RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

083613 - 3

SECTIONAL DOORS

12/06/2013

SECTION 087100

FINISH HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


B.

5.

6.

7.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Door Hardware, including electric hardware.

Hold-open closers with fire-alarm interface.

Wall or floor-mounted electromagnetic hold-open devices.

Power supplies for electric hardware.

Remote button release hardware.

Cylinders for doors fabricated with locking hardware.

Wiring diagrams for electric hardware.

Related Sections:

C.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

5.

6.

7.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Section 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry: Finish Hardware Installation

Section 07 90 00 - Joint Sealers – exterior thresholds

Section 08 11 13.13 - Metal Doors and Frames

Section 08 14 16 - Wood and Plastic Doors

Division 26 - Electrical Power

Division 26 and 27 - Fire/Life-Safety System

Section 28 13 00 - Security Access Systems

Specific Omissions: Hardware for the following is specified or indicated elsewhere.

Signs, except where scheduled.

Toilet accessories, including grab bars.

Installation.

Rough hardware.

Conduit, junction boxes & wiring.

Access doors and panels,

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

087100 - 1

FINISH HARDWARE

08/07/2013

1.2 REFERENCES:

Use date of standard in effect as of Bid date.

A. American National Standards Institute – ANSI 156.18 – Materials and Finishes.

B. ICC/ANSI A117.1 - 1998 – Specifications for making buildings and facilities usable by physically handicapped people.

C. ADA – Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990

D. BHMA – Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association

E. DHI – Door and Hardware Institute

F. NFPA – National Fire Protection Association

1. NFPA 80 – Fire Doors and Windows

2. NFPA 105 – Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies

3. NFPA 252 – Fire Tests of Door Assemblies

G. UL – Underwriters Laboratories

1. UL10C – Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

2. UL 305 – Panic Hardware

H. WHI – Warnock Hersey Incorporated

I. Local applicable codes

J. SDI – Steel Door Institute

K. WI – Woodwork Institute

L. AWI – Architectural Woodwork Institute

M. NAAMM – National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers

1.3 SUBMITTALS & SUBSTITUTIONS

A. SUBMITTALS: Submit six copies of schedule per Section 01340. Only submittals printed one sided will be accepted and reviewed. Organize vertically formatted schedule into “Hardware Sets” with index of doors and headings, indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening.

Include following information:

1. Type, style, function, size, quantity and finish of hardware items.

2. Use BHMA Finish codes per ANSI A156.18.

3. Name, part number and manufacturer of each item.

4. Fastenings and other pertinent information.

5. Location of hardware set coordinated with floor plans and door schedule.

6. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.

7. Mounting locations for hardware.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

087100 - 2

FINISH HARDWARE

08/07/2013

8. Door and frame sizes, materials and degrees of swing.

9. List of manufacturers used and their nearest representative with address and phone number.

10. Catalog cuts.

11. Wiring Diagrams.

12. Manufacturer’s technical data and installation instructions for electronic hardware.

13. Date of jobsite visit.

B. Bid and submit manufacturer’s updated/improved item if scheduled item is discontinued.

C. Deviations: Highlight, encircle or otherwise identify deviations from “Schedule of

Finish Hardware” on submittal with notations clearly designating those portions as deviating from this section.

D. If discrepancy between drawings and scheduled material in this section, bid the more expensive of the two choices, not the discrepancy in the submittal and request direction from Architect for resolution.

E. Substitutions per Division 1. Include product data and indicate benefit to the

Project. Furnish operating samples on request.

F. Items listed with no substitute manufacturers have been requested by Owner to meet existing standard.

G. Furnish as-built/as-installed schedule with closeout documents, including keying schedule, wiring diagrams, manufacturers’ installation, adjustment and maintenance information, and supplier’s final inspection report.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Qualifications:

1. Hardware supplier: direct factory contract supplier who employs a

Certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC), available at reasonable times during course of work for project hardware consultation to Owner, Architect and Contractor. a) Responsible for detailing, scheduling and ordering of finish hardware. Detailing implies that the submitted schedule of hardware is correct and complete for the intended function and performance of the openings.

B. Hardware: Free of defects, blemishes and excessive play. Obtain each kind of hardware (latch and locksets, exit devices, hinges and closers) from one manufacturer.

C. Exit Doors: Operable from inside with single motion without the use of a key or special knowledge or effort.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

087100 - 3

FINISH HARDWARE

08/07/2013

D. Fire-Rated Openings: NFPA 80 compliant. Hardware UL10C (positive pressure) compliant for given type/size opening and degree of label. Provide proper latching hardware, non-flaming door closers, approved-bearing hinges, and resilient seals. Coordinate with wood door section for required intumescent seals. Furnish openings complete.

E. Note: scheduled resilient seals may exceed selected door manufacturer’s requirements.

F. Furnish hardware items required to complete the work in accordance with specified performance level and design intent, complying with manufacturers’ instructions.

G. Pre-Installation Meetings: Initiate and conduct with supplier, installer and related trades, coordinate materials and techniques, and sequence complex hardware items and systems installation. Include manufacturers' representatives of locks, panic hardware and door closers in the meetings. Convene prior to commencement of related work.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:

A. Delivery: coordinate delivery to appropriate locations.

B. Acceptance at Site: Items individually packaged in manufacturers’ original containers, complete with proper fasteners and related pieces. Clearly mark packages to indicate contents, locations in hardware schedule and door numbers.

C. Storage: Provide securely locked storage area for hardware, protect from moisture, sunlight, paint, chemicals, dust, excessive heat and cold, etc.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS AND COORDINATION:

A. Where exact types of hardware specified are not adaptable to finished shape or size of members requiring hardware, provide suitable types having as nearly as practical the same operation and quality as type specified, subject to Architect’s approval.

B. Coordination: Coordinate hardware with other work. Furnish hardware items of proper design for use on doors and frames of the thickness, profile, swing, security and similar requirements indicated, as necessary for proper installation and function, regardless of omissions or conflicts in the information on the Contract

Documents. Furnish related trades with the following information:

1. Location of embedded and attached items to concrete.

2. Location of wall-mounted hardware, including wall stops.

3. Location of finish floor materials and floor-mounted hardware.

4. Locations for conduit and raceways as needed for electrical, electronic and electro-pneumatic hardware items. Fire/life-safety system interfacing. Point-to-point wiring diagrams plus riser diagrams to related trades.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

087100 - 4

FINISH HARDWARE

08/07/2013

5. Manufacturer templates to door and frame fabricators.

C. Check Shop Drawings for doors and entrances to confirm that adequate provisions will be made for proper hardware installation.

D. Prior to submittal, carefully inspect existing conditions to verify finish hardware required to complete Work, including sizes, quantities, existing hardware scheduled for re-use, and sill condition material. If conflict between the specified/scheduled hardware and existing conditions, submit request for direction from Architect. Include date of jobsite visit in the submittal.

1. Submittals prepared without thorough jobsite visit by qualified hardware expert will be rejected as non-compliant.

1.7 WARRANTY:

A. Part of respective manufacturers’ regular terms of sale. Provide manufacturers’ written warranties:

1. Extra Heavy Duty Cylindrical Lock:

2. Exit Devices:

3.

4.

5.

Closers:

Hinges:

Other Hardware

Seven Years

Three years mechanical

One year electrical

Ten years mechanical

Two years electrical

One year

Two years

1.8 COMMISSIONING:

A. Conduct these tests prior to request for certificate of substantial completion:

1. With installer present, test door hardware operation with climate control system and stairwell pressurization system both at rest and while in full operation.

2. With installer, access control contractor and electrical contractor present, test electrical, electronic and electro-pneumatic hardware systems for satisfactory operation.

3. With installer and electrical contractor present, test hardware interfaced with fire/life-safety system for proper operation and release.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

087100 - 5

FINISH HARDWARE

08/07/2013

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS:

A.

ITEM:

Listed acceptable alternate manufacturers: submit for review products with equivalent function and features of scheduled products.

MANUFACTURER: ACCEPTABLE SUB:

Hinges (IVE) Ives Hager, Stanley,

McKinney

Continuous Hinges (IVE) Ives Hager, Pemko, Select

Key System

Locks

Exit Devices

Closers

Surface Bolts

(BES) Best

(BES) Best

(VON) Von Duprin

(LCN) LCN

(IVE) Ives

Automatic Flush Bolts (IVE) Ives

Silencers (IVE) Ives

Push & Pull Plates

Lock Protectors

Kickplates

(IVE) Ives

(IVE) Ives

(IVE) Ives

Stops & Holders (IVE) Ives

Thresholds

Seals & Bottoms

(NGP) National Guard Products

(NGP) National Guard Products

None

None

None

None

Trimco, DCI

Trimco, DCI

Rockwood

Trimco

Trimco

Trimco

Trimco, Quality,

Rockwood

Pemko, Zero

Pemko, Zero

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

087100 - 6

FINISH HARDWARE

08/07/2013

A. Manufacturers and their abbreviations used in this schedule:

GLY Glynn-Johnson Hardware

IVE H. B. Ives

LCN LCN Closers

NGP National Guard Products

SCH Schlage Lock Company

BES

TRI

Stanley Best Locking

Trimco

VON Von Duprin

2.2 HINGING METHODS:

A. Drawings typically depict doors at 90 degrees; doors will actually swing to maximum allowable. Use wide-throw conventional or continuous hinges as needed up to 8 inches in width to allow door to stand parallel to wall for true 180degree opening. Advise architect if 8-inch width is insufficient.

B. Conform to manufacturer’s published hinge selection standard for door dimensions, weight and frequency, and to hinge selection as scheduled. Where manufacturer’s standard exceeds the scheduled product, furnish the heavier of the two choices, notify Architect of deviation from scheduled hardware.

C. Conventional Hinges: Steel or stainless steel pins and concealed bearings. Hinge open widths minimum, but of sufficient throw to permit maximum door swing. In general, conventional hinges are not to be used on out-swinging CCSD exterior doors (See continuous hinges below).

1. Out-swinging exterior doors: non-ferrous with non-removable (NRP) pins.

2. Non-ferrous material exteriors and at doors subject to corrosive atmospheric conditions.

D. Continuous Hinges:

1. Geared-type aluminum. a) Full surface only. SNB (Sex nuts and bolts) at doors x RivNuts at frames for replacement work. New construction requires continuous 14 gage reinforcement in frames. b) Use wide-throw units where needed for maximum degree of swing. Advise architect if commonly available hinges are insufficient.

2.3 LOCKSETS, LATCHSETS, DEADBOLTS:

A. Extra Heavy Duty Cylindrical Locks and Latches: as scheduled.

1. Chassis: cylindrical design, corrosion-resistant plated cold-rolled steel, through-bolted.

2. Locking Spindle: stainless steel, integrated spring and spindle design.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

087100 - 7

FINISH HARDWARE

08/07/2013

3. Latch Retractors: forged steel. Balance of inner parts: corrosion-resistant plated steel, or stainless steel.

4. Latchbolt: solid steel.

5. Backset: 2-3/4" typically, more or less as needed to accommodate frame, door or other hardware.

6. Lever Trim: Accessible design, independent operation, spring-cage supported, minimum 2” clearance from lever mid-point to door face.

7. Electric operation: Manufacturer-installed continuous duty solenoid.

8. Strikes: 16 gage curved steel, bronze or brass with 1” deep box construction, lips of sufficient length to clear trim and protect clothing.

9. Lock Series and Design: Schlage “ND” Series, “Rhodes” design. a) Vandalguard locking functions: ND96 (F86 Storeroom), ND93 (F88

Vestibule [Classroom]), ND92 (F109 Entrance [Office]). b) Non-cylinder functions: ND40 (F76 Privacy), ND10 (F75 Passage).

10. Certifications: a) ANSI A156.2, 1994, Series 4000, Grade 1. b) UL listed for "A" label and lesser class single doors up to 4ft x 8ft.

11. Accepted substitutions: None

B. Extra Heavy Duty Bored Deadbolts: As scheduled.

1. Lock Series and Design: Schlage B600 Series. a) B660.

2. Certifications: a) ANSI A156.5, 2001 Grade 1 Auxiliary Lock b) UL listed for “A” label and lesser class fire doors.

2.4 EXIT DEVICES / PANIC HARDWARE

A. General features:

1. Independent lab-tested 1,000,000 cycles.

2. Push-through push-pad design. No exposed push-pad fasteners, no exposed cavities when operated. Return stroke fluid dampeners and rubber bottoming dampeners, plus anti-rattle devices.

3. End caps: impact-resistant, flush-mounted. No raised edges or lips to catch carts or other equipment.

4. No exposed screws to show through glass doors.

5. Non-handed basic device design with center case interchangeable with all functions, no extra parts required to effect change of function.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

087100 - 8

FINISH HARDWARE

08/07/2013

6. Releasable in normal operation with 15-lb. maximum operating force and with 32 lb. maximum pressure under 250-lb. load to the door.

7. Exterior doors scheduled with XP-series devices: Static load force resistance of at least 2000 pounds.

8. Flush end cap design as opposed to typical "bottle-cap" design end cap.

9. Exit Device Series and Design: Von Duprin 99 Series (grooved mechanism case) with 994 lever trim.

B. Specific features:

1. Non-Fire Rated Devices: Hex Key Dogging

2. Lever Trim: #994 breakaway type, forged brass or bronze escutcheon min

.130” thickness, compression spring drive, match lockset lever design. a) Use standard 994 trim only at fire rated openings. All other openings to be provided with Vandal Resistant Pull Trim, Ives VR900 Series or approved equal.

3. Fire-Labeled Devices: UL label indicating “Fire Exit Hardware”. Vertical rod devices less bottom rod (LBR) unless otherwise scheduled.

4. Electrically Operated Devices: Single manufacturer source for electric latch retraction devices, electrically controlled trim, power transfers, power supplies, monitoring switches and controls.

5. Removable Mullions: Removable with single turn of building key. Securely reinstalled without need for key. Furnish storage brackets for securely stowing the mullion away from the door when removed. a) Use 154 Mullion Stabilizers at all exterior and high-security pairs.

6. All exit devices shall be secured to the doors with SNB (Sex nuts and bolts).

7. Accepted substitutions: None.

2.5 CLOSERS

A. Surface Closers: 4041

1. Full rack-and-pinion type cylinder with removable non-ferrous cover and cast iron body. Double heat-treated pinion shaft, single piece forged piston, chrome-silicon steel spring.

2. ISO 2000 certified. Units stamped with date-of-manufacture code.

3. Independent lab-tested 10,000,000 cycles.

4. Non-sized, non-handed, and adjustable.

5. Plates, brackets and special templating when needed for interface with particular header, door and wall conditions and neighboring hardware.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

087100 - 9

FINISH HARDWARE

08/07/2013

6. Adjustable to open with not more than 8.5 lbs. pressure to open at exterior doors and 5 lbs. at interior doors. As allowed per IBC. The local authority may increase the allowable pressure for fire doors to achieve positive latching, but not to exceed 15lbs.

7. Separate adjusting valves for closing speed, latching speed and backcheck.

8. Exterior door closers: tested to 100 hours of ASTM B117 salt spray test, furnish data on request.

9. Exterior doors: seasonal adjustments not required for temperatures from

120 degrees F to -30 degrees F, furnish checking fluid data on request.

10. Non-flaming fluid, will not fuel door or floor covering fires.

11. Pressure Relief Valves (PRV) not permitted.

12. All closers, with the exception of in-swinging exterior doors, shall be equipped with parallel arm closers.

13. All closers shall be installed with TB/MS (through bolts x machine screws) or SNB (Sex nuts and bolts)

14. Accepted substitutions: None.

2.6 OTHER HARDWARE

A. Automatic Flush Bolts: Low operating force design.

1. Ives FB30 Series or approved equal at metal doors

2. Door Controls International 960 Series at wood doors

B. Surface Bolts: 8-inch x SNB (Sex nuts and bolts)

1. Ives SB454 or approved equal.

C. Overhead Stops: Non-plastic mechanisms and finished metal end caps. Fieldchangeable hold-open, friction and stop-only functions.

1. Ives 100 Series or approved equal.

D. Lock Guards: As specified with SNB (Sex nuts and bolts). Welded studs are not acceptable.

1. Ives LG1 or approved equal.

E. Vandal Resistant Pull Trim: As specified with SNB (Sex nuts and bolts) anchors through door. Welded studs are not acceptable.

1. Ives VR900 Series or approved equal.

F. Kick Plates: Beveled four edges (B4E), .050 inches minimum thickness, height and width as scheduled. Sheet-metal screws of bronze or stainless steel to match other hardware.

G. Door Stops: Provide stops to protect walls, casework or other hardware.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

087100 - 10

FINISH HARDWARE

08/07/2013

1. Unless otherwise noted in Hardware Sets, provide wall type with appropriate fasteners. Where wall type cannot be used, provide floor type. If neither can be used, provide overhead type.

2. Locate overhead stops for maximum possible opening. Consult with Owner for furniture locations. Minimum: 90deg stop / 95deg deadstop. Note degree of opening in submittal.

H. Seals: Finished to match adjacent frame color. Resilient seal material: Silicone rubber as scheduled.

I.

1. National Guard Products 5050 or approved equal.

Door Bottoms:

1. National Guard Products 97V or approved equal.

J. Thresholds: As scheduled and per details. Substitute products: certify that the products equal or exceed specified material’s thickness. Proposed substitutions: submit for approval.

1. Exteriors: Seal perimeter to exclude water and vermin. Use sealant complying with requirements in Division 7 "Thermal and Moisture

Protection". Non-ferrous 1/4inch fasteners and lead expansion shield anchors, or Red-Head #SFS-1420 (or approved equivalent) Flat Head

Sleeve Anchors (SS/FHSL).

2. Fire-rated openings, 90min or less duration: use thresholds to interrupt floor covering material under the door where that material has a critical radiant flux value less than 0.22 watts per square centimeter, per NFPA 253. Use threshold unit as scheduled. If none scheduled, request direction from

Architect.

3. Fire-rated openings, 3hour duration: Thresholds, where scheduled, to extend full jamb depth.

4. Fasteners: Generally, Non-ferrous 1/4inch fasteners and lead expansion shield anchors, or Red-Head #SFS-1420 (or approved equivalent) Flat

Head Sleeve Anchors (SS/FHSL). Plastic plugs with wood or sheet metal screws are not an acceptable substitute for specified fastening methods.

K. Silencers: Interior hollow metal frames, 3 for single doors, 2 for pairs of doors.

Omit where adhesive mounted seal occurs. Leave no unfilled/uncovered prepunched silencer holes.

L. Wall & Floor-mounted electromagnetic door holders: LCN's SEM series or approved equivalent. Incorporate into U.L. listed fire & life-safety system, doors released to allow closure and latching when door's zone is in an alarm state.

Use minimum projection required to allow door to open as widely as allowed by wall conditions and projection of door hardware.

2.7 FINISH:

A. Generally BHMA 626 Satin Chromium

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

087100 - 11

FINISH HARDWARE

08/07/2013

1. Areas using BHMA 626 to have push-plates, pulls and protection plates of

BHMA 630, Satin Stainless Steel, unless otherwise noted.

B. Door closers: factory powder coated to match other hardware, unless otherwise noted.

C. Aluminum items: match predominant adjacent material. Seals to coordinate with frame color.

2.8 KEYING REQUIREMENTS:

A. Use existing Best cores

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ACCEPTABLE INSTALLERS:

A. Can read and understand manufacturers’ templates, supplier’s hardware schedule and printed installation instructions. Can readily distinguish drywall screws from manufacturers furnished fasteners. Available to meet with manufacturers’ representatives and related trades to discuss installation of hardware.

3.2 PREPARATION:

A. Ensure that walls and frames are square and plumb before hardware installation.

Make corrections before commencing hardware installation.

B. Locate hardware per SDI-100 and applicable building, fire, life-safety, accessibility, and security codes.

1. Notify Architect of code conflicts before ordering material.

2. Locate levers, key cylinders, thumb-turn pieces, touchbars and other operable portions of latching hardware between 30 inches to 44 inches above the finished floor.

3. Where new hardware is to be installed near existing doors/hardware scheduled to remain, match locations of existing hardware.

C. Overhead stops: before installing, determine proposed locations of furniture items, fixtures, and other items to be protected by the overhead stop's action.

Install overhead stops prior to closers if both are used.

D. Existing frames and doors to be retrofitted with new hardware:

1. Field-verify conditions and dimensions prior to ordering hardware. Fill existing hardware cut outs not being reused by the new hardware.

Remove existing hardware not being reused, return to Owner unless directed otherwise.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

087100 - 12

FINISH HARDWARE

08/07/2013

2. Remove existing floor closers not scheduled for reuse, fill cavities with concrete and finish smooth

3. Cut and weld existing steel frames currently prepared with 2-¾" height strikes. Cut an approx. 8" section from the strike jamb and weld in a reinforced section to accommodate specified hardware’s strike.

4. Patch and weld flush filler pieces into existing door hardware preparations in steel doors and frames, leave surfaces smooth.

5. Glue in solid wood block fillers to fill cut outs in existing wood doors, sand surfaces smooth. Alternatively, use an approved epoxy-based wood filler product, submit product data for approval.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install hardware per manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrate.

Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrate for proper installation and operation. Remove and reinstall or replace work deemed defective by Architect.

1. Gaskets: install jamb-applied gaskets before closers, overhead stops, rim strikes, etc; fasten hardware over and through these seals. Install sweeps across bottoms of doors before astragals, cope sweeps around bottom pivots, trim astragals to tops of sweeps.

2. When hardware is to be attached to existing metal surface and insufficient reinforcement exists, use RivNuts, NutSerts or similar anchoring device for screws.

3. Use manufacturers' fasteners furnished with hardware items, or submit

Request for Substitution with Architect.

4. Replace fasteners damaged by power-driven tools.

B. Locate floor stops no more that 4 inches from walls and not within paths of travel.

See paragraph 2.2 regarding hinge widths, door should be well clear of point of wall reveal. Point of door contact no closer to the hinge edge than half the door width. Where situation is questionable or difficult, contact Architect for direction.

C. Core concrete for exterior door stop anchors. Set anchors in approved non-shrink grout.

D. Locate overhead stops for minimum 90 degrees and maximum allowable degree of swing.

E. Drill pilot holes for fasteners in wood doors and/or frames.

F. Lubricate and adjust existing hardware scheduled to remain. Carefully remove and give to Owner items not scheduled for reuse.

G. Field verify existing conditions and measurements prior to ordering hardware. Fill existing hardware cut outs not being used by the new hardware. Remove existing hardware not being reused.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

087100 - 13

FINISH HARDWARE

08/07/2013

H. Disable or remove existing floor closers where they exist. If disabled cut or remove spindle.

I. Where existing wall conditions will not allow door to swing using the scheduled hinges, provide wide-throw hinges and if needed extended arms on closers.

J. Provide proper brackets to accommodate the mounting of closers on doors with flush transoms.

3.4. ADJUSTING

A. Adjust and check for proper operation and function. Replace units, which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly.

1. Hardware damaged by improper installation or adjustment methods: repair or replace to Owner’s satisfaction.

2. Adjust doors to fully latch with no more than 1 pound of pressure.

3. Adjust delayed-action closers on fire-rated doors to fully close from fullyopened position in no more than 10 seconds.

4. Adjust door closers per 1.9 this section.

B. Inspection: Use hardware supplier’s consultant or consultant’s agent. Include supplier's report with closeout documents.

C. Final inspection: Installer to provide letter to Owner that upon completion installer has visited the Project and has accomplished the following:

1. Re-adjust hardware.

2. Evaluate maintenance procedures and recommend changes or additions, and instruct Owner’s personnel.

3. Identify items that have deteriorated or failed.

4. Submit written report identifying problems

3.5 DEMONSTRATION:

A. Demonstrate mechanical hardware and electrical, electronic and pneumatic hardware systems, including adjustment and maintenance procedures.

3.6 PROTECTION/CLEANING:

A. Cover installed hardware, protect from paint, cleaning agents, weathering, carts/barrows, etc. Remove covering materials and clean hardware just prior to substantial completion.

B. Clean adjacent wall, frame and door surfaces soiled from installation/reinstallation process.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

087100 - 14

FINISH HARDWARE

08/07/2013

3.7 SCHEDULE OF FINISH HARDWARE

A. See door schedule in drawings for hardware set assignments.

HW SET 01

Qty Description

1 EA ELECTRIC HINGE

1 EA ELECT MORTISE

LOCK

1 EA DOOR POSITION

SWITCH

Catalog Number

3CB1 4.5 X 4 TW8

45HW-0-DEL-16-H-RQE

652

626

Finish Mfr

IVE

BES

679

Field verify door/frame for proper switch

DOOR CONTACT(S) BY OTHERS

REQUEST TO EXIT - WORK OF

DIVISION 28

RE-USE BALANCE OF DOOR,

FRAME & HARDWARE

BLK SCE

POWER SUPPLY, REQUEST TO EXIT, CARD READER, AND ALL WIRING BY ACCESS

CONTROL SUPPLIER/INSTALLER

HW SET 02

Qty

1 EA

1 EA

Description

TOUCHBAR

DOOR POSITION

SWITCH

Catalog Number

672-RD

679



DIVISION 28


FRAME & HARDWARE

628

BLK

Finish Mfr

SCE

SCE



RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

087100 - 15

FINISH HARDWARE

08/07/2013

HW SET 03

Qty

1 EA

EA

Description

TOUCHBAR

DOOR POSITION

SWITCH

Catalog Number

672-RD

679



DIVISION 28


FRAME & HARDWARE

628

BLK

Finish Mfr

SCE

SCE



HW SET 04

Qty

1 EA

1 EA

Description

ELECTRIC STRIKE

DOOR POSITION

SWITCH

Catalog Number

MUNL

679



DIVISION 28


FRAME & HARDWARE

626

BLK

Finish Mfr

SEC

SCE



HW SET 04A

Qty

1 EA

2 EA

Description

ELECTRIC STRIKE

DOOR POSITION

SWITCH

Catalog Number

MUNL

679



DIVISION 28


FRAME & HARDWARE

626

BLK

Finish Mfr

SEC

SCE



RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

087100 - 16

FINISH HARDWARE

08/07/2013

HW SET 05

Qty

1 EA

1 EA

Description

ELECTRIC STRIKE

DOOR POSITION

SWITCH

Catalog Number

1006 X NM

679



DIVISION 28


FRAME & HARDWARE

626

BLK

Finish Mfr

HES

SCE



HW SET 06

Qty

1 EA

Description

DOOR POSITION

SWITCH

Catalog Number

679



DIVISION 28


FRAME & HARDWARE

Finish

BLK

Mfr

SCE



HW SET 07

Qty

1 EA ENTRY MORTISE

LOCK

Description

HW SET 07A

Qty Description

1 EA ENTRY MORTISE

LOCK

Catalog Number

45H-0-A-16-H


FRAME & HARDWARE

Catalog Number

45H-0-AB-16-H

FRAME & HARDWARE


Finish

626

Finish

626

Mfr

Mfr

BES

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

087100 - 17

FINISH HARDWARE

08/07/2013

HW SET 08

Qty

1 EA STOREROOM

MORTISE LOCK

Description

HW SET 08A

Qty

1 EA PASSAGE MORTISE

LOCK

Description

HW SET 08B

Qty

1 EA STOREROOM

MORTISE LOCK

Description

HW SET 10

Qty

1 EA PANIC HARDWARE

1 EA SFIC RIM HOUSING

Description

Catalog Number

45H-0-D-16-H


FRAME & HARDWARE

Catalog Number

45H-0-N-16-H


FRAME & HARDWARE

Catalog Number

45H-0-DB-16-H


FRAME & HARDWARE

Catalog Number

98-L-17

80-129


FRAME & HARDWARE

HW SET 10A

Qty Description

1 EA PANIC HARDWARE

1 EA SFIC RIM HOUSING

1 EA SURFACE CLOSER

Catalog Number

98-L-17

80-129

4040XP RW/PA


FRAME & HARDWARE

Finish Mfr

626 BES

Finish

626

Finish

626

Mfr

BES

Mfr

BES

Finish Mfr

626

626

689

VON

SCH

Finish Mfr

626

626

VON

SCH

LCN

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

087100 - 18

FINISH HARDWARE

08/07/2013

HW SET 11 - VERIFY HARDWARE ON EXISTING DOOR

Qty Description Catalog Number

1 EA PASSAGE SET ND10S SPA

1 EA SGL CYL DEADBOLT B660BDC

1 EA PERMANENT CORE OWNER SUPPLIED


FRAME & HARDWARE

HW SET 12 - ROLL UP DOOR BY OTHERS

TO MATCH EXISTING


HARDWARE BY DOOR / FRAME

MANUFACTURER

HW SET 13

REPAIR PAIR OF DOORS, FRAMES, AND/OR HARDWARE

HW SET 14

Finish Mfr

626

626

626

Finish

SCH

SCH

BES

Mfr

REPAIR PAIR OF DOORS, FRAMES, AND/OR HARDWARE

HW SET 15 -


RE-USE EXISTING DOORS,

FRAMES, & HARDWARE

RE-USE EXISTING HARDWARE

DOOR BEING RELOCATED - REUSE EXISTING DOOR, FRAME, AND HARDWARE.

ADD REQUEST TO EXIT ONLY WHICH TO BE PROVIDED BY ACCESS CONTROL

INSTALLER/SUPPLIER

Finish Mfr

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV


087100 - 19

FINISH HARDWARE

08/07/2013

SECTION 092900

GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Interior gypsum board.

2. Exterior gypsum board for ceilings and soffits.

3. Tile backing panels.

4. Texture finishes.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating cost for each product having recycled content.

2. Product Certificates for Credit MR 5: For products and materials required to comply with requirements for regional materials, certificates indicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include statement indicating distance to Project, cost for each regional material, and fraction by weight that is considered regional.

3. Product Certificates for Credit MR 5: For products and materials required to comply with requirements for regionally manufactured and regionally extracted and manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally manufactured material. a. Include statement indicating location of manufacturer and distance to

Project for each regionally manufactured material. b. Include statement indicating location of manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material used in regionally extracted and manufactured materials. Indicate distance to Project and fraction by weight of each regionally manufactured material that is regionally extracted.

4. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For adhesives used to laminate gypsum board panels to substrates, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.

5. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4: For adhesives used to laminate gypsum board panels to substrates, documentation indicating that products

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

092900 - 1

GYPSUM BOARD

08/07/2013

comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of

Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

C. Samples:

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to

ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

C. Low Emitting Materials: For ceiling and wall assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly and complying with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard

Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using

Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

A. Recycled Content of Gypsum Panel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than < Insert number > percent.

B. Regional Materials: Gypsum panel products shall be manufactured within 500 miles

(800 km) of Project site from materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.

C. Regional Materials: Gypsum panel products shall be manufactured within 500 miles

(800 km) of Project site.

2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following :

1. American Gypsum .

2. CertainTeed Corp .

3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC .

4. Lafarge North America Inc .

5. National Gypsum Company .

6. PABCO Gypsum .

7. Temple-Inland .

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

092900 - 2

GYPSUM BOARD

08/07/2013

8. USG Corporation .

9. < Insert manufacturer's name >.

B. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm) .

2. Long Edges: [ Tapered ] [ Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for prefilling ].

2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized steel sheet .

B. Aluminum Trim: ASTM B 221 , Alloy 6063-T5.

2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.

2. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper.

3. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh.

4. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate.

1. Laminating adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Laminating adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale


B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

092900 - 3

GYPSUM BOARD

08/07/2013

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

C. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

D. Prefill open joints[ , rounded or beveled edges, ] and damaged surface areas.

E. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape.

F. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to

ASTM C 840:

1. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated . a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123

"Interior Painting."

G. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and texture finishes and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application.

H. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.


RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

092900 - 4

GYPSUM BOARD

08/07/2013

SECTION 099113

EXTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on exterior substrates.

1. Concrete.

2. Steel.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

B. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

C. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

D. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

E. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

F. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

B. Samples: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat.

C. Product List: For each product indicated. Include printout of current "MPI Approved

Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

099113 - 1

EXTERIOR PAINTING

12/06/2013

A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run,] that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.

A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3. a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 10 sq. ft. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product listed in other

Part 2 articles for the paint category indicated.

A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List."

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

C. VOC Content: Provide materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

099113 - 2

EXTERIOR PAINTING

12/06/2013

D. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range

2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS

A. Primer, Alkali Resistant, Water Based: MPI #3.

B. Primer, Bonding, Water Based: MPI #17.

C. Primer, Bonding, Solvent Based: MPI #69.

A. Primer, Alkyd, Anti-Corrosive for Metal: MPI #79.

B. Primer, Alkyd, Quick Dry, for Metal: MPI #76.

C. Primer, Galvanized, Water Based: MPI #134.

D. Primer, Galvanized: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer.

E. Primer, Quick Dry, for Aluminum: MPI #95.

A. Latex, Exterior Flat (Gloss Level 1): MPI #10.

B. Latex, Exterior Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #11.

C. Latex, Exterior, Gloss (Gloss Level 6: MPI #119.

D. Light Industrial Coating, Exterior, Water Based (Gloss Level 3): MPI #161.

E. Light Industrial Coating, Exterior, Water Based, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #163.

F. Light Industrial Coating, Exterior, Water Based, Gloss (Gloss Level 6): MPI #164.

A. Alkyd, Exterior Flat (Gloss Level 1): MPI #8.

B. Alkyd, Exterior, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #94.

C. Alkyd, Exterior Gloss (Gloss Level 6): MPI #9.

D. Alkyd, Quick Dry, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #81.

E. Alkyd, Quick Dry, Gloss (Gloss Level 7): MPI #96.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

099113 - 3

EXTERIOR PAINTING

12/06/2013

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent.

2. Portland Cement Plaster: 12 percent.

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

D. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.

B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in

"MPI Manual."

B. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

A. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by

Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

099113 - 4

EXTERIOR PAINTING

12/06/2013

B. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.5 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces: a. Prime Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. b. Prime Coat: Primer, alkali resistant, water based, MPI #3. c. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. d. Topcoat: Latex, exterior flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #10. e. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low sheen (Gloss Level 3-4), MPI #15. f. Topcoat: Latex, exterior semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #11. g. Topcoat: Latex, exterior gloss (Gloss Level 6), MPI #119.

2. Latex Aggregate/Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Textured coating, latex, flat, MPI #42. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #10. d. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low sheen (Gloss Level 3-4), MPI #15. e. Topcoat: Latex, exterior semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #11. f. Topcoat: Latex, exterior gloss (Gloss Level 6), MPI #119.

3. High-Build Latex System: Dry film thickness not less than 10 mils. a. Prime Coat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer. b. Intermediate Coat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer. c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, high build, MPI #40.

4. Latex Aggregate System: a. Prime Coat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer. b. Intermediate Coat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer. c. Topcoat: Textured coating, latex, flat, MPI #42. a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based, MPI #134. b. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized metal, as recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for exterior use on galvanized-metal substrates with topcoat indicated. c. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. d. Topcoat: Latex, exterior flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #10. e. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low sheen (Gloss Level 3-4)MPI #15. f. Topcoat: Latex, exterior semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #11.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

099113 - 5

EXTERIOR PAINTING

12/06/2013

g. Topcoat: Latex, exterior gloss (Gloss Level 6), MPI #119.

2. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based, MPI #134. b. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized metal, as recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for exterior use on galvanized-metal substrates with topcoat indicated. c. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, matching topcoat. d. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based (Gloss

Level 3), MPI #161. e. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, semi-gloss (Gloss

Level 5), MPI #163. f. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, gloss (Gloss

Level 6), MPI #164. a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized metal, as recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for exterior use on galvanized-metal substrates with topcoat indicated. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, flat (Gloss Level 5), MPI #8. d. Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #94. e. Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #9.


RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

099113 - 6

EXTERIOR PAINTING

12/06/2013

SECTION 099123

INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems the following interior substrates:

1. Concrete.

2. Steel.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

B. Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

C. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

D. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

E. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

F. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

G. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

B. Samples: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.

C. Product List: For each product indicated. Include printout of current "MPI Approved

Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

099123 - 1

INTERIOR PAINTING

12/06/2013

A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.

A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3. a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 10 sq. ft b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List."

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

C. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction and, for interior paints and coatings applied at Project site, the following

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

099123 - 2

INTERIOR PAINTING

12/06/2013

VOC limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to

40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24)].

1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L.

2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L.

3. Dry-Fog Coatings: 400 g/L.

4. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L.

5. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L.

6. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L.

7. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L.

8. Floor Coatings: 100 g/L.

D. Low-Emitting Materials: Interior paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard

Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using

Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

E. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS

A. Primer Sealer, Latex, Interior: MPI #50.

B. Primer, Alkali Resistant, Water Based: MPI #3.

C. Primer Sealer, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC:[ MPI #149.]

D. Primer Sealer, Alkyd, Interior: MPI #45.

E. Primer, Bonding, Water Based: MPI #17.

F. Primer, Bonding, Solvent Based: MPI #69.

A. Latex, Interior, Flat, (Gloss Level 1): MPI #53.

B. Latex, Interior, (Gloss Level 2): MPI #44.

C. Latex, Interior, (Gloss Level 3): MPI #52.

D. Latex, Interior, (Gloss Level 4): MPI #43.

E. Latex, Interior, Semi-Gloss, (Gloss Level 5): MPI #54.

F. Latex, Interior, Gloss, (Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss of 65 units at 60 degrees): MPI #114.

G. Latex, Interior, High Performance Architectural, (Gloss Level 3): MPI #139.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

099123 - 3

INTERIOR PAINTING

12/06/2013

H. Latex, Interior, High Performance Architectural, (Gloss Level 4): MPI #140.

A. Alkyd, Interior, Flat (Gloss Level 1): MPI #49.

B. Alkyd, Interior, (Gloss Level 3): MPI #51.

C. Alkyd, Interior, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #47.

D. Alkyd, Interior, Gloss (Gloss Level 6): MPI #48.

E. Alkyd, Quick Dry, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #81.

F. Alkyd, Quick Dry, Gloss (Gloss Level 7): MPI #96.

A. Sealer, Water Based, for Concrete Floors: MPI #99.

B. Sealer, Solvent Based, for Concrete Floors:MPI #104.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

D. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

099123 - 4

INTERIOR PAINTING

12/06/2013

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual."

B. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

A. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by

Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

B. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.5 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Gypsum Board Substrates: a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50. b. Prime Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat, (Gloss Level 1), MPI #53. e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 2), MPI #44. f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #52. g. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 4), MPI #43. h. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss, (Gloss Level 5), MPI #54. i. Topcoat: Latex, interior, gloss, (Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss of 65 units at 60 degrees, MPI #114.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

099123 - 5

INTERIOR PAINTING

12/06/2013

a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, MPI #149. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, flat (Gloss

Level 1), MPI #143. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, (Gloss

Level 2), MPI #144. e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, (Gloss

Level 3), MPI #145. f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (Gloss

Level 5), MPI #147.

3. High-Performance Architectural Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, (Gloss

Level 2), MPI #138. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, (Gloss

Level 3), MPI #139. e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, (Gloss

Level 4), MPI #140. f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, semi-gloss (Gloss

Level 5), MPI #141.

4. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System: a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50. b. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based (Gloss

Level 3), MPI #151. d. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, semi-gloss (Gloss

Level 5), MPI #153. e. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, gloss (Gloss

Level 6), MPI #154.

5. Alkyd over Latex Primer System: a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50. b. Intermediate Coat: Alkyd, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #49. d. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #51. e. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #47. f. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, gloss (Gloss Level 6), MPI #48.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV


099123 - 6

INTERIOR PAINTING

12/06/2013

SECTION 099600

HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and application of high-performance coating systems on the following substrates: a. Concrete, horizontal surfaces.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

B. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

B. Samples: For each type of coating system and in each color and gloss of topcoat indicated.

C. Product List: For each product indicated, include printout of current "MPI Approved

Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.

A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Coatings: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

099600 - 1


12/06/2013

A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each coating system indicated to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each coating system specified in Part 3. a. Wall and Ceiling Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and are listed in "MPI Approved Products List."

1. Provide materials for use within each coating system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a coating system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in coating system and on substrate indicated.

3. Provide products of same manufacturer for each coat in a coating system.

C. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction and, for interior coatings applied at project site, the following VOC limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,

Subpart D (EPA Method 24)].

1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L.

2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L.

3. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L.

4. Anti-Corrosive and Anti-Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L.

5. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L.

6. Pre-Treatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

099600 - 2


12/06/2013

7. Floor Coatings: 100 g/L.

D. Low-Emitting Materials: Interior coatings shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale


E. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

A. Primer Sealer, Latex, Interior: MPI #50.

A. Epoxy, Gloss: MPI #77.

B. Epoxy-Modified Latex, Interior, Gloss (Gloss Level 6): MPI #115.

C. Epoxy, High-Build, Low Gloss: MPI #108.

D. Epoxy Deck Coating (Slip-Resistant): MPI #82.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


1. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: a. Concrete: 12 percent. b. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent. c. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

B. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

C. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

099600 - 3


12/06/2013

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI

Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.

B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce coating systems indicated.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply high-performance coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual."

B. Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Produce sharp glass lines and color breaks.

A. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating operation. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

B. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces.

3.5 INTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SCHEDULE

A. Concrete Substrates, Horizontal Surfaces. a. Prime Coat: Epoxy, gloss, MPI #77. b. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy, gloss, MPI #77. c. Topcoat: Epoxy, gloss, MPI #77.


RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

099600 - 4


12/06/2013

PART 1 - GENERAL

SECTION 13125

PREFABRICATED METAL SECURITY BOOTH


Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes metal building systems that consist of integrated sets of mutually dependent components including structural framing, roof panels, wall panels, soffit panels, doors, windows and accessories.


1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete foundations, slabs, and anchor-bolt installation.

2. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass installed in wall and door assemblies.

3. Division 9 Section “Finish Schedule (Colors and Materials).”

4. Division 23 Section “Packaged Rooftop Air Conditioning Units.”

5. Division 23 Section “Commissioning of HVAC.”

6. Division 27 Section “Common Work Results for Electrical.”

7. Division 27 Section “General Requirements.”

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Building Code: 2000 International Building Code with Southern Nevada Amendments

(IBC).

B. Energy Code: 2003 International Energy Conservation Code (IECC)

C. ADAAG: Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines.

A. General: Provide a complete, integrated set of metal building system manufacturer's standard mutually dependent components and assemblies that form a metal building system capable of withstanding structural and other loads, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure or infiltration of water into building interior. Include primary and secondary framing, metal roof panels, metal wall panels, and accessories complying with requirements indicated.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

13125 - 1


12/06/2013

1. Provide metal building system of size and with spacings, slopes, and spans indicated.

B. Primary Frame Type:

1. Rigid Clear Span: Structural-framing system without interior columns.

C. Wall Framing: Manufacturer's standard.

D. Secondary Frame Type: Manufacturer's standard.

E. Eave Height: Manufacturer's standard height, as indicated by nominal height on

Drawings.

F. Roof Slope: Manufacturer's standard for frame type required.

G. Roof System: Manufacturer's standard with insulation with a minimum R-30 rating.

H. Exterior Wall System: Manufacturer's standard insulated metal wall panels, with a minimum R-19 rating.

1.5 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Structural Performance: Provide metal building systems capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:

1. Design Loads: As required by Building Code.

2. Wind Loads: Include horizontal loads induced by a basic wind speed corresponding to a 50-year, mean-recurrence interval at Project site of 90 miles per hour.

3. Collateral Loads: Include additional dead loads other than the weight of metal building system for permanent items such as sprinklers, mechanical systems, electrical systems, and ceilings.

4. Design secondary framing system to accommodate deflection of primary building structure and construction tolerances, and to maintain clearances at openings.

B. Seismic Performance: Design and engineer metal building systems capable of withstanding the effects of earthquake motions determined according to Building Code.

C. Thermal Movements: Provide metal panel systems that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

13125 - 2


12/06/2013

D. Thermal Performance: Provide insulated metal wall and roof panel assemblies tested according to ASTM C 1363 or ASTM C 518: Roof R-30, Walls R-19.

E. Water Penetration for Metal Roof Panels: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 1646 at test-pressure difference of 2.86 lbf/sq. ft. (137 Pa).

F. Water Penetration for Metal Wall Panels: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum differential pressure of 20 percent of inward-acting, windload design pressure of not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa) and not more than 12 lbf/sq. ft. (575 Pa).

G. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for Class 90.

H. Accessibility: Comply with Building Code and ADAAG design requirements including:

1. Door widths and maneuvering clearances.

3. Hardware type and operation.

4. Work surface heights and clearances.

5. Control mounting heights

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of the following metal building system components:

2. Metal roof panels.

3. Metal wall panels and metal liner panels.

4. Insulation and vapor retarders.

5. Doors.

6. Windows and glazing.

7. Accessories.

8. Air Conditioning Equipment.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For the following in the size indicated.

1. Coated Finishes: For each exposed finish, prepared on substrate indicated 6 by

6 inches (150 by 150 mm) square.

2. Glass: For window and door glazing, 6 by 6 inches (150 by 150 mm) square.

C. Shop Drawings: For the following metal building system components. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

13125 - 3


12/06/2013

2. Anchor-Bolt Plans: Submit anchor-bolt plans before foundation work begins.

Include location, diameter, and projection of anchor bolts required to attach metal building to foundation. Indicate column reactions at each location.

3. Structural-Framing Drawings: Show complete fabrication of primary and secondary framing; include provisions for openings. Indicate welds and bolted connections, distinguishing between shop and field applications. Include transverse cross-sections.

4. Metal Wall Panel Layout Drawings: Show layouts of metal panels including methods of support. Include details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, trim, flashings, closures, and special details. Distinguish between factory- and field-assembled work; show locations of exposed fasteners. a. Show wall-mounted items including doors, windows, louvers, and lighting fixtures.

5. Electrical Service: Show layout of electrical devices including switches, outlets, panels, equipment connections, and lighting fixtures. Indicate wiring sizes, wattage and capacity of the components.

6. Mechanical Equipment: Show layout of air conditioning and heating equipment.

D. Letter of Design Certification: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

Include the following.

1. Name and location of Project.

3. Name of manufacturer.

4. Name of Contractor.

5. Building dimensions including width, length, height, and roof slope.

6. Indicate compliance with AISC standards for hot-rolled steel and AISI standards for cold-rolled steel, including edition dates of each standard.

7. Governing building codes and year of editions.

8. Design Loads: Include dead load, roof live load, collateral loads, roof snow load, deflection, wind loads/speeds and exposure, seismic design category or effective peak velocity-related acceleration/peak acceleration, and auxiliary loads

(cranes).

9. Load Combinations: Indicate that loads were applied acting simultaneously with concentrated loads, according to governing building code.

10. Certificate of Compliance with Energy Code requirements.

E. Manufacturer Certificate: Signed by manufacturer certifying that products comply with requirements.

F. Maintenance Data: For metal panel finishes, door hardware, and HVAC equipment.

G. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.

H. Agency Submittal: Provide drawings signed and sealed by qualified professional engineers and obtain jurisdictional agency approval of the design prior to fabrication and installation.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

13125 - 4


12/06/2013

A. Erector Qualifications: An experienced erector who has specialized in erecting and installing work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is acceptable to manufacturer.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer.

1. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer.

C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural

Welding Code--Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."

D. Cold-Formed Steel: Comply with AISI's "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed

Steel Structural Members," or AISI's "Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Steel Structural Members," for design requirements and allowable stresses.

E. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide field-insulated metal panels having thermal insulation materials with the following surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less, unless otherwise indicated.


A. Deliver components and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal panels for protection during transportation and handling.

B. Unload, store, and erect building components in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.

1. Established Dimensions for Foundations: Comply with established dimensions on approved anchor-bolt plans, establishing foundation dimensions and proceeding with fabricating structural framing without field measurements.

Coordinate anchor-bolt installation to ensure that actual anchorage dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete foundations and casting of anchor-bolt inserts into foundation walls and footings. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

13125 - 5


12/06/2013

B. Coordinate metal panel assemblies with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction of supports and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Metal Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

ASTM D 2244.

ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.

2. Finish Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Weathertightness: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace, assemblies that fail to remain weathertight, including leaks, within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Heating and Air Conditioning Equipment: Manufacturer’s standard form in which manufacture agrees to repair or replace equipment that fails to operate properly or maintain environmental conditions as specified, within specified warranty period. This includes all electrical/mechanical systems and components.

1. Warranty Period: 3 year from date of Substantial Completion.

D. Glazing: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace,

Insulating glass assemblies that fail to remain airtight, within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Austin Mohawk, Inc.

3. Nationwide Structures, Inc.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

13125 - 6


12/06/2013

ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 or 55 (345 or 380); or ASTM A 529/A 529M, Grade 50 or 55 (345 or 380).

B. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M; ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 or 55 (345 or 380); or ASTM A 529/A 529M, Grade 50 or 55 (345 or 380).

C. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B or C, structural tubing.

D. Structural-Steel Sheet: Hot-rolled, ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Structural Steel (SS),

Grades 30 through 55 (205 through 380), or High-Strength Low Alloy Steel (HSLAS),

Grades 45 through 70 (310 through 480); or cold-rolled, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M,

Structural Steel (SS), Grades 25 through 80 (170 through 550), or High-Strength Low

Alloy Steel (HSLAS), Grades 45 through 70 (310 through 480).

E. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grades 33 through 80 (230 through 550) or High-Strength Low Alloy Steel (HSLAS), Grades 50 through 80 (340 through 550); with G60 (Z180) coating designation; mill phosphatized.

F. Non-High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, carbon-steel hex nuts; and ASTM F 844 plain (flat) steel washers.

A. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet coated by the hot-dip process.

1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel

(SS), Grades 33 through 80 (230 through 550), with G90 (Z275) coating designation.

2. Surface: Smooth, flat finish.

A. Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide fasteners with heads matching color of materials being fastened by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating.

B. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.

C. Metal Panel Sealants:

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

13125 - 7


12/06/2013

1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape of manufacturer's standard size.

2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; one-part elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or silicone-rubber sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal panels and remain weathertight; and as recommended by metal building system manufacturer.

2.5 HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING

A. Equipment: Subject to compliance with requirements and governing building codes, manufacturer’s standard roof mounted providing heating and cooling capacity as specified.

1. Design Temperature Range: Comply with ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals

2013 Edition for outside air of 106 F for cooling and 31.8 F for heating. The unit shall be sized to meet the 1% design day for both cooling and heating mode.

2. Comply with Energy Code requirements.

2.6 ELECTRICAL

A. Subject to compliance with requirements and governing building codes, manufacturer’s standard power and lighting package.

1. Comply with the requirements of Division 27 for Power and Lighting.

2. Comply with Energy Code requirements.

3. Size power distribution panel to accommodate security equipment requirements and HVAC equipment.

4. Provide electrical power to security devices, cameras and monitors in the locations shown.

2.7 SECURITY

A. Conduits: Concealed from panel to device to accept control cabling for security devices.

1. Comply with the requirements of Division 28 for Low Voltage and Data.

2. Device Mounting: Concealed backing plates for interior and exterior security devices and panels.

3. Exterior: Waterproof accessory plates to accept attachment of security devices and radio antenna.

A. Shop Fabrication: Fabricate and assemble the building into the largest finished components allowed by shipping and handling requirements.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

13125 - 8


12/06/2013

B. General: Design components and field connections required for erection to permit easy assembly.

C. Metal Panels: Fabricate and finish metal panels at the factory by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.

1. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of metal panel.

A. Primary Framing: Manufacturer's standard structural primary framing system, designed to withstand required loads and specified requirements.

1. Make shop connections by welding.

2. Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces for shop priming according to SSPC-SP 2.

Shop prime primary structural members with specified primer after fabrication.

2.10 DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Horizontal-Sliding Doors: Manufacturer's standard horizontal-sliding door assembly including structural frame, door panels, brackets, guides, tracks, hardware, and installation accessories.

1. Door Frames: Channels and zees; fabricated from minimum 0.0528-inchuncoated thickness, metallic-coated steel sheet or structural-steel shapes.

2. Door Panels: Same material and finish as metal wall panels.

3. Hardware: Keyed mortise lock with ADA compliant operating handle.

2.11 WINDOWS

A. Aluminum Windows: Metal building system manufacturer's standard, with self-flashing mounting fins, and as follows:

1. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM 221, alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish, but not less than 0.062-inch thickness at any location for main frame and sash members.

2. Mullions: Between adjacent windows, fabricated of extruded aluminum matching finish of window units.

3. Fasteners, Anchors, and Clips: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or other noncorrosive material, compatible with aluminum window members, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components of window units. Fasteners shall not be exposed, except for attaching hardware.

4. Finish: Clear Anodized Aluminum.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

13125 - 9


12/06/2013

B. Glazing:

1. Insulating Glass: Units complying with ASTM E 774 for Class CBA units and consisting of two lites separated by a dehydrated air space, with. Seal with manufacturer's standard sealant.

2. Safety Glass: Category I and II materials complying with testing requirements in

16 CFR 1201.

3. Thickness and Shading Coefficient: Comply with Energy Code requirements.

4. Factory-Glazed Fabrication: Glaze window units in the factory to greatest extent possible and practical for applications indicated. Comply with requirements in

Division 8 Section Glazing.

2.12 ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide accessories as standard with metal building system manufacturer and as specified. Fabricate and finish accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.

1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

B. Roof Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including copings, fasciae, corner units, ridge closures, clips, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal roof panels, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Wall Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal wall panel assembly including copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal wall panels, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Interior Work Surfaces and Shelving: Stainless Steel formed with smooth edges and corners. Support minimum 100 psf work surface load.

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. All Metal Surfaces: High-Performance Organic Finish (2-Coat Fluoropolymer): AA-

C12C40R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: conversion coating; Organic Coating: manufacturer's standard 2-coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight).

Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions, except as modified below:

1. Humidity Resistance: 2000 hours.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

13125 - 10


12/06/2013

2. Salt-Spray Resistance: 2000 hours.

3. Interior and Exterior Color: Match Metal Panel 1 color.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in the appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are not acceptable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Before installation proceeds, survey elevations and locations of concrete and locations of anchor bolts, and other embedments to receive prefabricated units, for compliance with requirements and metal building manufacturer's tolerances.

C. Proceed with erection only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Doors: After completing installation, test and adjust doors to operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion.

B. Door Hardware: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation and function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended.

A. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period.

B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Division 9 painting

Sections.

C. Metal Panels: Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are installed. On completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

13125 - 11


12/06/2013

1. Replace metal panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

D. Windows: Clean metal surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. Clean factory-glazed glass immediately after installing windows.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC equipment.


RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

13125 - 12


12/06/2013

SECTION 14999

PANTOGRAPH LIFT

PART 1.1 SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1.

Preparation instructions and recommendations.

2.

Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.

3.

Installation methods.

B.

Shop Drawings: Submit drawings showing full layout of all lifts with dimensions and details shown for services and conduits between lifts and the control consoles.

C.

Operation and Maintenance Manual: Submit Owner's manual to include system operation, maintenance and trouble shooting, spare part number, drawings and schematics.

PART 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Manufacturer Qualifications: The lift company selling the product shall have ISO-

9001 certification and the proof of current certification shall accompany the bid.

B.

Installer Qualifications: For warranty validation, installation shall be performed by qualified factory Authorized and trained personnel.

C.

Product Requirements:

1.

Design Standards and Certification: The lift shall be Certified by ETL to the

ANSI/ALI Standard for Automotive Lifts, ALCTV-2011: Safety Requirements for Construction, Testing and Validation; as well as all Federal & State

Standards.

2.

The drive system shall permit lifting without any pulsation, jerks, or unsteady lifting. Lifting shall be smooth. System shall comprise an electrically powered pump, flow control valves, and a fluid reservoir. An electronic/hydraulic synchronization device shall ensure smooth alignment of each lifting assembly based on variances in vehicle weight. A microprocessor shall control all lift movement for ultimate operator safety and convenience. Troubleshooting codes shall facilitate service and repair.

3.

All material thickness and structural dimensions are minimums. Dimensional tolerances, unless noted, are as follows: +/- 0.25 inch for dimensions less than ten (10) inches; +- 1.0 for dimensions from ten (10) to five (5) feet inclusive,

+/- 3.0 inch for dimensions greater that is five (5) feet.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

14999 - 1

PANTOGRAPH LIFT

08/07/2013

PART 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.

Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.

B.

Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solventbased materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A.

Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

PART 1.5 WARRANTY – K PLUS Hydraulic Protection

A.

Manufacturer's Warranty: Lift system shall be warranted against defects in workmanship and material for a minimum period of two year for ALL parts and 2year labor. The Hydraulic Cylinder seals and “Volumetric” Synchronization system shall be warranted for a minimum of two (2) years.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

PART 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A.

Acceptable Manufacturer: Mohawk or approved equal

B.

Substitutions:

1.

Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions the specific tender.

2.

Requests for changes on products, materials, equipment and methods of construction required by the contract documents by the Contractor after the award shall be considered requests for "substitutions", and shall follow the procedures outlined within the bid documents for Substitutions.

3.

Any substitution of specified lift requiring modifications of foundation system detailed will be the responsibility of the Contractor.

4.

The Contractor shall provide for any and all engineering and redesign of foundation system as a result of substitution.

5.

Under no circumstances will extra payment be permitted as a result of additional work to accommodate any equipment substitution.

PART 2.2 PANTOGRAPH LIFT

1.

Complete assembly shall consist of two hydraulically lifted platforms and an electro-hydraulic control console. Required lengths of steel reinforced hydraulic hose, compressed air line and electrical cable shall connect the lift to the eventual installed location of the control console.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

14999 - 2

PANTOGRAPH LIFT

08/07/2013

2.

Sufficient lengths of hydraulic hose, air line and electrical cable shall be supplied with the lift to permit locating the control console ten (10) feet

(maximum) from the connections on the lift. If the console is desired to be located farther away, additional lengths shall be provided at an additional cost.

3.

Hydraulic interconnects shall have standard JIC or ORB fittings throughout.

4.

Lift Performance

5.

Lifting capacity: 18 tons (36,000 lbs.) per lift unit, minimum.

6.

Minimum lifting height from finished floor level to bottom of tires: 63 inches to the fully raised deck (or platform), minimum. Lifting unit shall permit lifting of vehicle to any height to full height with a minimum of 10 mechanical locking positions distributed throughout the lifts travel

7.

First lock position shall be 18 inches minimum to allow comfortable and safe brake/tire work at this height.

8.

Lifting speed: 60 seconds approximate to full height.

9.

Platform dimensions. a.

Platform length: 336 inches (28 feet) b.

Platform width: 32 inches c.

Spacing between platforms: 45 inches d.

Overal platform width: 109.5 inches e.

Retracted height: flush with floor level

10.

Lift Structure Features

11.

All pivot pins at connections of leg to platform or cylinder to leg will be accomplished with 2 ½ inch diameter chrome rods for lifelong service. Smaller diameter pivot pins or pins that are not finished with chrome are not acceptable.

12.

Support leg joints shall be provided with composite bushings at all cylinder to leg connections and the leg to platform connections, where stresses are at maximum, for extended lift life and easy repair.

13.

As t he definition of a parallelogram is a four sided figure with two horizontal lines connected by two parallel angled lines (lifting legs), both horizontal components must be a part of the parallelogram for structural integrity and ability to connect top with lower platforms. Lifts designed without the structural integrity of a lower horizontal base section are not acceptable.

14.

Each platform shall be constructed of 0.375 inch thick steel plate supported by

(2) 4 x 8 x 0.250 inch wall ASTM A-500 Grade B structural steel tubing and a structural steel channel 8” @ 11.5 lb/ft.

15.

Each platform shall have automatically engaging plate steel wheel stops mounted to the front and the rear of the platforms that engage upon lift ascent

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

14999 - 3

PANTOGRAPH LIFT

08/07/2013

to prevent a vehicle from rolling off the front or rear of the lift when raised more than 12 inches.

16.

Front and rear wheel stops shall automatically swing into position as the lift if raised and recede when lowered.

17.

Chocks shall not reduce the effective length of lifting platforms by more than six (6) inches.

18.

Wheel chocks shall be interchangeable.

19.

Leveling/Anchoring provisions.

20.

The base of each lifting member shall be pre-drilled to accept anchoring bolts adequately sized for the loads imposed during lift operations.

21.

The base frame shall consist of 30” x 20” x ½ thick A-36 steel base plates attached to each support leg by twin 1” thick A-36 steel plates. Base plates shall be attached to each other with (2) 3” x 4” x 5/16 wall structural steel tubes. Lifts which have individual base plates that are not connected to each other to create a base frame are not acceptable.

22.

The concrete flooring requirements must require minimum 3000-PSI compressive strength concrete.

23.

There shall be no fixed obstructions between lifting platforms.

24.

Hydraulic system.

25.

Each hydraulic cylinder shall incorporate a velocity fuse (flow check valve) integrally mounted to prevent inadvertent retraction in the event of a fluid leak.

26.

Hydraulic cylinders shall be mounted to the underside of the lifting platforms away from sources of dirt, grime and damage from falling objects.

27.

All hydraulic cylinders shall be 7 3/4 inch diameter and h ave 2 1/2 inch diameter chrome-plated rods. Smaller sized cylinders which demand higher pressure to operate, straining the hydraulic components, and reducing the life of the motor and pump, are not acceptable.

28.

Working pressure for this lift shall not exceed 1800 psi at maximum load. Lifts which demand higher pressure to operate, straining the hydraulic components, and reducing the life of the motor and pump, are not acceptable.

29.

All hydraulic hoses shall be of steel reinforced construction and have standard

JIC fitting throughout.

30.

The lift shall be driven by a hydraulic pump of U.S. manufacture, capable of supplying the appropriate PSI and GPM to operate the lift.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

14999 - 4

PANTOGRAPH LIFT

08/07/2013

31.

In the event of a power failure, the lift shall be able to be lowered from any raised position by operation of a manual hand pump and manual lowering valves.

32.

Mechanical safety locks.

33.

Steel safety locks with a safety factor of not less then 3:1 shall be mounted on each lifting cylinder and shall allow the lift to be locked at a minimum of ten

(10) different levels. These locks shall ensure a minimum amount of travel in the event of a hydraulic fluid leak and shall maintain the height of the lift in that situation.

34.

The safety locks shall automatically disengage when the lift “LOWER” control is operated, and automatically re-engage when the lift “LOWER” control is released. The safety locks shall be automatically engaged as the lift ascends.

This will ensure positive lock engagement when raising the lift in the event of hydraulic failure.

35.

Control console shall house the following equipment: a.

Steel oil reservoir (plastic reservoirs are not acceptable) b.

Suction strainer c.

Low-pressure return filter d.

Hydraulic gear pump e.

Manual hand pump with manual lowering valves f.

Electric motor: 20 HP, 208-230/440-460 VAC, 3 phase, 60 Hz, TEFC of

U.S. manufactures.

36.

Electrical enclosures for control components shall be NEMA 12 rated

(minimum) and have the following controls mounted on them yet still maintain the NEMA 12 sealing ability. a.

Lockable System On/Off Switch b.

“RAISE” and “LOWER” push button controls c.

“PARK” button control to lower lift on mechanical safeties which illuminates (amber) when the lift is in position to be locked. d.

An alphanumeric LED display to identify safe and unsafe operating conditions, display lifting status in trouble shooting problems with simple instructions as opposed to error codes. e.

LED display illuminates green when lifted is powered. f.

Audible alarm which sounds when lift is raised and lowered. Alarm will de-active once lift is within parking position or fully lowered.

37.

The control system shall be operated by a Programmable Logic Control (PLC) and lock-out all operations of lift controls if an unsafe condition exists due to such instances as (but not limited to): insufficient air pressure to operate safety locks, displaced safety tape switch or uneven platform heights. This lock-out shall not be able to be reset until the unsafe condition has been corrected.

38.

The control system shall ensure that lifting platforms differ in height by no

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

14999 - 5

PANTOGRAPH LIFT

08/07/2013

more than two (2) inches. If platforms become uneven by a greater amount, the lift shall stop and prohibit further operation until the condition is corrected

39.

The system shall be programmable to stop lift at a specific height in order to load or unload any accessory jack, stop at a specific height to accommodate individual technicians or low ceiling height.

40.

Coatings: a.

The lift must be available in both a premium powder coat and Nickel

Zinc Galvanized protective coating. The steel components must undergo a steel pellet blast (Wheelabrator style) preparation with acid wash before the coating is applied.

PART 3.0

EXECUTION

PART 3.1 INSTALLATION

1.

Drive Mechanism: a.

The drive system shall be hydraulic drive and shall permit lifting without any pulsations, jerks or unsteady lifting. Lifting shall be smooth.

Hydraulic system shall be comprised of an electrically powered pump, flow control valves, and a fluid reservoir. b.

Hydraulic lifting cylinders shall be of a piston type to prevent leakage in the case of piston damage. c.

The cylinders shall be built using highly polished chromium plated plunger shafts that resist corrosion, scratching and other damage that could lead to shorter seal life. d.

The lift for the wash bay will be entirely hot dipped galvanized; the respective console will be water-resistant, stainless steel, as per OMER.

PART 4 STANDARD EQUIPMENT

1.

(48) ¾” X5” wej-it anchor bolts.

2.

Touch-up paint, 1 can each of red & yellow.

3.

Dexron III ATF for hydraulic pump and reservoir.

4.

Shims to level the platforms for proper installation.

5.

Safety and operations manual.

6.

Dextron III AFT for hydraulic pump and reservoir.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

14999 - 6

PANTOGRAPH LIFT

08/07/2013

7.

Safety and operations manual.

8.

ANSI/ALI OIM booklet (ALI standard # ALOIM-2008).

9.

ANSI/ALI “Lifting it Right” booklet (ALI standard #SM01-2).

10.

ANSI/ALI Lifting Point Guide booklet (ALI standard # ALI/LP-guide).

11.

ANSI/ALI SAFETY DECALS AFFIXED TO LIFT.

PART 5.0

OPTIONS

PART 5.1 TRACK LIGHTING (OPTIONAL)

1.

The track lighting option must be certified and tested to the current ANSI/ALI

ALCTV and UL-201 standards.

2.

The lift shall furnished with six (6) 40 watt dual pin, 48 inch long (minimum) cool white fluorescent lighting fixtures. Lights shall be evenly spaced along the length of each track to illuminate the inner area of the lift and the vehicle undercarriage.

3.

Light fixtures shall incorporate guards to prevent breakage of bulbs and also shield the operator in the event of the bulb breakage.

4.

The lighting system shall be self-contained and be powered by the supply to the lift. The lft control system shall monitor the level of the tracks and prevent power to the lighting system when the lifting tracks are below 18 inches from floor level top of track.

PART 5.2 RJ-50 AIR OVER HYDRAULIC JACKING BEAM (OPTIONAL)

1.

Maximum Capacity per beam: 25,000 lbs.

2.

Any jacking beams supplied with this lift must be certified and tested to the current ANSI/ALI ALCTV and UL-201 standards.

3.

The jacking beam weldment shall be constructed of two (2) vertical ¾” thick x

10” high parallel ASTM A-36 steel plates welded onto a 1/2” thick ASTM A-36 steel bottom plate. End Sections are enclosed by 3/4” thick ASTM A-36 steel plates to trap ends of platform in flanges of tracks. Handle provided for pushing and pulling platform along inside length of tracks. Mounting plates provided for mounting valves and power units.

4.

Wheel assemblies: Wheels constructed of CF-1018 steel and rimmed to capture flat rails that run along inside of each track. Axles made of 5/8” diameter CF-1018 steel round. Axles designed to carry load of jack beam when empty and spring retracted when loaded, thus transferring load of jack beam on inner flanges of tracks to secure/hold jacking beam in place.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

14999 - 7

PANTOGRAPH LIFT

08/07/2013

5.

Two (2) power units shall be provided, one for each cylinder, each consisting of an air over hydraulic pump and a steel reservoir. Each Reservoir: 9 1/2” x

11 1/2” x 6 1/2” steel rectangular tank (3 gallon).

6.

Valving: Two (2) Directional control valves, spring centered, rated 3000 psi, each with handle for separate control of each jacking cylinder.

7.

Two (2) Jacking Cylinders: Each consisting of (1) 4 1/8” OD ASTM A-513-5 honed steel cylinder barrel and (1) 2 5/8” diameter CF-1045 chrome-plated steel cylinder rod. Cylinder bases consist of a 3/8” thick x 6 1/4” x 8” ASTM A-

36 steel plate. Exposed rod ends have machined holes to accept standard lifting pads and special axle lifting pads. Stroke of each jack cylinder equals approx 8 7/8”.

8.

Each hydraulic cylinder shall have a counter-balance valve integrally mounted to prevent collapse in the event of a fluid leak. Positive downward pressure from power unit must be present to allow cylinder to retract. This type of valving ensures cylinders remain in their extended position for long periods of time without worry of leaking/bleeding downward.

9.

Two (2) standard lifting pads and two (2) yoke shaped axle lifting pads supplied with each jacking beam. Jacking beam also supplied with (2) 3” long and (2) 6” long stackable truck adapters.

10.

Hydraulic Tubing: 3/8” OD seamless stainless steel hydraulic tubing assemblies, rated 14,000 psig minimum burst pressure, flared at each end to accept #6 ORB male fittings. Four (4) Hydraulic Hose assemblies: Parker brand type SAE-100R2, 1/4” ID, Rated 20,000 psig minimum burst pressure, oil, weather and abrasion resistant, each end with #6 JIC female swivel fittings.

11.

Dimensions: Designed for standard 45” dimension inside of tracks.

Approximate beam dimensions: 12” high x 28” deep x 52” long.

PART 5.3 TRACK SAFETY TAPE SWITCH OPTION (OPTIONAL)

1.

Track safety tape switch option consists of (2) 10’ tape strip sections attached to bottom of each platform, which, upon depression anywhere along the length, will instantly stop the lift from lowering or raising. For use as an emergency stop for personnel in lift area, or as a safety lowering device to prevent lowering of lift on other equipment.

2.

Tape switches can be mounted on the bottom of the platforms towards the inside of the lift, towards outside of lift, or both, as requested.

3.

Each safety tape switch section shall consist of a switch tape encased in a rubber guard, capable of withstanding a 1” depression, but activated with as little as 1 lb of force.

4.

Track safety tape switch shall be safety yellow.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

14999 - 8

PANTOGRAPH LIFT

08/07/2013

PART 5.4 TD-1000-P COUNTER-BALANCE TIRE DOLLY (OPTIONAL)

1.

The TD-1000-P tire dolly is designed for the removal and installation of single, tandem, and duplex tires and wheels which are mounted on trucks that are supported above ground level (i.e. raised off the wheels by a jacking beam).

2.

The TD-10 00-P tire dolly is designed for the removal and installation of single, tandem, and duplex tires and wheels which are mounted on trucks that are supported above ground level (i.e. raised off the wheels by a jacking beam).

3.

The tire dolly capacity shall be 1000 lbs minimum.

4.

The tire dolly shall come equipped with a hand winch rated 1,500 lbs for raising and lowering.

5.

The tire dolly shall have an open-carriage design for much easier access to lug nuts and visibility for alignment of bolt pattern to wheels.

6.

Heavy duty lift arms made with UHMW rollers shall allow easy rotation of wheels for alignment with bolt patter.

7.

A hand crank s hall be provided to tilt the arms for ease of alignment, providing a -2 degree to +15 degree fork tilt range.

8.

A safety chain shall be provided to secure tires and wheels to dolly.

9.

Dolly shall be e quipped with two (2) 8” diameter front mounted ball bearing casters, and two (2) 8” diameter rear mounted ball bearing swivel casters for maneuverability. The swivel caster wheels shall include locking mechanisms which can prevent the dolly from moving.

10.

The dolly fork rollers shall range in height from 2” minimum to 38” inches at maximum height.

11.

The side to side adjustment shall be 2” minimum, to ease alignment of rim’s lug holes with wheel.

12.

The fork rollers shall be 25” long to accommodate wide tires.

13.

Overall dimensions of folly shall be 83 ½” long, 51 ½” wide, 84 ½” high.


1.

The oil drain pan is designed to fit between platforms and slide throughout the full platform length, assisting in catching and holding drained fluids from lifted vehicles.

2.

Oil Drain Pan Capacity: 27.8 gallons maximum to brim of pan.

3.

(1) Rectangular Pan: Constructed of 12 gauge thick ASTM A-36 sheet steel with box dimensions of 42” long x 18” long x 8 1/2” deep. (2) Steel handles for

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

14999 - 9

PANTOGRAPH LIFT

08/07/2013

ease of rolling pan along inside lengths of tracks. Drainage located at bottom of pan, controlled by (1) 1” NPT brass ball valve.

4.

(1) Pan c over: Framing consisting of 2” x 2” x 1/4” thick ASTM A-36 steel angle. Cover consisting of 3/4-#9 expanded metal, and designed to allow liquid (oil) to enter pan and catching small parts greater than the size of a 5/8” diameter sphere. Cover dimensions: 19” x 43”.

5.

Wheel assemblies: Wheels constructed of AISI C-1045 Chrome rod and rimmed to capture flat rails that run along inside of each track. Axles made of

3/4” diameter ASTM A-311 class B steel round stock. Adjustment of wheel centers made by adjusting set screws in axle retaining sleeves.


1.

Maximum capacity of table 2,000 lbs.

2.

This lift table handles power train components like engines and their transmissions, engines with transaxle assemblies, rear ends and large electric vehicle batteries. It will also serve as a work table where components can be lowered to a convenient work height for repairs.

3.

Dimensions: a.

Height fully lowered: 31 inches b.

Height fully raised: 80 ½ inches c.

Table Width: 19 inches d.

Table Length: 36 inches e.

Overall Dimensions: 31” W x 56”L x 34 1/2H

4.

Table comes equipped with (4) 8 inch diameter swivel casters for easy maneuverability. Front wheels can be locked in position for steering. Rear wheels can be locked to prevent the lift from rolling.

5.

Tables comes equipped with an air/hydraulic foot pump with a metered valve for safely lowering load.

6.

Five foot extension hose with quick disconnect fittings stores in the lift base.

The foot pump can be removed from its holder and hydraulic hose quickly and easily extended using the extension hose. This provides hands free operation of the pump anywhere around the lift table’s perimeter.

7.

Scissor lift table design provides easy 360 degree access to any component.

8.

Two heavy duty ratchet tie-downs are included to safely secure the load on the lift table.

9.

Twin threaded rods with ¾ inch hex heads can be adjusted with common ratchet or hex driver, to adjust table tilt angle +/- 15 degrees, from front to back, or from side to side.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

14999 - 10

PANTOGRAPH LIFT

08/07/2013

PART 6.0 QUALIFICATION BIDDERS

1.

This bid will be awarded only to a responsible bidder, qualified to provide the work specified. The bidder will submit the following information with their proposal.

2.

List 3 references of jobs of equal value with the same specified equipment.

Company Name Contact Phone # file: 36-28-F.doc rev: 1-5-2011

All lift options must be compatible with base model lift. If not, then entire lift is not

ALI/ETL certified. Each proposal shall contain a list of certified options from ETL testing labs.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

14999 - 11

PANTOGRAPH LIFT

08/07/2013

SECTION 230513

MOTORS AND CONTROLLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Furnish and install electric motors required for equipment furnished under this

Division.

B. Work Included:

1. Motors factory mounted on equipment.

2. Motor controllers provided as an integral part of a piece of equipment.

3. Motor controllers will be furnished and installed under Division 16 unless motor controller is integral part of piece of equipment and/or specifically required to be furnished under this Division.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. NEMA ICS-2 – Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Include product data on motor starters and combination motor starters, relays, pilot devices and switching and overcurrent protective devices. Include trip ratings, size and UL listing.

B.

C.

Where similar items of equipment are utilized, include separate data sheet for each item, individually identified as to function.

Provide operation and maintenance manual


A. Provide motor starters under this division by same manufacturer where possible.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

230513 - 1


08/07/2013

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Motors

B.

1. Century/Gould.

2. General Electric.

3. Louis-Allis.

4. Reliance.

Motor Starters

1. Allen-Bradley.

2. General Electric.

3. Square D.

4. Westinghouse.

2.2 MOTORS

A. Provide motor voltages as indicated.

B.

C.

Unless otherwise specified, provide motors that are single speed, 1750 rpm with standard drip-proof enclosure.

Provide motors exposed to the weather that are totally enclosed fan-cooled or totally enclosed air-over types.

D.

E.

F.

G.

H.

I.

J.

Provide all three-phase motors with at least 1.15 service factor. Provide motors in explosion-proof applications with a service factor of 1.00, Class B insulation and specifically selected for the application.

Select motors to operate at design conditions without exceeding nameplate ratings if 1.00 service factor is assumed. Derate as required for elevations.

Provide motors with sealed or field-lubricated type ball bearings unless otherwise noted. Provide grease fittings for field-lubricated motors.

Provide motors with copper windings.

Select motors for low starting current, designed for continuous duty to provide the running torque and pull-in torque required to send the load.

Select all motors for quiet operation. Provide TEFC Gould E+ energy efficient design for all motors 5 hp and above.

Provide capacitor start type single-phase motors with starting, pull-in and running characteristics to match the load. Limit temperature rise to 60 degrees C.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

230513 - 2


08/07/2013

K. Refer to various sections of this Division for special requirements for specific items of equipment requiring motors. Select motors for variable speed operation

(i.e., for handling units) specifically for quiet operation.

2.3 MOTOR STARTERS

A. Manual Motor Starters

1. Fractional Horsepower Manual Starter: NEMA ICS 2; AC general-purpose

Class A manually operated, full-voltage controller for fractional horsepower induction motors, with thermal overload unit, pilot light and toggle operator.

2. Motor Starting Switch: NEMA ICS 2; AC general-purpose, Class a, manually operated, full-voltage controller for fractional horsepower induction motors, without thermal overload unit, red pilot light, NO auxiliary contact, and toggle operator.

3. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6; Type 1.

B. Magnetic Motor Starters

1. Magnetic Motor Starters: NEMA ICS 2: AC general-purpose, Class A magnetic controller for induction motors rated in horsepower as indicated.

2. Provide accessible terminals for wiring directly from the front of the starter.

3. Contacts: Provide silver, cadmium oxide alloy, double break, non-welding contacts which will not require filing, dressing or cleaning throughout the life of the control equipment.

4. Provide starter types as scheduled: a. Full Voltage Starting: Non-reversing type. b. Two Speed Starting: Two speed, two winding, variable torque type.

Include integral time delay transition between FAST and SLOW speeds.

5. Coils: Pressure molded, 120 volts, 60 hertz. Provide integral control transformer.

6. Overload Relay: NEMA ICs 2; bimetal overload relays in all three phases for three-phase full voltage starters, in underground phases for single-phase full voltage starters and in all six legs for two-speed full voltage starters.

Provide overload relays of the hand reset trip-free variety so that blocking in the reset position will not prevent the motor controller from dropping out if the motor is overloaded. Capability to field convert overload relays from hand to automatic reset is unacceptable.

7. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6; Type 1.

8. Auxiliary Contacts: Provide each starter with the required auxiliary contacts for the control functions indicated and required, including the holding interlock and pilot light interlocks, plus two additional contacts, field convertible to normally open or normally closed, NEMA ICS 2 controls.

Provide capability to add auxiliary contacts without removing existing wiring or removing the controller from its enclosure.

9. Push Buttons: NEMA ICS 2; START/STOP or HAND/OFF/AUTO in front cover as required by temperature controls.

10. Indicating Lights: NEMA ICS 2; RUN; red pilot light (push to test type) in front cover. Operate pilot lights from separate interlock not placed across the holding coil.

11. Control Power Transformers: Provide integral 120-volt secondary control transformer with both primary and secondary control power fuses.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

230513 - 3


08/07/2013

C. Combination Motor Starter

1. Combine starter with disconnect in common enclosure as scheduled. a. Molded Case Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1; circuit breakers with integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. b. Motor Circuit Protector: NEMA AB 1; circuit breakers with integral instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole.

2. Provide combination starters with an IER of at least 22,000 A (RMS).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install motor control equipment in accordance with manufacturers’ instructions.

B.

C.

D.

Select and install heater elements in motor starters to match installed motor characteristics.

Motor Data: Provide neatly typed label inside each motor starter enclosure door identifying motor served, nameplate horsepower, full load amperes, code letter, service factor and voltage/phase rating. Provide phenolic nameplate on cover exterior to indicate motor served.

Mount in accessible location to allow sufficient room for maintenance on itself and adjacent items.


RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

230513 - 4


08/07/2013

SECTION 230529

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Supports, anchors and sleeves applicable to mechanical systems, including:

1. Pipe, duct, and equipment hangers, supports, and associated anchors.

2. Equipment bases and supports.

3. Sleeves and seals.

4. Flashing and sealing equipment and pipe stacks.

B. WORK FURNISHED BUT INSTALLED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS

C. Provide hanger and support inserts and sleeves and coordinate placement into formwork.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM A 193 – Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature

Service.

B. ASTM B 633 – Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel.

C. CID A-A-1923 – Shield, Expansion (Lag, Machine and Externally Threaded Wedge Bolt

Anchors).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch: Provide malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring.

B. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook.

C. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.

D. Copper Pipe Support and Hangers: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.

E. Shield for Insulated Piping 2 Inches and Smaller: 18 gage galvanized steel shield over insulation in 180-degree segments, minimum 12 inches long at pipe support.

F. Shields for Vertical Copper Pipe Risers: Sheet lead.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

230529 - 1


08/07/2013

2.2 HANGER RODS

A. Steel, threaded both ends, threaded one end or continuous threaded.

2.3 INSERTS

A. Provide malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods.

2.4 FLASHING

A. Metal Flashing: 26 gage galvanized steel.

B. Lead Flashing: 5 pounds per square foot sheet lead for waterproofing; 1 pound per square foot sheet lead for soundproofing.

C. Flexible Flashing: 47 mil thick sheet butyl; compatible with roofing.

D. Caps: Steel, 22 gage minimum; use 16 gage at fire resistant elements.

2.5 EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS

A. Provide prefabricated curbs for roof-mounted equipment with the equipment.

2.6 SLEEVES

A. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Floors: Form with 16 gage galvanized steel.

B. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Above Grade: Form with 18 gage galvanized steel.

C. Sleeves for Pipes Through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls, and

Fireproofing: Provide prefabricated fire rated sleeves including seals, UL listed; or provide Schedule 40 galvanized steel, sized for minimum 1 inch space between sleeve and carrier pipe.

D. Sleeves for Pipes Through Floor Supporting Riser Piping: Standard weight galvanized steel pipe.

E. Sleeves for Pipes Through Roof: Standard weight galvanized steel pipe.

F. Sleeves for Round Ductwork: Form with galvanized steel.

G. Sleeves for Rectangular Ductwork: Form with galvanized steel or wood.

H. Provide fire-stop compound at all penetrations of floor slabs or firewalls such that fire rating integrity of barrier is not lessened.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

230529 - 2


08/07/2013

I. Caulk: Caulk all sleeves water and airtight.

J. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction.

Provide for continuous insulation wrapping. Provide pipe sleeves one size larger than the pipe it serves, including insulation, except where "Link Seal" casing seals are used.

2.7 FINISHES

A. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.

B. Provide corrosion resistant hangers and supports for piping and ductwork in corrosive atmosphere.

2.8 ANCHOR BOLTS

A. Provide galvanized anchor bolts for equipment placed on concrete pads or on concrete slabs, of size and number recommended by manufacturer of equipment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Support horizontal piping per Uniform Mechanical Code.

B. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2-inch space between finished covering and adjacent work.

C. Place a hanger within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.

D. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment.

E. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers.

F. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.

G. Provide corrosion resistant hangers for piping hangers in corrosive areas. Provide hanger rods, bolts, nuts, and metal parts coated with same material as hangers.

3.2 INSERTS

A. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork.

B. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

230529 - 3


08/07/2013

C. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches.

D. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, provide inserts flush with slab surface.

E. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide thru-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut recessed into and grouted flush with slab.

3.3 FLASHING

A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counterflashing where sleeves, piping and ductwork penetrate weather or waterproofed walls, floors, and roofs.

B. Provide acoustical lead flashing around ducts and pipes penetrating equipment rooms, installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for sound control.

C. Flexible sheet flash and counterflash curbs for mechanical equipment on roof with sheet metal; seal watertight.

3.4 EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS

A. Provide templates, anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment.

B. Construct support of steel members. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure.

C. Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration isolation components are installed.

D. Provide curbs of 4 inches minimum height above roofing surface for installation of condensing units on roof. For RTU and ECU units, install on existing supporting structure.

3.5 SLEEVES

A. Provide sleeves for all pipe penetrations through walls, roof or slab above grade.

B. Set sleeves in position in formwork. Provide reinforcing around sleeves.

C. Extend sleeves through floors 2 inches above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves full depth and provide floor plate.

D. Where piping or ductwork penetrates floor, ceiling or wall, close off space between pipe or duct and adjacent work with fire stopping insulation and seal airtight. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration. When penetration is through a fire rated floor or wall, provide fire safing insulation so that the assembly when complete is UL listed and equals the fire rating of construction penetrated by the sleeve.

E. Install chrome plated steel escutcheons at finished surfaces.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

230529 - 4


08/07/2013

F. Neatly cut holes in existing walls, floors and roofs for placement of sleeves. Place sleeve and grout, and caulk annular space to provide finished appearance.

G. Install pipe in sleeve so that neither the pipe nor its insulation touches the sleeve at any point.

H. Seal space between pipe and sleeve watertight for all sleeves penetrating the roof.

3.6 ANCHOR BOLTS

A. Locate position of anchor bolts by means of suitable templates.

B. When equipment is placed on vibration isolators, secure equipment to the isolator and the isolator to the floor, pad or support as recommended by the vibration isolator manufacturer.

3.7 INSULATION SHIELDS

A. Provide insulation shields at every hanger support.

B. Provide shields of the proper length to distribute weight evenly and to prevent sagging or indentation of insulation at hanger.

C. Install shield so that hanger is placed at the center of the shield.


RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

230529 - 5


08/07/2013

SECTION 230548

VIBRATION ISOLATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Vibration isolators for rotary, dynamic, or reciprocating equipment or components; include:

1. Vibration isolation.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASHRAE - Guide to Average Noise Criteria Curves.

1.3

A.

SUBMITTALS

B. Indicate isolation base dimensions.

C. Indicate vibration isolator locations, with static and dynamic load.

D. Include calculations required to certify compliance with specified requirements.

E. Submit manufacturer's certificate that isolators are properly installed and properly adjusted to meet or exceed specified requirements.


A. Maintain ASHRAE criteria for average noise criteria curves for all equipment at full load condition.

B. Provide vibration isolation devices, including auxiliary steel bases and pouring forms, from a single manufacturer or supplier who will be responsible for complete coordination of all phases of this work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Amber-Booth Company.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

230548 - 1

VIBRATION ISOLATION

08/07/2013

B. Korfund Dynamics Corporation.

C. Mason Industries.

2.2 ISOLATION BASES

A. Type A: Integral structural steel fan and motor base with motor slide rails.

B. Type B: Slung structural steel base with gussetted brackets.

C. Type C: Reinforced 3,000 pounds per square inch concrete base set in full depth perimeter structural steel channel frame, with gussetted brackets and anchor bolts.

D. Type D: Reinforced 3,000 pounds per square inch concrete base with chamfered edges without channel frame.

2.3 VIBRATION ISOLATORS

A. Type 1: Closed spring mount with top and bottom housing separated with neoprene rubber stabilizers.

B. Type 2: Open spring mount with stiff springs (horizontal stiffness equal to vertical stiffness).

C. Type 3: Open spring mount with stiff springs, heavy mounting frame, and limit stop.

D. Type 4: Closed spring hanger with acoustic washer.

E. Type 5: Closed spring hanger with 1 inch thick acoustic isolator.

F. Type 6: Rubber waffle pads, 30 durometer, minimum 1/2-inch thick, maximum loading

40 pounds per square inch. Use neoprene in oily or exterior locations.

G. Type 7: 1/2-inch thick rubber waffle pads bonded each side of 1/4-inch thick steel plate.

H. Type 8: Type BRD-1 rubber-in-shear isolators. Size isolator for 0.35-inch deflection.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Provide pairs of neoprene side snubbers or restraining springs where side torque or thrust may develop.

B. Color code spring mounts.

C. Select springs to operate at two-thirds maximum compression strain, with 1/4-inch ribbed neoprene pads.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

230548 - 2

VIBRATION ISOLATION

08/07/2013

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install vibration isolators for motor driven equipment.

B. Set steel bases for 1-inch clearance between housekeeping pad and base. Set concrete inertia bases for 2-inch clearance. Adjust equipment level.

C. Provide spring isolators on piping connected to isolated equipment as follows: up to

4-inch diameter, first three points of support; five to 8-inch diameter, first four points of support; 10-inch diameter and over, first six points of support. Static deflection of first point to be twice deflection of isolated equipment.

D. Provide minimum of four hangers for each fan coil unit and VAV box. Provide isolators for each hanger.

3.2 SCHEDULE

Isolated Equipment Base Type Isolator Type

Air Handling Units

Pumps

Piping

Ductwork

F B

B

C & D

1

5

1 or 3

4

N/A

Fan Coil Units 8

*

Internal isolated units do not require external spring isolator. Mount directly to housekeeping pad.


RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

230548 - 3

VIBRATION ISOLATION

08/07/2013

SECTION 230553

MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Materials for identification of mechanical products installed under Division 23.


A. Section 09911 – Exterior Painting.

B. Section 09912 – Interior Painting.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ANSI A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.

B. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Craftsmark.

B. Markem Corporation.

C. Seton Name Plate Company.

D. W. H. Brady Company.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

230553 - 1


08/07/2013

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Color: Meet requirements of ANSI A13.1, unless specified otherwise.

B. Plastic Nameplates: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved white letters on a black background; minimum size 3 inches long and 1 inch high. Minimum lettering height for numbers and names is 1/4-inch and other data is 1/8-inch.

C. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter with smooth edges.

D. Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters 2-1/2 inch high for ductwork and equipment.

E. Stencil Paint: Semi-gloss, high build epoxy esther or alkyd paint.

F. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and fluid being conveyed.

G. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Plastic Nameplates: Secure nameplates to equipment fronts using corrosive resistant screws and rivets. Install nameplates parallel to equipment lines.

B. Metal Tags: Install with corrosive-resistant chain and "j-hook."

C. Stencil Painting: Apply single coat sufficient to cover background completely with minimum 4 mils dry film thickness.

D. Plastic Pipe Markers: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

E. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Install completely around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

F. Underground Plastic Pipe Markers: Install 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly above buried pipe.

G. Equipment:

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

230553 - 2


08/07/2013

1. Identify mechanical equipment scheduled on Drawings with nameplates, except for air devices, sprinkler heads, plumbing fixtures, and plumbing shock absorbers.

2. Identify name, number, function, capacity, and other pertinent information of air handling units, pumps, heat transfer equipment, and tanks, with plastic nameplates.

H. Controls: Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates.

I. Valves: Identify valves in main and branch piping with metal tags.

J. Piping: Paint exposed piping in colors to meet ANSI standards. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers or plastic tape pipe markers. Identify service, flow direction and pressure. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping.

Locate identification not to exceed 10 feet on straight runs, including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and tee at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure and at each obstruction. Provide a flow arrow at each identification marker.

K. Ductwork: Identify ductwork with stenciled painting. Identify as to air handling unit number, and area served. Locate identification at air handling unit, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure and at each obstruction.

L. Use identification of equipment on the "Record Drawings" for nameplate designations.

M. Attach identification for items such as special switches, etc., located in finished areas, on or in the immediate vicinity of the item.

3.3 VALVE CHART AND SCHEDULE

A. Provide valve chart and schedule in aluminum frame with clear plastic shield. Install at location as directed.

3.4 COLOR CODE FOR MARKING PIPE

MATERIAL

Cold water (potable) WATER

BAND

Green

LETTERS AND

ARROW

White

LEGEND

POTABLE

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

230553 - 3


08/07/2013

COLOR CODE MARKING SIZES

OUTSIDE

DIAMETER OF PIPE

COVERING

(INCHES)

Less than 1-1/2

1-1/2 to 2-3/8

LENGTH OF

COLOR BAND

(INCHES)

8

8

ARROW

LENGTH BY

WIDTH

(INCHES)

8 x 2-1/4

8 x 2-1/4


SIZE OF LEGEND

LETTERS AND

NUMERALS

(INCHES)

1/2

3/4

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

230553 - 4


08/07/2013

SECTION 230593

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Testing, adjusting, and balancing of mechanical and plumbing systems.

B. The Contractor will select a qualified, independent technical balancing firm and/or laboratory to provide balancing, testing and adjusting services.

1. These services will be paid for by the Owner. Employment of an independent firm by the Owner in no way relieves the Contractor of the obligation to comply with the contract documents.

2. The responsibilities of the balancing firm and the services to be provided are included herein for information and guidance to the Contractor.

C. Perform the balancing, testing and adjusting services with Associated Air Balance

Council (AABC) certified personnel or employ a qualified, independent, technical balancing firm and/or laboratory.

D. Each section of Division 23 - Mechanical that has products or systems listed herein incorporate this section by reference and is incomplete without the required tests stated herein.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. AABC-MN-1- National Standards for Testing and Balancing, heating, Ventilating and

Air Conditioning System.

B. ASHRAE 111- Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and balancing of Building

Heating, Ventilating, Air-conditioning and Refrigeration Systems.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Test Reports:

1. Submit test report forms for review minimum 90 days prior to requesting final review by A/E.

2. Furnish six individually bound copies of test data. Neatly type and arrange data.

Include with the data the date tested, personnel present, weather conditions, nameplate record of test instrument and list all measurements taken, both prior to and after any corrections are made to the system. Record all failures and corrective action taken to remedy incorrect situation.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

230593 - 1


08/07/2013

3. A/E will retain one copy. Remaining copies will be returned for inclusion in operation and maintenance manuals.

4. Prior to commencing work, submit draft reports indicating adjusting, balancing and equipment data required.

5. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of project.

Provide final copies for A/E and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals.

B. Include a set of reduced drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets and indicating thermostat locations.

1.4 AIR SYSTEM BALANCING

A. Quality Assurance:

1. Company specializing in the testing, adjusting and balancing of systems specified with a minimum of three years of documented experience and a member in good standing, certified to perform services, of the AABC. Perform work under supervision of AABC Certified Test and Balance Engineer.

2. Perform total system balance in accordance with AABC National Standards for

Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems.

B. General:

1. Conform to the specifications which include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Air flows balanced to specified quantities. b. Temperature regulation verification by hourly readings for three consecutive eight-hour days. c. Three inspections within 90 days of occupancy for temperature verification. d. Opposite season adjustment of systems.

2. Complete the installation and operate all systems to ensure they are operating in accordance with the requirements of these specifications and drawings, and perform all other items as described hereinafter to assist the balancing firm in performing the balancing, testing and adjusting of the systems. The items include, but are not be limited to, the following: a. Air Distribution Systems:

1) Verify all existing air supply, return, exhaust, transfer grilles, registers, diffusers and terminal units installed are operational.

2) Blank and/or seal air handling systems, units and associates apparatus, such as heating and cooling coils, filter sections, access doors, etc., to eliminate excessive bypass or leakage of air.

3) All fans (supply, return, relief and exhaust) operating and verified for freedom from vibration, proper fan rotation and belt tension; correct overload heater elements; and clean filters installed. b. Automatic Controls:

1) Verify that all control components are installed in accordance with project requirements, including all electrical interlocks, damper sequence air resets, fire and freezestats. Stroke all controls through the full range. The testing described shall be performed by the

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

230593 - 2


08/07/2013

control contractor in the presence of TAB contractor and

Commissioning Agent prior to final TAB.

2) The controls contractor shall calibrate all controlling instruments and be positioned for design conditions as directed by the TAB contractor and Commissioning Agent prior to TAB. c. Cooperate with the balancing firm to provide all necessary data on the design and proper application of the system components and furnish all labor and material required to eliminate any deficiencies. List all motors, nameplate data and size of overload heater installed. Record motor amperage during operation. d. The drawings and specifications indicate valves, dampers, sheaves, and miscellaneous adjustment devices required to obtain optimum operating conditions to verify that all adjustment devices are accessible and readily adjustable. e. Accurately record actual locations of balancing valves and rough setting.

C. Sequencing and Scheduling:

1. Sequence work to commence after completion of systems and prior to substantial completion of project.

2. Schedule and provide assistance in final adjustment and test of life safety, smoke evacuation and smoke control systems, with proper authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Submit reports on AABC National Standards for Total System Balance forms and include the following information:

1. Title Page: a. Company name. b. Company address. c. Company telephone number. d. Project name. e. Project location. f. Project A/E. g. Project Contractor. h. Project altitude.

2. Air Moving Equipment: a. Location. b. Manufacturer. c. Model. d. Air flow, specified and actual. e. Return air flow, specified and actual. f. Outside air flow, specified and actual. g. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual. h. Inlet pressure. i. Discharge pressure. j. Fan rotations per minute.

3. Exhaust Fan Data: a. Location.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

230593 - 3


08/07/2013

b. Manufacturer. c. Model. d. Air flow, specified and actual. e. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual. f. Inlet pressure. g. Discharge pressure. h. Fan rotations per minute.

4. Return Air/Outside Air Data: a. Identification/location. b. Design air flow. c. Actual air flow. d. Design return air flow. e. Actual return air flow. f. Design outside air flow. g. Actual outside air flow. h. Return air temperature. i. Outside air temperature. j. Required mixed air temperature. k. Actual mixed air temperature. l. Design outside/return air ratio. m. Actual outside/return air ratio.

5. Electric Motors: a. Manufacturer. b. HP/BHP. c. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load. d. Rotations per minute. e. Service factor. f. Starter size, rating, heater elements. g. Exercise starters through its entire operating sequence.

6. V-Belt Drive: a. Identification/location. b. Required driven rotations per minute. c. Driven sheave, diameter and rotations per minute. d. Belt, size and quantity. e. Motor sheave, diameter and rotations per minute. f. Center-to-center distance, maximum, minimum and actual.

7. Duct Traverse: a. System zone/branch. b. Duct size. c. Area. d. Design velocity. e. Design air flow. f. Test velocity. g. Test air flow. h. Duct static pressure. i. Air temperature. j. Air correction factor.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

230593 - 4


08/07/2013

8. Air Monitoring Station Data: a. Identification/location. b. System. c. Size. d. Area. e. Design velocity. f. Design air flow. g. Test velocity. h. Test air flow.

9. Air Distribution Test Sheet: a. Air terminal number. b. Room number/location. c. Terminal type. d. Terminal size. e. Area factor. f. Design velocity. g. Design air flow. h. Test (final) velocity. i. Test (final) air flow. j. Percent of design air flow.

10. Terminal Unit Data: a. Manufacturer. b. Type, constant, variable, single, dual duct. c. Identification/number. d. Location. e. Model. f. Size. g. Minimum static pressure. h. Minimum design air flow. i. Maximum static pressure. j. Maximum design air flow. k. Inlet static pressure.

11. Pump Data: a. Identification/number. b. Manufacturer. c. Size/model. d. Impeller. e. Service. f. Design flow rate, pressure drop, BHP. g. Actual flow rate, pressure drop, BHP. h. Discharge pressure. i. Suction pressure. j. Total operating head pressure. k. Shut off, discharge and suction pressure. l. Shut off, total head pressure.

12. Flow Measuring Station: a. Identification/station.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

230593 - 5


08/07/2013

b. Location. c. Size. d. Manufacturer. e. Model. f. Design flow rate. g. Design pressure drop. h. Actual/final pressure drop. i. Actual/final flow rate. j. Station calibrated setting.

13. Sound Level Report: a. Location. b. Octave bands - equipment off. c. Octave bands - equipment on.

14. Vibration Tests: a. Location of Points:

1) Fan bearing, drive end.

2) Fan bearing, opposite end.

3) Motor bearing, center (if applicable).

4) Motor bearing, drive end.

5) Motor bearing, opposite end.

6) Casing (bottom or top).

7) Casing (side).

8) Duct after flexible connection (discharge).

9) Duct after flexible connection (suction). b. Test Readings:

1) Horizontal, velocity and displacement.

2) Vertical, velocity and displacement.

3) Axial, velocity and displacement. c. Normally acceptable readings, velocity and acceleration. d. Unusual conditions at time of test. e. Vibration source (if non-complying).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

A. Not used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Furnish proposed test procedures, recording forms, list of personnel and test equipment for A/E review.

B. Follow recommended procedures for testing as published by test equipment manufacturer.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

230593 - 6


08/07/2013

C. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting and balancing operations. Make instruments available to A/E to facilitate spot checks during testing.

D. The TAB contractor shall review the drawings and identify any balancing devices that may be required prior to the system TAB. The device listing shall be provided to the general contractor to insure the devices are installed prior to starting the TAB.

3.2 AIR SYSTEM BALANCING

A. Before commencing work, verify that systems are complete and operable. Ensure the following:

1. Equipment is operable and in a safe and normal condition.

2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable.

3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment.

4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to final filters.

5. Duct systems are clean of debris.

6. Correct fan rotation.

7. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open.

8. Coil fins have been cleaned and combed.

9. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place.

10. Air outlets are installed and operable.

11. Duct system leakage has been minimized.

12. Hydronic systems have been flushed, filled and vented.

13. Correct pump rotation.

14. Proper strainer baskets are clean and in place.

15. Service and balance valves are open.

16. Report any defects or deficiencies noted during performance of services to A/E.

17. Promptly report abnormal conditions in mechanical systems or conditions which prevent system balance.

B. Installation Tolerances:

1. Adjust air handling systems to scheduled values plus or minus 5 percent for supply systems and plus or minus 10 percent for return and exhaust systems.

2. Adjust hydronic systems to plus or minus 10 percent of design conditions indicated.

C. Test Procedures:

1. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide design supply, return, and exhaust air quantities.

2. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of duct.

3. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.

4. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts and noise.

5. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extent that adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Control volume by internal duct devices such as dampers and splitters.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

230593 - 7


08/07/2013

6. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of sheaves. If the sheaves are not the proper size, coordinate with the manufacturer and installing contractor to provide and change the drives as required to achieve the proper air flow at the fan.

7. Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet or inlet.

8. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure drops, and total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters.

9. Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design conditions.

10. Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to check leakage.

11. Where modulating dampers are provided, take measurements and balance at extreme conditions. Balance variable volume systems at maximum air flow rate, full cooling, and at minimum air flow rate, full heating.

12. Measure building static pressure and adjust supply, return, and exhaust air systems to provide required relationship between each to maintain approximately

0.05 inches positive static pressure near the building entries.

13. Test run fan/motor combinations, volume dampers and controls. Check sequence of operation and air flow limits at factory prior to shipment and submit test reports.

14. Check that automatic flow controller is capable of maintaining air flow to within 5 percent of set point with inlet static pressure variations up to 2 inches.

15. Maximum Casing Leakage: 2 percent of design air flow at rated inlet static pressure.

16. Maximum Damper Leakage: 2 percent of design air flow at inlet static pressure.

17. Set volume with damper operator attached to assembly allowing modulation from

100 percent of design flow to 20 percent design flow. Set units with heating coils for minimum 35 percent design flow.

18. Provide record data that represents actually measured, or observed condition.

19. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops.

20. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption has been rectified.

21. Leave systems in proper working order, replace adjustable sheaves with permanent fixed position sheaves, replace belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings.

22. At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report.

Recheck points or areas as selected and witnessed by A/E.

23. Check and adjust systems for opposite season performance approximately six months after final acceptance and submit report.

3.3 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT

A. Air-Cooled Condensing Units/Packaged Air Conditioning Unit:

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

230593 - 8


08/07/2013

1. Provide initial charge of refrigerant and oil for each refrigeration system; replace losses of oil or refrigerant prior to end of guarantee period, and supply to Owner one complete charge of lubricating oil in addition to that placed in the system.

2. Charge the system with refrigerant that test the entire system for leaks after completion of installation. Repair any leaks and put the system into operation.

Test the system after repair of leaks to prove performance.

3. If initial start-up and testing takes place in winter and machines are to remain inoperative, shut the system down and start-up and repeat testing at the beginning of the first cooling season.

4. Provide cooling season start-up and winter season shutdown for first year of operation.


RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

230593 - 9


08/07/2013

SECTION 230800

COMMISSIONING OF HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL




Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes commissioning process requirements for HVAC&R systems, assemblies, and equipment.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements" for general commissioning process requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Commissioning Plan: A document that outlines the organization, schedule, allocation of resources, and documentation requirements of the commissioning process.

B. CxA: Commissioning Authority.

C. HVAC&R: Heating, Ventilating, Air Conditioning, and Refrigeration.

D. Systems, Subsystems, Equipment, and Components: Where these terms are used together or separately, they shall mean "as-built" systems, subsystems, equipment, and components.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Certificates of readiness.

B. Certificates of completion of installation, prestart, and startup activities.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

230800 - 1


08/07/2013

1.5 ALLOWANCES

A. Labor, instrumentation, tools, and equipment costs for technicians for the performance of commissioning testing are covered by the "Schedule of Allowances" Article in

Section 012100 "Allowances."

1.6 UNIT PRICES

A. Commissioning testing allowance may be adjusted up or down by the "List of Unit

Prices" Article in Section 012200 "Unit Prices" when actual man-hours are computed at the end of commissioning testing.

1.7 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Perform commissioning tests at the direction of the CxA.

B. Attend construction phase controls coordination meeting.

C. Attend testing, adjusting, and balancing review and coordination meeting.

D. Participate in HVAC&R systems, assemblies, equipment, and component maintenance orientation and inspection as directed by the CxA.

E. Provide information requested by the CxA for final commissioning documentation.

F. Provide measuring instruments and logging devices to record test data, and provide data acquisition equipment to record data for the complete range of testing for the required test period.

1.8 CxA'S RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Provide Project-specific construction checklists and commissioning process test procedures for actual HVAC&R systems, assemblies, equipment, and components to be furnished and installed as part of the construction contract.

B. Direct commissioning testing.

C. Verify testing, adjusting, and balancing of Work are complete.

D. Provide test data, inspection reports, and certificates in Systems Manual.

1.9 COMMISSIONING DOCUMENTATION

A. Provide the following information to the CxA for inclusion in the commissioning plan:

1. Plan for delivery and review of submittals, systems manuals, and other documents and reports.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

230800 - 2


08/07/2013

2. Identification of installed systems, assemblies, equipment, and components including design changes that occurred during the construction phase.

3. Process and schedule for completing construction checklists and manufacturer's prestart and startup checklists for HVAC&R systems, assemblies, equipment, and components to be verified and tested.

4. Certificate of completion certifying that installation, prestart checks, and startup procedures have been completed.

5. Certificate of readiness certifying that HVAC&R systems, subsystems, equipment, and associated controls are ready for testing.

6. Test and inspection reports and certificates.

7. Corrective action documents.

8. Verification of testing, adjusting, and balancing reports.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TESTING PREPARATION

A. Certify that HVAC&R systems, subsystems, and equipment have been installed, calibrated, and started and are operating according to the Contract Documents.

B. Certify that HVAC&R instrumentation and control systems have been completed and calibrated, that they are operating according to the Contract Documents, and that pretest set points have been recorded.

C. Certify that testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures have been completed and that testing, adjusting, and balancing reports have been submitted, discrepancies corrected, and corrective work approved.

D. Set systems, subsystems, and equipment into operating mode to be tested (e.g., normal shutdown, normal auto position, normal manual position, unoccupied cycle, emergency power, and alarm conditions).

E. Inspect and verify the position of each device and interlock identified on checklists.

F. Check safety cutouts, alarms, and interlocks with smoke control and life-safety systems during each mode of operation.

G. Testing Instrumentation: Install measuring instruments and logging devices to record test data as directed by the CxA.

3.2 Testing AND BALANCING VERIFICATION

A. Prior to performance of testing and balancing Work, provide copies of reports, sample forms, checklists, and certificates to the CxA.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

230800 - 3


08/07/2013

B. Notify the CxA at least 10 days in advance of testing and balancing Work, and provide access for the CxA to witness testing and balancing Work.

C. Provide technicians, instrumentation, and tools to verify testing and balancing of

HVAC&R systems at the direction of the CxA.

1. The CxA will notify testing and balancing Subcontractor 10 days in advance of the date of field verification. Notice will not include data points to be verified.

2. The testing and balancing Subcontractor shall use the same instruments (by model and serial number) that were used when original data were collected.

3. Failure of an item includes, other than sound, a deviation of more than 10 percent. Failure of more than 10 percent of selected items shall result in rejection of final testing, adjusting, and balancing report. For sound pressure readings, a deviation of 3 dB shall result in rejection of final testing. Variations in background noise must be considered.

4. Remedy the deficiency and notify the CxA so verification of failed portions can be performed.

3.3 GENERAL TESTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide technicians, instrumentation, and tools to perform commissioning test at the direction of the CxA.

B. Scope of HVAC&R testing shall include entire HVAC&R installation, from central equipment for heat generation and refrigeration through distribution systems to each conditioned space. Testing shall include measuring capacities and effectiveness of operational and control functions.

C. Test all operating modes, interlocks, control responses, and responses to abnormal or emergency conditions, and verify proper response of building automation system controllers and sensors.

D. The CxA along with the HVAC&R Contractor, testing and balancing Subcontractor, and

HVAC&R Instrumentation and Control Subcontractor shall prepare detailed testing plans, procedures, and checklists for HVAC&R systems, subsystems, and equipment.

E. Tests will be performed using design conditions whenever possible.

F. Simulated conditions may need to be imposed using an artificial load when it is not practical to test under design conditions. Before simulating conditions, calibrate testing instruments. Provide equipment to simulate loads. Set simulated conditions as directed by the CxA and document simulated conditions and methods of simulation. After tests, return settings to normal operating conditions.

G. The CxA may direct that set points be altered when simulating conditions is not practical.

H. The CxA may direct that sensor values be altered with a signal generator when design or simulating conditions and altering set points are not practical.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

230800 - 4


08/07/2013

I. If tests cannot be completed because of a deficiency outside the scope of the HVAC&R system, document the deficiency and report it to the Owner. After deficiencies are resolved, reschedule tests.

J. If the testing plan indicates specific seasonal testing, complete appropriate initial performance tests and documentation and schedule seasonal tests.

3.4 HVAC&R systems, subsystems, and equipment Testing Procedures

A. Energy Supply System Testing: Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to test performance of gas system and equipment at the direction of the

CxA. The CxA shall determine the sequence of testing and testing procedures for each equipment item and pipe section to be tested.

B. Refrigeration System Testing: Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to test performance of refrigerant compressors and condensers, and other refrigeration systems. The CxA shall determine the sequence of testing and testing procedures for each equipment item and pipe section to be tested.

C. HVAC&R Distribution System Testing: Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to test performance of air distribution systems; special exhaust; and other distribution systems, including HVAC&R terminal equipment and unitary equipment.

D. Vibration and Sound Tests: Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to test performance of vibration isolation and seismic controls.

E. Refer to mechanical drawings for HVAC systems to be commissioned.


RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

230800 - 5


08/07/2013

SECTION 237413

DIRECT EVAPORATIVE COOLING SECTIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED: (ECU-1P, ECU-2P, ECU-3P, ECU-4P and ECU-10F)

A. Packaged custom air handling units.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. AFBMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigues Life for Ball Bearings

B. AFBMA 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings

C. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook

D. ANSI/AMCA 210-07 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Certificated

Aerodynamic Performance Rating

E. ANSI/AMCA 300-08 – Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans

F. AMCA 301 - Method of Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data

G. ANSIAMCA Standard 500-L-12-Test Methods of Louvers for Rating

H. ANSIAMCA Standard 500-D-12-Test Methods of Louvers for Rating

I. ARI 430 - Central Station Air Handling Units

J. ARI 435 - Application of Central Station Air Handling Units

K. NEMA MG1 - Motors and Generators

L. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code

M. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible

N. UL 900 - Test Performance of Air Filter Units

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of General Conditions and Division 1 as applicable.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

237413 - 1

DIRECT EVAPORATIVE COOLERS

08/07/2013

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly, unit dimensions, weight loading, required clearances, construction details, field connection details, electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

C. Product Data:

1. Provide literature, which indicates dimensions, weights, capacities, ratings, fan performance, gauges and finishes of materials, electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

2. Provide data on filter media, filter performance data, filter assembly, and filter frames.

3. Provide fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted.

4. Submit sound power level data for fan unit outlet, inlet and casing radiated at rated capacity and specified pressure.

5. Submit electrical requirements for power supply including wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring, clearly indicating factory installed and field installed wiring.

6. Submit performance and vibration test results of the fan for review prior to any air handling unit shipment to the jobsite.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data

1. Submit under provisions of General Conditions and Division 1 as applicable.

2. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for lubrication, filter replacement, motor and drive replacement, spare parts lists and wiring diagrams.

3. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions.

1.4 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Energy Labs equipment is the basis of the design on this project. The contractor shall base his bid on Energy Labs and, at his option, may provide line item additive or deductive alternates for alternate brand items set out below.

B. Alternate pricing shall include any contractor required costs of architectural, mechanical, structural, acoustical, seismic, electrical changes required to match the performance, fit and characteristics of the base bid equipment. An alternate price does not imply an alternate manufacturer’s standard construction is acceptable.

Deviations from the base bid specification shall be noted with particularity at the time of bid.

Custom Air Handlers – Base Bid - Energy Labs $ ______________

Alternate:

Manufacturer # 1

Manufacturer # 2

Manufacturer # 3

Add/Deduct

Add/Deduct

Add/Deduct

$ ______________

$ ______________

$ ______________

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

237413 - 2


08/07/2013

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum ten (10) years documented experience, which issues complete catalog data on total product.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish under provisions of General Conditions and Division 1 as applicable.

B. Provide one (1) set of fan belts and filters for each unit.


A. Conform to all information documented in approved submittal package and construction notes.


A. Store in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures and finish. All fans must be periodically rotated during storage period per manufacturer recommendation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AIR HANDLING UNIT

A. Unit Construction: The following sections describe in detail construction requirements for the unit base, cabinet, access doors, insulation and paint finish. Unit shall be built for outdoor installation.

B. Unit Base: Each unit shall be constructed on a base fabricated from ASTM A36 welded structural steel channel. Tubular or formed metal channel bases are not acceptable. Channel bases shall be sized as a function of air handling length as follows:

A.H. UNIT LENGTH MINIMUM CHANNEL SIZE

UP to 10

11’ to 20’

21’ to 30’

41’ to 50’

4” x 1-5/8”

6” x 2”

8” x 2-1/2”

12” x 3”

(5.4lbs/Lin.Ft.)

(8.2lbs/Lin.Ft.)

(11.5lbs/Lin.Ft.)

(20.7lbs/Lin.Ft.)

1. Heavy removable lifting lugs shall be added to the perimeter channel along the longest length of the unit. The unit floor shall be fabricated of 16-gauge hot rolled galvanized steel sheets.

The floor shall be supported by structural and minimum 12-gauge formed galvanized steel members. Max spacing of floor support shall be 24” centers. These formed members shall be welded to other

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

237413 - 3


08/07/2013

members for maximum strength. Floor skin shall be supplied with standing seams design and drive cleats to maintain water and airtight seal. The flooring shall be spot welded to the members below. No penetrations thru the floor skin shall be acceptable. Welds shall be below the floor and spaced no greater than

6” on center.

2. Fans, coils and major components shall be supported with structural steel members directly below these items.

C. Housing: The unit housing side and roof panels shall be constructed of 16-gauge galvanized steel, and shall utilize a standing seam modular panel type construction.

The panels shall be caulked and attached to each other, to the roof, and to the floor using nuts and bolts. Drive screw attachment is not acceptable. All panels shall be removable. All seams shall be sealed with an acrylic latex sealant prior to assembling the panels and after completion of the assembly. All floor openings shall have 12 gauge galvanized steel-framed flange around the entire perimeter of opening for duct connection. Minimum sound transmission loss (STL) through unit panels shall be as follows:

2” - 1½ PCF Insulation

125 250 500

25 29 36

1K

42

2K

47

4K

48

1. Hinged, double wall, insulated, man size access doors shall be provided in all sections requiring access for maintenance or service. The doorframe shall be one piece, 14 gauge galvanized steel welded with an integral gutter lip. Access doors shall be fully gasketed with a closed cell, replaceable neoprene gasket.

The gasketing material shall be installed to allow for easy removal and replacement. Access door must not leak more than 25 CFM @ 6” static pressure. Submit test results from independent testing laboratory for engineer review.

2. Door hinges and latches shall be easily adjustable, without the use of shims or special tools, to allow for a tight seal between the door and the doorframe as the gasketing material compresses over time. The door hinge design shall allow for field modification of door swing and doors shall be easily removable. Provide door detail drawing with submittal package.

3. Latches shall utilize phenolic knurled knobs. The latch assembly shall incorporate a built-in safety catch to release cabinet operating pressure prior to opening the door.

4. Doors entering into any section of the air handler that contains rotating fans shall be provided with zinc-plated nuts in lieu of knurled knobs. The nuts shall limit access to personnel with proper tools. Include a 10” x 10” wire reinforced glass view window in each fan access door.

5. A door switch shall be interlocked with fan starter to stop the fan before access door is opened.

6. Outdoor units shall have roofs with a minimum of ¼” per foot slope to insure no standing water.

D. Insulation and Interior Liner: Insulation shall be 2” thick, 1½ lbs per cubic foot density, neoprene coated fiberglass to cover all walls, ceilings and under floors. Insulation shall meet NFPA-90A smoke and flame spread requirements. There shall be no raw edges of insulation exposed to the air stream. Plenum fan sections shall have a 20 gauge perforated galvanized sheet metal liner covering all wall and ceiling surfaces in

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

237413 - 4


08/07/2013

the blast area of fan. The entire interior of all units shall be lined with minimum 20 gauge bright galvanized, (perforated) (solid) steel liner.

E. Drain Pans: Drain pans shall be constructed from 16-gauge, 316 stainless steel.

Galvanized steel drain pans are not acceptable. The drain pan shall be insulated with

2.0”, 1½ # density insulation to prevent condensation under the drain pan. Insulation shall be protected with an 18-gauge galvanized steel liner. Drain pans must be sized such that the entire coil, including headers and return bends, are inside the drain pan.

Drain pans must slope in two directions so there is no standing water in drain pan.

Stainless steel condensate connection shall be provided on one side of the unit. Coils shall be supported on 10 gauge stainless steel members to prevent immersion of the coil in condensate and allow for complete cleaning of drainpan beneath the coils.

F. Paint Finish: After final assembly the unit exterior shall be coated with an industrial grade, high solids, and polyurethane paint over an epoxy primer. In addition, all fan bases, springs and structural steel supports shall be coated with the same finish. The paint system shall meet ASTM B117 Salt spray test for a minimum of 5000 hours in a

5% solution.

2.2 INTERNAL COMPONENTS

A. Fan Assembly

1. Plenum (plug) fan assemblies shall be arrangement #1. Arrangement #3 plenum fans are not acceptable because they are less efficient and generate more noise.

The air handling unit manufacturer, for the purpose of sole source responsibility, shall manufacture all fan assemblies including fan wheels supplied for the air handlers. Fan performance shall be based on tests run in an AMCA certified laboratory and administered in accordance with AMCA Standard 210. Fan performance tests shall be taken with fans running inside the cabinet to include any affects from the unit cabinet and other internal components. Fans shall bear

AMCA seal for air and sound.

2. Plenum fans shall be configured so that both fan bearings are on the drive side of the wheel with the wheel over hung (Arrangement #1 for all belt drive and

Arrangement #4 for all direct drive fans). There shall be no obstructions (i.e., bearings or bearing supports, etc.,) at the inlet of the fan. Fan wheel shall be aluminum with aluminum extruded airfoil blades. Fan bearings shall have a minimum L10-200,000 Hr. operating life and be mounted on a structural steel channel or machined surface. On DWDI fans the structure supporting the bearing shall be fabricated from structural steel and be detachable to allow for removal of the fan wheel and shaft as one piece. The fan discharge shall be isolated from the cabinet by means of a neoprene-coated flexible connection.

Plenum fans shall be provided with spring-style thrust restraints.

3. Each fan shall be sized to perform as indicated on the equipment schedule. The wheel diameter shall not be less than that shown on the equipment schedule.

The fan shall be constructed to AMCA Standards for the Class Rating as indicated on the Equipment Schedule.

4. Provide grease fittings and extend lubrication lines to the motor side of the fan just inside the access door.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

237413 - 5


08/07/2013

B. Fan Base, Spring Isolation, and Support Framing: Mount fan and motor on an internal, fully welded, rigid steel base. Base shall be free-floating at all four corners on spring type isolators with earthquake restraints. The fan assembly shall be isolated from the cabinet by steel springs with minimum deflection of 2.0” or as indicated on schedules.

The spring isolators shall be mounted to structural steel members. All isolators shall be rated for zone 4 seismic requirements. The spring isolators shall be mounted on a waffle pad for vibration isolation.

C. Balancing: The fan shaft shall be sized not to exceed 75% of the first critical speed for maximum RPM of Class specified. The critical speed will refer to the top of the speed range of the fans’ AMCA class. The lateral static deflection shall not exceed 0.003” per foot of the length of the shaft. Fans shall be balanced to ISO standard G6.3. A copy of the above balance test data for this project showing calculations for deflection and critical speed of the shaft and wheel assembly shall be submitted to the engineer and a copy forwarded to the Owner.

D. Motors and Drive:

1. Furnish premium-efficiency open drip proof, (TEFC) NEMA frame, ball bearing type motors. Marathon “XRI”, Reliance “XE”, or Toshiba Premium Efficiency with grease lubricated bearings and alemite fittings are acceptable. The Horsepower values as shown on the schedule are minimum allowable.

2. The motor shall be mounted on an adjustable slide rail motor base with two adjusting bolts per side. The fan motors shall be factory wired to an external junction box with flexible conduit of adequate length so that it will not have any affect on the vibration isolation.

3. Provide V-belt type, cast-iron sheaves, and reinforced rubber belts. The belts shall be selected for 150% of the motor nameplate horsepower. Drives shall be

“Browning” or equal by “Woods.”

E. Filters

1. Filter sections shall be fabricated as part of the air-handling unit. Filters shall be arranged for upstream loading. Provide filter-holding frames to accommodate scheduled filters. Filter frames shall be 16 Ga. galvanized steel and shall be fully welded to reduce leakage of air through corners.

2. Factory install at each filter bank a Dwyer Magnehelic “Series 2000 ASF” pressure gauge complete with signal flags, static pressure tips, hardware and fittings. Enclose the gauge in a protective sheet metal box with a hinged inspection door. Paint to match unit.

F. Direct evaporative cooling section:

1. The evaporative cooling section shall employ a 12” thick media which is made from a cellulose fiberglass, impregnated with insoluble, anti-rot salts and rigidifying saturants. The media shall have a minimum of 123 square feet of evaporative surface per cubic foot. The media shall produce no water carry over at face velocities as high as 700 feet/minute and shall be non-clogging. The media shall be rated for water temperatures up to 130 deg.F and air temperatures up to 300 deg.F. The media shall meet NFPA-90A smoke and fire regulations.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

237413 - 6


08/07/2013

2. The evaporative cooling section shall also include a 1/2” FPT automatic water makeup valve, a 2” FPT drain connection, and end-suction pump. The pump shall operate at main incoming voltage, and shall include a low water cutoff which will de-energize the pump prior to water levels which may be low enough to damage the pump. The pump shall be rated for continuous duty. The low water cutoff shall also energize the pump when the water level returns to an acceptable level.

3. #304 stainless steel with all seams continuously welded to insure against water leaks, and shall be leak tested at the factory prior to shipping. All other metal parts in the evaporative cooling section shall be 16 gauge 304 stainless steel.

4. The evaporative cooling section sump shall be constructed of 16 gauge water distribution pipe shall be constructed of seamless copper. The distribution pipe shall be provided with clean out plugs at each end. Access plate to distribution pad and pipe shall be fastened with stainless steel bolts and wing nuts.

5. The pump shall be provided with #316 stainless steel perforated suction strainer.

The strainer area shall be a minimum of 2 square feet.

6. An access section with door shall be provided both on the downstream and upstream sides of the evaporative media. The access door shall be a minimum of 15” wide and shall be of the same construction as described above.

G. Electrical Requirements:

1. Provide single source power panels (SSPP’s) that are constructed according to

NEC regulations and carry a U.L.508 listing and label. The panel shall include a non-fused main disconnect switch covering all fans and pumps in each unit,

Motor Starters for constant volume units or VFD’s for variable volume units, and any necessary transformers, Hand–Off–Auto switches, relays and pilot lights for complete operation of the fans in the unit. The single source power panels shall be factory wired to all factory furnished devices such as motors and interlocks.

2. The air handling unit manufacturer, for the purpose of sole source responsibility, shall manufacture all electrical panel assemblies supplied for the air handlers.

The air handling unit manufacturer shall be a U.L. 508 listed panel shop.

3. The main control panel shall have access door(s) for direct access to the controls. The panel shall be NEMA type 3R (rainproof) and shall contain a single externally operated, non-fused disconnect, suitable for copper wire up to and including 3” conduit. The electrical contractor shall bring separate 460/3/60 power to the single source power panel.

4. All wiring shall be run in EMT conduit, (or flexible when connecting to a motor), raceways are not acceptable.

5. If the unit requires splits, junction boxes shall be furnished on each section to allow the electrical contractor to make final connections in the field. Wiring shall be clearly labeled to allow ease in final interconnections.

H. Furnaces: Provide a gas-fired outdoor, gravity vented furnace with a weatherproof cabinet and terminal cap for use with (natural) (propane) gas. The heat exchanger shall be (aluminized) (E-3 409 Stainless Steel) (321 Stainless Steel). Die-formed burners shall be constructed of (aluminized steel) (E-3 409 Stainless Steel) with flared ports, air shutters, and stainless steel inserts.

1. Unit controls shall include a 24-volt control transformer, (single stage) (two stage) (electronic modulation) gas control system with a regulated combination

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

237413 - 7


08/07/2013

redundant gas valve, intermittent spark pilot, and electronic flame supervision.

The unit shall include all required limit and safety controls. The furnace shall be

A.G.A. Certified and bear the A.G.A. label.

I. Air Flow Measuring Stations: Fans shall be supplied with a complete flow measuring system capable of supplying a 4 – 20mA. Output signal to the EMS system that is proportional to airflow.

1. The flow measuring station and a flow transmitter shall be factory mounted. The flow measuring station shall consist of pressure taps pick-ups located in the inlet cone of each fan. There shall be no obstruction created on the inlet of the fan by installation of flow measuring device. Flow measuring stations installed in the inlet of fan will obstruct the fan inlet and will decrease fan efficiency and increase sound power levels. Provide a gauge with CFM scale on external side of the fan sections, which indicates the fan volume.

2. The electronic flow transmitter shall be mounted on the exterior of the fan section. It shall be capable of receiving signals of total and static pressure from a flow element, of amplifying, extracting the square root, and scaling to produce a 4 - 20 mA or 0 - 5 VDC output signal linear and scaled to air volume or velocity.

The flow transmitter shall be capable of the following performance and application criteria.

3. Calibrated spans from 0 - 896 FPM, in eight flow range increments. Output signal 4 -20 mA or 0-5 VDC standard. Integral zeroing means 3-way zeroing valve with manual switch. Temperature effect ± 2.0% of full span from 40° to

120°F.

4. The transmitter shall not be damaged by over-pressurization up to 200 times greater than span, and shall be furnished with a factory calibrated span and integral zeroing means. The transmitter shall be housed in a NEMA 12 enclosure with external signal tubing, power, and output signal connections.

5. The electronic differential pressure transmitter shall be Setra Model 264 or equal.

J. Unit Mounted Controls:

1. All controls shall be factory mounted by the Air Handling Unit manufacturer.

These controls shall include all damper actuators, temperature sensors, pressure sensors, and airflow measuring sensors, filter switches, smoke and fire detectors as indicated on the control drawings.

2. Electric and electronic controls shall be wired to a terminal block in a sheet metal enclosure located at a common location mounted on the air-handling unit. All pressure sensing controls shall be piped to a common point on the unit with 1/4” compression fittings.

3. All controls shall be supplied by the temperature controls contractor and shipped to the Air Handling Unit Manufacturer for installation.

K. Unit piping: All necessary water piping specialties including strainers, shut-off valves, thermometers, pressure taps, air vents, etc. shall be included as indicated on the piping diagram. Control valve wiring (electric) or control tubing (pneumatic) shall be extended to a common point on the Air Handling Unit.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

237413 - 8


08/07/2013

L. Sound Power and Performance Certification:

1. The manufacturer shall perform actual sound test on one selected AHU in accordance with AMCA Standard 300-96. Reverberant Room Method for sound testing of fans, and AMCA Standard 210, Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for rating. The mechanical engineer shall select the test AHU after review of the submittal.

2. Air handling unit sound power data shall be submitted for review by Owner’s representative. Sound power data shall be given at the supply connection(s)

(outlet) and return connection(s) (inlet) in addition to radiated sound power from the cabinet. Raw fan sound power data shall be derived from tests done in accordance with AMCA Standard 300-96 . Data extrapolated from non-like fan sizes and types scheduled are not acceptable. Attenuation assumed for the cabinet configuration, type of insulation, opening locations and sizes, etc., shall be verified through actual test measurements. The mechanical engineer may, at his option, request copies of such tests.

3. If the AHU manufacturer is incapable of performing the AMCA Standard 300 sound test, substitute method shall be proposed for review by the mechanical engineer. The proposed substitute method shall clearly identify the measurement instrumentation, the test reference to a nationally known test standard and qualifications of personnel who will perform the test.

4. The mechanical and acoustics engineers shall be allowed to witness the sound test. The AHU manufacturer shall notify the mechanical engineer a minimum of ten (10) days prior to test as to the location and date of the sound test. The travel costs incurred by test witnesses shall be borne by the equipment manufacturer.

5. If the sound test indicates the AHU noise levels exceed levels of units specified, the Contractor shall take corrective measures to reduce the sound. Any modifications that are necessary to meet scheduled sound levels shall be applied to all AHU’s represented by the test unit. Test results shall be submitted to the

Owner’s Representative for approval prior to shipment of any equipment.

M. Air Performance Testing: T he manufacturer shall perform an air performance test on one selected unit in accordance to AMCA 210-85/ANSI 51-1985 “Standard for

Laboratory Measurement of Airflow”. Air handling unit air performance data shall be submitted for review by Owner’s representative. The mechanical engineer shall be allowed to witness the airflow test. The AHU manufacturer shall notify the mechanical engineer a minimum of ten (10) days prior to test as to the location and date of the test. The travel costs incurred by test witnesses shall be borne by the equipment manufacturer.

N. Air Leakage Testing:

1. Air handling unit leakage data shall be submitted for review by Owner’s representative. The mechanical engineer shall be allowed to witness the leakage test. The AHU manufacturer shall notify the mechanical engineer a minimum of ten (10) days prior to test as to the location and date of the test. The travel costs incurred by test witnesses shall be borne by the equipment manufacturer.

2. The manufacturer shall perform the leak test as follows: A U-Tube manometer shall be used to measure the static pressure exerted on the unit cabinet. The manometer must have graduations no larger than 0.2” (inches of water gauge).

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

237413 - 9


08/07/2013

A pressure blower that is capable of producing the required pressure without operating at a stall shall be used to perform the test. The pressurizing fan shall be attached to a flow metering station which shall measure the volume flow rate by pressure drop through calibrated nozzles. The test apparatus shall have a means of dampering such that the required pressure may be exerted without over-pressurizing the cabinet.

3. Procedure: The air-handling unit shall have all duct openings, damper, and louver openings sealed with plywood or sheet metal and caulked or taped. The static pressure tap shall be arranged with one leg open to atmosphere and one leg tapped to the cabinet interior. A static pressure load of 1.5 times the maximum calculated internal static pressure or 10” whichever is less, will be exerted on the cabinet. The leakage rate will be recorded at the flow measuring apparatus. The air density at which the test was performed will be determined.

The test results will be corrected to standard air. An AHU will be considered acceptable if it leaks at a rate of not more than one percent of the design volume.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings are lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation

3.2 INSTALLATION, START-UP AND WARRANTY

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Install in conformance with ARI 435.

C. Assemble high-pressure units by bolting sections together. Isolate fan section with flexible duct connections.

D. Warranty and Start-Up Service: Manufacturer shall provide factory start-up service for each air-handling unit. Manufacturer shall provide a one (1) year parts and labor warranty.


RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

237413 - 10


08/07/2013

PART 1 - GENERAL

SECTION 238106

PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS


A. Furnish and install roof mounted, self-contained units, with electric cooling, and gasfired heating and related controls; including:

1. Packaged rooftop unit.

2. Controls.

3. Remote panel.

4. Roof mounting frame and base.

5. Maintenance service.


A. Section 230548 – Vibration Isolation.

B. Section 230513 – Motors and Controllers.

C. Section 230553 – Mechanical Identification

D. Section 230593 – Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. NFPA 90A – Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems.

B. ARI 340/360 – Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air-Conditioning Equipment and

Heat Pump Equipment

C. ARI 270 – Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment.

D. ASHRAE 90.1-Energy Standard for Buildings except Low-rise Residential Buildings

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Include product data and schematic layouts showing condensing units, cooling coils, refrigerant piping and accessories required for complete system. Include complete pipe sizing data.

B. Include rated capacities, dimensions, weights, accessories, required clearances, electrical requirements, wiring diagrams and location and size of field connections.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

238106 - 1


08/07/2013

C. Include manufacturer’s installation instructions.

D. Provide operation and maintenance manual.

1.5 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Furnish complete service and maintenance of packaged rooftop units for one year from date of substantial completion.

B. Provide maintenance service with a two month interval as maximum time period between calls. Provide 24 hour emergency service on breakdowns and malfunctions.

C. Include maintenance items as outlined in manufacturer’s operating and maintenance data including minimum of six filter replacements, minimum of one fan belt replacement and controls checkout, adjustments and recalibrations.

D. Submit copy of service call work order or report and included description of work performed.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Provide two (2) sets of filters, one (1) set of belts.


A. Submit results of factory test in time of unit shipment.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Provide a five (5) year manufacturer’s material replacement warranty for the compressor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Trane Co.

B. Carrier

C. York.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

238106 - 2


08/07/2013

2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Provide roof mounted units complete with gas burner and electric refrigeration as scheduled.

B. Provide units which are self-contained, packaged, factory assembled and prewired consisting of insulated cabinet and frame, supply fan, heat exchanger and burner controls, air filters, refrigerant cooling coil and compressor, condenser coil and condenser fan.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Cabinet: Galvanized steel with baked enamel finish, access doors or removable access panels, with quick fasteners, screwdriver operated flush cam type of locking door handle type wit piano hinges. Provide structural members a minimum of 18 gauge with access doors or removable panels a minimum of 20 gauge.

B. Insulation: 1 inch thick neoprene coated glass fiber on surfaces where conditioned air is handled. Protect edges from erosion.

C. Heat Exchangers: Aluminized or stainless steel of welded construction.

D. Supply Fan: Forward curved centrifugal type, resiliently mounted with V-belt drive, adjustable variable pitch motor pulley and rubber isolated hinge mounted motor or direct drive. Isolate complete fan assembly.

E. Air Filters: 2 inch thick pleated media, nominal 30% efficiency.

F. Roof Mounting Frame: 14 inch high galvanized steel channel frame with gaskets and nailer strips.

2.4 BURNER

A. Gas Burner: Atmospheric type burner with adjustable combustion air supply, pressure regulator, gas valves, manual shutoff, intermittent spark or glow coil ignition, flame sensing device and automatic 100 percent shutoff pilot.

B. Gas Burner Safety Controls: Energize ignition, limit time for establishment of flame, prevent opening of gas valve until pilot flame is proven, stop gas flow on ignition failure, energize blower motor and after air flow proven and slight delivery, allow gas valve to open.

C. High Limit Control: Provide a temperature sensor with fixed stop at maximum permissible setting, which will de-energize the burner on excessive bonnet temperature, and energize the burner when temperature drops to lower safe value.

D. Supply Fan Control: Provide temperature sensor sensing bonnet temperatures and independent of burner controls or adjustable time delay relays with switch for continuous fan operation.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

238106 - 3


08/07/2013

2.5 EVAPORATOR COIL

A. Provide copper or aluminum tube and aluminum fin assembly with galvanized drain pan and connection.

B. Provide thermostatic expansion valves and alternate row circuiting for units 7 1/2 tons cooling capacity and larger.

2.6 COMPRESSOR

A. Provide the compressor which is hermetic or semi-hermetic, 3600 rpm maximum, resiliently mounted with positive lubrication, crankcase heater, high and low pressure safety controls, motor overload protection, suction and discharge service valves and gauge ports, and filter dryer.

B. Delay compressor start with five minute timed off circuit.

C. Provide outdoor thermostat which will energize compressor control circuit above 35 degrees F ambient.

D. Provide hot gas bypass or cycling compressors for capacity control.

2.7 CONDENSER

A. Provide the coil with copper or aluminum tube and aluminum fin assembly with subcooling rows.

B. Provide condenser fans which are direct drive propeller fans, resiliently mounted with fan guard, motor overload protection wired to operate with compressor.

C. Provide heat pressure control by refrigerant pressure switches cycling the condenser fans for unit operation down to 35 degrees F outdoor temperature.

2.8 SUPPLY/RETURN CASING

A. Dampers: Provide outside, return and relief dampers with damper operator and control package to automatically vary outside air quality.

B. Gaskets: Provide tight fitting dampers with edge gasket, maximum leakage 5 percent at 2 inches WC pressure differential.

C. Damper Operator: Provide 24 volt with gear train sealed in oil with spring return on units 7 1/2 tons cooling capacity and larger.

D. Damper Operator: Provide pneumatic piston or gear driven type with spring return.

E. Mixed Air Controls: Maintain selected supply air temperature and return dampers to minimum position on call for heating and above 57 degrees F ambient when ambient air enthalpy exceeds return air enthalpy.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

238106 - 4


08/07/2013

2.9 OPERATING CONTROLS – SINGLE ZONE UNITS

A. Operating controls shall be as indicated on the drawings and Section 15900.

2.10 OPERATING CONTROLS – VARIABLE VOLUME UNITS

A. Operating controls shall be as indicated on the drawings and Section 15900.

2.11 PERFORMANCE

A. Base performance on ARI 210 test conditions unless specified otherwise. Sound rating numbers are in accordance with ARI 270.

B. Rated heating and cooling capacities shall be as scheduled on the Drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that roof is ready to receive work and opening dimensions dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings.

B. Verify that proper supply is available.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Mount units on factory built roof mounting frame providing watertight enclosure to protect ductwork and utility services. Install roof mounting frame level.


A. Manufacturer’s Field Services: Provide initial startup and shutdown during first year of operation including routine servicing and checkout.


RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

238106 - 5


08/07/2013

SECTION 238126

SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes split-system cooling only air-conditioning and units consisting of separate evaporator-fan and compressor-condenser components.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Include performance data in terms of capacities, outlet velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements, and electrical characteristics.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Field quality-control reports.

B. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For split-system cooling only and heat pump airconditioning units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

238126 - 1

SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS

08/07/2013

1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Filters: Two sets for each indoor fan coil unit.

2. Gaskets: Two sets for each access door.

3. Fan Belts: Two sets for each indoor fan coil unit fan.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. ASHRAE Compliance:

1. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety

Standard for Refrigeration Systems."

2. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 4 -

"Outdoor Air Quality," Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment," Section 6 - "

Procedures," and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up."

C. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with actual equipment provided.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of split-system air-conditioning units that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: a. For Compressor: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. b. For Parts: One year from date of Substantial Completion. c. For Labor: One year from date of Substantial Completion.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

238126 - 2


08/07/2013

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Carrier

2. Trane

3. York

2.2 INDOOR UNITS

A. Evaporator-Fan Components, wall mounted (IU-1 thru IU-7 and IU-9), Ceiling suspended (IU-8):

1. Cabinet: Cabinet discharge and inlet grilles shall be attractively styled, highimpact polystyrene. Cabinet shall be fully insulated for improved thermal and acoustic performance.in color selected by Architect, and discharge drain pans with drain connection.

2. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins and thermal-expansion valve. Comply with ARI 206/110.

3. Fan: Direct drive, centrifugal.

4. Fan Motor: a. Motors shall be open drip-proof, permanent lubricated ball bearing with inherent overload protection. Fan motor shall be three-speed. b. Mount unit-mounted disconnect switches on interior of unit.

5. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

6. Condensate Drain Pans: a. Fabricated with two percent slope in at least two planes to collect condensate from cooling coils (including coil piping connections, coil headers, and return bends), and to direct water toward drain connection. b. ASHRAE compliance option in "Length" Subparagraph below may be required to comply with Project requirements or authorities having jurisdiction. Retain option in first subparagraph to comply with

LEED Prerequisite IEQ 1; otherwise, insert distance. c. Single-wall, stainless steel sheet. d. Drain Connection: Located at lowest point of pan and sized to prevent overflow. Terminate with threaded nipple on both ends of pan.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

238126 - 3


08/07/2013

1) Minimum Connection Size: NPS ¾ inch e. Pan-Top Surface Coating: Asphaltic waterproofing compound. f. Condensate drain pan shall have internal trap.

7. Air Filtration Section: a. Unit shall have filter track with factory supplied, cleanable filter.

8. Controls: a. Controls shall consist of a microprocessor-based control system which shall control space temperature, determine optimum fan speed, and run self-diagnostics; the temperature control range shall be from 62 degree F to 84 degree F. b. User interface with the unit shall be accomplished through the standard wireless control or a wired controller.

2.3 OUTDOOR UNITS (CU-1, 2, 3, 4, 5,6,7, 8 and HP-9)

A. Air-Cooled, Compressor-Condenser Components:

1. Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel in color selected by Architect, with removable panels for access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Provide brass service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing.

2. Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration isolation device. Compressor motor shall have thermal- and currentsensitive overload devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor. a. Compressor Type: Hermetic scroll or hermetic rotary b. Two-speed compressor motor with manual-reset high-pressure switch and automatic-reset low-pressure switch. c. Refrigerant Charge: R-410A d. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins and liquid subcooler. Comply with ARI 206/110.

3. Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor.

4. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection.

5. Low Ambient Kit: Permits operation down to -20 degree F.

6. Winter start control

7. Crankcase heater

8. Wind Baffles

9. Mounting Base: Polyethylene.

10. Heat-Pump Components: Reversing valve and low-temperature-air cutoff thermostat. (HP-9 only).

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Thermostat: Low voltage with subbase to control compressor and evaporator fan.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

238126 - 4


08/07/2013

B. Thermostat: Wireless infrared functioning to remotely control compressor and evaporator fan, with the following features:

1. Compressor time delay.

2. 24-hour time control of system stop and start.

3. Liquid-crystal display indicating temperature, set-point temperature, time setting, operating mode, and fan speed.

4. Fan-speed selection including auto setting.

C. Automatic-reset timer to prevent rapid cycling of compressor.

D. Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried, pressurized, and sealed; factory-insulated suction line with flared fittings at both ends.

E. Drain Hose: For condensate.

2.5 CAPACITIES AND CHARACTERISTICS

A. Cooling Capacity: See equipment schedules on drawings.

B. Heating Capacity: See equipment schedule on drawings.

C. Indoor Unit:

1. Electrical Characteristics: See equipment schedules on drawings.

2. Airflow: See equipment schedules on drawings

D. Outdoor Unit:

1. Type: Air cooled

2. Electrical Characteristics: See equipment schedule on drawings.

3. Sound-Pressure Level: 61 dBa.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install units level and plumb.

B. Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely fastened to building structure.

C. Install roof-mounted, compressor-condenser components on equipment supports specified in Section 077200 "Roof Accessories." Anchor units to supports with removable, cadmium-plated fasteners.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

238126 - 5


08/07/2013

D. Install and connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings.

Install tubing to allow access to unit.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.

3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.3 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain units.


RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

238126 - 6


08/07/2013

SECTION 260553

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Identification for raceways.

2. Identification of power and control cables.

3. Identification for conductors.

4. Underground-line warning tape.

5. Warning labels and signs.

6. Instruction signs.

7. Equipment identification labels.

8. Miscellaneous identification products.

9. Arc flash study and arc flash hazard warning labels.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.


A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and IEEE C2.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.

1.4 REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop

Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance

Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

260553 - 1

IDENTIFICATION OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

08/07/2013

C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

E. Equipment manufacturer shall provide arc flash study. Provide arc flash hazard warning labels on all electrical panels, switchboards, distribution boards and unit substation. These labels are intended to assist maintenance personnel and others in the selection of proper Personal Protective Equipment when working around exposed and energized conductors.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway size.

B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at More Than 600 V:

1. Black letters on an orange field.

2. Legend: "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch high letters on 20-inch centers.

C. Tape and Stencil for Raceways Carrying Circuits More Than 600 V: 4-inch wide black stripes on 10-inch centers diagonally over orange background that extends full length of raceway or duct and is 12 inches wide. Stop stripes at legends.

2.2 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size.

B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

2.3 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE

A. Tape:

1. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and locate underground electrical and communications utility lines.

2. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations.

3. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

260553 - 2


08/07/2013

B. Color and Printing:

1. Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5.

2. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE.

3. Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE,

COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE.

2.4 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS

A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated.

C. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:

1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD -

EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."

2.5 INSTRUCTION SIGNS

A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs up to 20 sq. inches and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes.

1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face.

2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.

3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment.

2.6 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.

2.7 CABLE TIES

A. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self-extinguishing, one piece, self-locking,

Type 6/6 nylon.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.

2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi.

3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F.

4. Color: Black except where used for color-coding.

B. UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight, self-extinguishing, one piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

260553 - 3


08/07/2013


2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi.


4. Color: Black.

C. Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self-extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, self-locking.


2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi.

3. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0.


5. Color: Black.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior).

B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

2.9 ARC FLASH HAZARD WARNING LABELS

A. Installed warning labels (orange <40 cal/cm2) or danger label (red >40 cal/cm2) in accordance with ANSI Z535.4-2002. The label must be readable in both indoor and outdoor environments for at least three years and contain the following information (See sample label, attached):

1. Arc hazard boundary (inches).

2. Working distance (inches).

3. Arc flash incident energy at the working distance (cal/ cm2).

4. PPE category and description including the glove rating.

5. Voltage rating of the equipment.

6. Limited approach distance (inches).

7. Restricted approach distance (inches).

8. Prohibited approach distance (inches).

9. Equipment/bus name.

10. Date prepared.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

260553 - 4


08/07/2013

C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate.

F. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each colorcoding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of twocolor markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at

25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas.

G. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility.

H. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below:

1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon.

2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.

I. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench

[or concrete envelope ]exceeds 16 inches overall.

J. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Concealed Raceways, Duct Banks, More Than 600 V, within Buildings: Tape and stencil 4-inch wide black stripes on 10-inch centers over orange background that extends full length of raceway or duct and is 12 inches wide. Stencil legend "DANGER

CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch high black letters on 20-inch centers. Stop stripes at legends. Apply to the following finished surfaces:

1. Floor surface directly above conduits running beneath and within 12 inches of a floor that is in contact with earth or is framed above unexcavated space.

2. Wall surfaces directly external to raceways concealed within wall.

3. Accessible surfaces of concrete envelope around raceways in vertical shafts, exposed in the building, or concealed above suspended ceilings.

B. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows:

1. Emergency Power.

2. Power.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

260553 - 5


08/07/2013

3. UPS.

C. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in panelboards, vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coded conductors or color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase and voltage.

1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded all conductors. a. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than

No. 8 AWG, if authorities having jurisdiction permit. b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Black.

2) Phase B: Red.

3) Phase C: Blue. c. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Brown.

2) Phase B: Orange.

3) Phase C: Yellow. d. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.

D. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, More than 600 V: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use nonmetallic plastic tag holder with adhesive-backed phase tags, and a separate tag with the circuit designation.

E. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections.

1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.

2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.

3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

F. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable.

1. Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables.

2. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in raceway.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

260553 - 6


08/07/2013

G. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and

29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.

H. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.

I. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red background with minimum 3/8-inch high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for power transfer.

J. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and

Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.

1. Labeling Instructions: a. Indoor Equipment: Self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch high letters on 1-1/2-inch high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high. b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label 4 inches high. c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor. d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure.

2. Equipment to Be Labeled: a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be self-adhesive, engraved label. b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. c. Switchboards. d. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary. e. Substations. f. Emergency system boxes and enclosures. g. Motor-control centers. h. Enclosed switches. i. Enclosed circuit breakers. j. Enclosed controllers.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

260553 - 7


08/07/2013

k. Push-button stations. l. Power transfer equipment. m. Contactors. n. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices.

K. ARC FLASH ANALYSIS a. Personnel performing the arc flash analysis shall be trained and experienced in accordance with NETA Training Specifications concerning the apparatus and systems being evaluated. b. LABELS: (Sample)


RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

260553 - 8


08/07/2013

SECTION 263110

RIGID CRYSTALLINE PHOTOVOLTAIC SYSTEM INTEGRATED MOUNTING SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 OVERVIEW


1. Non-ballasted, non-penetrating rigid crystalline photovoltaic mounting system


1. SECTION 075419 – POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING

1.2 RELATED TERMS

A. AC – Alternating Current. A form of electricity.

B. Array: A series of solar modules mounted to a Membrane Integrated PV Mounting structure to form a DC power-producing unit.

C. DC – Direct Current. A form of electricity.

D. Inverter: Converts DC electricity into AC electricity and often includes isolation transformers for power conditioning, anti islanding protection features, integrated DC and AC disconnect switches, and inverter direct communication capabilities.

E. kW – Kilowatts. A unit used to define power. Is used to define solar PV system sizes.

F. kWh – Kilowatt-Hour. A unit of energy. Is used to define solar PV energy production on an annual, monthly, daily or hourly basis.

G. Mounting System: A mounting structure for crystalline silicon solar modules with capabilities to integrate with roofing.

H. PV Module: A number of solar cells connected together electrically and sealed inside a rigid and/or framed weatherproof package with a clear face.

I. Photovoltaic (PV): Pertaining to the direct conversion of light into electricity.

J. PTC (PVUSA Test Conditions): Test conditions applied to PV modules intended to represent wattage during operation. Irradiance of 1000 W/m2, 68 degrees F (20 degrees C) ambient temperature, 1 meter/second wind speed, and an air mass of 1.5.

K. String: A number of modules or panels interconnected electrically in series to produce the operating voltage required by the load.

RTC IBMF SOGR 263110 - 1 08/07/2013

LAS VEGAS, NV PHOTOVOLTAIC SYSTEM INTEGRATED MOUNTING SYSTEM

L. STC (Standard Test Conditions): Test conditions applied to PV modules. Irradiance of

1000 W/m

2

, cell temperature of 25 degrees C and an air mass of 1.5.

M. Tilt Angle: The angle of inclination of a solar panel measured form the horizontal plane.

N. Web Based Monitoring System: Internet based data logging system and interface measuring PV system performance and inverter data.

1.3 REQUIREMENTS

A. Design Requirements:

1. Contractor is responsible for providing the proper permitting documents for PV mounting system, including the attachment of the membrane mounting system for the solar modules, and the integration with a new or existing roof. Provide modifications to meet specified requirements and maintain visual design concepts as indicated in layout drawings.

2. Acknowledge Contract Drawings are diagrammatic and are intended to establish basic dimension of units, sight lines, and profiles of units.

3. Provide details for attachment, fastening, penetrations, and electrical connections.

4. Provide concealed fastening wherever possible.

5. Provide weather-tight penetrations of building envelope for electrical connections.

6. Mount all conduit trays on the surface for visual identification.

B. Performance Requirements:

1. Provide a system which does not use ballast a. Maximum system weight is not to exceed 2.5 pounds per square foot inclusive of the rigid photovoltaic panel

2. Provide a system which does not use penetrations a. Fortification of the roof membrane itself may be necessary depending on the wind uplift requirements of the project

3. Provide an attachment system to the roof membrane with an ultimate design yield stress in excess of 850 pounds

1.4 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Product Data Sheets:

1. Submit data sheets for components including but not limited to the following: a. Mounting System b. Roof Mounted Accessories

B. Shop Drawings:

RTC IBMF SOGR 263110 - 2 08/07/2013


1. Submit shop drawings covering pertinent details of the following. a. Site plan showing location of main PV System components including but not limited to the PV array, inverters, and disconnect switches. b. Dimensioned PV module layout

C. Submit the following Informational Submittals:

1. Estimated Design Data: a. Estimated monthly and yearly solar PV energy production in kWh AC. b. Provide assumptions used to obtain AC kWh energy production including but not limited to: wire losses, module temperature losses, inverter efficiency, soiling loss factors, shading loss factors and local weather data, and electrical losses.

2. Test Reports: a. Written results obtained from manufacturer or independent third party certification of testing specified as part of System Requirements and

Source and Field Quality Control articles. b. Wind uplift report with including mounting system design.

3. Qualification Data: a. Contractor shall be approved by manufacturer of roofing system in writing to install roofing integrated solar system, and all roof related items.

4. Manufacturer’s Instructions: a. Submit manufacturer’s printed installation instructions. b. Indicate by transmittal that copies of instructions and recommendations have been distributed to installer.

5. Contractor’s Field Reports: a. Submit written results and findings of Contractor’s field services specified as part of Field Quality Control.

D. Closeout Submittal Documents

1. Project Record Documents: a. As Built site plan showing location of main PV System components including but not limited to the PV array, inverters, and disconnect switches. b. As Built dimensioned PV module layout c. As Built electrical system wiring diagram d. As Built electrical penetration details of weather-tight building envelope.

2. Operation and Maintenance Data:

RTC IBMF SOGR 263110 - 3 08/07/2013


a. Submit manufacturer’s printed recommended operation and maintenance data.

3. Warranty: a. Submit specified product warranties.


A. Single Source Responsibility: To ensure performance, water-tight integrity of roof system, and compatibility of all systems, obtain primary equipment for systems from a single roofing and photovoltaic system provider.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this Section with a minimum AA bond rating, and 40 years of commercial roofing experience.

C. Installer Qualifications: Approved in writing by equipment manufacturers as qualified for installation of specified systems.

D. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Provided system must meet all requirements of federal, state, and local building codes.

2. Provide system that meets or exceeds SDG&E interconnection requirements for self-generating equipment.

3. Provide Photovoltaic modules compliant with the following requirements: a. UL-1703 – “Flat-Plate Photovoltaic Modules and Panels.” b. CEC eligible renewable equipment.

4. Provide inverters compliant with requirements: a. UL-1741 – “Standards for Inverters, Converters and Controllers.” b. IEEE 1547-2003 “Standard for Interconnecting Distributed Resources with

Electric Power Systems.” c. CEC eligible renewable equipment.

E. Certifications: Submit system component manufacturer's certification that products furnished for Project meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.6 PRE-COMMENCEMENT MEETING

A. Conduct pre-installation conference with – Owner, and Contractor 2 weeks prior to job start.

B. Review requirements of Contract Documents and submittals.

C. Review details relating to facility maintenance and ongoing operation.

RTC IBMF SOGR 263110 - 4 08/07/2013



A. Inspect equipment at time of delivery. Remove from jobsite and immediately replace all equipment not conforming to specification.

B. Protect finished surfaces as necessary to prevent damage.

C. Replace damaged units.


A. Environmental Requirements:

1. Do not install system during rain, snow, or windy conditions, or when these conditions are imminent.

2. Work on a dry roof only. Determine acceptable moisture level by method specified by manufacturer.

B. Existing Conditions: Ensure existing conditions are stable, solid, and ready to accept new construction.

1.9 WARRANTIES

A. Furnish PV modules providing manufacturer’s limited performance warranty of 25 years minimum, and providing manufacturer’s defects and workmanship warranty of 5 years minimum.

B. Provide evidence of acceptability of roofing manufacturer for existing guarantee which offers protection of system “overburden”.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Mounting System:

1. ENRGY Anchor by Johns Manville

2. Or other approved equal

B. Mounting System Accessories

1. Membrane Attachment Ring for ENRGY Anchor

RTC IBMF SOGR 263110 - 5 08/07/2013


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roof system to ensure surfaces are free from dirt or other deleterious matter, and installation areas are away from shaded equipment of parapet locations

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Locate PV array as shown on Drawings and approved shop drawings.

B. Install photovoltaic system in accordance with NEC, manufacturer’s printed instructions, electric utility service provider requirements, and approved shop drawings.

C. For installation of mounting system:

1. (If required for wind uplift concerns) Attach the ring by using fasteners appropriate for the roof assembly and deck type. a. Provide fastener length sufficient to allow for maximum pull out values. b. Utilize one fastener for each of the factory prepared fastener holes.

2. Attach the anchoring system to PVC welding the target with approved techniques to the roof membrane around the inside and outside diameter of the ring (if present). a. Ensure a proper weld and water-tight condition

3. Install racking system per manufacturer’s instructions to anchor using supplied fastening system

D. Follow mounting system manufacture’s recommended installation procedures and roof warrantor installation procedures for installation. Roof warrantor’s installation procedures to override any conflict with the mounting systems installation recommendations.

E. Attach PV solar modules to the PV mounting system using attachment hardware for specific solar module used. Follow PV mounting manufacture and PV Solar Panel manufactures recommendations for location and tightening details.

F. Installer shall verify that site, mounting surface substrate, supports and other site and work conditions are adequate and proper for installation.


A. Notify Roofing Manufacturer 2 weeks prior to installation to ensure on site inspection of roof and solar system.

B. Verify existing roof guarantee requirements with manufacturer prior to solar installation.

RTC IBMF SOGR 263110 - 6 08/07/2013


3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Test and adjust operating functions in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to ensure performance to specifications upon installation.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean surfaces in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations; remove excess mastic, mastic smears, foreign materials, and other unsightly marks.

B. Clean energy generating surfaces of the PV module to ensure no obstructions block sunlight.

3.6 COMMISSIONING

A. Commissioning:

1. To be provided by Contractor/ Installer .

2. Prior to commissioning ensure PV system has passed and received final inspection certificate from authorities having jurisdiction and local utility.

3. Provide training to designated Owners representative.

4. Ensure the installation has been performed in accordance with NEC and other local codes. Following NEC articles refer to PV systems:

5. Refer to commissioning procedures contained in the inverter installation manual

6. Refer to commissioning requirements contained within IEEE 1547.1 Standard

Conformance Test Procedures for Equipment Interconnecting Distributed

Resources with Electric Power Systems.

7. Provide suitable tools and equipment for commissioning.

8. Utilize System Commissioning Check sheet / Log sheet.

9. Provide commissioning certificate to Owner.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect existing roof and penetrations from debris and excessive foot traffic. Provide protection boards where required, and under all equipment staging areas.

RTC IBMF SOGR 263110 - 7 08/07/2013


SYSTEM COMMISSIONING CHECKSHEET / LOG SHEET

Date & Time

Weather

(Sunny, Cloudy, Rain, etc.)

Air Temperature (ºF or

ºC)

Module Backskin

Temperature

(ºF/ ºC)

Irradiance at plane of

array (W/m 2 )

Source Circuit DC Open Circuit

Voltage

DC Short Circuit

Current

Positive to

Ground Resistance

(M-Ohms)

Negative to Ground

Resistance

String #1

String #2

String #3

String #4

String #5

String #6

String #7

String #8

String #9

String #10

String N

(350-600 Volts) § (0-8.0 Amps) £ (M-Ohms)

Notes:

§ Warning: Make certain the digital voltage meter you are using is rated for 600 volts DC minimum, calibrated with certification (traceable), and is in good working order.

£ Note: most handheld digital multimeters have the capability to measure a maximum of 10 Amps DC of short circuit current. A quality multimeter will have a fuse in line in order to protect itself. However, do not electrically short a solar module or panel if you suspect its output to be greater than 10 Amps. DC current clamp meters are readily available in the market

.

END OF SECTION

RTC IBMF SOGR 263110 - 8 08/07/2013


SECTION 271100

CABINETS, ENCLOSURES AND RACKS

PART 1 - GENERAL



Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specifications, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY


1. Free-standing Equipment Cabinets, Enclosures or Racks.

2. Wall-mounted Equipment Cabinets or Enclosures.

3. Wall-mounted Equipment Racks.


1. 260533

2. 271300

3. 271500

4. 280500

5. 280513

6. 280514

7. 280526

8. 280528

9. 281300

10. 281500

11. 281650

12. 282300

Identification for Electrical Systems

Communications Backbone Cabling

Communications Horizontal Cabling

General Requirements

Conductors and Cables

Fiber Optics

System Signal Grounding

Raceways and Boxes

Access Control System

Electronic Components

Duress Alarm System

Video Surveillance (CCTV) System

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/EIA RS-310-C

B. NEMA 250

C. NFPA 70

Rack mounting standards.

Enclosures for Electrical Equipment 1000 V Max.

National Electrical Code - application, and installation of electrical cabinets and enclosures.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

271100 - 1

CABINETS ENCLOSURES AND RACKS

08/07/2013

D. UL 50

1.04 SUBMITTALS

Cabinets and Boxes.

A. Conform to the requirements of section 280500, General Requirements.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for all items to be used including specifications, installation instructions and general recommendations.

1.05 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Cabinets shown on the Drawings are in approximate locations, actual location within the same room may depend on site conditions and Facility approval.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Types: Provide NEMA type 12 cabinets and enclosures.

B. Materials: Provide cabinets and enclosures as follows:

1. Provide electrical cabinets and enclosures which are UL listed and labeled, and constructed in conformance with UL 50 "Cabinets and Boxes."

2. In normally dry interior locations, provide sheet steel with corrosion resistant fasteners.

3. Outdoors and in damp interior locations, provide galvanized sheet steel with stainless steel fasteners.

4. At constantly wet locations or corrosive atmospheres, provide stainless sheet steel with stainless steel fasteners

C. Rail Mounts: Full enclosure length rack angles shall be installed and have ANSI/EIA

RS-310-C mounting standards with 10-32 tapped mounting holes in each enclosure

D. Shelf: Provide a shelf or other suitable mounting plate for all non rack mountable equipment

E. Painting: In addition to galvanizing or priming coat, all inside and outside surfaces of trim and doors shall be given a factory finish coat of paint.

F. Grounding:

1. Comply with Section 280526.

2. Provide cabinets and enclosures with provision for cabinet grounding without penetrating exterior wall of the enclosure.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

271100 - 2


08/07/2013

2.02 SLIDE OUT RACKS

A. Provide slide out 19” racks to provide rear access to wiring and components. Custom build unistrut support to accommodate slide out rack. Provide the following or approved equal from other manufacturers.

1. Middle Atlantic Products…………………………………………………..SRS Series

B. Provide key-locking latches for doors.

2.03 FREE-STANDING EQUIPMENT CABINETS, ENCLOSURES OR RACKS

A. Provide free standing enclosures/racks. Racks in Security Electronics Room need not be fully enclosed or lockable. Provide the following or approved equal from other manufacturers:

1. Wrightline……………………………………………………………Paramount Series

2. Hoffman…………………………………………………………….…….Proline Series

B. Modular free standing equipment racks, overall size shall be 78x23x23 inches.

C. Provide modular enclosure components including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Solid lockable front and rear solid doors, all keyed alike.

2. Solid sides on all enclosure sides not directly joined to another enclosure.

3. Rack joining kits.

4. Cover and fan.

5. Filtered air inlet.

6. Keyboard slide tray for each keyboard.

7. Base for each enclosure with wire management provisions.

2.04 WALL-MOUNTED EQUIPMENT CABINETS OR ENCLOSURES

A. Provide wall-mounted cabinets/enclosures from the following or approved equal from other manufacturers:

1. Hoffman……………………………………………….Concept Wall-Mount Series

B. Provide removable doors.

C. Provide removable internal mounting panel for component installation.

D. Provide handle operated, key-locking latches for doors.

E. Provide multiple doors where required. Individual door width shall be no greater than

24 inches.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

271100 - 3


08/07/2013

2.05 WALL-MOUNTED EQUIPMENT RACKS

A. Provide wall-mounted, double-hinged racks Racks in Security Electronics Room need not be fully enclosed or lockable. Provide the following or approved equal from other manufacturers:

1. Hoffman……………………………………………………….Industrial E-DH Series

B. Provide key-locking latches for doors.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Mounting: Mount cabinets at a uniform height, nominally 6 feet to the top of the enclosure above finished floor, except as otherwise noted or physically not practical.

Mount cabinets with fronts straight and plumb.

B. Bracing: Brace or anchor all free-standing/wall-mounted cabinets using Uni-strut or other approved method to building structure.

C. Flush Cabinets: Set flush cabinets in finished spaces flush with adjacent walls. Mount cabinets with fronts straight and plumb.

D. Painting: Touch up all welds, scrapes and other mars in the enclosure finish with a rust inhibiting paint.

E. Front Access: Locate with minimum of 36 inches clear space in front of each cabinet or rack.

F. Other Access: Provide minimum 36 inches clear space to each side of enclosure which requires access for inspection or service.

END OF SECTION

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

271100 - 4


08/07/2013

SECTION 271300

COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and Division 26, 27 and 28 specifications and requirements, general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Pathways.

2. UTP cable.

3. 8/125-micrometer single mode. 50/125-micrometer multimode, optical fiber cabling.

4. Coaxial cable.

5. Cable connecting hardware, patch panels, and cross-connects.

6. Cabling identification products.


1. All Division 26, 27 and 28 Specification Sections

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.

B. Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection or cross-connection.

C. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

D. IDC: Insulation displacement connector.

E. LAN: Local area network.

F. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.

G. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

271300 - 1


08/07/2013

1.4 BACKBONE CABLING DESCRIPTION

A. Backbone cabling system shall provide interconnections between communications equipment rooms, main terminal space, and entrance facilities in the telecommunications cabling system structure. Cabling system consists of backbone cables, intermediate and main cross-connects mechanical terminations, and patch cords or jumpers used for backbone-to-backbone cross-connection.

B. Backbone cabling cross-connects may be located in communications equipment rooms or at entrance facilities. Bridged taps and splitters shall not be used as part of backbone cabling.


A. General Performance: Backbone cabling system shall comply with transmission standards in TIA/EIA-568-B.1, when tested according to test procedures of this standard.

1.6 SUBMITTALS


1. For all communications cable, include the following installation data for each type used: a. Nominal OD. b. Minimum bending radius. c. Maximum pulling tension. d. Insulation rating. e. Rated performance level. f. TIA standards met.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules, in software and format selected by Owner.

2. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules that are part of the cabling and asset identification system of the software.

3. Cabling administration drawings and printouts.

4. Wiring diagrams to show typical wiring schematics including the following: a. Cross-connects. b. Patch panels. c. Patch cords.

5. Cross-connects and patch panels. Detail mounting assemblies, and show elevations and physical relationship between the installed components.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

271300 - 2


08/07/2013

6. Cable tray layout, showing cable tray route to scale, with relationship between the tray and adjacent structural, electrical, and mechanical elements. Include the following: a. Vertical and horizontal offsets and transitions. b. Clearances for access above and to side of cable trays. c. Vertical elevation of cable trays above the floor or bottom of ceiling structure. d. Load calculations to show dead and live loads as not exceeding manufacturer's rating for tray and its support elements.

C. Qualification Data: For Installer, qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector.

D. Source quality-control reports.

E. Field quality-control reports.

F. Maintenance Data: For splices and connectors to include in maintenance manuals.

G. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:

1. Software operating and upgrade manuals.

2. Program Software Backup: On compact disk, complete with data files.

3. Device address list.

4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.


A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff.

1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and Cabling Administration

Drawings by an RCDD.

2. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of

Registered Technician, who shall be present at all times when Work of this

Section is performed at Project site.

3. Testing Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise onsite testing.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on-site testing.

C. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

271300 - 3


08/07/2013

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.

2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in


E. Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A.

F. Grounding: Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.


A. Test cables upon receipt at Project site.

1. Test optical fiber cable to determine the continuity of the strand end to end. Use optical fiber flashlight or optical loss test set.

2. Test optical fiber cable while on reels. Use an optical time domain reflectometer to verify the cable length and locate cable defects, splices, and connector, including the loss value of each. Retain test data and include the record in maintenance data.

3. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cables and connecting materials until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications pathways and cabling with

Owner's telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers.

1.11 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT

A. Technical Support: Beginning with Substantial Completion, provide software support for four years.

B. Upgrade Service: Update software to latest version at Project completion at all RTC

Sites. Install and program software upgrades that become available within four years from date of Substantial Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system. Upgrade shall include new or revised licenses for use of software.

1. Provide 30 days' notice to Owner to allow scheduling and access to system and to allow Owner to upgrade computer equipment if necessary.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

271300 - 4


08/07/2013

1.12 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Patch-Panel Units: One of each type.

2. Connecting Blocks: One of each type.

3. Work Area Outlet Faceplates: Six of each type, of each color utilized

4. UTP Outlet modules: 24 of each type, of each color utilized.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PATHWAYS

A. General Requirements: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A.

B. Cable Support: NRTL labeled for support of Category 6 cabling, designed to prevent degradation of cable performance and pinch points that could damage cable.

1. Support brackets with cable tie slots for fastening cable ties to brackets.

2. Straps and other devices.

C. Cable Trays:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Cable Management Solutions, Inc. b. Cablofil Inc. c. Cooper B-Line, Inc. d. Cope - Tyco/Allied Tube & Conduit. e. GS Metals Corp. f. Chalfant.

2. Cable Tray Materials: Metal, suitable for indoors and protected against corrosion by electroplated zinc galvanizing, complying with ASTM B 633, Type 1, not less than 0.000472 inches thick. a. Solid-Bottom Cable Trays: One-piece construction, nominally 12 inches wide. Provide with solid covers. Verify tray construction acceptance with local code requirements.

D. Conduit and Boxes: Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Raceways and

Boxes." Flexible metal conduit shall not be used.

1. Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 4 inches wide, 4 inches high, and 2-1/2 inches deep, with single gang plaster ring for work area outlet faceplate mounting.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

271300 - 5


08/07/2013

2.2 UTP CABLE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Belden CDT Inc.; Electronics Division.

2. Berk-Tek; a Nexans company.

3. CommScope, Inc.

4. Draka USA.

5. Genesis Cable Products; Honeywell International, Inc.

6. KRONE Incorporated.

7. Mohawk; a division of Belden CDT.

8. Nordex/CDT; a subsidiary of Cable Design Technologies.

9. Superior Essex Inc.

10. SYSTIMAX Solutions; a CommScope Inc. brand.

11. 3M.

12. Tyco Electronics/AMP Netconnect; Tyco International Ltd.

B. Description: 100-ohm, 100-pair UTP, formed into 25-pair binder groups covered with a gray thermoplastic jacket.

1. Comply with ICEA S-90-661 for mechanical properties.

2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1 for performance specifications.

3. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, Category 6.

4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL 444 and NFPA 70 for the following types: a. Communications, General Purpose: Type CM or CMG. b. Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP, complying with NFPA 262. c. Communications, Riser Rated: Type CMR, complying with UL 1666. d. Communications, Limited Purpose: Type CMX. e. Multipurpose: Type MP or MPG. f. Multipurpose, Plenum Rated: Type MPP, complying with NFPA 262. g. Multipurpose, Riser Rated: Type MPR, complying with UL 1666.

2.3 UTP CABLE HARDWARE


1. American Technology Systems Industries, Inc.

2. Dynacom Corporation.

3. Hubbell Premise Wiring.


5. Leviton Voice & Data Division.

6. Molex Premise Networks; a division of Molex, Inc.


8. Panduit Corp.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

271300 - 6


08/07/2013

9. Siemon Co. (The).


B. General Requirements for Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2,

IDC type, with modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of same category or higher.

C. Connecting Blocks: 110-style IDC for Category 6. Provide blocks for the number of cables terminated on the block, plus 25 percent spare. Integral with connector bodies, including plugs and jacks where indicated.

D. Cross-Connect: Modular array of connecting blocks arranged to terminate building cables and permit interconnection between cables.

1. Number of Terminals per Field: One for each conductor in assigned cables.

E. Patch Panel: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered jack units with IDC-type connectors at each jack for permanent termination of pair groups of installed cables.

1. Number of Jacks per Field: One for each four-pair UTP cable indicated.

F. Jacks and Jack Assemblies: Modular, color-coded, eight-position modular receptacle units with integral IDC-type terminals.

G. Patch Cords: Factory-made, 4-pair cables in minimum 48-inch lengths; terminated with

8-position modular plug at each end.

1. Patch cords shall have bend-relief-compliant boots and color-coded icons to ensure Category 6 performance. Patch cords shall have latch guards to protect against snagging.

2. Patch cords shall have color-coded boots for circuit identification.

2.4 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE



2. CommScope, Inc.

3. Corning Cable Systems.

4. General Cable Technologies Corporation.



7. Optical Connectivity Solutions Division; Emerson Network Power.


9. SYSTIMAX Solutions; a CommScope Inc. brand.

10. 3M.


RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

271300 - 7


08/07/2013

B. Description: Single mode, (8/125-micrometer, minimum 12-fiber), Multimode, (50/125micrometer, 24-fiber), tight buffer, optical fiber cable.



3. Comply with TIA/EIA-492AAAB for detailed specifications.

4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL 444, UL 1651, and NFPA 70 for the following types: a. General Purpose, Nonconductive: Type OFN or OFNG. b. Plenum Rated, Nonconductive: Type OFNP, complying with NFPA 262. c. Riser Rated, Nonconductive: Type OFNR, complying with UL 1666. d. General Purpose, Conductive: Type OFC or OFCG. e. Plenum Rated, Conductive: Type OFCP, complying with NFPA 262. f. Riser Rated, Conductive: Type OFCR, complying with UL 1666.

5. Conductive cable shall be steel armored type.

6. Maximum Attenuation: 3.50 dB/km at 850 nm; 1.5 dB/km at 1300 nm.

7. Minimum Modal Bandwidth: 500 MHz-km at 850 nm; 500 MHz-km at 1300 nm.

C. Jacket:

1. Jacket Color: Aqua for 50/125-micrometer cable.

2. Cable cordage jacket, fiber, unit, and group color shall be according to TIA/EIA-

598-B.

3. Imprinted with fiber count, fiber type, and aggregate length at regular intervals not to exceed 40 inches.

2.5 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE HARDWARE


1. ADC.



4. Corning Cable Systems.





9. Optical Connectivity Solutions Division; Emerson Network Power.


B. Cross-Connects and Patch Panels: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered, duplex cable connectors.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

271300 - 8


08/07/2013

1. Number of Connectors per Field: One for each fiber of cable or cables assigned to field, plus spares and blank positions adequate to suit specified expansion criteria.

C. Patch Cords: Factory-made, dual-fiber cables in minimum 36-inch lengths.

D. Cable Connecting Hardware:

1. Comply with Optical Fiber Connector Intermateability Standards (FOCIS) specifications of TIA/EIA-604-2, TIA/EIA-604-3-A, and TIA/EIA-604-12. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.3.

2. Quick-connect, simplex and duplex, Type SC or Type ST Connectors, based on owner’s requirements for room applications. Insertion loss not more than 0.75 dB.

3. Type SFF connectors may be used in termination racks, panels, and equipment packages.

2.6 COAXIAL CABLE


1. Alpha Wire Company.


3. Coleman Cable, Inc..

4. CommScope, Inc.

5. Draka USA.

B. General Coaxial Cable Requirements: Broadband type, recommended by cable manufacturer specifically for broadband data transmission applications. Coaxial cable and accessories shall have 75-ohm nominal impedance with a return loss of 20 dB maximum from 7 to 806 MHz.

C. RG-11/U: NFPA 70, Type CATV.

1. No. 14 AWG, solid, copper-covered steel conductor.

2. Gas-injected, foam-PE insulation.

3. Double shielded with 100 percent aluminum polyester tape and 60 percent aluminum braid.

4. Jacketed with sunlight-resistant, black PVC or PE.

5. Suitable for outdoor installations in ambient temperatures ranging from minus 40 to plus 85 deg C.

D. RG-6/U: NFPA 70, Type CATV or CM.

1. No. 16 AWG, solid, copper-covered steel conductor; gas-injected, foam-PE insulation.

2. Double shielded with 100 percent aluminum-foil shield and 60 percent aluminum braid.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

271300 - 9


08/07/2013

3. Jacketed with black PVC or PE.

4. Suitable for indoor installations.

E. NFPA and UL compliance listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL 1655 and with NFPA 70, "Radio and

Television Equipment" and "Community Antenna Television and Radio Distribution"

Articles. Types are as follows:

1. CATV Cable: Type CATV.

2. CATV Plenum Rated: Type CATVP, complying with NFPA 262.

3. CATV Riser Rated: Type CATVR, complying with UL 1666.

2.7 COAXIAL CABLE HARDWARE


1. Aim Electronics; a brand of Emerson Electric Co.



B. Coaxial-Cable Connectors: Type BNC, 75 ohms.

2.8 GROUNDING

A. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.

2.9 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate cables.

B. Factory test cables on reels according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

C. Factory test UTP cables according to TIA/EIA-568-B.2.

D. Factory test multimode optical fiber cables according to TIA/EIA-526-14-A and TIA/EIA-

568-B.3.

E. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

271300 - 10


08/07/2013

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ENTRANCE FACILITIES

A. Coordinate backbone cabling with the protectors and demarcation point provided by communications service provider.

3.2 WIRING METHODS

A. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways and enclosed solid cable trays except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters. Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces.

1. Install all cable in enclosed solid cable trays, with covers for trunk cabling routing, and from cable tray to work area outlet box in metallic conduit.

2. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Division 16

Section "Raceways and Boxes."

B. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train cables within enclosures. Connect to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS

A. Cable Trays: Comply with NEMA VE 2 and TIA/EIA-569-A.

B. Comply with requirements for demarcation point, pathways, cabinets, and racks specified in Division 17 Section "Communications Equipment Room Fittings."

Drawings indicate general arrangement of pathways and fittings.

C. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends between pull points.

D. Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes" for installation of conduits and wire ways.

E. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows whenever possible.

F. Pathway Installation in Communications Equipment Rooms:

1. Install cable trays to route cables if conduits cannot be located in these positions.

2. Secure conduits to wall and/or cabinet/rack enclosure when entering room from overhead.

3. Extend conduits 3 inches above finished floor.

4. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding conductor to grounding system.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

271300 - 11


08/07/2013

3.4 INSTALLATION OF CABLES

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. General Requirements for Cabling:

1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

2. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, and “Cable Termination Practices."

3. Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated.

4. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels.

5. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.

6. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer.

7. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in

BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Use lacing bars and distribution spools.

8. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable.

9. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling.

Heat lamps shall not be used for heating.

10. In the communications equipment room, install a 10-foot-long service loop on each end of cable.

11. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull tensions.

C. UTP Cable Installation:


2. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry.

D. Optical Fiber Cable Installation:


2. Cable may be terminated on connecting hardware that is rack or cabinet mounted.

E. Open-Cable Installation:

1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment.

F. Installation of Cable Routed Exposed under Raised Floors:

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

271300 - 12


08/07/2013

1. Install plenum-rated cable only.

2. Install cabling after the flooring system has been installed in raised floor areas.

3. Coil cable 6 feet long not less than 12 inches in diameter below each feed point.

G. Outdoor Coaxial Cable Installation:

1. Install outdoor connections in enclosures complying with NEMA 250, Type 4X.

Install corrosion-resistant connectors with properly designed O-rings to keep out moisture.

2. Attach antenna lead-in cable to support structure at intervals not exceeding 36 inches.

H. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields.

I. Separation from EMI Sources:

1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA/EIA-569-A recommendations for separating unshielded copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment.

2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches. c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches.

3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches. c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches.

4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches. c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches.

5. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and

Transformers: A minimum of 48 inches.

6. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 18 inches.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

271300 - 13


08/07/2013

3.5 FIRESTOPPING

A. Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop

Systems."

B. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A; Annex A, "Firestopping."

C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.

3.6 GROUNDING

A. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical

Protection" Chapter.

B. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.

C. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall allowing at least 2-inch clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus bar with a minimum No. 1/0 AWG grounding electrode conductor from building main grounding bus bar to building electrical service entrance ground. Connect secondary grounding bus bars with a minimum No. 6 AWG grounding electrode conductor to the building main grounding bus bar.

D. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG equipment grounding conductor.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A.

Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical

Identification."

1. Administration Class: 3.

2. Color-code cross-connect fields and apply colors to voice and data service backboards, connections, covers, and labels.

B. Comply with requirements in Division 9 Section "Interior Painting" for painting backboards. For fire-resistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label.

C. Label colors for equipment identification shall comply with TIA/EIA-606-A for Class 3 level of administration including optional identification requirements of this standard.

D. Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for cable and asset management software.

E. Cable Schedule: Install in a prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet. List incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect with rigid frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of final comprehensive schedules for Project.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

271300 - 14


08/07/2013

F. Cabling Administration Drawings: Show building floor plans with cabling administration-point labeling. Identify labeling convention and show labels for telecommunications closets, backbone pathways and cables, entrance pathways and cables, terminal hardware and positions, horizontal cables, work areas and workstation terminal positions, grounding buses and pathways, and equipment grounding conductors.

G. Cable and Wire Identification:

1. Label each cable within 4 inches of each termination and tap, where it is accessible in a cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated.

2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered at device if color of wire is consistent with associated wire connected and numbered within panel or cabinet.

3. Exposed Cables and Cables in Cable Trays and Wire Troughs: Label each cable at intervals not exceeding 15 feet.

4. Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel. a. Individually number wiring conductors connected to terminal strips and identify each cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or cabinet to a building-mounted device with name and number of particular device as shown. b. Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames.

5. Identification within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets:

Label each connector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and connecting hardware. Where similar jacks and plugs are used for both voice and data communication cabling, use a different color for jacks and plugs of each service.

H. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type with printing area and font color that contrasts with cable jacket color but still complies with requirements in

TIA/EIA 606-A, for the following:

1. Cables use flexible vinyl or polyester that flexes as cables are bent.





1. Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber jacket materials for NRTL certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections for compliance with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

2. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

271300 - 15


08/07/2013

3. Test UTP copper cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not cross-connection. a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-

568-B.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)"

Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.

4. Optical Fiber Cable Tests: a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-

568-B.1. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration. b. Link End-to-End Attenuation Tests:

1) Horizontal and multimode backbone link measurements: Test at 850 or 1300 nm in 1 direction according to TIA/EIA-526-14-A, Method B, and One Reference Jumper.

2) Attenuation test results for backbone links shall be less than 2.0 dB.

Attenuation test results shall be less than that calculated according to equation in TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

D. Data for each measurement shall be documented. Data for submittals shall be printed in a summary report that is formatted similar to Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM, or transferred from the instrument to the computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted.

E. Remove and replace cabling where test results indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.

F. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports.

END OF SECTION

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

271300 - 16


08/07/2013

SECTION 271500

COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and Division 26, 27 and 28 specification and requirements, the general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Pathways.

2. UTP cabling.

3. Coaxial cable.

4. Cable connecting hardware, patch panels, and cross-connects.

5. Telecommunications outlet/connectors.

6. Cabling system identification products.

7. Cable management system.


1. All Division 26, 27 and 28 Specification Sections

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Basket Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of wire mesh bottom and side rails.

B. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.

C. Channel Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of a one-piece, ventilatedbottom or solid-bottom channel.

D. Consolidation Point: A location for interconnection between horizontal cables extending from building pathways and horizontal cables extending into furniture pathways.

E. Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection or cross-connection.

F. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

271500 - 1


08/07/2013

G. IDC: Insulation displacement connector.

H. Ladder Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of two longitudinal side rails connected by individual transverse members (rungs).

I. LAN: Local area network.

J. Outlet/Connectors: A connecting device in the work area on which horizontal cable or outlet cable terminates.

K. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.

L. Solid-Bottom or Nonventilated Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of longitudinal side rails and a bottom without ventilation openings.

M. Trough or Ventilated Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of longitudinal side rails and a bottom having openings for the passage of air.

N. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.

1.4 HORIZONTAL CABLING DESCRIPTION

A. Horizontal cable and its connecting hardware provide the means of transporting signals between the telecommunications outlet/connector and the horizontal cross-connect located in the communications equipment room. This cabling and its connecting hardware are called "permanent link," a term that is used in the testing protocols.

1. TIA/EIA-568-B.1 requires that a minimum of two telecommunications outlet/connectors be installed for each work area.

2. Horizontal cabling shall contain no more that one transition point or consolidation point between the horizontal cross-connect and the telecommunications outlet/connector.

3. Bridged taps and splices shall not be installed in the horizontal cabling.

4. Splitters shall not be installed as part of the optical fiber cabling.

B. A work area is approximately 100 sq. ft., and includes the components that extend from the telecommunications outlet/connectors to the station equipment.

C. The maximum allowable horizontal cable length is 295 feet; this maximum allowable length does not include an allowance for the length of 16 feet to the workstation equipment. The maximum allowable length does not include an allowance for the length of 16 feet in the horizontal cross-connect.


A. General Performance: Horizontal cabling system shall comply with transmission standards in TIA/EIA-568-B.1, when tested according to test procedures of this standard.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

271500 - 2


08/07/2013

1.6 SUBMITTALS


1. For all horizontal cable, include the following installation data for each type used: a. Nominal OD. b. Minimum bending radius. c. Maximum pulling tension. d. Insulation rating. e. Rated performance level. f. TIA standards met. g. Color coding

B. Shop Drawings:

1. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules, in software and format selected by Owner.

2. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules that are part of the cabling and asset identification system of the software.

3. Cabling administration drawings and printouts.

4. Wiring diagrams to show typical wiring schematics, including the following: a. Cross-connects. b. Patch panels. c. Patch cords.

5. Cross-connects and patch panels. Detail mounting assemblies, and show elevations and physical relationship between the installed components.

6. Cable tray layout, showing cable tray route to scale, with relationship between the tray and adjacent structural, electrical, and mechanical elements. Include the following: a. Vertical and horizontal offsets and transitions. b. Clearances for access above and to side of cable trays. c. Vertical elevation of cable trays above the floor or bottom of ceiling structure. d. Load calculations to show dead and live loads as not exceeding manufacturer's rating for tray and its support elements.

C. Samples: For workstation outlets, jacks, jack assemblies, in specified finish, one for each size and outlet configuration and faceplates for color selection and evaluation of technical features.

D. Qualification Data: For Installer, qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector.

E. Source quality-control reports.

F. Field quality-control reports.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

271500 - 3


08/07/2013

G. Maintenance Data: For splices and connectors to include in maintenance manuals.

H. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:

1. Software operating and upgrade manuals.

2. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data files.

3. Device address list.

4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.


A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff.

1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and Cabling Administration

Drawings by an RCDD.

2. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of

Registered Technician, who shall be present at all times when Work of this

Section is performed at Project site.

3. Testing Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise onsite testing.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on-site testing.

C. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.

2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in


E. Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A.

F. Grounding: Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.


A. Test cables upon receipt at Project site.

1. Test optical fiber cables to determine the continuity of the strand end to end. Use optical fiber flashlight or optical loss test set.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

271500 - 4


08/07/2013

2. Test optical fiber cables while on reels. Use an optical time domain reflectometer to verify the cable length and locate cable defects, splices, and connector; including the loss value of each. Retain test data and include the record in maintenance data.

3. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cables and connecting materials until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications pathways and cabling with

Owner's telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers.

B. Coordinate telecommunications outlet/connector locations with location of power receptacles at each work area.


A. Technical Support: Beginning with Substantial Completion, provide software support for four years.

B. Upgrade Service: Update software to latest version at Project completion. Install and program software upgrades that become available within four years from date of

Substantial Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system. Upgrade shall include new or revised licenses for use of software.

1. Provide 30 days' notice to Owner to allow scheduling and access to system and to allow Owner to upgrade computer equipment if necessary.



1. Device Plates: Six of each type, of each color utilized.

2. UTP Outlet modules: 24 of each type, of each color utilized.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PATHWAYS

A. General Requirements: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

271500 - 5


08/07/2013

B. Cable Support: NRTL labeled for support of Category 6 cabling, designed to prevent degradation of cable performance and pinch points that could damage cable.

1. Support brackets with cable tie slots for fastening cable ties to brackets.

2. Straps and other devices.

C. Cable Trays:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Cable Management Solutions, Inc. b. Cablofil Inc. c. Cooper B-Line, Inc. d. Cope - Tyco/Allied Tube & Conduit. e. GS Metals Corp.

2. Cable Tray Materials: Metal, suitable for indoors, and protected against corrosion by either electroplated zinc galvanizing, complying with ASTM B 633,

Type 1, not less than 0.000472 inch thick, or hot-dip galvanizing, complying with

ASTM A 123/A 123M, Grade 0.55, not less than 0.002165 inch thick. a. Solid-Bottom Cable Trays: One-piece construction, nominally 12 inches wide. Provide with solid covers.

D. Conduit and Boxes: Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Raceways and

Boxes." Flexible metal conduit shall not be used.

1. Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 4 inches wide, 4 inches high, and 2-1/2 inches deep with single gang plaster ring for work area outlet faceplate mounting.

2. Minimum conduit size from cable tray to work area outlet boxes is 1”.

2.2 UTP CABLE




3. CommScope, Inc.

4. Draka USA.

5. Genesis Cable Products; Honeywell International, Inc.





10. SYSTIMAX Solutions; a CommScope, Inc. brand.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

271500 - 6


08/07/2013

11. 3M.


B. Description: 100-ohm, 4-pair UTP, covered with a blue thermoplastic jacket.



3. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, Category 6.

4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL 444 and NFPA 70 for the following types: a. Communications, General Purpose: Type CM or CMG. b. Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP, complying with NFPA 262. c. Communications, Riser Rated: Type CMR, complying with UL 1666. d. Communications, Limited Purpose: Type CMX. e. Multipurpose: Type MP or MPG. f. Multipurpose, Plenum Rated: Type MPP, complying with NFPA 262. g. Multipurpose, Riser Rated: Type MPR, complying with UL 1666.

2.3 UTP CABLE HARDWARE









8. Panduit Corp.



B. General Requirements for Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2,

IDC type, with modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of same category or higher.

C. Connecting Blocks: 110-style IDC for Category 6. Provide blocks for the number of cables terminated on the block, plus 25 percent spare. Integral with connector bodies, including plugs and jacks where indicated.

D. Cross-Connect: Modular array of connecting blocks arranged to terminate building cables and permit interconnection between cables.

1. Number of Terminals per Field: One for each conductor in assigned cables.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

271500 - 7


08/07/2013

E. Patch Panel: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered jack units with IDC-type connectors at each jack for permanent termination of pair groups of installed cables.

1. Number of Jacks per Field: One for each four-pair UTP cable indicated.

F. Jacks and Jack Assemblies: Modular, color-coded, eight-position modular receptacle units with integral IDC-type terminals.

G. Patch Cords: Factory-made, four-pair cables in minimum 48-inch lengths; terminated with eight-position modular plug at each end.

1. Patch cords shall have bend-relief-compliant boots and color-coded icons to ensure Category 6 performance. Patch cords shall have latch guards to protect against snagging.

2. Patch cords shall have color-coded boots for circuit identification.

2.4 COAXIAL CABLE


1. Alpha Wire Company.


3. Coleman Cable, Inc.

4. CommScope, Inc.

5. Draka USA.

B. Cable Characteristics: Broadband type, recommended by cable manufacturer specifically for broadband data transmission applications. Coaxial cable and accessories shall have 75-ohm nominal impedance with a return loss of 20 dB maximum from 7 to 806 MHz.

C. RG-11/U: NFPA 70, Type CATV.

1. No. 14 AWG, solid, copper-covered steel conductor.

2. Gas-injected, foam-PE insulation.

3. Double shielded with 100 percent aluminum polyester tape and 60 percent aluminum braid.

4. Jacketed with sunlight-resistant, black PVC or PE.

5. Suitable for outdoor installations in ambient temperatures ranging from minus 40 to plus 85 deg C.

D. RG-6/U: NFPA 70, Type CATV or CM.

1. No. 16 AWG, solid, copper-covered steel conductor; gas-injected, foam-PE insulation.

2. Double shielded with 100 percent aluminum-foil shield and 60 percent aluminum braid.

3. Jacketed with black PVC or PE.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

271500 - 8


08/07/2013

4. Suitable for indoor installations.

E. NFPA and UL compliance listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL 1655 and with NFPA 70 "Radio and Television

Equipment" and "Community Antenna Television and Radio Distribution" Articles.

Types are as follows:

1. CATV Cable: Type CATV.

2. CATV Plenum Rated: Type CATVP, complying with NFPA 262.

3. CATV Riser Rated: Type CATVR, complying with UL 1666.

4. CATV Limited Rating: Type CATVX.

2.5 COAXIAL CABLE HARDWARE


1. Aim Electronics; a brand of Emerson Electric Co.



B. Coaxial-Cable Connectors: Type BNC, 75 ohms.

2.6 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET/CONNECTORS

A. Jacks: 100-ohm, balanced, twisted-pair connector; four-pair, eight-position modular.

Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

B. Workstation Outlets: Four-port-connector assemblies mounted in single faceplate.

1. Plastic Faceplate: High-impact plastic. Coordinate color with Division 16 Section

"Wiring Devices."

2. Metal Faceplate: Stainless steel, complying with requirements in Division 16

Section "Wiring Devices."

3. For use with snap-in jacks accommodating any combination of UTP, optical fiber, and coaxial work area cords. a. Flush mounting jacks, positioning the cord at a 45-degree angle.

4. Legend: Factory labeled by silk-screening or engraving for stainless steel faceplates.

5. Legend: Machine printed, in the field, using adhesive-tape label.

6. Legend: Snap-in, clear-label covers and machine-printed paper inserts.

2.7 GROUNDING

A. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

271500 - 9


08/07/2013

2.8 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.

B. Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."

2.9 CABLE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM


B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. iTRACS Corporation.

2. Telsoft Solutions.

C. Description: Computer-based cable management system, with integrated database and graphic capabilities.

D. Document physical characteristics by recording the network, TIA/EIA details, and connections between equipment and cable.

E. Information shall be presented in database view, schematic plans, or technical drawings.

1. Microsoft Visio Professional or AutoCAD drawing software shall be used as drawing and schematic plans software.

F. System shall interface with the following testing and recording devices:

1. Direct upload tests from circuit testing instrument into the personal computer.

2. Direct download circuit labeling into labeling printer.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate cables.

B. Factory test UTP and optical fiber cables on reels according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

C. Factory test UTP cables according to TIA/EIA-568-B.2.

D. Factory-sweep test coaxial cables at frequencies from 5 MHz to 1 GHz. Sweep test shall test the frequency response or attenuation over frequency, of a cable by generating a voltage whose frequency is varied through the specified frequency range and graphing the results.

E. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

271500 - 10


08/07/2013


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WIRING METHODS

A. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways and enclosed solid cable trays except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters. Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces.

1. Install all cable in enclosed solid cable trays, with covers for trunk cabling routing, and from cable tray to work area outlet box in metallic conduit..

2. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Division 16

Section "Raceways and Boxes."

B. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train cables to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS

A. Cable Trays: Comply with NEMA VE 2 and TIA/EIA-569-A-7.

B. Comply with requirements for demarcation point, pathways, cabinets, and racks specified in Division 16 Section "Communications Equipment Room Fittings."

Drawings indicate general arrangement of pathways and fittings.

C. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends between pull points.

D. Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes" for installation of conduits and wireways.

E. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows whenever possible.

F. Pathway Installation in Communications Equipment Rooms:

1. Position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard where a single piece of plywood is installed, or in the corner of room where multiple sheets of plywood are installed around perimeter walls of room.

2. Install cable trays to route cables if conduits cannot be located in these positions.

3. Secure conduits to wall and/or cabinet/rack enclosure when entering room from overhead.

4. Extend conduits 3 inches above finished floor.

5. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding conductor to grounding system.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

271500 - 11


08/07/2013

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CABLES

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. General Requirements for Cabling:


2. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices."

3. Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated.

4. Terminate conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels.

5. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.

6. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer.

7. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in

BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.

8. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable.

9. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling.

Heat lamps shall not be used for heating.

10. In the communications equipment room, install a 10-foot-long service loop on each end of cable.

11. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull tensions.

C. UTP Cable Installation:


2. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry.

D. Open-Cable Installation:

1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment.

E. Outdoor Coaxial Cable Installation:

1. Install outdoor connections in enclosures complying with NEMA 250, Type 4X.

Install corrosion-resistant connectors with properly designed O-rings to keep out moisture.

2. Attach antenna lead-in cable to support structure at intervals not exceeding 36 inches.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

271500 - 12


08/07/2013

F. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields.

G. Separation from EMI Sources:

1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA/EIA-569-A for separating unshielded copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment.

2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches. c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches.

3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches. c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches.

4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches. c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches.

5. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and

Transformers: A minimum of 48 inches.

6. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 18 inches.

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop

Systems."

B. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A, Annex A, "Firestopping."

C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A.

Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical

Identification."

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

271500 - 13


08/07/2013

1. Administration Class: 3.

2. Color-code cross-connect fields. Apply colors to voice and data service backboards, connections, covers, and labels.

B. Using cable management system software specified in Part 2, develop Cabling

Administration Drawings for system identification, testing, and management. Use unique, alphanumeric designation for each cable and label cable, jacks, connectors, and terminals to which it connects with same designation. At completion, cable and asset management software shall reflect as-built conditions.

C. Label colors for equipment identification shall comply with TIA/EIA-606-A for Class 3 level of administration, including optional identification requirements of this standard.

D. Cable Schedule: Post in prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet.

List incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations.

Protect with rigid frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of final comprehensive schedules for Project.

E. Cabling Administration Drawings: Show building floor plans with cabling administration-point labeling. Identify labeling convention and show labels for telecommunications closets, backbone pathways and cables, entrance pathways and cables, terminal hardware and positions, horizontal cables, work areas and workstation terminal positions, grounding buses and pathways, and equipment grounding conductors. Follow convention of TIA/EIA-606-A. Furnish electronic record of all drawings, in software and format selected by Owner.

F. Cable and Wire Identification:

1. Label each cable within 4 inches of each termination and tap, where it is accessible in a cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated.

2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered at device if color of wire is consistent with associated wire connected and numbered within panel or cabinet.

3. Exposed Cables and Cables in Cable Trays and Wire Troughs: Label each cable at intervals not exceeding 15 feet.

4. Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel. a. Individually number wiring conductors connected to terminal strips, and identify each cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or cabinet to a building-mounted device shall be identified with name and number of particular device as shown. b. Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames.

5. Identification within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets:

Label each connector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and connecting hardware. Where similar jacks and plugs are used for both voice and data communication cabling, use a different color for jacks and plugs of each service.

6. Uniquely identify and label work area cables extending from the MUTOA to the work area. These cables may not exceed the length stated on the MUTOA label.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

271500 - 14


08/07/2013

G. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type with printing area and font color that contrasts with cable jacket color but still complies with requirements in TIA/EIA-

606-A.

1. Cables use flexible vinyl or polyester that flex as cables are bent.





1. Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber cable jacket materials for NRTL certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections for compliance with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

2. Visually confirm Category 6 marking of outlets, cover plates, outlet/connectors, and patch panels.

3. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components. a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-

568-B.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)"

Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.

4. UTP Performance Tests: a. Test for each outlet and MUTOA. Perform the following tests according to

TIA/EIA-568-B.1 and TIA/EIA-568-B.2:

1) Wire map.

2) Length (physical vs. electrical, and length requirements).

3) Insertion loss.

4) Near-end crosstalk (NEXT) loss.

5) Power sum near-end crosstalk (PSNEXT) loss.

6) Equal-level far-end crosstalk (ELFEXT).

7) Power sum equal-level far-end crosstalk (PSELFEXT).

8) Return loss.

9) Propagation delay.

10) Delay skew.

5. Coaxial Cable Tests: Conduct tests according to Division 16 Section "Master

Antenna Television System."

6. Final Verification Tests: Perform verification tests for UTP systems after the complete communications cabling and workstation outlet/connectors are installed.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

271500 - 15


08/07/2013

a. Voice Tests: These tests assume that dial tone service has been installed.

Connect to the network interface device at the demarcation point. Go offhook and listen and receive a dial tone. If a test number is available, make and receive a local, long distance, and digital subscription line telephone call. b. Data Tests: These tests assume the Information Technology Staff has a network installed and is available to assist with testing. Connect to the network interface device at the demarcation point. Log onto the network to ensure proper connection to the network.

D. Document data for each measurement. Data for submittals shall be printed in a summary report that is formatted similar to Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM, or transferred from the instrument to the computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted.

E. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel in cable-plant management operations, including changing signal pathways for different workstations, rerouting signals in failed cables, and keeping records of cabling assignments and revisions when extending wiring to establish new workstation outlets. Include training in cabling administration software.

END OF SECTION

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

271500 - 16


08/07/2013

SECTION 280500

ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and other Division 1 Specifications, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. Part 1 Includes:

1. Related Documents

2. Summary and related sections

3. References

4. Definitions

5. System Description and General Responsibilities

6. Coordination

7. Quality Assurance

8. Submittals

9. Delivery, Storage, and Handling

10. Site Conditions

11. Sequencing and Scheduling

12. Warranty

13. Extra Materials

B. Part 2 Includes:

1. Product Options and Substitutions

2. Materials and Equipment

3. Equipment Modification

4. Fabrication

5. Source Quality Control

6. Firestopping/Sealant Materials

C. Part 3 Includes:

1. Examination

2. Installation

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280500 - 1

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

08/07/2013

3. Field Quality Control

4. Cleaning

5. Training

D. Related Sections:

1. 260533

2. 271100

3. 271300

4. 271500

5. 280513

6. 280514

7. 280526

8. 280528

9. 281300

10. 281500

11. 281650

12. 282300


Cabinets, Enclosures and Racks




Fiber Optics


Raceways and Boxes



Duress Alarm System


1.03 REFERENCES

A. Codes compliance - Comply with the established project edition of the following codes as applicable:

1. Southern Nevada Electrical Code (NFPA 70)

2. National Fire Alarm Codes (NFPA 72)

SNEC

NFAC

3. Southern Nevada Building Code

4. All State, County and City codes and ordinances

SNBC

B. Standards Compliance - Comply with the following standards as applicable:

1. American National Standards Institute ANSI

2. American Society for Testing and Materials

3. Electronics Industry Association

ASTM

EIA

4. Electrical Testing Laboratories

5. Factory Mutual

6. Federal Aviation Agency

7. Federal Communications Commission

ETL

FM

FAA

FCC

8. Institute of Elect. and Electronics Engineers

9. National Electrical Contractors Association

10. National Electrical Manufacturers Association

IEEE

NECA

NEMA

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280500 - 2


08/07/2013

11. National Fire Protection Association

12. Occupational Safety Health Act

13. Underwriter's Laboratories

NFPA

OSHA

UL

1.04 DEFINITIONS

A. By Others or By Other Trades: By persons or parties other than the Division 28 Contractor.

In this context the words “by others or by other trades” shall not be interpreted to mean “not in contract (NIC)”.

B. Certified: Equipment has been tested and found by a nationally recognized testing laboratory to meet nationally recognized standards and found to be safe for use in a specified manner; production is periodically inspected by a nationally recognized testing laboratory; and it bears a label, tag, or other record of certification.

C. Concealed: Not visible or readily accessible such as, embedded in masonry or other construction installed behind wall furring with double partitions or above hung ceilings, in crawl spaces, in shafts.

D. Conveniently Accessible: Capable of being serviced without climbing or crawling under or over obstacles, and with adequate working clearance both front and back.

E. Damage: Visible or invisible abuse that negatively affects performance or appearance and creates defective materials or workmanship.

F. Defective Materials or Workmanship: Operational failures, performance below minimum requirements, evidence that the system will not be reasonably maintainable, errors in documentation, abnormal operations, unsafe conditions, or similar unsatisfactory performance.

G. Contractor: Company holding the contract or agreement with the Owner or its representative. The Contractor may, when permitted, sub-contract Work described in this

Section to which the term contractor may apply.

H. Exposed: Not concealed.

I. Failure: Any deviation from intended system operation and performance, as determined by the Contract Documents and subsequent submittals and the Owner’s Representative.

J. Furnish: Purchase and deliver to the Project site complete with every necessary appurtenance, support, and accessory required for operation.

K. Install: Unload at the delivery point at the site and perform every operation necessary to establish secure mounting and correct operation at the proper location in the Project.

L. Labeled: Equipment embodies a valid label, symbol, or other identifying maker of a nationally recognized testing laboratory such as Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc., the laboratory makes periodic inspections of the production of such equipment, and the labeling indicates compliance with nationally recognized standards or tests to determine safe use in a specified manner.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280500 - 3


08/07/2013

M. Listed: Equipment is mentioned in a list which is published by a nationally recognized laboratory which makes periodic inspection of the production of such equipment or states that such equipment meets nationally recognized standards or has been tested and found safe for use in a specified manner.

N. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory: A testing laboratory which is approved, in accordance with OSHA regulations, by the Secretary of Labor.

O. Provide: Furnish and install, completely ready for use, including all accessories required for operation.

1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES

A. The Contractor is responsible for the Work of the following Sections, as governed by the general requirements of this Section:

1. 271100

2. 271300



3. 271500

4. 280500

5. 280514

6. 280526


Electronic Systems General Requirements

Fiber Optics


7. 280528

8. 281300

9. 281500

10. 281650

11. 282300

Raceways and Boxes



Duress Alarm System


B. Combined Prescriptive and Performance Design Requirements

1. Division 28 includes a combination of prescriptive and performance specifications.

Compliance with the performance specifications, as well as coordination and integration of the prescription requirements, will require substantial design work on the part of the Contractor.

2. The performance requirements are intended to establish overall system performance requirements, satisfy the operational requirements, and establish the intercoordination requirements for the Division 28 systems.

3. The prescriptive requirements establish the minimum quality, characteristics, and types of components, equipment, and materials to be used to achieve the stated system performance requirements. The Contractor is advised, however, that prescriptive specifications have not been provided to satisfy all of the specified performance requirements.

4. The Contractor shall carefully consider all of the requirements for each of the

Division 28 systems when preparing its bid. Any questions regarding the intent of these requirements, the scope of the systems or their coordination requirements must be submitted in writing prior to bidding in accordance with the Instructions to

Bidders. The Contractor shall have no claim for either extra compensation or extra

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280500 - 4


08/07/2013

time on the grounds that it did not understand the scope or the requirements of the

Division 28 work, and/or the coordination requirements of the Division 28 work with the work of the other Divisions.

5. Compliance with the project requirements will be progressively monitored and adjusted through the submittal process, Shop Test, Performance Test and

Continuous Operational Test.

C. Drawing Interpretation

1. The Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general arrangement of systems and equipment unless indicated otherwise by dimensions or detail drawings. The

Drawings utilize riser, block, installation and schematic diagrams and symbols to outline the Work to be provided. These drawings do not have any dimensional significance nor do they delineate every item required for the intended Work. No interpretation shall be made from the limitations of symbols and diagrams that any elements necessary for complete Work are excluded.

2. The Work shall be provided in accordance with the intent expressed on the Drawings and Specifications, and in conformance with the actual building architectural and structural conditions. When in conflict, field conditions take precedence over the

Contract Documents.

3. The meaning of abbreviations shall be the same whether in lower case letters or without periods.

4. The use of words in the singular shall not be considered as singular where other indications denote that more than one item is referred to.

5. Details that appear on the Contract Documents which are specific with regard to the dimensioning and positioning of the Work, are intended only for the purpose of establishing general feasibility. They do not replace engineering or field coordination by the contractor for the Work.

D. Provide all parts and equipment for a complete and operational system for the Work of

Division 28 as described herein and shown on the drawings.

E. Furnish and install all trenching and backfill, duct banks, conduits, raceways, sleeves, boxes, gutters, shelves, enclosures, shelf and enclosure supports, backboards, pull ropes (in unused or spare conduits) required to make all systems fully operational, including components not shown on the Drawings, but necessary for fully operational systems.

F. Furnish, install, terminate, test, dress, and identify all wire and cable required to make systems fully operational, including all wire, fiber, proximity devices, request to exit devices, and cabling not shown on the Drawings, but necessary for fully operational systems.

G. Recognize that the Work entails a considerable amount of custom integration between individual systems, as well as the design and implementation of many system and component interfaces. Take full responsibility for the complete design, installation, and performance of the total integrated system, including integration between systems and various interfaces, in order to achieve the specified operational features and system performance requirements.

H. Recognize that the Work entails a considerable amount of custom-written and customtailored software, both high-level language applications and hardware-specific drivers. Take

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280500 - 5


08/07/2013

full responsibility for the performance of the total software suite, including the software embedded in manufactured equipment, in order to achieve the specified operational features and system performance requirements.

I. It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that all equipment supplied under this specification is 100% compatible with the existing systems, devices, raceways, and/or wiring installed in this facility and shall be integratible/compatible with all RTC security systems.

The Contractor shall install, configure and program the systems described in these

Specification to ensure that the new systems and the existing systems operate as on seamless entity.

J. Extensive interface to the existing on-line facility security and life safety systems is required as part of this Work. All connections to the existing systems shall be thoroughly detailed in submittals and approved prior to commencing of any work.

K. If it is necessary to temporarily remove or disconnect any part of the existing systems or equipment for the purposes of interfacing and connecting new equipment, the Contractor shall reinstall and make fully operational all equipment and devices removed or disconnected. Any and all system cutovers and interruptions must be pre-approved and carefully coordinated with Owner and Facility.

L. Fully test the systems, demonstrate their satisfactory operation, and train maintenance and operating personnel, as specified in this Section and the Sections governed by this Section.

1.06 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate with the Owner and all other trades as required to ensure that the entire Work of this Project will be carried out in an orderly, complete, and coordinated fashion.

B. Coordinate all device installations with the Phase 1/Phase 2 Contractor(s) to assure all conflicts and issues are addressed.

C. Coordinate the installation all security devices with the existing lighting and ventilation in all equipment rooms and control stations to avoid any possible interference and to enhance system function.

D. Coordinate with the Work of all applicable Divisions and Drawings for the required electrical and mechanical control interfaces to the work of this section.

E. Coordinate with the Owner all electrical work including, but not limited to, the required number, size, type and exact locations of all system line voltage circuits, electrical junction boxes and power receptacles. Circuits used to supply energy to any device or equipment associated with the Security Electronic and Life Safety Systems shall be derived from an emergency-generator-supplied source where available.

F. If applicable, provide coordination drawings of security device plate mounting templates and internal frame conduits to the hollow metal frame manufacturer/supplier to facilitate frame preparation for electronic devices. Rework all frames for which device mounting has not been coordinated at Contractor’s expenses.

G. If applicable, obtain product data and wiring schematic information from the Division 8 and

11 Contractors/manufacturers for all approved locking and door monitoring hardware.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280500 - 6


08/07/2013

Coordinate with the Contractors to properly wire, terminate and test all electrically controlled and monitored door/gate hardware.


A. Division 28 requires contractors with similar work experience and specific licenses and certifications to perform the work of this section. Specific requirements are identified in the related sections. Contractors must be certified or licensed at the time of bid where

Manufacture certification or licensure is required. Required licenses and certifications shall be submitted within 3 days of being selected as the apparent low bidder.

B. The Division 28 contractor shall have had experience in the design and installation of similar systems of similar project sizes and similar integration as this project to be considered qualified.

C. The Contractor shall be responsible for all costs incurred including costs incurred by the

Owner and its representatives for failure to provide the experience and key personnel as specified.

1. Deductive change orders may be issued as a result of the failure to properly engineer the work prior to construction or improperly installed work that results in costs incurred to the Owner. Examples of incurred costs are rejection of submittals for failure to follow specifications or failure to properly engineer the work; reinspection of rejected work.

D. The Division 28 contractor shall maintain a local service center with qualified service technicians for the duration of the Warranty.

E. The Division 28 Contractor shall have a Southern Nevada Contractors License C-10 and/or

C-7 for the respective work.

F. Key Project Personnel must have work experience with projects of similar size and complexity. Systems experience shall be demonstrated for the Key Project Personnel.

Résumés of prospective key personal shall be submitted within 30 days of contract award.

1. Project Manager Qualifications a. Bachelors of Science Degree from ABET accredited college in Construction

Management or related engineering field or, b. Five years experience with projects of similar size and complexity.

2. Project Engineer Qualifications a. Licensed Professional Electrical Engineer or, b. Bachelors of Science Degree from ABET accredited college in Electronics

Engineering field and two years experience with systems to be provided, or c. Technical Trade School Degree, Associate of Science Degree, or Bachelors

Degree and a minimum of six years of demonstrated experience with the systems to be provided.

3. The approved Project Manager shall represent the Contractor at all times in all project matters and shall be responsible for the administrative work including but not limited to, the following:

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280500 - 7


08/07/2013

a. Representation at all project meetings. b. Progress schedule and progress reporting. c. Payment schedule of values and pay requests. d. Representation and management of all employees and sub-contractors. e. Conduction of on-site performance and acceptance testing.

4. The approved Project Engineer shall be qualified and shall be responsible for technical work including but not limited to, the following: a. Preparation and signature of all engineering, shop drawings, and product data submittals. b. System fabrication, field installation work, and testing.

5. Consider all qualification and experience materials submitted as binding. Obtain the

Owner’s approval in writing prior to any deviations from the minimum requirements in organization, personnel, work plan, quality control plan, procurement plan or other declaration within the qualification submittal. Key project personnel substituted prior to or during the Work must meet the specification requirements and obtain the

Owner’s approval.

G. Regulatory Requirements and Standards:

1. References to the Southern Nevada Electrical Code (SNEC) and National Fire

Alarm Code (NFAC) are a minimum installation requirement standard. Drawings and

Specifications shall govern in those instances where requirements are greater than those specified in the CEC and NFAC.

2. Obtain and pay for all permits and inspections required by all legal authorities and agencies having jurisdiction for the Work. The certificates of all such permits and inspections shall be delivered to the Owner.

1.08 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of General Conditions, Submittals.

B. Contractor is advised that approval or acceptance of product data or shop drawing submittals does not release the contractor from providing all necessary documentation per submittal requirements, nor does it obviate contractor from additional design and coordination throughout the project.

C. CPM Schedule

1. Submit a Critical Path Method Schedule within 30 days of the Notice to Proceed.

2. At a minimum show tasks by area such as by building, by floor or other appropriate designations.

3. Include tasks that are not part of the work of this section but that may affect this section such as work by other trades or contractors or Owner review time.

4. Include tasks that are not part of the work of this section but that may affect this section such as work by other trades or contractors or Owner review time.

D. Submittal Matrix

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280500 - 8


08/07/2013

1. Prepare and submit a matrix of submittals by type vs. section of all submittals to be made by the Division 28 contractor within 30 days of the Notice to Proceed.

2. Utilize the list of required submittals listed at the end of this section as a starting point.

Add columns for expected delivery dates and each specification section. If a listed submittal is not required for a specific section, indicate such with an “N/A” or other means in the column and row cross point.

E. Schedule of Values

1. Submit a Schedule of Values (SOV) based on the CPM schedule and Submittal

Matrix that reflect the value of the systems and installation of work for this Division.

2. That approved SOV will be used as a basis for progress payments.

F. Product Data:

1. Product data is required for all materials and equipment. Include complete bill of materials for each section with the product data submittal.

2. Cross-reference submitted items to the Specifications using their related sections and paragraph numbers.

3. Submit complete product data for the all system components in a single, bound submittal of one or more volumes. Provide a table of contents and labeled divider tabs for each section. Partial submittals for individual sections will be returned without review.

4. Include descriptive literature, catalog cuts, illustrations, schematics, technical data sheets, and test data necessary for the Owner’s Representative to ascertain that proposed equipment and materials comply with specification requirements. Include manufacturer’s name, model, catalog or part numbers. Catalog cuts shall be legible and shall clearly identify equipment being submitted.

5. Include required calculations, I/O points lists, system zone schedules, and other tabular data as necessary to clarify system sizing and configuration. Do not, however, consider such submittals as a substitute for complete shop drawings.

6. Disclosure of Product Deviations: Specifically identify and tabulate any and all deviations from the contract documents including all system functions and features.

Reference the corresponding specification sections and paragraph/article numbers.

All variances and deviations will be reviewed for acceptance or rejection. It will be the

Contractor’s sole responsibilities to comply with all other contract requirements not revealed in the disclosure of product deviations.

G. Shop Drawings:

1. Shop drawings are required for all systems and component assemblies.

2. AutoCAD “.dwg” files of the Contract Drawings may be made available upon request.

These files may be used as a first step in the preparation of shop drawings. Do not consider the drawing plots from such files as a substitute for the shop drawings that are to be prepared by the contractor.

3. Shop drawings will not be accepted or considered unless they are submitted as a complete package for each specification section. Partial submittals covering less than a whole system or with incomplete interfaces to other systems will be rejected.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280500 - 9


08/07/2013

4. Standard manufacturer’s drawings may not be used as shop drawings unless specifically modified for use on this project.

5. Each drawing requires a unique drawing number and revision level. Revisions shall per be dated and referenced per submittal number. Delta numbers and clouds on the drawings shall be used in all instances where changes have been made to the pervious submittal.

6. At a minimum, include the following shop drawings: a. Floor Plans: Scaled drawings showing equipment and all device locations in plan view. Include wire and cable types and quantities, raceway sizing and routing. Routing information shall indicate where rated assemblies are penetrated. Separate into as many plan series as needed to prevent overlapping information. These drawings shall be fully coordinated with other trades prior to submittal. Show relationships to adjacent surrounding structures. b. Equipment and Control Room Plans and Elevations: Scaled, dimensioned drawings showing security equipment layouts in security equipment rooms, electrical/security closets, and control rooms. Include electrical J-boxes and receptacles, power, conduit sizing and routing, metal gutters, wiring ducts, cable trays, and supports. Indicate all other non-security cabinets, enclosures, and equipment within the room. c. Cabinet, Enclosure, and Rack Elevations: Scaled, dimensioned drawings for each system equipment cabinet, enclosure, and rack showing component and equipment mounting, wire and cable routing and separation, connector and terminal block locations and labeling, and all necessary fabrication details. d. System Block Diagrams: Single line block diagrams showing the general relationship between system components and the interconnection between systems. Use these drawings as a reference for the Single line diagrams and point-to-point diagrams by cross-referencing the shop drawing number of those diagrams on these drawings. e. Single Line Diagrams: Interconnection diagrams for the riser and trunk wiring between equipment cabinets, enclosures racks and major components. Use the same equipment designations as the floor plans and block diagrams. f. Point-to-Point Diagrams: Drawings which show the wiring of each component or device of each individual system. Include details of power supply, grounding, shielding, shield grounding, surge protection, fusing, connector pin-outs, terminal assignments, and similar wiring and connection details. Use the same component and device designations as the floor plans and other shop drawings. g. Schematic Diagrams: Drawings which show the component wiring of a system to include but not limited to door position switches, request to exit devices, resistors, diodes, transistors, relays, etc. Required for all custom systems and modified commercial products. h. Device Installation Diagrams: Details which show the installation and wiring termination of each field device in each individual system. Include settings for dipswitches, jumpers, addresses, port assignments, etc. of all devices. i. All other shop drawings necessary to install, fabricate, locate, identify, test, service, and repair the systems provided.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280500 - 10


08/07/2013

7. Shop drawings approved by the Owner’s Representative OR by the Consultant

Engineer is not a release from Contract requirements as defined by the Drawings,

Specifications, and governing codes and regulations.

H. Samples:

1. Field Samples: a. Wires and Cables: Submit a one (1) foot sample length of each wire and cable type to be used with the cable identification clearly shown. b. Submit all required samples along with the product data submittal for review and approval prior to installation. c. If all wire samples can not be submitted at the same time, submit samples with a complete list of all cables to be used noting samples which have been submitted.

Update the list with each subsequent sample submittal.

2. Devices/Equipment: a. Provide licenses for all devices, request to exit, proximity, access control, reader interface modules, workstations. Assure all installed devices are licensed properly to assure a compatible and operable system. Provide the RTC with (2) additional licenses for all equipment and devices installed. b. Submit sample assemblies of each of the following devices or equipment along with the product data submittal for review and approval by the Owner’s

Representative:

1)

2)

3)

Substituted products if requested by Owner.

Custom component, board, equipment or assembly.

Tone generator (each type) a) Demonstrate each type of proposed tone generator to the

Owner’s Representative. Distinctive tones shall be used for each application or function and shall remain consistent though out the project.

4) Duress Station

3. Disposition: Submitted samples become property of the Owner and will not be returned.

4. Approval of any custom or modified assemblies shall be required. Submit technical information with samples.

I. Test Procedures:

1. Initial Performance Testing: Submit test procedures, forms, and checklists for pointby-point testing. Include a listing for each individual system, each control station and control panel, each equipment room, and each major system component. At a minimum, forms shall include columns for operational/non-operational status, remarks, workmanship, and date corrected. Submit a sample format for approval by the Owner’s Representative a minimum of 20 days prior to testing.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280500 - 11


08/07/2013

2. Performance Testing: Submit test forms which are identical to or similar to the accepted Initial Performance Testing forms. Obtain approval from the Owner’s

Representative for any changes in test procedure or forms.

3. Continuous Operational/Functional Testing: Submit a detailed test procedure for the continuous functional testing described generally in this Section. Submit for approval by the Owner’s Representative a minimum of 15 days prior to testing.

J. Test Results:

1. Initial Performance Testing: Submit completed test results for point-by-point testing to the Owner’s Representative five days prior to scheduled Performance Testing.

2. Performance Testing: Submit completed test results prior to or with the request to begin the Continuous Operational Test.

3. Continuous Operational Test: Submit completed test results prior to or with the request for Substantial Completion.

K. Record (As-Built) Documents:

1. Provide and submit As Built drawings noting the actual configuration of installed devices, security equipment, data room layouts to the entity with jurisdiction prior to the scheduling of any inspections. These drawings shall be wet sealed prior to submission and shall document the changes from the Bid Drawings.

2. Maintain a current record set of as-built drawings on the job and as construction and installation progress; show the actual installed location of all items, material, and equipment.

3. Accurately record actual routing of all conduits including sizes and types.

4. The as-built drawings shall be available to the Owner’s Representative for review and will be required for evaluation of progress payments.

5. Submit as-built shop drawings created from the approved shop drawings and updated from the site as-built drawing set and any other drawings required to depict the as-built conditions of the installed work.

L. Operational Manuals:

1. Submit the (3) identical manuals, which shall contain the Theory of Operation, start up, shut down and emergency procedures, and the manufacturer’s operating instructions.

2. Subdivide the manual by section with tab dividers. Provide a table of contents which identifies each section and the contents therein.

3. Submit an electronic copy.

M. Maintenance Manuals:

1. Submit a complete (3) sets of maintenance documents as described in this Section.

For documents of sizes greater than 11 x 17 inches, prints and electronic copy shall be furnished.

2. Manuals shall include the following as a minimum requirement: a. Technical system description.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280500 - 12


08/07/2013

b. System schematics. c. Detailed wiring diagrams to identify cabling, termination, and routing. d. Panel assembly drawings to identify location of components, terminal strips, and equipment as required to correlate with system drawings. e. Descriptions and drawings as required to maintain equipment from the board to the component level. f. Description of software and user programmable functions. Procedures for user programmable functions shall be included. g. A complete printout of each unique system program.

3. For systems where the program resides on electronic media or other similar storage medium, furnish a copy of the media, or similar medium, to the Owner’s

Representative. Provide all required system licenses as well as (2) additional licenses prior to Substantial Completion.

4. Where multiple systems are combined into a single integrated system, documentation shall include a description of the integrated system and the details of the interfaces between systems.

5. Provide a list of current telephone numbers and addresses of all material vendors and equipment manufacturers who have supplied components in this Project.

Include separate service telephone list and purchasing telephone list crossreferencing with each component.


A. Protect all materials and equipment from damage during storage at the site and throughout the construction period. Protect equipment and materials during shipment and storage against physical damage, dirt, dust, moisture, cold, rain, and any foreign substances that may damage the equipment.

B. Prevent damage from rain, dirt, sun and ground water by storing the equipment on elevated supports and covering them on all sides with securely fastened protective rigid or flexible waterproof coverings.

C. Protect conduit by storing it on elevated supports and capping the ends with suitable closure material to prevent dirt accumulation.

D. Protect all fabricated and/or installed materials and equipment against dust, dirt, moisture, physical damage, metal debris, and any foreign substances that may damage the equipment.

E. Protect painted surfaces with removable heavy Kraft paper, sheet vinyl or equal, installed at the factory and removed prior to final inspection.

F. Replace equipment determined by the Owner’s Representative to be damaged. Repaint and finish damaged paint on equipment and materials with the same quality of paint and workmanship used by manufacturer so that repaired areas are not obvious.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280500 - 13


08/07/2013


A. Site Investigation

1. Prior to submitting a bid, the Contractor shall perform a site survey of all related existing systems and submit any potential problems of the design documents that may increase the installation cost of the project.

2. Survey all locations to assure that the existing equipment on site, e.g. switch port, network switches, etc are sufficient to support the new and reinstalled CCTV cameras and ACAM equipment. These switches and equipment are located in all data room locations. IN addition, this survey shall verify that where work is to be performed and verify existing conditions prior to shop drawing submittals.

B. Existing Systems

1. It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that all equipment supplied under this Specification is 100% compatible with the existing systems and wiring installed in the facility and shall be compatible and integratible with existing RTC security systems. The Contractor shall investigate and verify the capability of existing equipment, e.g. switch ports, network switches, etc.. can support the identified equipment on the contract drawings. The Contractor shall promptly identify any issues with existing equipment and be responsible for the notifying the Owner and for inclusion of this equipment in his bid documents. The Contractor shall install, configure, and program the systems described in this Specification to ensure that the new and existing systems operate as one seamless entity.

2. Extensive interface to the existing facility security and communication systems is required as part of this Work. All connections to the existing systems shall be thoroughly detailed in submittals and approved prior to commencing any work.

3. If it is necessary to temporarily remove or disconnect any part of the existing systems or equipment for the purposes of interfacing and connecting new equipment, the

Contractor shall reinstall and make fully operational all equipment and devices removed or disconnected. Any and all system cutovers and interruptions must be pre-approved and carefully coordinated with Owner and Facility.

C. Match Existing Conditions

1. Paint new exposed conduit, boxes and supports to match existing condition. If new conduit is installed along with existing non-painted conduit the existing condition would not be painted and thus not require painting. If new conduit is installed by itself or along with existing painted conduit then the existing condition would require painting to match. Concealed conduit including conduit in electrical rooms need not be painted unless otherwise noted.

2. Repair, patch, clean and paint existing surfaces that are damaged, disturbed or left in an unfinished or mismatching condition as a result of the work of this contract, to match the adjacent area.

D. Existing Equipment Disposition

1. Remove, refurbish, and re-install devices, equipment and materials specifically noted on the Drawings. During removal and storage, protect devices from damage.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280500 - 14


08/07/2013

2. Remove, package, and turnover all devices, equipment, and materials specifically noted on the Drawings to be removed and turnover to the Owner. During removal and storage, protect devices from damage.

3. Remove and dispose materials that are not to be reinstalled or turned over to the

Owner.

4. Contractor shall abide by all facility rules.

E. Security Requirements

1. Special security requirements will be provided by the facility. See Division 1.

2. Special requirements may include limited access to the work area by area or time, background checks of on-site personnel, restrictions of equipment and tools to include tool counts.

1.11 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. General Requirements:

1. Do not begin the project without the Owner’s acceptance of proposed key project personnel for the Division 28 Work.

2. Prepare, review, and coordinate with the Owner’s Representative an approved construction (CPM) work schedule. Schedule work in areas and at times that will not interfere with scheduled activities as defined by the Owner’s Representative.

3. Do not procure any equipment without accepted product data submittals. Do not perform any field installation without accepted shop drawings. Do not begin any extensive software development or programming without accepted system, operational narratives, the required Owner’s coordination, and user's requirements.

4. Pre-assemble control electronics, control panels, racks, and cabinets off-site as most practical.

5. Install system control equipment, control panels, cabinets, racks, and consoles only after major construction in the area in which they are to be installed has been completed and areas have been cleaned, painted, and sealed.

6. After systems installation and prior to point-by-point performance testing, thoroughly pre-test all devices and device wiring for proper performance. Then, thoroughly pretest each system function in each state or condition under every operating mode.

B. Coordinate all work in the existing facility with the Phase 1/Phase 2 contractor(s) and the facility contact person.

1.12 WARRANTY

A. The Contractor is to provide a warranty for 48 months from the Date of Substantial

Completion of the work provided under this contract (including, but not limited to, software, hardware, and peripheral equipment) as a system, including interfaces to work by others for one year from the date of Acceptance of the Work. Specific Division 28 sections may require longer warranty periods. Divisions of work among various suppliers, vendors, installers, subcontractors, and other parties will not be recognized or accepted.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280500 - 15


08/07/2013

B. Extended Warranty: Submit to the Owner prior to the Date of Substantial Completion an itemized pricing for an Extended Service and Warranty for each year after the initial warranty period up to five (5) years. Describe whether all parts and labor are included in this offering.

C. Guarantee to repair and replace defective materials or workmanship during the warranty period including labor and materials.

D. An emergency maintenance (Warranty) request shall be defined as a system or portion of a system failure that affects building safety, security, and operation of critical components.

Failure of a single component (i.e., smoke detector, intercom station, camera, or monitor) is not considered an emergency maintenance request.

E. Respond within four hours to an emergency maintenance request. Provide a twenty-four hour telephone contact number (24 hours per day, 365 days per year). Service response time is defined as the period between the placing of a service request and the arrival of a qualified technician capable servicing the problem on-site.

F. Maintain a sufficient parts inventory at the project during the warranty period to meet the guaranteed system repair times.

G. Repair and make operational any defective materials or workmanship resulting from an emergency maintenance request within an 8-hour period from the time of the initial arrival of service personnel at the site. Correct non-emergency defective materials or workmanship within four (4) calendar days of receiving notice of the defect.

H. Where the equipment manufacturer's warranty covers a longer time period than that required by these Specifications, the manufacturer's warranty shall govern.


A. Prior to Acceptance of the Work, deliver to the Owner all spare parts and extra materials required in each Section. All spare parts and extra materials shall be brand new in their original shipping boxes or packages and shall have one year material warranty remaining at the time of delivery. Extra materials shall be available to the Contractor to use as immediate replacements during the warranty period. All extra materials used for the warranty requirements shall be replaced by the Contractor. Provide the Owner with (2) additional equipment and device licenses prior to the date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Tools:

1. Provide three of each type of security screw bits used.

2. Provide minimum of one of any specialty tools used.

C. Spare Parts:

1. Provide 25 of each type and size of security screw used.

2. Provide 2 additional Reader Interface Devices used.


RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280500 - 16


08/07/2013

A. Technical Support: Beginning with Substantial Completion, provide software support for four years at all RTC sites. This agreement shall include all software upgrades, all technical support and shall be all inclusive. a. Upgrade Service: Update software to latest version at Project completion and provide continuous upgrades as these upgrades are identified and made available. Install and program software upgrades that become available within four years from date of Substantial Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system at all RTC Sites, e.g. Sunset Maintenance, Bonneville

Transit Center, South Strip Transfer Terminal, Administration Building (600 S.

Grand Central Parkway) and all sites. These Upgrade shall include new or revised licenses for use of software and all labor, equipment, testing, parts and any/all other related costs.

1) Provide 30 days' notice to Owner to allow scheduling and access to system and to allow Owner to upgrade computer equipment if necessary.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Comply with the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specifications.

B. The products named in this section and the sections governed by this section establish minimum qualities that substitutions must meet to be considered acceptable. The specified products have also been used in preparing the drawings and specifications, and therefore establish the basis for equipment sizing, wire and cable design, power consumption, and other design parameters.

C. Substitution requests, if permitted, will be considered only if submitted in strict accordance with the followings:

1. Cross-reference submitted items to the Specifications using their related Section and paragraph number.

2. Submit complete product data, descriptive literature, catalog cuts, illustrations, schematics, technical data sheets, and test data necessary for the Owner’s

Representative to ascertain that proposed equipment and materials comply with specification requirements. Include manufacturer’s name, model, catalog or part numbers. Catalog cuts shall be legible and shall clearly identify equipment being submitted.

3. Disclosure of Product Deviations: Specifically identify and tabulate any and all deviations from the contract documents including all system functions and features.

Reference the corresponding specification sections and paragraph/article numbers.

All variances and deviations will be reviewed for acceptance or rejection. It will be the

Contractor’s sole responsibilities to comply with all other contract requirements not revealed in the disclosure of product deviations.

D. The Contractor shall take full responsibility for all design, coordination, and cost associated with substitutions including, but not limited to:

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280500 - 17


08/07/2013

1. Its integration into the total system including physical mounting space, electrical interconnection, signal wiring, power, quality, electromagnetic interference, communication protocols, and similar design considerations.

2. Any additional materials, equipment, components, accessories, items required for equivalent system operation and performance.

3. Any necessary changes to branch power circuits, circuit protective devices, and the

Work of other trades.

4. Any modifications to wire, cable, and raceway design.

2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. All equipment and materials required for installation under these Specifications shall be new and without blemish or defect.

B. Materials and equipment furnished shall be of current production by manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacturing of such items, for which replacement parts are available.

Specifications are prepared long in advance of project construction; the contractor is to use the newest model of the specified products available at bid time.

C. All material and equipment shall be listed, labeled, or certified by Underwriters’ Laboratories,

Inc., where such standards have been established. Equipment and material which are not covered by UL Standard will be accepted provided equipment and material is listed, labeled, certified or otherwise determined to meet safety requirements of a nationally recognized testing laboratory. Equipment of a class which no nationally recognized testing laboratory accepts, certifies, lists, labels, or determines to be safe will be considered, if inspected or tested in accordance with national industrial standards such as NEMA or ANSI.

D. All parts of a system shall be the product of one manufacturer. When more than one unit of the same class of equipment or material is required, such units shall be the products of a single manufacturer. Constituent parts which are similar shall be the product of a single manufacturer.

E. All components of an assembled unit need not be products of the same manufacturer; however, all components must be acceptable to the Owner’s Representative. Components shall be compatible with each other and with the total assembly for the intended service.

2.03 EQUIPMENT MODIFICATIONS:

A. When standard manufactured equipment is modified from its original condition or factory options have been exercised identify the changes as noted below.

1. Clearly identify the modifications on the shop drawings.

2. Clearly identify each piece of modified equipment with a label, which states, “This unit has been modified...” and identify the modification or reference. Locate the label so that a service technician or factory service personal will be able to determine the equipment in use is non-standard and that modifications are required for service, testing and replacement.

3. Identify and describe the modifications on the Record Documents.

B. Equipment modification labels are not required for jumper or switch settings.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280500 - 18


08/07/2013

2.04 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate enclosures to easily accommodate interconnecting cables entering from above or below through the use of auxiliary gutters, cable trays, and conduits. Protect all metal cabinet edges where conductors cross and conduit ends with protective covering or bushing.

B. Group wires and cables by types, boards and modules, and maintain National Electrical

Code clearances throughout the installation, including Class 1, Class 2, communications, and branch circuit power separations. Maintain sufficient and proper separation between microphone-level audio, line-level audio, high-level audio, and video cables.

C. Uniformly organize equipment and cable routing throughout all enclosures, racks, and cabinets. Provide wiring ducts, wireways, wire posts, D rings, wire saddles to route and secure factory and field wiring. Provide routing for all wiring from point of entry to point of termination to maintain required separation, access to all components, and general organization to the wiring. Neatly dress, route and secure wiring.

D. Mechanically fasten cabinet raceways and cable clamps to enclosure rear panels, rack members, console members, or to other system components. The use of adhesive fasteners (without mechanical fastener) is not permitted. Furnish and install cable support posts where necessary to properly support cables.

E. No splices are permitted in cabinet raceways. Exception: Splice to cable shield when within two inches of cable termination is permitted.

F. Furnish and install metal grounding type outlet strips in each equipment cabinet, enclosure, and rack. Leave a minimum of two unused receptacles at each location for future expansion.

Neatly shorten and dress power cords from individual equipment to the outlet strips.

G. Provide protection from accidental contact of all terminals or exposed conductors over 25 volts within enclosures that contain Class 2 wiring. Use non-conductive barriers, heat shrink or other acceptable methods. Tape of any kind is not permitted.

H. Provide an isolated ground bus within each equipment cabinet, enclosure, and rack for single point termination of audio and data shields and grounds.


A. Shop Inspections:

1. Have trained, qualified, quality assurance inspector regularly inspect shop assemblies. Inspect for quality of workmanship, neatness, part and wiring identification, conformance to codes and standards, and compliance with system

Specifications and shop drawings.

2. The Owner’s Representative shall have the right at all times to inspect or otherwise evaluate the Work performed or being performed and shall have access to the premises in which the Work is being performed.

3. The Owner’s Representative may verify the inspections or re-inspect any item. The

Owner reserves the right to reject materials and workmanship found unacceptable during inspections.

B. Shop Test and Demonstration

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280500 - 19


08/07/2013

1. Shop Test and Demonstration shall be a major milestone that shall commence only after all shop assembly, system integration, and software development and programming is complete. Owner’s approval of the integrated shop test shall be obtained before any system components are shipped to the site for installation.

2. Perform a point-by-point system demonstration of the Integrated Security System including CCTV system, Duress Alarm System, Integrated Sequences of Operation,

PLC system, control panels, Intercom, and Public Address system to show all systems functioning and communicating as a single integrated system.

3. Each input and output point, operational sequence, control panel, and PLC network will be tested. Provide sample field devices, approved mock up devices and jumpers to simulate actual field operation conditions. In addition, simulated system failure, response time, reset and boot up time, and other tests will be conducted as directed by the Owner.

4. Sample field devices including, but not limited to are, intercom stations, paging speakers, microphones, cameras, CCTV monitors, locks, and door position monitoring devices.

5. Notify the Owner a minimum of 15 working days prior to demonstration so that the

Owner may witness the demonstration.

6. Conduct the demonstration in strict accordance with the test procedure accepted by the Owner. Demonstrate full compliance with the required operating modes and sequences of operation under all operating modes. Record demonstration/ test results on a report which shall include a list of all personnel witnessing the demonstration, test methods used, and a record of each specific test made.

7. If demonstration results are not in compliance with requirements, make necessary hardware and software changes, corrections, repairs, or adjustments at no additional cost to the Owner. If corrections cannot be made during the scheduled Shop Test and another shop test is required, the Contractor shall pay for all transportation, lodging and expenses of the Owner’s representatives’ (maximum seven people) attending the additional tests. This process shall continue until the systems are acceptable to the Owner.

2.06 FIRESTOPPING/SEALANT MATERIALS

A. Firestop and seal all penetrations of fire walls with minimum three hour sealant or Fire Stop

Putty (FSP). This includes but is not limited to all raceway, conductor, sleeve and cable tray penetrations where penetrating device does not completely seal the hole.

B. Accepted Products: International Protective Coatings Corp. Flame Safe FSP 1100, Nelson

FSP, Domtar Fire-Halt or approved equal from other manufacturers.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Carefully inspect the installed Work by other trades and verify that all such Work is complete to the point where installation of the Work of this division may properly commence.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280500 - 20


08/07/2013

B. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Owner’s Representative. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until such discrepancies have been fully resolved.

C. Install all equipment in accordance with all pertinent codes and regulations, the accepted design, and the referenced standards.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Identification:

1. Install a nameplate on each individual equipment rack, enclosure, boxes, cabinet, and significant equipment item.

2. Use identifiers and abbreviations defined in the Drawings whenever possible. Use plan designation for labeling, unless indicated otherwise.

3. Nameplates shall be laminated black phonemic resin with a white core and engraved lettering, a minimum of 1/4” high. Use fasteners to install nameplates. Do not fasten with adhesives.

4. Engrave using upper case letters of uniform height; centered on device, cover plate, or enclosure; with all characters made clearly and distinctly.

5. All equipment shall have the manufacturer’s name, address, model number and rating on a name plate securely affixed in a conspicuous place. All equipment shall bear labels attesting to Underwriters Laboratories approval where subject to

Underwriters Laboratories label service.

6. Identify all field terminals and relays with device identification. Lettering shall be

3/16” high minimum.

B. Equipment Installation:

1. Install all equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and accepted shop drawings. Provide all required licenses for equipment and devices.

2. Install all equipment in compliance with CEC requirements, NECA's "Standard of

Installation", and recognized industry practices.

3. If requested, submit structural and seismic mounting load calculations demonstrating adequate support and bracing for seismic zone 4.

4. Do not attach electrical materials to roof decking, removable or knockout panels, or temporary walls and partitions unless indicated otherwise. Use hangers and other supports to support the equipment and materials, intended for this purpose.

5. Locate equipment as close as practical to the locations shown on the Drawings.

6. Maintain minimum 3-foot working clearances on each side of equipment or equipment racks where access is required to inspect, service or adjust.

7. Check equipment against available mounting space indicated on the drawings.

Coordinate location of equipment with existing devices to minimize interference.

Bring all conflicts or clearance problems to the attention of the Owner’s

Representative during the preparation of shop drawings.

8. Where the Owner’s Representative determines that equipment installation is not conveniently accessible for operation and maintenance, remove and reinstall equipment in a conveniently accessible manner at no extra cost.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280500 - 21


08/07/2013

C. Grounding and Shielding:


D. Surge Suppression:



A. Initial Performance Testing:

1. Initial Performance Testing is to be conducted by the Contractor.

2. Point-by-point testing shall include the sequential operation of each system and control function in each of its operating modes. All tests are to be conducted and recorded per the accepted procedure and test forms.

3. Notify the Owner’s Representative five days in advance that this activity will be occurring.

B. Performance Testing:

1. Performance Testing is to be conducted by the Contractor and witnessed by the

Owner’s Representative.

2. Schedule point-by-point performance testing only after Initial Testing has been satisfactorily completed and all necessary corrections have been made. Provide the

Owner’s Representative with a minimum of 5 working days notice with a request to schedule Performance Testing. Submit Initial Performance Test records prior to the scheduled Performance Test. Failure to submit test results as specified shall be cause to re-schedule testing.

3. Point-by-point testing shall include the sequential operation of each function in each of its operating modes, in addition to completion of all required performance testing and measurement.

4. Conduct point-by-point testing in the presence of Owner's Representative. Record test results on the accepted test checklist which shall include a list of all personnel witnessing the tests. If test results are not in compliance with requirements, make necessary changes or adjustments at no additional cost, and arrange for another test.

This process shall continue until the systems are acceptable to the Owner’s

Representative.

5. Failure of any part of the system which precludes completion of system testing, which cannot be repaired in four (4) hours, shall be cause for terminating the test.

Repeated failures which result in a cumulative time of eight (8) hours to effect repairs, shall cause the system test to be declared unacceptable. Retesting of the entire system shall be rescheduled at the convenience of the Owner.

6. Performance Testing will also include inspections for contract document compliance, codes and standards compliance, and workmanship.

C. Continuous Functional/Operational Testing:

1. After completion and Owner Representative’s approval of the Performance Testing, conduct a 14-day operational test in order to demonstrate continuous system performance. The systems will not be accepted until they operate for 15 continuous

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280500 - 22


08/07/2013

days without a system failure. Restart the test period from the beginning after every confirmed system failure.

2. The Owner will provide staff to man and operate all control points during continuous operational testing. The Owner’s test personnel will simulate staff movement, generate alarms, and otherwise randomly operate as many functions as practical on a nearly continuous, 8-hour-shift basis. Provide jumpers and simulation programs to test alarms and other conditions that cannot be readily performed by test personnel.

The test staff will record all suspected problems and provide these reports to the test committee.

3. The test committee will be composed of representatives from the Owner, Consultant, and Contractor, and will meet on a regular basis during testing to evaluate problem reports and determine if system failures have occurred. The Owner’s Representative will make the final determination for all disputed problems.

4. System failure is defined as any portion of the system that fails to operate as intended and can not be corrected within 24 hours of the failure. Individual device failure such as a single camera or a single intercom station will not be a cause for system failure.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Comply with Division 1 requirements.

B. Protect equipment during installation against entry of foreign matter on the inside. Vacuum clean all equipment both inside and outside before testing, operating and painting. Clean electrical connections with a suitable solvent prior to assembly.

C. Remove from the premises and dispose of all packing material and debris on a daily basis.

D. Upon completion of the Work, remove excess debris, materials, equipment, apparatus, tools and the like and leave the premises clean, neat and orderly.

E. Thoroughly polish all bright metal or plated Work and remove any pasted labels, dirt or stains from the equipment.

3.05 TRAINING

A. Provide on-site, project-specific training sessions for system operations, maintenance, and programming with designated total hours as follows:

1. Electronic Components

2. Video Surveillance (CCTV) System

3. Access Control System

4. Duress Alarm System

Operational Maintenance Programming

0 1 0

4

4

1

4

4

1

8

8

0

B. All classroom training is to occur on site at a location provided by the Owner.

C. Professionally video tape all training sessions and furnish two forms of storage media (VHS tape and DVD) to the Owner for use in future training sessions.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280500 - 23


08/07/2013

D. All training is to review the existing systems as they apply to the equipment and systems provided under this contract. All personnel being trained are expected to have basic experience for the existing systems.

E. Operational Training:

1. Train security staff in the operation of the System. Operational training shall include how to monitor and control the systems provided under this contract and how to respond to system events.

F. Maintenance Training:

1. Train Owner’s personnel in the basic user level maintenance and trouble shooting of the System. Structure training to identify the equipment and systems that can be serviced or reset by the on duty building engineer, how to identify systems that have failed or not working, and emergency shut down procedures.

2. Provide a combination of classroom sessions supported by audio/visual aids, and field sessions with personnel participating in hands-on preventative, corrective maintenance and reactive maintenance.

G. Programming Training:

1. Train Owner’s personnel in the site-specific programming and software trouble shooting of the System. Training will also include all user programmable features.

Conduct training sessions using instructors who have been actively involved throughout construction and who are certified in writing by the manufacturers of the specific systems.

2. Provide a combination of classroom sessions supported by audio/visual aids, and field sessions with personnel participating in hands-on for programming changes, software uploading/downloading, trouble shooting, etc.

H. Submit an estimated training schedule 15 days prior to training for approval by the Owner’s

Representative. Estimate classroom and hands-on hours required for all three types of training (operational, maintenance, and programming). Include a syllabus for each class session.

I. All training materials including Operational and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals shall be reviewed and approved prior to conducting the specific training.

END OF SECTION

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280500 - 24


08/07/2013

SCHEDULE 28 A

SAMPLE LIST OF DIVISION 28 SUBMITTALS

1. CPM Schedule

2. Submittal Matrix

3. Schedule of Values (SOV)

4. Licenses and certifications

5. Key Project Personnel

6. Product Data

7. Shop Drawings a. Floor Plans b. Enlarged Control / Equipment Rooms and Elevations c. Rack and Cabinet Elevations d. Block Diagrams e. Single Line Diagrams f. Point- to-Point Diagrams g. Schematic Diagrams h. Installation Diagrams and Details

8. Calculations; UPS, Data

9. Sequence of Operations

10. Samples

11. Test Procedures

12. Test Results

13. Record Documents a. Drawings b. O&M Manuals c. Warranty

14. Extra Materials

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280500 - 25


08/07/2013

SECTION 280513

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 GENERAL



Conditions and other Division 1 Specifications, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY


1. Building wire and cable.

2. Wiring connectors and connections.


1. 260533

2. 271100

3. 271300

4. 271500

5. 280500

6. 280514

7. 280526

8. 280528

9. 281300

10. 281500

11. 281650

12. 282300






Fiber Optics


Raceways and Boxes



Duress Alarm System


1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Provide wiring and cables as described herein, shown on the drawings or as recommended by the manufacturer. When in conflict, the more stringent or greater requirements will take precedence as determined by the Engineer of Record.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280513 - 1


08/07/2013

B. Wires, cables, harnesses and connectors specifically described in another section or provided by or manufactured by a manufacturer in that section shall be provided by that section.

C. Wire size and features are minimum requirements, specific applications or manufacturers may have more stringent requirements which are to be provided at no additional cost to

Owner.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with Section 280500, General Requirements and General Conditions.


A. Comply with Section 280500, General Requirements and General Conditions.

B. NEC Compliance: Comply with Article 725 (Class 2 Power-limited Circuits).

C. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum ten years documented experience.


A. Conductor sizes are based on copper.

B. Aluminum conductors shall not be used.

C. Wire and cable routing shown on Drawings is approximate unless dimensioned. Route wire and cable as required to meet Project Conditions.

D. Where wire and cable routing is not shown, and destination only is indicated, determine exact routing and lengths required.

1.07 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate Work with other trades.

B. Determine required separation between cable and other work.

C. Determine cable routing to avoid interference with other work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Provide materials from listed manufacturers or approved equal.

B. Approved cable manufactures:

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280513 - 2


08/07/2013

1. Belden

2. Berk-tek

3. Commscope/General Instrument

4. General Cable

5. Mohawk

6. Optical Cable Corporation.

7. West Penn

2.02 CONNECTORS

A. Terminal Blocks:

1. Type: DIN-rail-mounted, modular, screw terminals.

2. Provide fused terminals where required or indicated.

3. Accepted Manufacturers: Entrelec, Phoenix Contact, Weidmueller, or approved equal.

B. CCTV Video Connectors:

1. Type: 75-ohm, commercial crimp-on, 3-piece BNC connectors.

2. Body: Zinc outer piece and nickel center.

3. Contacts: Nickel/gold plating.

4. Accepted Products: Cambridge CPMC-78 series, AMP or approved equal from other manufacturers.

C. Data Connectors:

1. Type: Deluxe plastic, 9-pin, D sub-miniature hoods

2. Accepted Products: Cambridge HX series, AMP or approved equal from other manufacturers.

2.03 WIRES AND CABLES

A. Accepted Products: Belden, West Penn or approved equal.

B. Listings and Markings: UL listed and marked for flame resistance as follows:

1. General purpose: CEC Type CM

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280513 - 3


08/07/2013

2. Riser:

3. Plenum:

CEC Type CMR

CEC Type CMP

C. Communication and Control Cables:

1. Conductors: Stranded bare copper, size as indicated.

2. Insulation level: 300 VRMS.

3. Temperature level: 75° C.

4. Paired cables shall be twisted.

5. Shield (where indicated): 100% coverage aluminum polyester foil with drain wire.

D. Coaxial Cables:

1. Nominal impedance: 75 ohms.

2. Conductor: Stranded bare copper.

3. Dual shield: 100% coverage aluminum polyester tape with 95% coverage tinned copper braid.

4. Maximum attenuation at 10 MHz: 0.87 dB per 100 feet.

5. Insulation: Foam polyethylene, 300 VRMS.

6. Minimum temperature level: 75° C

E. Data Grade Cables:

1. Type: Twisted individually shielded pairs, quantity and size as indicated.

2. Conductors: Stranded bare copper.

3. Insulation level: 300 VRMS.

4. Minimum temperature level: 75° C

5. Maximum capacitance between conductors: 25 pf per foot.

6. Shield: 100% coverage aluminum polyester foil with drain wire.

F. Category 6 UTP

1. UL listed NEC type CM as defined in NEC Article 800

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280513 - 4


08/07/2013

2. Complies with UL 1581 Test

3. Meets and Exceeds TIA/EIA 568-B.2 Specifications

4. Verified to Category 6 requirements by independent third party testing laboratory

G. Category 3 UTP

1. High pair count unshielded 24-AWG solid conductor twisted-pair core with a metallic sheath ARMM riser rated shall meet or exceed the TIA/EIA-568B Commercial

Building Standards for CAT3. The cable will be riser or plenum rated as dictated by

National, State and Local Electrical and Building Codes.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with Section 17050, General Requirements.

B. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations, procedures, and standards for the assembly, programming, and operation of the alarm system.

C. Coordinate closely with the door and frame contractor for proper installation of all door position sensors per manufacturer’s recommendations.

D. Mount individual components to removable rear panels in wall-mounted cabinets using

DIN rails, snap track or stand off-mounted PC boards, or properly sized mounting hardware.

E. Fuses: Provide over-current protection for control relay outputs and associated wiring.

F. Power Distribution:

1. Hardwire each system power supply circuit to a line voltage transient voltage surge suppresser at its point of supply.

2. Coordinate with the electrical contractor for power capacities and circuit assignments in the electrical panel schedules and drawings for the alarm systems. Notify the

Owner if additional power or circuits may be required.

3.02 WIRE TERMINATION, DRESSING, AND IDENTIFICATION:

A. Terminate or join all wires and cables with specified terminal blocks or connectors submitted and accepted for the specific termination. Acceptable termination and junction methods include:

1. Equipment or device terminal blocks (provided with equipment or device): Direct connection with stripped conductors.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280513 - 5


08/07/2013

2. Equipment or device screw terminals (provided with equipment or device): Twocrimp, spade lug on stripped conductors.

3. Device lead wires (provided with device): Two-crimp, insulated wire nut over conductors.

4. Equipment or device connector (provided with equipment or device): Provide mating connector.

5. Junctions and/or splices where indicated: Provide terminal blocks for control and communication cables and specified connector types for others.

B. Use the specific cable stripper for each cable and wire type. Use a 3-step-cut coax cable stripper on coaxial cables, a jacket stripper on jacketed cables, and the proper size stripper for individual conductors. Do not strip with a knife, scissors or other improper tool.

C. Use the proper crimping tool for each cable / connector combination. For example, crimp coaxial cables using a full-cycle ratchet crimp tool with the specific size hexagonal steel die for the cable type. Crimp D-subminiature connectors using a specific D-sub crimp tool, and so on.

D. For multi-pin connectors use the appropriate pin insertion and extraction tool.

E. Dress wires and cables to provide a neat and orderly appearance within all enclosures, equipment racks, cabinets, and consoles by routing in snap-cover, plastic wiring duct or other acceptable method. In locations where wiring duct is not feasible, organize by cable clamping, dressing and tie-wrapping.

F. Relieve strain on all loose wire bundles using tie-wrap supports fastened with machine screws or bolts. Do not use self-adhesive type supports.

G. Neatly form cable ends and apply shrinkable tubing to shielded cables or where necessary to secure the insulation against fraying or raveling.

H. Individually identify all conductors with a unique number located within 1-1/2-inch from its termination at both ends. Impress the number on a fixed length of white shrinkable tubing with a heat impression stamping machine, or other acceptable method.

I. Cross reference the interconnection diagrams of the record drawings with the installed cable identification numbers.

J. Route from source to termination in a uniform manner through raceways, cabinets, and equipment housings without breaking the insulation or deforming the cables. "Flying splices", meaning splices in wire bundles, raceways, or pull boxes are specifically prohibited. Splice only at junction box locations shown on the Drawings.

K. Obtain Owner’s pre-approval for all exposed cable runs.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280513 - 6


08/07/2013

L. Maintain separation between Class 1, Class 2, communications, and branch circuit power wire and cable in accordance with the SNEC. Do not route microphone-level audio, linelevel audio, or high-level audio in the same conduit or cable group.

M. Do not exceed the following cable pulling tensions or per manufacturer requirements:

1. 24 AWG conductors: 4 lbs. per conductor.






N. Use a scale to measure tensions for typical cable pulls. If tensions are exceeded even momentarily or if cables are damaged, remove the cables. Install new cables either using an acceptable anti-friction agent or adding pull boxes to the run.

O. Install edge protection materials ("cat track") on the edges of holes, lips of ducts of any other point where wires or cables cross sharp metallic edges.


A. Performance Testing:

1. Comply with Section 280500, Performance Testing for: a. Initial Performance Testing. b. Performance Testing.

2. Category 6 Cable Testing Requirements: a. Test results shall be submitted both hardcopy and soft formats. These two submissions shall also be accompanied by an affidavit, signed by a Contractor

Official, stating that each basic link in the horizontal cabling system was tested and passed the required performance tests, with the official warranting the truth and accuracy of the two reports submitted. b. The hardcopy report is to be submitted in a labeled, 3-ring binder. c. The machine readable report is to be submitted on CD. This submission must also include the software necessary to view the report. Software is not required if the submission is in a CSV format or directly readable by Microsoft

Excel.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280513 - 7


08/07/2013

. d. The test result database for the horizontal cabling system shall contain, at a minimum, the following information;

1) Circuit id assigned to each basic link and OWNER id. Coordinate with

OWNER for the assignment of this information.

2) The wire map results indicating passage of tests for;

3) Shorts,

4) Opens,

5) Miswires,

6) Splits,

7) Pairs,

8) Crossed Pairs,

9) End-to-end connectivity. e. The worst-case result, frequently at which it occurred, and the TIA limit for:

1) Attenuation,

2) NEXT,

3) PSNEXT,

4) Return loss,

5) ELFTEXT,

6) PSELFEXT. f. Note; CONTRACTOR shall provide calculated normalized attenuation (to 100 meters) as part of the submitted test data in addition to the attenuation reported by the test equipment. g. The results for tem ‘e’ above shall be provided for all pairs and pair combinations and for both directions of the link, as required by the TIA specifications for each test parameter.

1) Length (in feet), propagation delay, delay skew,

2) Results of ambient noise tests,

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280513 - 8


08/07/2013

3) Cable manufacturer, cable part number, cable type and NVP for the cable.

4) Tester manufacturer, model, serial number, hardware version, software version.

5) Tester auto test specifications used.

6) Date of test.

3.04 TRAINING

A. Provide training in accordance with Section 280500, Demonstration.

END OF SECTION

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280513 - 9


08/07/2013

SECTION 280514

FIBER OPTICS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

3. Fiber Optic Patch Panel.

4. Fiber Optic Jumper Cables.

5. Fiber Optic Inner Duct.

6. Fiber Video Transmitter and Receiver.

7. Fiber Data Transmitter and Receiver.

8. Fiber Video and Data Transmitter and Receiver.

9. Fiber Rack and Mounts.

1. 17050 Electronic Systems General Requirements

2. 17120 Conductors Cables

3. 17125

4. 17160

5. 17680

6. 17716

Raceways and Boxes




7. 17717 Communications Horizontal Cabling

8. 17720 Electronic

9. 17728

10. 17723

11. 17782


Duress Alarm System


1.02 REFERENCES

A. CODES AND STANDARDS

1. Underwriters Laboratories (UL).

2. National Electric Code: Articles 770 and 800 (latest issue).

3. Southern Nevada Electrical Code (SNEC).

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280514 - 1

FIBER OPTICS

12/06/2013

4. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): National, state and local building and fire codes.

5. ANSI/TIA/EIA 455, standard Test Procedures for Fiber Optics, Current Issue.

6. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling

Standards and Addendums, current editions.

7. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569, Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications

Pathways and Spaces, current issue

8. ANSI/EIA/TIA-598-A, Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding (May 1995).

9. ANSI/TIA/EIA-606, The Administration Standard for the Telecommunications

Infrastructure of Commercial Building current issue.

10. ANSI/TIA/EIA-607, Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications current issue.

11. ANSI/TIA/EIA-758, Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications

Cabling Standard current issue.

12. TIA/EIA TSB-95 Additional Transmission Performance Guidelines for 4-Pair 100 ohm Category 5e Cabling with Addendums.

13. TIA/EIA TSB-72, Centralized Optical Fiber Cabling Guidelines (October 1995).

14. IEEE 802.3 (Ethernet), 802.3Z (Gigabit Ethernet over optical fiber), 802.3ab

(Gigabit Ethernet over 4 pair Category 5 or higher).

15. BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (current edition).

16. FCC Part 68.50.

17. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA).

18. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), NFPA-70.

1. Provide and install pathway and cabling as shown on Drawings.

2. Furnish and install all appropriate cables, connectors, patch cords, and cable management hardware internal to the cabinets/racks.

3. Install and functionally test all fiber equipment which shall include but is not limited to transmitters, receivers, patch panels, mounts, and racks. Refer to Part

3 for test requirements.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Conform to the requirements of Section 17050, General.

A. Conduit routing shown on the Drawings is approximate, actual routing will depend on site conditions and code requirements.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280514 - 2

FIBER OPTICS

12/06/2013

A. The Work of this section shall conform to Southern Nevada Code of Regulations and other applicable codes and standards.

B. Include in the material list submission, copies of manufacturer certifications that the installer is an authorized installer of the manufacturer products, has been adequately trained in the installation of those products.

C. System startup and testing shall be performed under the direct observation of the electrical engineer responsible for preparation of the Shop Drawings.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Provide a minimum of 15 year system performance warranty for the installed data cabling system, components of the optical data backbone cable system, cables, connectors, and transmission speeds of 10 GiGabit/sec (1000 Base X) commencing upon the date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Provide Fiber Optics System’s equipment and components including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Fiber Optic Cables................................................................................West Penn

3. Fiber Optic Patch Panel.............................................................................Panduit

4. Fiber Optic Jumper Cables........................................................................Panduit

5. Fiber Optic Inner Duct............................................................................... Panduit

6. Video/Data Transmitter……..International Fiber Systems (IFS), Bosch LTC 4681

7. Video/Data Receiver………..International Fiber Systems (IFS), Bosch LTC 4682

8. Fiber Rack Chassis w/Internal Power Supply...................…IFS, Bosch LTC 4637

A. Optical fiber shall be multimode, graded index, optical fiber wave guide with nominal

62.5/125mm-core/cladding diameter. The optical fiber shall comply with

ANSI/EIA/TIA-492.

B. Mechanical and environmental specifications for multi-mode fiber distribution cables shall be indoor/outdoor, tight-buffered type cables. The cable shall meet the requirements of NEC Section 770. Confirm that the cable is listed for the specified application.

C. Cabled optical fibers shall meet the graded performance specifications of

ANSI/TIA/EIA 568. Attenuation shall be measured in accordance with ANSI/EIA/TIA-

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280514 - 3

FIBER OPTICS

12/06/2013

455-46, -53, or -61. Information transmission capacity shall be measured in accordance with ANSI/EIA/TIA-455-51 or -30. The cable shall be measured at 23 degrees C. and 5 degrees C.

D. Multi-mode fiber optic cable shall meet the following minimum performance requirements:

1. Minimum bandwidth capability at 850 nm: 500 MHz/kilometer.

2. Minimum bandwidth capability at 1,300 nm: 500 MHz/kilometer.

3. Maximum attenuation at 850 nm: 3.5 dB/kilometer.

4. Maximum attenuation at 1,300 nm: One dB/kilometer.

E. Utilize gigabit enhanced 62.5/125 multi-mode fiber; provide performance warranty that the multi-mode optical cable will support 10 GiGabit - 1000 Base X gigabit

Ethernet transmission up to 550 meters at 850 nm using SX optics.

2.03 SINGLE-MODE FIBER CABLES

A. Single-mode optical fibers shall be Class IVa dispersion-unshifted single-mode optical fibers and shall comply with ANSI/EIA/TIA-492. Fiber conductors shall have a nominal core diameter of 8.7 microns. Cables shall have transmission window centered at 1,310 nm and 1,550 nm wavelengths.

B. Mechanical and environmental specifications for single-mode fiber distribution cables shall be indoor/outdoor, tight-buffered type cables. Cables shall meet the requirements of NEC Section 770. Contractor shall confirm the cable is certified for the specified application.

C. Cabled optical fibers shall meet the attenuation performance specifications of table

ANSI/TIA/EIA 568 A, Chapter 12, Table 12-3. Attenuation shall be measured in accordance with ANSI/EIA/TIA-455-78A or -61. Cables shall be measured at 23 degrees C. and 5 degrees C.

D. Single-mode fiber optic cable shall meet the following minimum performance requirements:

1. Maximum attenuation at 1,310 nm: 1.0 dB/kilometer (inside cables).

2. Maximum attenuation at 1,550 nm: 1.0 dB/kilometer (inside cables).

A. Shall be duplex angled, SC Type, MM or SM connectors.

2.05 FIBER OPTIC PATCH PANEL

A. Rack-mounted with the capacity to handle 12, 24, 48, 72 or 144 ports. Patch panels shall be sized to accommodate terminated strands with a 25 percent future expansion capacity. Complete kit shall include panel bulkheads and supporting hardware bulkheads with built-in cable management.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280514 - 4

FIBER OPTICS

12/06/2013

2.06 FIBER OPTIC JUMPER CABLES

A. Multi-mode 62.5/125 or single-mode duplex cable, OFNR-rated. Length shall be 1 meter at minimum, pre-manufactured with SC-SC connectors with same transmission characteristics as the terminated fibers.

B. Fiber optic patch cables shall be jacketed with polyvinyl chloride with yellow indicating a single-mode patch cable and orange indicating a multi-mode patch cable.

The cable shall meet requirements of TIA/EIA-568-B.3 except where more stringent requirements on bandwidth and attenuation are specified.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

1. Proper bending radius and pulling strength requirements of cables shall be followed during handling and installation. Cables, splice cases, punch-down frames, LIUs, patch panels and supporting hardware shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer recommendations

2. Interior innerduct and cable shall be Plenum or Riser rated, as required by applicable code regulation or standard. Riser rated innerduct as a minimum shall be installed on floor-to-floor fiber optic cabling.

3. Interior fiber shall be installed in conduit or raceway unless installed in the cable tray system where corrugated innerduct shall be used. Innerduct runs without conduit shall be installed properly strapped and supported every 4 feet.

Innerduct shall be rated for indoor or outdoor use as applicable.

4. Cables in panels, cabinets, trays, and racks shall be neatly grouped and strapped with sufficient service loop using tie-wrap cable straps. Cables and panels shall be clearly identified at both ends with a unique cable numbering system and in compliance with TIA 606.

5. All fiber optic strands shall be terminated using fusion splicing or epoxy polishing.

B. Racks/Cabinets:


2. Racks and cabinets shall be floor- or wall-mounted, as required, and provided with tip bars and additional accessories as required for a complete functional system. Racks and cabinets shall be seismically braced.

C. Labeling and Marking:

1. Provide complete cable location chart and as-built documentation in an envelope and attach to the inside rear doors of distribution frame cabinets in wiring spaces.

2. Mark distribution panels, cables and cover plates with computer-generated labels. Drops shall be labeled with the same identifier on the receptacle faceplate, inside the junction box, on the cable at the jack, on the cable at the

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280514 - 5

FIBER OPTICS

12/06/2013

patch panel, on the termination side of the patch panel, and on the patch side of the patch panel. Cable markers shall be located within 2 inches of the end of the cable jacket and shall be directly readable. Panel labels shall be computergenerated and printed using a laser printer. A disk with the label files shall be submitted as part of the project record documents.

3. Cable Identification Methodology: Utilize the room numbers of the facility to identify individual drops for new and existing facilities. Room number shall be comprised of the first three digits of the numbering scheme. In large facilities requiring more than three digits or in facilities with alphanumeric room identifiers, adjust the numbering scheme accordingly. Identifiers shall be unique and in compliance with TIA 606.

3.02 CERTIFICATION AND TESTING OF CABLING SYSTEM

A. Cables and termination hardware shall be 100 percent tested for defects in installation and to verify cable performance under installed conditions, these test results shall be submitted to the Owner for review no less than 14 calendar days after completion of all testing. Conductors of installed cables shall be verified.

Defects in the cabling system installation including, but not limited to, cable, connectors, feed through couplers, patch panels, and connector blocks shall be repaired or replaced in order to ensure 100 percent effectiveness.

1. Terminate, test, and document multi-mode and single-mode fiber optic cables with connectors at the drop locations and on fiber optic patch panels.

2. Fiber optic cables shall meet EIA/TIA performance standards and shall be tested in accordance with applicable standards. Light source and power meter tests shall be dual wavelength and bi-directional, while OTDR tests shall be performed with sufficient launch cables installed at both ends of the fiber run to clearly identify the mated connectors. a. Multi-mode fiber optic cable runs shall be tested in both directions at both wavelengths with a power meter and light source combination that can verify distance and attenuation at each wavelength. b. Single-mode fiber optic cable runs less than or equal to 100m shall also be tested in both directions at both wavelengths with a power meter and light source combination that can verify distance and attenuation at each wavelength. c. Single-mode fiber optic cable runs greater than 100m shall be tested with an OTDR, light-source, and power meter.

END OF SECTION

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280514 - 6

FIBER OPTICS

12/06/2013

SECTION 280526

SYSTEM SIGNAL GROUNDING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specifications, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. Provide a separate signal and communications grounding system. Grounding requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented by special requirements of systems described in other Sections.

B. Provide an isolated ground bus within each equipment cabinet, enclosure, and rack for single point termination of audio and data shields and grounds. Do not loop or series each ground bus.

C. Related Sections:

1. 260533 Identification for Electrical Systems

2. 271100 Cabinets, Enclosures and Racks

3. 271300 Communications Backbone Cabling


5. 280500 Electronic Systems General Requirements

6. 280513 General Requirements

7. 280514 Fiber Optics

8. 280528 Raceways and Boxes

9. 281300 Access Control System

10. 281500 Electronic Components

11. 281650 Duress Alarm System

12. 282300 Video Surveillance (CCTV) System

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with Section 280513.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280526 - 1


08/07/2013



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or approved equal:

1. Grounding Conductors, Cables, Connectors, and Rods: a. Apache Grounding/Erico Inc. b. Boggs, Inc. c. Chance/Hubbell. d. Copperweld Corp. e. Dossert Corp. f. Erico Inc.; Electrical Products Group. g. Framatome Connectors/Burndy Electrical. h. Galvan Industries, Inc. i. Harger Lightning Protection, Inc. j. Hastings Fiber Glass Products, Inc. k. Heary Brothers Lightning Protection Co. l. Ideal Industries, Inc. m. ILSCO. n. Kearney/Cooper Power Systems. o. Korns: C. C. Korns Co.; Division of Robroy Industries. p. Lightning Master Corp. q. Lyncole XIT Grounding. r. O-Z/Gedney Co.; a business of the EGS Electrical Group. s. Raco, Inc.; Division of Hubbell. t. Robbins Lightning, Inc. u. Salisbury: W. H. Salisbury & Co. v. Superior Grounding Systems, Inc. w. Thomas & Betts, Electrical.

2.02 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

A. For insulated conductors, comply with Division 28 Section "Conductors and Cables."

B. Material: copper.

C. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280526 - 2


08/07/2013

D. Grounding Electrode Conductors: Stranded cable.

E. Bare Copper Conductors: Comply with the following:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.

2. Assembly of Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.

3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.

F. Copper Bonding Conductors: As follows:

1. Bonding Cable: 16 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG copper conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter.

2. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded copper conductor.

3. Bonding Jumper: Bare copper tape, braided bare copper conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.

4. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided copper conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.

G. Grounding Bus: Bare, annealed copper bars of rectangular cross section, with insulators.

2.03 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS

A. Comply with IEEE 837 and UL 467; listed for use for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and connected items.

B. Bolted Connectors: Bolted-pressure-type connectors, or compression type.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 APPLICATION

A. Install a 1/0 AWG, THWN, stranded copper bonding jumper from each equipment cabinet ground bus to the single-point ground bus in the security equipment room and elsewhere as indicated. Do not loop or series each ground bus.

B. Use the signal grounding system as the system signal reference voltage by connecting the isolated secondary common of each low-voltage power supply and equipment item to the system at only one point. Also use the system as the shield ground by connecting the source side of all shields to the system at only one point. Ground all other equipment per manufacturer’s recommendation.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280526 - 3


08/07/2013

C. Other than its single connection to site ground, isolate this signal grounding system from all other metallic objects. Maintain complete isolation from the safety grounding system which shall be used to ground all equipment cabinets, enclosures, racks, conduits, equipment chassis, and other metallic objects from hazardous line voltages. If

60 Hz hum is found in the system add circuits or transformers within equipment to provide positive isolation between signal and safety/chassis ground, thereby eliminating all ground loops.

D. Grounding Bus

1. Use insulated spacer; space 1 inch from wall and support from wall 6 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

2. At doors, route the bus up to the top of the door frame, across the top of the doorway, and down to the specified height above the floor.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install so vibration by equipment mounted on vibration isolation hangers and supports is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, unless a disconnect-type connection is required; then, use a bolted clamp. Bond straps directly to the basic structure taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. Install straps only in locations accessible for maintenance.

3.03 CONNECTIONS

A. General: Make connections so galvanic action or electrolysis possibility is minimized.

Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible.

1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make contact points closer to order of galvanic series.

2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact.

3. Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless-steel separators and mechanical clamps.

4. Make aluminum-to-galvanized steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and mechanical clamps.

5. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280526 - 4


08/07/2013

B. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: For No. 8 AWG and larger, use pressure-type grounding lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors may be terminated with winged pressure-type connectors.

C. Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A.

D. Compression-Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by connector manufacturer. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on grounding conductor.



END OF SECTION

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280526 - 5


08/07/2013

SECTION 280528

RACEWAYS AND BOXES

PART 1 GENERAL




1.02 SUMMARY


1. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit (RGS).

2. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT).

3. Rigid Non-metallic Conduit (PVC).

4. Flexible Metal Electrical Conduit.

5. Liquid-tight Flexible Metal Conduit.

6. Gutters, Wireways and Troughs.

7. Cable Trays.

8. Fittings, Couplings, and Connectors.

9. Supporting Devices.

10. Sealant.

11. Outdoor Outlet Boxes.

12. Indoor Outlet Boxes and Small Junction and Pull Boxes.


1. 260533

2. 271100

3. 271300

4. 271500

5. 280500

6. 280513

7. 280514

8. 280526

9. 281300





Electronic Systems General Requirements


Fiber Optics



RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280528 - 1

RACEWAYS AND BOXES

08/07/2013

10. 281500

11. 281650

12. 282300


Duress Alarm System


1.03 REFERENCES

A. ANSI C80.2 Rigid and Steel Conduit.

B. ANSI C80.3 Electrical Metallic Tubing - Zinc Coated.

C. ANSI 870 Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters, and Associated Fittings.

D. NECA Standard of Installation.

E. NEMA FB 1 Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes and Conduit Bodies for Conduit

F. NEMA OS 1 Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports.

G. SNEC Southern Nevada Electrical Code, (based on National Electrical Code)

H. UL 1 Flexible Metal Conduit.

I. UL 5 Surface Metal Raceways and Fittings.

J. UL 50

K. UL 360

Cabinets and Boxes.

Liquid-Tight Flexible Conduit.

L. UL 514A Metallic Outlet Boxes.

M. UL 514B Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes.


A. Design Requirements:

1. Raceway Size: Use a minimum conduit inside diameter of 3/4-inch. Size conduit and raceway for a maximum cross-sectional fill area of 40%.

2. Gutter, Wireway and Trough Size: Size for a maximum cross sectional fill area of

20%.

3. Raceway Support: For each support and group of fasteners provide strength equal to the maximum weight of the present load plus all future raceways for which the support provides space, times a safety factor. Except as otherwise indicated, use a safety factor greater than four where necessary to provide a minimum safety allowance of 200 lbs. Provide additional support strength where required to prevent distortion of raceway during wire pulling.

4. Equipment Ground Conductor (Green): Where indicated, shown or required, raceway sizes shall be adequate to include the circuit conductors, an equipment

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280528 - 2

RACEWAYS AND BOXES

08/07/2013

ground conductor and a neutral conductor in accordance with percentage of fill requirements as specified.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Conform to the requirements of Section 17050, General Requirements.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for all items to be used including specifications, installation instructions and general recommendations.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit scale plan and elevation drawings of raceway systems showing layout and size of raceways, pull boxes and junction boxes within three feet of equipment to be installed by this contract.

D. Record Drawings: Provide shop drawings showing as-built conditions of all raceways, termination boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes and installed equipment.


A. Conduit routing shown on the Drawings is diagrammatic and approximate, actual routing will depend on site conditions and code requirements.

B. Coordinate with the Owner for approved locations of conduit and equipment installation in the existing facility.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 RACEWAY (WHERE OWNER APPROVED)

A. Acceptable Product: Wiremold (Steel Surface Raceway System): V500, V700, &

700WH

B. Wiremold Steel Surface Raceway System): 3000

2.02 RIGID GALVANIZED STEEL CONDUIT (RGS)

A. Rigid steel conduit zinc coated shall conform to ANSI C80.2.

2.03 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)

A. EMT, zinc coated shall conform to ANSI C80.3.

2.04 RIGID NON-METALLIC CONDUIT (PVC)

A. Rigid non-metallic conduit shall be Schedule 40 PVC conduit manufactured in compliance with NEMA TC-2. PVC conduit shall be U.L. listed. Joints shall be solvent cement type.

B. Provide PVC elbows, bends, fittings and adapters as required for a complete installation. Provide solvent cement as recommended by the conduit manufacturer.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280528 - 3

RACEWAYS AND BOXES

08/07/2013

2.05 FLEXIBLE METAL ELECTRICAL CONDUIT (GREENFIELD)

A. Flexible metal electrical conduit shall conform to UL 1.

2.06 LIQUID-TIGHT FLEXIBLE STEEL CONDUIT

A. Liquid-tight flexible steel conduit shall conform to UL 360.

B. Sizes 1.25 inches and smaller: Provide with a continuous copper bonding conductor wound spirally between convolutions.

C. Sizes 1.5 inches and larger: Provide with an internal grounding conductor and grounding bushings.

D. Also known as Seal Tight flexible conduit.

2.07 GUTTERS, WIREWAYS AND TROUGHS

A. Use NEMA Type 12.

B. Use 14 gauge bodies and covers.

C. Use above and below wall-mounted enclosures and cabinets for the collection of field device conduits, wires, and cables.

D. Do not use in inaccessible locations.

2.08 CABLE TRAYS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Chalfant Manufacturing Company.

2. Cooper B-Line, Inc.

3. Cope, T. J., Inc.; a subsidiary of Allied Tube & Conduit.

4. GS Metals Corp.; GLOBETRAY Products.

5. MONO-SYSTEMS, Inc.

6. MPHusky.

7. PW Industries.

8. Wirewood; Field mate wire basket.

B. MATERIALS AND FINISHES

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280528 - 4

RACEWAYS AND BOXES

08/07/2013

1. Cable Trays, Fittings, and Accessories: Aluminum, complying with NEMA VE 1,

Aluminum Association's Alloy 6063-T6 for rails, rungs, and cable trays, and

Alloy 5052-H32 or Alloy 6061-T6 for fabricated parts; with chromium-zinc,

ASTM F 1136, splice-plate fasteners, bolts, and screws

C. CABLE TRAY ACCESSORIES

1. Fittings: Tees, crosses, risers, elbows, and other fittings as indicated, of same materials and finishes as cable tray.

2. Barrier Strips: Same materials and finishes as cable tray.

3. Cable tray supports and connectors, including bonding jumpers, as recommended by cable tray manufacturer.

D. WARNING SIGNS

1. Revise size of lettering in first paragraph below to suit 25-foot (7.6-m) viewing distance.

2. Lettering: 1-1/2-inch- (40-mm-) high, black letters on yellow background with legend "WARNING! NOT TO BE USED AS WALKWAY, LADDER, OR

SUPPORT FOR LADDERS OR PERSONNEL."

2.09 FITTINGS, COUPLINGS AND CONNECTORS

A. Fittings for conduit and outlet boxes shall conform to UL 514B.

B. Surface metal electrical raceways and fittings shall conform to UL 5.

C. Use fittings listed and equally acceptable for specific conduit or raceway system used; e.g.: Use PVC coated fittings with PVC coated conduit.

D. For threaded rigid steel conduit, do not use threadless or compression type fittings.

E. For EMT, provide steel or malleable iron "concrete-tight" or "rain-tight" couplings and connectors. Use compression; set screw or stainless steel multiple locking type bodies.

Do not use indentation type fittings.

F. Bushing and connectors shall be insulated type which maintain continuity of conduit grounding system. Insulating material shall be molded or locked into metallic body of the fitting. Bushings made entirely of nonmetallic material will not be allowed.

G. Set screw connectors and couplings body shall have wall thickness at least equal to wall thickness of conduit used. Couplings or conduit trade size ¾-inch through 2 inch shall have two set screws per fitting and 2.5-inch through 4-inch shall have four set screws per fitting. Set screws shall be case hardened steel with hex head and cup point.

H. Provide flexible metal conduit fittings made of steel or malleable iron. Insulate with one of the following types:

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280528 - 5

RACEWAYS AND BOXES

08/07/2013

I.

1. Wedge and screw type having an angular wedge fitting between the convolutions of the conduit.

2. Squeeze or clamp type having a bearing surface contoured to wrap around the conduit and clamped by one or more screws.

3. Steel, multiple point type, for threading into internal wall of the conduit convolutions.

Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit shall incorporate a threaded grounding cone, steel, nylon or equal plastic compression ring and a gland for tightening. Fitting shall be steel or malleable iron with insulated throat, with male thread and locknut or male bushing with or without "O" ring seal.

J. Expansion fittings shall be hot-dipped galvanized malleable iron with a packing ring to prevent entrance of water, a pressure ring, a grounding ring and a separate external copper bonding jumper.

K. Inferior material such as "pot metal" shall not be used for any type of fitting.

L. All locknuts shall be the bonding type with sharp edges for digging into the metal wall of an enclosure.

2.10 SUPPORTING DEVICES

A. General: Provide supporting devices with manufacturer’s standard materials, designed and constructed in accordance with published product information, for a complete installation.

B. Raceway Supports: Provide manufacturer's standard supports including clevis hangers, riser clamps, and conduit straps, threaded C-clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze, wall brackets and spring steel clamps.

C. Corrosion Resistance: Provide all supports, support hardware and fasteners hotdipped galvanized or cadmium plated.

D. Fasteners: Provide fasteners as required by the type of wall or ceiling construction and the equipment to be supported by the fastener.

E. U-Channel Strut Systems: Provide minimum 12 gauge U-channel strut system for mounting and supporting electrical equipment. Fittings shall mate with the U-channel.

F. Fittings for Strut System: Galvanized steel end caps, conduit clamps, conduit hangers,

U-bolts.

2.11 OUTDOOR OUTLET BOXES

A. Conform to NEMA FB 1, for fittings, cast metal boxes and conduit bodies.

B. Provide electrical boxes and fittings which are UL-listed and labeled, and conform to

UL 50, UL 514A, UL 514B, and UL 514C.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280528 - 6

RACEWAYS AND BOXES

08/07/2013

C. Select covers for boxes of types appropriate for each use and location.

D. Provide gaskets for covers of boxes in damp locations.

E. Corrosion resistance: Provide galvanized or other equally acceptable corrosion resistant finish for all boxes, accessories and fittings.

2.12 INDOOR OUTLET BOXES AND SMALL JUNCTION- AND PULL-BOXES

A. Conform to NEMA OS 1 for sheet-steel outlet boxes, device boxes, covers and box supports. Provide minimum 4-inch square by 1.5-inch deep, one piece, deep-drawn, galvanized steel, outlet boxes for general use. Provide square cornered, straight sided gang boxes wherever required by SNEC or more than two wiring devices are indicated in the same location. Provide boxes of increased depth where required by the project conditions.

B. Furnish with stamped knockouts in the back and sides.

C. Provide threaded screw holes with corrosion-resistant screws for securing box covers and wiring devices.

D. Accessories: Provide outlet box accessories as required for each installation, including plaster covers, mounting brackets, wallboard hangers, extension rings, fixture studs, cable clamps and metal straps for supporting outlet boxes, which are compatible with outlet boxes being used and fulfilling requirements of individual wiring situations.

2.13 FIRESTOPPING/SEALANT MATERIALS

A. Accepted Products: International Protective Coatings Corp. FlameSafe



FSP 1100,

Nelson FSP, Domtar Fire-Halt



or approved equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Penetrations:

1. Firestop and seal all penetrations of fire walls and floors with minimum three hour sealant or Fire Stop Putty (FSP). This includes but is not limited to all raceway, conductor, sleeve and cable tray penetrations where penetrating device does not completely seal the hole.

2. Provide a suitable caulk for purposes of speech privacy and air flow restriction where a fire rated seal is not required.

B. Raceways and Fittings:

1. Comply with SNEC, for application, size, location and installation of each type of raceway.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280528 - 7

RACEWAYS AND BOXES

08/07/2013

2. Where not specifically shown on the drawings or specified, use the following guidelines for the selection of raceway types: a. RGS – Exposed exterior and wet locations. Areas subject to physical damage or vandalism. b. EMT – Concrete encased. Interior dry exposed locations. c. PVC –. Below grade or under concrete slab. Use metal risers. d. Flexible Metal – Use to connect to equipment that must be mechanically isolated or shifted to final position in indoor dry locations only. Use where conduit must be fished in building voids. Do not use in corrosive atmosphere. e. Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal – Use when flexible metal is required in wet or outdoor locations.

3. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends between boxes.

4. Conduit and EMT runs shall be mechanically and electrically continuous from service entrance to all outlets. Each conduit shall enter and be securely connected to a cabinet, junction box, pull box or outlet by means of a locknut on the outside and a bushing on the inside or by means of a liquid-tight, threaded, self-locking, cold-weld type wedge adapter.

5. Keep conduit at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of steam and hot-water pipes.

6. Level and square raceway runs.

7. Complete installation of electrical raceways before starting installation of cables/wires within raceways.

8. Provide supports for raceways as specified.

9. Prevent foreign matter from entering raceways; use temporary closure protection.

10. Make bends and offsets so the inside diameter is not effectively reduced.

11. Unless otherwise indicated, keep the legs of a bend in the same plane and the straight legs of offsets parallel.

12. Use raceway fittings that are of types compatible with the associated raceway and suitable for the use and location.

13. Run raceways with a minimum number of bends. All bends shall have the longest possible radii.

14. Install exposed raceways parallel and perpendicular to nearby surfaces or exposed structural members, and follow the surface contours.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280528 - 8

RACEWAYS AND BOXES

08/07/2013

15. Run exposed, parallel or banked raceways together.

16. Make bends in parallel or banked runs from the same center line so that the bends are parallel. Factory elbows may be used in banked runs where they can be installed parallel.

17. Join and terminate raceways with fittings designed and equally acceptable for the purpose of the raceway system and make up tight.

18. Where the installation is such that joints cannot be made tight, use bonding jumpers to provide electrical continuity of the raceway system.

19. Make the set screws of threadless fittings up tight; do not use pliers.

Compression fittings shall be tightened with two wrenches.

20. Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align the raceway to enter squarely and install the locknuts so that the dished part is against the box.

21. Where terminating in threaded hubs, screw the raceway or fitting tight into the hub so the end bears against the wire protection shoulder.

22. Where chase nipples are used, align the raceway and coupling square to the box and tighten the chase nipple so no threads are exposed. Running threads are not allowed.

23. Install nylon pull strings in empty raceways. Leave not less than 12 inches of slack at each end of the conduit.

24. Horizontal cross runs of conduit or EMT may be installed in partitions only where explicitly permitted. Exposed horizontal runs, where permitted, shall be installed close to ceiling or ceiling beams.

25. Conduits and EMT connected to wall outlets shall be run in such a manner that they will not cross water, steam or waste pipes or radiator branches.

26. Conduits and EMT shall not be run through beams, except where clearly indicated on drawings or where permitted.

27. Conduits and raceways above suspended ceilings may be supported from the floor construction above or from the main ceiling support members, however, the finished installation shall not interfere with the removability of ceiling panels.

28. At building expansion joints, provide expansion fittings and cross at right angles to joint.

29. Provide conduits stubbed up through or from concrete floor for connection to freestanding equipment with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs, set flush with the finished floor. Where no equipment connections are made, install screwdriver-operated threaded flush brass plugs in conduit end.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280528 - 9

RACEWAYS AND BOXES

08/07/2013

30. Provide expansion fittings for all rigidly fastened conduits spanning a building expansion joint and if not otherwise provided, for all runs 1.5 inches or larger, exceeding 150 feet in length.

C. CABLE TRAY INSTALLATION

1. Comply with recommendations in NEMA VE 2. Install as a complete system, including all necessary fasteners, hold-down clips, splice-plate support systems, barrier strips, hinged horizontal and vertical splice plates, elbows, reducers, tees, and crosses.

2. Remove burrs and sharp edges from cable trays.

3. Fasten cable tray supports to building structure and install seismic restraints. a. Design each fastener and support to carry load indicated by seismic requirements. b. Construct supports from channel members, threaded rods, and other appurtenances furnished by cable tray manufacturer. Arrange supports in trapeze or wall-bracket form as required by application. c. Support bus assembly to prevent twisting from eccentric loading. d. Manufacture center-hung support, designed for 60 percent versus 40 percent eccentric loading condition, with a safety factor of 3. e. Locate and install supports according to NEMA FG 1.

4. Make connections to equipment with flanged fittings fastened to cable tray and to equipment. Support cable tray independent of fittings. Do not carry weight of cable tray on equipment enclosure.

5. Make cable tray connections using standard fittings.

6. Workspace: Install cable trays with enough space to permit access for installing cables.

7. Install barriers to separate cables of different systems, such as power, communications, and data processing.

8. After installation of cable trays is completed, install warning signs in visible locations on or near cable trays.

D. BOXES AND FITTINGS:

1. Coordination: Coordinate installation of electrical boxes and fittings with wire/cable and raceway installation work, and with general construction work.

2. Weatherproof: Provide weatherproof outlets for all interior and exterior locations exposed to weather or moisture.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280528 - 10

RACEWAYS AND BOXES

08/07/2013

3. Knockout Caps: Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been removed.

4. Anchoring: Support and fasten boxes securely per SNEC.

5. Sizes: Provide boxes of sizes adequate to meet SNEC volume requirements, but in no case smaller than sizes indicated.

6. Do not use sectional (gangable) boxes.

7. Do not use device plates as covers for boxes in exposed locations.

8. Do not use round boxes where conduit must enter box through side of box, which would result in difficult and insecure connections when fastened with locknut or bushing on rounded surface.

9. Threaded Hubs: Use threaded hub type boxes with gasketed weatherproof covers in all exterior locations; where installed on unfinished walls, columns or plasters; where exposed to moisture laden atmosphere; or where indicated.

10. Extension Rings: Where extension rings are required on existing outlet boxes, drill new mounting holes in the rings to align with the mounting holes on the existing boxes.

E. PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES:

1. Conform to SNEC.

2. Locate junction and pull boxes in accessible locations.

3. Do not locate boxes in finished areas UON.

4. Supports: Provide in each box sufficient clamps, grids, or devices to which cables are secured in neat and orderly fashion permitting ready identification and so that no cable will have an unsupported length of more than 30 inches.

F. RACEWAY SUPPORTS:

1. Compliance: Install hangers, sleeves, seals, U-channel supports and fasteners as indicated and in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Comply with requirements of SNEC and American National Standards Institute

(ANSI)/National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) for installation of supporting devices.

2. Provide individual and multiple (trapeze) raceway hangers, and riser clamps as necessary to support raceways. Provide U-bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assembly, and for securing hanger rods and conduits.

3. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal raceways to be supported together on trapeze type hangers where possible.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280528 - 11

RACEWAYS AND BOXES

08/07/2013

4. Support individual horizontal conduits and EMT 1.5 inches in size and smaller by either one-hole pipe straps or separate pipe hangers. Use separate pipe hangers for larger sizes. Spring steel fasteners may be used in lieu of pipe straps or hangers for sizes 1.5-inch and smaller in dry locations. For hanger rods with spring steel fasteners, use 0.3-inch diameter or larger threaded steel. Use steel fasteners that are specifically designed for supporting single conduits or EMT.

Unless otherwise indicated, do not use wire as a means of support. Use spring steel conduit supports only for lighting system branch circuit raceway in suspended ceilings in dry locations.

5. Except as otherwise indicated, space supports for metallic and non-metallic raceways in accordance with the requirements of this Section and the requirements of the SNEC.

6. Provide support for exposed or concealed raceway as close as practical to and not exceeding 12 inches from an unsupported box or access fitting. In horizontal runs a support at a box or access fitting may be omitted when the box or access fitting is independently supported and the raceway termination is not made with a chase nipple or threadless box connector.

7. In vertical runs provide such support that the load produced by the weight of the raceway and the enclosed conductors is carried entirely by the conduit supports, with no weight load on raceway termination’s or conductor terminals.

G. MISCELLANEOUS SUPPORTS:

1. Provide supports for all miscellaneous electrical components as required to produce the same safety allowances as specified for raceway supports above.

Provide metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnects, control enclosures, pull boxes, junction boxes etc.

2. In open overhead spaces, cast boxes threaded to raceways need not be separately supported except where used for fixture support; support sheet metal boxes directly from the building structure or by bar hangers. Where bar hangers are used, attach the bar to raceways on opposite sides of the box and support the raceway with an equally acceptable type fastener not more than 24 inches from the box. When penetrating reinforced-concrete members, avoid cutting any reinforcing steel.

3. Wood backing shall not be used for mounting any equipment except as required for temporary power or telephone terminal strips or unless noted otherwise on drawings. Only steel frame work or strut type channels shall be used for equipment mounting.

4. In hollow masonry, tile, plaster or gypsum board, use toggle type bolts to secure equipment, conduit runs and outlet boxes in place.

H. FASTENERS:

1. Unless otherwise indicated securely fasten all electrical items and their supporting hardware including, but not limited to, conduits, raceways, cables,

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280528 - 12

RACEWAYS AND BOXES

08/07/2013

busways, cabinets, panelboards, wall-mounted transformers, boxes, disconnect switches and control components to the building structure.

2. Fasten by means of wood screws or screw-type nails on wood; by toggle bolts on hollow masonry units; by concrete inserts or expansion bolts on concrete or brick; by machine screws; welded threaded studs, or spring-tension clamps on steel work. Do not weld conduits or pipe straps to steel structures. In partitions of light steel construction use sheet metal screws.

3. Do not use powder charged devices or Ramsets to attach fasteners (unless otherwise approved by the District).

4. Holes cut to a depth of more than 1.5 inches in reinforced concrete beams or to a depth of more than 3/4 inches in concrete joints shall not be allowed. Notify the

District if such penetration is needed.

5. Loads applied to any fastener shall not exceed one-fifth of the proof test load.

Use vibration and shock-resistant fasteners.

3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Upon completion of installation of raceways, inspect interiors of raceways at all outlet, junction and pull boxes, remove burrs and obstructions.

B. Run a swab or mandrel to remove dirt and blockages. Raceways which are deformed and prevent the passage of a mandrel shall be replaced.

C. Remove dirt and construction debris from all outlet, junction and pull boxes.

END OF SECTION

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

280528 - 13

RACEWAYS AND BOXES

08/07/2013

SECTION 281300

ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL


Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. For firestopping application and use latest code requirements.

C. For connection of high voltage use latest code requirements.

D. For power cables, Section 28 05 13, LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS

AND CABLES (600 VOLTS AND BELOW).

E. For grounding of equipment, Section 28 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.

F. For infrastructure, Section 28 05 28, RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.

G. For infrastructure, Section 27 11 00, CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.

H. For perimeter lighting, use the latest code requirements.

I. For access control, Section 28 13 00, PHYSICAL ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS (PACS).

J. For screening of personnel and shipments, Section 28 16 50, SECURITY ACCESS

DETECTION.

K. For alarm systems, Section 28 16 50, INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEM (IDS).

L. For control and operation of all security systems, Section 28 13 00, ACCESS CONTROL

SYSTEM AND DATABASE MANAGEMENT.

M. For emergency and interior communications, Section 28 05 13, ELECTRONIC PERSONAL

PROTECTION SYSTEM (EPPS).

N. For Warranty of Construction, Section 28 05 13.

O. For General Requirements, Section 28 05 13

1.2 SUMMARY

1. Access Control Server

2. Three or more security access networked workstations.

3. Security access operating system and application software.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 13 00 - 1

ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM

10/14/2013

4. Readers and cards

5. Electronic locks and electrified hinges

6. Alarm monitoring and door contacts

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CCTV: Closed-circuit television.

B. CPU: Central processing unit.

C. Credential: Data assigned to an entity and used to identify that entity.

D. dpi: Dots per inch.

E. DTS: Digital Termination Service. A microwave-based, line-of-sight communication provided directly to the end user.

F. GFI: Ground fault interrupter.

G. Identifier: A credential card; keypad personal identification number; or code, biometric characteristic, or other unique identification entered as data into the entry-control database for the purpose of identifying an individual. Where this term is presented with an initial capital letter, this definition applies.

H. I/O: Input/Output.

I. LAN: Local area network.

J. Location: A Location on the network having a PC-to-controller communications link, with additional controllers at the Location connected to the PC-to-controller link with a TIA 485-A communications loop. Where this term is presented with an initial capital letter, this definition applies.

K. PC: Personal computer. Applies to the central station, workstations, and file servers.

L. PCI Bus: Peripheral Component Interconnect. A peripheral bus providing a high-speed data path between the CPU and the peripheral devices such as a monitor, disk drive, or network.

M. PDF: Portable Document Format. The file format used by the Acrobat document-exchangesystem software from Adobe.

N. RAS: Remote access services.

O. RF: Radio frequency.

P. ROM: Read-only memory. ROM data are maintained through losses of power.

Q. TCP/IP: Transport control protocol/Internet protocol incorporated into Microsoft Windows.

R. TWAIN: Technology without an Interesting Name. A programming interface that lets a graphics application, such as an image editing program or desktop publishing program, activate a scanner, frame grabber, or other image-capturing device.

S. UPS: Uninterruptible power supply.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 13 00 - 2


10/14/2013

T. USB: Universal serial bus.

U. WAN: Wide area network.

V. WAV: The digital audio format used in Microsoft Windows.

W. WMP: Windows media player.

X. Wiegand: Patented magnetic principle that uses specially treated wires embedded in the credential card.

Y. Windows: Operating system by Microsoft Corporation.

Z. Workstation: A PC with software that is configured for specific, limited security-system functions.

AA. WYSIWYG: What You See Is What You Get. Text and graphics appear on the screen the same as they will in print.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Reference each product to a location on Drawings. Test and evaluation data presented in Product Data shall comply with

SIA BIO-01.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Diagrams for cable management system.

2. System labeling schedules, including electronic copy of labeling schedules that are part of the cable and asset identification system of the software specified in Parts 2 and 3.

3. Wiring Diagrams. For power, signal, and control wiring. Show typical wiring schematics including the following:

4. Cable Administration Drawings: As specified in "Identification" Article.

5. Battery and charger calculations for central station, workstations, and controllers.

C. Samples: For workstation outlets, jacks, jack assemblies, and faceplates. For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

D. Other Action Submittals:

1. Project planning documents as specified in Part 3.

E. Field quality-control reports.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For security system to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and

Maintenance Data," include the following:

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 13 00 - 3


10/14/2013

2. PC installation and operating documentation, manuals, and software for the PC and all installed peripherals. Software shall include system restore, emergency boot diskettes, and drivers for all installed hardware. Provide separately for each PC.

3. Hard copies of manufacturer's specification sheets, operating specifications, design guides, user's guides for software and hardware, and PDF files on CD-ROM of the hardcopy submittal.

4. System installation and setup guides with data forms to plan and record options and setup decisions.

A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.

1. Cable installer must have on staff a registered communication distribution designer certified by Building Industry Consulting Service International.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain central station, workstations, controllers, Identifier readers, and all software through one source from single manufacturer.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. Comply with NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code."

E. Comply with SIA DC-01 and SIA DC-03 and SIA DC-07.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Central Station, Workstations, and Controllers:

1. Store in temperature- and humidity-controlled environment in original manufacturer's sealed containers. Maintain ambient temperature between 50 and 85 deg F, and not more than 80 percent relative humidity, noncondensing.

2. Open each container; verify contents against packing list; and file copy of packing list, complete with container identification, for inclusion in operation and maintenance data.

3. Mark packing list with the same designations assigned to materials and equipment for recording in the system labeling schedules that are generated by software specified in

"Cable and Asset Management Software" Article.

4. Save original manufacturer's containers and packing materials and deliver as directed under provisions covering extra materials.


1. Alarm Printer Black/Red Ribbons: Package of 12.

2. Laser Printers: Three toner cassettes and one replacement drum unit.

3. Credential card blanks, ready for printing. Include enough credential cards for all personnel to be enrolled at the site plus an extra 50 percent for future use.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 13 00 - 4


10/14/2013

4. Fuses of all kinds, power and electronic, equal to 10 percent of amount installed for each size used, but no fewer than three units.

6. (2) long range card reader.

7. (3) door position switches.

8. (2) of each type of system modules used (single RIM, dual RIM, ISC, ICM, OCM).

9. (1) power supplies.

10. (3) of each type of relays.

11. (3) of each type of request to exit device.

12. (3) of each type of fuses and fused terminals.

A. Provide as a minimum a 24 month parts and labor warranty on all ACAM components and systems installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Firms regularly engaged in the design and manufacture of Access Control and Alarm Monitoring System’s components and accessories, of types, sizes, capacities and characteristics required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

B. Provide Access Control and Alarm Monitoring System’s equipment and components including, but not limited to, the following materials or approved equal from other manufacturers:

1. Access Control Server Workstation………………….

2. Access Control Monitoring Station…………………...

3. Access Control 20” LCD Monitor……………………..

Hewlett Packard, Dell, IBM



4. Access Control Software………………………………

5. Intelligent System Controller (ISC)……………………

Lenel, Bosch Systems

Lenel, Bosch LNL-1000

6. Input Control Module (ICM)…………………… ……...

7. Output Control Module (OCM)……………………….. Lenel, Bosch LNL-1200

9. Dual Reader Interface Module (DRIM)……....…….... Lenel, LNL-1320

10. Field Hardware Power Supplies………………….….. Lenel, Bosch

12. Proximity Card Reader………………………… ……... HID iClass

13. Photo ID Proximity Smart Card………………. ……... HID iClass

14. Request to Exit Detectors ……………………………..Bosch DS1600

A. Access Control System:

1. Provide an Access Control System to serve as the central access control and alarm monitoring system for the facility. The Access Control System shall be fully compatible and integratible with existing systems and shall electrically control the entrance to doors

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 13 00 - 5


10/14/2013

and gates as shown on the plans. Electric door hardware, request to exit devices with proximity card reader shall secure the door for entry.

2. The Access Control System shall monitor alarms from door position sensors. The system shall consist of multiple alarm partitions or zones per Owner’s requirements. All alarms shall be annunciated at the Access Control System Server and any Owner provided workstations.

3. The Access Control System shall control and monitor doors where shown on the plans and annunciate the door status and alarms on the Access Control System Server and all

Owner provided workstations with Contractor installed software with multiple layers of building map displays.

4. All alarms from the Duress buttons shall be annunciated at the Access Control System

Server and Owner provided workstations where shown on drawings. In addition, ability to silence alarms shall be capable from the Access Control System workstations.

5. The Access Control System shall be fully compatible and integratible with all existing systems and shall be integrated with the Video Surveillance (CCTV) System. All alarms and door/gate entry access requests from the Access Control System shall be annunciated at the Video Surveillance (CCTV) System monitor.

6. Provide long range (17” minimum) proximity readers at vehicle pedestals where shown.

Install readers in custom pedestals as indicated on the Drawings. Provide short range (4” minimum) proximity readers at all other locations as indicated on the Drawings.

7. The Access Control System shall be capable of creating photo ID badges with smart card technology. Each door as well as each card shall be programmable to specific access levels, providing unique access configurations per user. Provide and program all cards with photo ID badging accessories.

8. Door alarms will include door opened too long ‘DOTL’, forced door, and circuit short/open supervision. The Access Control System will send a unique alarm signal to the CCTV

System for each and every door position sensor.

9. Provide enclosures, door hardware, and request to exit devices, door position switches, racks, wiring, raceways, terminations, mounts and all other equipment required for a complete operational system. This shall include Door Position Switches, Request to Exit

Devices, door hardware and all system modules shall be protected in adequately sized enclosures/racks.

1. The Access Control System shall be fully compatible with the Access Control System of the other existing RTC Facility and must be capable of automatically updating the databases at the existing Facility via the RTC network. The Contractor shall assure that such connectivity shall be present via the RTC network and to each data room. For example if a user gets deleted at one Facility, the database at the other Facility shall automatically update to adjust for the deletion. The existing system at the existing

Facility is the Bosch ReadyKey Pro system.

2. All Card Readers must be capable of utilizing iClass technology.

C. Door/Gate Position Status and Alarms:

1. Provide low voltage power to the various switches which combine to indicate the secure or nonsecure status of position monitored doors/gates (i.e., hinge position, latch position, bolt position, limiting switches, etc.).

2. Provide door/gate position and latch monitoring as indicated on the Drawings. If the DPS or latch monitor becomes unsecured, electronically indicate door status and/or alarm at designated Access Control Server and Owner provided workstations as indicated on the

Drawings. Wire door positions switches (DPS) and all other alarm detection devices to, and monitor them with, system inputs at their designated access control panels.

3. All door position/bolt monitoring switches in a hardware group shall be connected in series with each other’s so that an open at any one of the switch contacts shall break the

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 13 00 - 6


10/14/2013

24VDC circuit to the monitoring electronics and provide a real time unsecured door status and/or alarm indication on the designated Access Control computers. Losing the indicating signal power by cutting the circuit (circuit failure) shall indicate an unsecured door and/or initiate a door alarm.

D. User Programming Functions

1. The system operation shall be completely programmable by the Owner for service and maintenance. Programming shall be possible from the Access Control System Server;

Owner provided workstations, or a stand-alone computer with the proper access codes.

Database partitioning on a single server will be possible.

E. Door Operation – General

1. For card reader locations, presenting a valid card across the proximity card reader shall allow access through the door for a programmable time initially set for four seconds and then relock.

2. Upon valid access, the proximity card reader shall alarm shunt to signal authorized access through the door. The alarm shunt shall be a programmable time initially set for thirty seconds.

3. When the door closes the lock shall automatically relock.

4. Locks shall unlock and remain unlocked when the unlock input signal is active.

5. If desired, selective access controlled doors shall be capable of remote release from The

Access Control Server and Owner provided Workstations.

6. Selective electrified doors in egress pathways shall unlock and remain unlocked during a fire alarm. Coordinate and obtain a signal from the fire alarm contractor.

2.3 OPERATION

A. Security access system shall use a single database for access-control and credential-creation functions.

B. Distributed Processing: A fully distributed processing system.

1. Access-control information, including time, date, valid codes, access levels, and similar data, shall be downloaded to controllers so each controller can make access-control decisions.

2. Intermediate controllers for access control are prohibited.

3. In the event that communications with the central controller are lost, controllers shall automatically buffer event transactions until communications are restored, at which time buffered events shall be uploaded to the central station.

C. Number of Locations:

1. Support at least 32,000 separate Locations using a single PC with combinations of directconnect, dial-up, or TCP/IP LAN connections to each Location.

2. Each Location shall have its own database and history in the central station.

3. Locations may be combined to share a common database.

1. 130 different card-reader formats.

3. 48 graphic file types for importing maps.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 13 00 - 7


10/14/2013

1. 1024 reader-controlled doors.

2. 50,000 total-access credentials.

3. 2048 supervised alarm inputs.

4. 2048 programmable outputs.

5. 32,000 custom action messages per Location to instruct operator on action required when alarm is received.

1. System components shall be interconnected and shall provide automatic communication of status changes, commands, field-initiated interrupts, and other communications required for proper system operation.

2. Communication shall not require operator initiation or response and shall return to normal after partial- or total-network interruption such as power loss or transient upset.

3. System shall automatically annunciate communication failures to the operator and shall identify the communications link that has experienced a partial or total failure.

4. Communications controller may be used as an interface between the central-station display systems and the field device network. Communications controller shall provide functions required to attain the specified network communications performance.

G. Central station shall provide operator interface, interaction, display, control, and dynamic and real-time monitoring. Central station shall control system networks to interconnect all system components, including workstations and field-installed controllers.

H. Field equipment shall include controllers, sensors, and controls.

I.

1. Controllers shall serve as an interface between the central station and sensors and controls.

2. Data exchange between the central station and the controllers shall include down-line transmission of commands, software, and databases to controllers.

3. The up-line data exchange from the controller to the central station shall include status data such as intrusion alarms, status reports, and entry-control records.

4. Controllers are classified as alarm-annunciation or entry-control type.

System Response to Alarms:

1. Field device network shall provide a system end-to-end response time of one second(s) or less for every device connected to the system.

2. Alarms shall be annunciated at the central station within one second of the alarm occurring at a controller or at a device controlled by a local controller, and within 100 ms if the alarm occurs at the central station.

3. Alarm and status changes shall be displayed within 100 ms after receipt of data by the central station.

4. All graphics shall be displayed, including graphics-generated map displays, on the console monitor within five seconds of alarm receipt at the security console.

5. This response time shall be maintained during system heavy load.

J. False-Alarm Reduction: The design of the central station and controllers shall contain features to reduce false alarms. Equipment and software shall comply with SIA CP-01.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 13 00 - 8


10/14/2013

1. Use a cyclic code method to detect single- and double-bit errors, burst errors of eight bits or fewer, and at least 99 percent of all other multibit and burst errors between controllers and the central station.

2. Interactive or product error-detection codes alone will not be acceptable.

3. A message shall be in error if one bit is received incorrectly.

4. Retransmit messages with detected errors.

5. Allow for an operator-assigned two-digit decimal number to each communications link representing the number of retransmission attempts.

6. Central station shall print a communication failure alarm message when the number of consecutive retransmission attempts equals the assigned quantity.

7. Monitor the frequency of data transmission failure for display and logging.

L. Data Line Supervision: System shall initiate an alarm in response to opening, closing, shorting, or grounding of data transmission lines.

M. Door Hardware Interface:

1. Comply with requirements in Division 08 Sections for door hardware required to be monitored or controlled by the security access system.

2. Electrical characteristics of controllers shall match the signal and power requirements of door hardware.

A. System Software: Based on 32-bit, Microsoft Windows central-station and workstation operating system and application software.

1. Multiuser multitasking shall allow independent activities and monitoring to occur simultaneously at different workstations.

2. Graphical user interface shall show pull-down menus and a menu-tree format.

3. Capability for future additions within the indicated system size limits.

4. Open architecture that allows importing and exporting of data and interfacing with other systems that are compatible with operating system.

5. Password-protected operator login and access.

B. Peer Computer Control Software: Detect a failure of a central computer and cause the other central computer to assume control of all system functions without interruption of operation.

Both central computers shall have drivers to support this mode of operation.

C. Application Software: Interface between the alarm annunciation and entry-control controllers to monitor sensors and DTS links, operate displays, report alarms, generate reports, and help train system operators.

1. Reside at the central station, workstations, and controllers as required to perform specified functions.

2. Operate and manage peripheral devices.

3. Manage files for disk I/O, including creating, deleting, and copying files; and automatically maintain a directory of all files, including size and location of each sequential and random-ordered record.

4. Import custom icons into graphics to represent alarms and I/O devices.

5. Globally link I/O so that any I/O can link to any other I/O within the same Location without requiring interaction with the host PC. This operation shall be at the controller.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 13 00 - 9


10/14/2013

6. Globally code I/O links so that any access-granted event can link to any I/O with the same Location without requiring interaction with the host PC. This operation shall be at the controller.

7. Messages from PC to controllers and controllers to controllers shall be on a polled network that utilizes check summing and acknowledgment of each message.

Communication shall be automatically verified, buffered, and retransmitted if message is not acknowledged.

8. Selectable poll frequency and message time-out settings shall handle bandwidth and latency issues for TCP/IP, RF, and other PC-to-controller communications methods by changing the polling frequency and the amount of time the system waits for a response.

9. Automatic and encrypted backups for database and history backups shall be automatically stored at the central-control PC and encrypted with a nine-character alphanumeric password that must be used to restore or read data contained in backup.

10. Operator audit trail for recording and reporting all changes made to database and system software.

11. Support network protocol and topology, TCP/IP, Novel Netware, Digital Pathworks,

Banyan Vines, LAN/WAN, and RAS.

1. Password levels shall be individually customized at each workstation to allow or disallow operator access to program functions for each Location. displayed at each workstation. If an alarm is unacknowledged (not handled by another workstation) for a preset amount of time, the alarm will automatically appear on the filtered workstation.

1. Controllers shall operate as autonomous, intelligent processing units. a. Controllers shall make decisions about access control, alarm monitoring, linking functions, and door-locking schedules for their operation, independent of other system components. b. Controllers shall be part of a fully distributed processing-control network. c. The portion of the database associated with a controller, and consisting of parameters, constraints, and the latest value or status of points connected to that controller, shall be maintained in the controller.

2. The following functions shall be fully implemented and operational within each controller: c. Automatically reporting alarms to the central station. d. Reporting of sensor and output status to the central station on request. e. Maintaining real time, automatically updated by the central station at least once a day. f. Communicating with the central station. g. Executing controller resident programs. h. Diagnosing. i. Downloading and uploading data to and from the central station.

3. Controller Operations at a Location:

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 13 00 - 10


10/14/2013

a. Up 64 controllers connected to TIA 485-A communications loop. Globally operating I/O linking and anti-passback functions between controllers within the same Location without central-station or workstation intervention. Linking and antipassback shall remain fully functional within the same Location even when the central station or workstations are off-line. b. In the event of communication failure between the central station and a Location, there shall be no degradation in operations at the controllers at that Location.

Controllers at each Location shall be connected to a memory buffer with a capacity to store up to 10,000 events; there shall be no loss of transactions in system history files until the buffer overflows. c. Buffered events shall be handled in a first-in-first-out mode of operation.

4. Individual Controller Operation: a. Controllers shall transmit alarms, status changes, and other data to the central station when communications circuits are operable. If communications are not available, controllers shall function in a stand-alone mode; operational data, including the status and alarm data normally transmitted to the central station, shall be stored for later transmission to the central station. Storage capacity for the latest 1024 events shall be provided at each controller. b. Card-reader ports of a controller shall be custom configurable for at least 120 different card-reader or keypad formats. Multiple reader or keypad formats may be used simultaneously at different controllers or within the same controller. c. Controllers shall provide a response to card readers or keypad entries in less than

0.25 seconds, regardless of system size. d. Controllers that are reset, or powered up from a nonpowered state, shall automatically request a parameter download and reboot to their proper working state. This shall happen without any operator intervention. e. Initial Startup: When controllers are brought on-line, database parameters shall be automatically downloaded to them. After initial download is completed, only f. database changes shall be downloaded to each controller.

On failure for any reason, controllers shall perform an orderly shutdown and force controller outputs to a predetermined failure-mode state, consistent with the failure modes shown and the associated control device. g. After power is restored, following a power failure, startup software shall initiate selftest diagnostic routines, after which controllers shall resume normal operation. h. After controller failure, if the database and application software are no longer resident, controllers shall not restart but shall remain in the failure mode until repaired. If database and application programs are resident, controllers shall immediately resume operation. If not, software shall be restored automatically from the central station. a. System shall monitor and report status of TIA 485-A communications loop of each

Location. b. Communication status window shall display which controllers are currently communicating, a total count of missed polls since midnight, and which controller last missed a poll. c. Communication status window shall show the type of CPU, the type of I/O board and the amount of RAM for each controller.

6. Operating systems shall include a real-time clock function that maintains seconds, minutes, hours, day, date, and month. The real-time clock shall be automatically synchronized with the central station at least once a day to plus or minus 10 seconds.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 13 00 - 11


10/14/2013

The time synchronization shall be automatic, without operator action and without requiring system shutdown.

1. Central-station or workstation communications shall use the following: a. Direct connection using serial ports of the PC. b. TCP/IP LAN interface cards. c. Dial-up or cable modems for connections to Locations.

2. Each serial port used for communications shall be individually configurable for "direct communications," "modem communications incoming and outgoing," or "modem communications incoming only," or as an ASCII output port. Serial ports shall have adjustable data transmission rates and shall be selectable under program control.

3. Use multiport communications board if more than two serial ports are needed. a. Use a 4-, 8-, or 16-serial port configuration that is expandable to 32- or 64-serial ports. b. Connect the first board to an internal PCI bus adapter card.

4. Direct serial, TCP/IP, and dial-up, cable, or satellite communications shall be alike in the monitoring or control of the system except for the connection that must first be made to a dial-up or voice-over IP Location.

5. TCP/IP network interface card (NIV) shall have an option to set the poll-frequency and message-response time-out settings.

6. PC-to-controller and controller-to-controller communications (direct, dial-up, or TCP/IP) shall use a polled-communication protocol that checks sum and acknowledges each message. All communications in this subparagraph shall be verified and buffered, and retransmitted if not acknowledged.

G. Direct Serial or TCP/IP PC-to-Controller Communications:

1. Communication software on the PC shall supervise the PC-to-controller communications link.

2. Loss of communications to any controller shall result in an alarm at all PCs running the communication software.

3. When communications are restored, all buffered events shall automatically upload to the

PC, and any database changes shall be automatically sent to the controller.

1. TIA 485-A, four-wire, point-to-point, regenerative (repeater) communications network methodology.

2. TIA 485-A communications signal shall be regenerated at each controller.

1. All data transmissions from PCs to a Location, and between controllers at a Location, shall include a complete database checksum to check the integrity of the transmission. If the data checksum does not match, a full data download shall be automatically retransmitted.

2. If a controller is reset for any reason, it shall automatically request and receive a database download from the PC. The download shall restore data stored at the controller to their normal working state and shall take place with no operator intervention.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 13 00 - 12


10/14/2013

3. Software shall provide for setting downloads via dial-up connection to once per 24-hour period, with time selected by the operator.

4. Software shall provide for setting delays of database downloads for dial-up connections.

Delays change the download from immediately to a delay ranging from one to 999 minutes.

1. Inputs in system shall have two icon representations, one for the normal state and one for the abnormal state.

2. When viewing and controlling inputs, displayed icons shall automatically change to the proper icon to display the current system state in real time. Icons shall also display the input's state, whether armed or bypassed, and if the input is in the armed or bypassed state due to a time zone or a manual command.

3. Outputs in system shall have two icon representations, one for the secure (locked) state and one for the open (unlocked) state.

4. Icons displaying status of the I/O points shall be constantly updated to show their current real-time condition without prompting by the operator.

5. The operator shall be able to scroll the list of I/Os and press the appropriate toolbar button, or right click, to command the system to perform the desired function.

6. Graphic maps or drawings containing inputs, outputs, and override groups shall include the following: a. Database to import and store full-color maps or drawings and allow for input, output, and override group icons to be placed on maps. b. Maps to provide real-time display animation and allow for control of points assigned to them. c. System to allow inputs, outputs, and override groups to be placed on different maps. d. Software to allow changing the order or priority in which maps will be displayed.

7. Override Groups Containing I/Os: a. System shall incorporate override groups that provide the operator with the status and control over user-defined "sets" of I/Os with a single icon. b. Icon shall change automatically to show the live summary status of points in that group. c. Override group icon shall provide a method to manually control or set to time-zone points in the group. d. Override group icon shall allow the expanding of the group to show icons representing the live status for each point in the group, individual control over each point, and the ability to compress the individual icons back into one summary icon.

8. Schedule Overrides of I/Os and Override Groups: a. To accommodate temporary schedule changes that do not fall within the holiday parameters, the operator shall have the ability to override schedules individually for each input, output, or override group. b. Each schedule shall be composed of a minimum of two dates with separate times for each date. c. The first time and date shall be assigned the override state that the point shall advance to when the time and date become current. d. The second time and date shall be assigned the state that the point shall return to when the time and date become current.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 13 00 - 13


10/14/2013

9. Copy command in database shall allow for like data to be copied and then edited for specific requirements, to reduce redundant data entry.

K. Operator Access Control:

1. Control operator access to system controls through four password-protected operator levels. System operators and managers with appropriate password clearances shall be able to change operator levels for operators.

2. Three successive attempts by an operator to execute functions beyond their defined level during a 24-hour period shall initiate a software tamper alarm.

3. A minimum of 32 passwords shall be available with the system software. System shall display the operator's name or initials in the console's first field. System shall print the operator's name or initials, action, date, and time on the system printer at login and logoff.

4. The password shall not be displayed or printed.

5. Each password shall be definable and assignable for the following: a. Selected commands to be usable. b. Access to system software. c. Access to application software. d. Individual zones that are to be accessed. e. Access to database.

1. Command Input: Plain-language words and acronyms shall allow operators to use the system without extensive training or data-processing backgrounds. System prompts shall be a word, a phrase, or an acronym.

2. Command inputs shall be acknowledged and processing shall start in not less than one second(s).

3. Tasks that are executed by operator's commands shall include the following: a. Acknowledge Alarms: Used to acknowledge that the operator has observed the alarm message. b. Place Zone in Access: Used to remotely disable intrusion-alarm circuits emanating from a specific zone. System shall be structured so that console operator cannot disable tamper circuits. c. Place Zone in Secure: Used to remotely activate intrusion-alarm circuits emanating from a specific zone. d. System Test: Allows the operator to initiate a system-wide operational test. e. Zone Test: Allows the operator to initiate an operational test for a specific zone. g. Change Operator: Used for changing operators. h. Security Lighting Controls: Allows the operator to remotely turn on or turn off i. security lights.

Display Graphics: Used to show any graphic displays implemented in the system.

Graphic displays shall be completed within 20 seconds from time of operator command.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV k. Generate and format reports. l. Request help with the system operation.

1) Include in main menus.

2) Provide unique, descriptive, context-sensitive help for selections and functions with the press of one function key.

3) Provide navigation to specific topic from within the first help window.

28 13 00 - 14


10/14/2013

4) Help shall be accessible outside the application program.

1) Lock (secure) or unlock (open) each controlled entry and exit up to four times a day through time-zone programming.

2) Arm or disarm each monitored input up to four times a day through timezone programming.

3) Enable or disable readers or keypads up to two times a day through timezone programming.

4) Enable or disable cards or codes up to four times a day per entry point through access-level programming.

4. Command Input Errors: Show operator input assistance when a command cannot be executed because of operator input errors. Assistance screen shall use plain-language words and phrases to explain why the command cannot be executed. Error responses that require an operator to look up a code in a manual or other document are not acceptable. Conditions causing operator assistance messages include the following: a. Command entered is incorrect or incomplete. b. Operator is restricted from using that command. c. Command addresses a point that is disabled or out of service. d. Command addresses a point that does not exist. e. Command is outside the system's capacity.

M. Alarms: a. Assign manual and automatic responses to incoming-point status change or alarms. b. Automatically respond to input with a link to other inputs, outputs, or operatorresponse plans; unique sound with use of WAV files; and maps or images that graphically represent the point location. c. Sixty-character message field for each alarm. characters, with database storage capacity of up to 32,000 messages. Setup shall assign messages to access point, zone, and sensor. e. Secondary messages shall be assignable by the operator for printing to provide f. further information and shall be editable by the operator.

Allow 25 secondary messages with a field of four lines of 60 characters each. g. Store the most recent 1000 alarms for recall by the operator using the report generator. a. Annunciate a tamper alarm when unauthorized changes to system database files are attempted. Three consecutive unsuccessful attempts to log onto system shall generate a software tamper alarm. b. Annunciate a software tamper alarm when an operator or other individual makes three consecutive unsuccessful attempts to invoke functions beyond the authorization level. c. Maintain a transcript file of the last 5000 commands entered at each central station to serve as an audit trail. System shall not allow write access to system transcript files by any person, regardless of their authorization level.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 13 00 - 15


10/14/2013

d. Allow only acknowledgment of software tamper alarms.

3. Read access to system transcript files shall be reserved for operators with the highest password authorization level available in system.

4. Animated Response Graphics: Highlight alarms with flashing icons on graphic maps; display and constantly update the current status of alarm inputs and outputs in real time through animated icons.

5. Multimedia Alarm Annunciation: WAV files to be associated with alarm events for audio annunciation or instructions.

6. Alarm Handling: Each input may be configured so that an alarm cannot be cleared unless it has returned to normal, with options of requiring the operator to enter a comment about disposition of alarm. Allow operator to silence alarm sound when alarm is acknowledged.

7. Alarm Automation Interface: High-level interface to central-station alarm automation software systems. Allows input alarms to be passed to and handled by automation systems in the same manner as burglar alarms, using a TIA 232-F ASCII interface.

8. CCTV Alarm Interface: Allow commands to be sent to CCTV systems during alarms (or input change of state) through serial ports.

9. Camera Control: Provides operator ability to select and control cameras from graphic maps.

N. Alarm Monitoring: Monitor sensors, controllers, and DTS circuits and notify operators of an alarm condition. Display higher-priority alarms first and, within alarm priorities, display the oldest unacknowledged alarm first. Operator acknowledgment of one alarm shall not be considered acknowledgment of other alarms nor shall it inhibit reporting of subsequent alarms.

1. Displayed alarm data shall include type of alarm, location of alarm, and secondary alarm messages.

2. Printed alarm data shall include type of alarm, location of alarm, date and time (to nearest second) of occurrence, and operator responses.

3. Maps shall automatically display the alarm condition for each input assigned to that map if that option is selected for that input location.

4. Alarms initiate a status of "pending" and require the following two handling steps by operators: a. First Operator Step: "Acknowledged." This action shall silence sounds associated with the alarm. The alarm remains in the system "Acknowledged" but "Un-

Resolved." b. Second Operator Step: Operators enter the resolution or operator comment, giving the disposition of the alarm event. The alarm shall then clear.

5. Each workstation shall display the total pending alarms and total unresolved alarms.

6. Each alarm point shall be programmable to disallow the resolution of alarms until the alarm point has returned to its normal state.

7. Alarms shall transmit to the central station in real time except for allowing connection time for dial-up locations.

8. Alarms shall be displayed and managed from a minimum of four different windows. a. Input Status Window: Overlay status icon with a large red blinking icon. Selecting the icon will acknowledge the alarm. b. History Log Transaction Window: Display name, time, and date in red text.

Selecting red text will acknowledge the alarm. c. Alarm Log Transaction Window: Display name, time, and date in red. Selecting red text will acknowledge the alarm.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 13 00 - 16


10/14/2013

d. Graphic Map Display: Display a steady colored icon representing each alarm input location. Change icon to flashing red when the alarm occurs. Change icon from flashing red to steady red when the alarm is acknowledged.

9. Once an alarm is acknowledged, the operator shall be prompted to enter comments about the nature of the alarm and actions taken. Operator's comments may be manually entered or selected from a programmed predefined list, or a combination of both.

10. For locations where there are regular alarm occurrences, provide programmed comments. Selecting that comment shall clear the alarm.

11. The time and name of the operator who acknowledged and resolved the alarm shall be recorded in the database.

12. Identical alarms from the same alarm point shall be acknowledged at the same time the operator acknowledges the first alarm. Identical alarms shall be resolved when the first alarm is resolved.

13. Alarm functions shall have priority over downloading, retrieving, and updating database from workstations and controllers.

14. When a reader-controlled output (relay) is opened, the corresponding alarm point shall be automatically bypassed.

O. Monitor Display: Display text and graphic maps that include zone status integrated into the display. Colors are used for the various components and current data. Colors shall be uniform throughout the system. a. FLASHING RED: Alerts operator that a zone has gone into an alarm or that primary power has failed. b. STEADY RED: Alerts operator that a zone is in alarm and alarm has been acknowledged. c. YELLOW: Advises operator that a zone is in access. d. GREEN: Indicates that a zone is secure and that power is on.

2. Graphics: a. Support 32,000 graphic display maps and allow import of maps from a minimum of

16 standard formats from another drawing or graphics program. b. Allow I/O to be placed on graphic maps by the drag-and-drop method. c. Operators shall be able to view the inputs, outputs, and the point's name by moving the mouse cursor over the point on the graphic map. d. Inputs or outputs may be placed on multiple graphic maps. The operator shall be able to toggle to view graphic maps associated with I/Os. e. Each graphic map shall have a display-order sequence number associated with it to provide a predetermined order when toggled to different views. f. Camera icons shall have the ability to be placed on graphic maps that, when selected by an operator, will open a video window, display the camera associated with that icon, and provide pan-tilt-zoom control. g. Input, output, or camera placed on a map shall allow the ability to arm or bypass an input, open or secure an output, or control the pan-tilt-zoom function of the selected camera.

P. System test software enables operators to initiate a test of the entire system or of a particular portion of the system.

1. Test Report: The results of each test shall be stored for future display or printout. The report shall document the operational status of system components.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 13 00 - 17


10/14/2013

Q. Report-Generator Software: Include commands to generate reports for displaying, printing, and storing on disk and tape. Reports shall be stored by type, date, and time. Report printing shall be the lowest-priority activity. Report-generation mode shall be operator selectable but set up initially as periodic, automatic, or on request. Include time and date printed and the name of operator generating the report. Report formats may be configured by operators.

1. Automatic Printing: Setup shall specify, modify, or inhibit the report to be generated; the time the initial report is to be generated; the time interval between reports; the end of the period; and the default printer.

2. Printing on Request: An operator may request a printout of any report.

3. Alarm Reports: Reporting shall be automatic as initially set up. Include alarms recorded by system over the selected time and information about the type of alarm, the type of sensor, the location, the time, and the action taken.

4. Access and Secure Reports: Document zones placed in access, the time placed in access, and the time placed in secure mode.

5. Custom Reports: Reports tailored to exact requirements of who, what, when, and where.

As an option, custom report formats may be stored for future printing.

6. Automatic History Reports: Named, saved, and scheduled for automatic generation.

7. Cardholder Reports: Include data, or selected parts of the data, as well as the ability to be sorted by name, card number, imprinted number, or by any of the user-defined fields.

8. Cardholder by Reader Reports: Based on who has access to a specific reader or group of readers by selecting the readers from a list.

9. Cardholder by Access-Level Reports: Display everyone that has been assigned to the specified access level.

10. Who Is "In" (Muster) Report: a. Emergency Muster Report: One-click operation on toolbar launches report. b. Cardholder Report. Contain a count of persons who are "In" at a selected Location and a detailed listing of name, date, and time of last use, sorted by the last reader used or by the group assignment.

11. Panel Labels Reports: Printout of control-panel field documentation including the actual location of equipment, programming parameters, and wiring identification. Maintain system installation data within system database so that data are available on-site at all times.

12. Activity and Alarm On-Line Printing: Activity printers for use at workstations; prints all events, or alarms only.

13. History Reports: Custom reports that allow the operator to select any date, time, event type, device, output, input, operator, Location, name, or cardholder to be included or excluded from the report. a. Initially store history on the hard disk of the host PC. b. Permit viewing of the history on workstations or print history to any system printer. c. The report shall be definable by a range of dates and times with the ability to have a daily start and stop time over a given date range. d. Each report shall depict the date, time, event type, event description, and device; or I/O name, cardholder group assignment, and cardholder name or code number. e. Each line of a printed report shall be numbered to ensure that the integrity of the report has not been compromised. f. Total number of lines of the report shall be given at the end of the report. If the report is run for a single event such as "Alarms," the total shall reflect how many alarms occurred during that period.

14. Reports shall have the following four options:

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV a. View on screen.

28 13 00 - 18


10/14/2013

b. Print to system printer. Include automatic print spooling and "Print To" options if more than one printer is connected to the system. c. "Save to File" with full path statement. d. System shall have the ability to produce a report indicating status of system inputs and outputs or of inputs and outputs that are abnormal, out of time zone, manually overridden, not reporting, or in alarm.

15. Custom Code List Subroutine: Allow the access codes of system to be sorted and printed according to the following criteria: a. Active, inactive, or future activate or deactivate. b. Code number, name, or imprinted card number. c. Group, Location access levels. d. Start and stop code range. e. Codes that have not been used since a selectable number of days. f. In, out, or either status. g. Codes with trace designation.

16. The reports of system database shall allow options so that every data field may be printed.

17. The reports of system database shall be constructed so that the actual position of the printed data shall closely match the position of the data on the data-entry windows.

R. Anti-Passback:

1. System shall have global and local anti-passback features, selectable by Location.

System shall support hard and soft anti-passback.

2. Hard Anti-Passback: Once a credential holder is granted access through a reader with one type of designation (IN or OUT), the credential holder may not pass through that type of reader designation until the credential holder passes through a reader of opposite designation.

3. Soft Anti-Passback: Should a violation of the proper IN or OUT sequence occur, access shall be granted, but a unique alarm shall be transmitted to the control station, reporting the credential holder and the door involved in the violation. A separate report may be run on this event.

4. Timed Anti-Passback: A controller capability that prevents an access code from being used twice at the same device (door) within a user-defined amount of time.

5. Provide four separate zones per Location that can operate without requiring interaction with the host PC (done at controller). Each reader shall be assignable to one or all four anti-passback zones. In addition, each anti-passback reader can be further designated as "Hard," "Soft," or "Timed" in each of the four anti-passback zones. The four antipassback zones shall operate independently.

6. The anti-passback schemes shall be definable for each individual door.

7. The Master Access Level shall override anti-passback.

8. System shall have the ability to forgive (or reset) an individual credential holder or the entire credential-holder population anti-passback status to a neutral status.

1. Provide for and allow an operator to be restricted to only working with visitors. The visitor badging subsystem shall assign credentials and enroll visitors. Allow only those access levels that have been designated as approved for visitors.

2. Provide an automated log of visitor name, time and doors accessed, and name of person contacted.

3. Allow a visitor designation to be assigned to a credential holder.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 13 00 - 19


10/14/2013

4. Security access system shall be able to restrict the access levels that may be assigned to credentials issued to visitors.

5. Allow operator to recall visitors' credential-holder file once a visitor is enrolled in the system.

6. The operator may designate any reader as one that deactivates the credential after use at that reader. The history log shall show the return of the credential.

7. System shall have the ability to use the visitor designation in searches and reports.

Reports shall be able to print all or any visitor activity.

T. Time and Attendance:

1. Time and attendance reporting shall be provided to match IN and OUT reads and display cumulative time in for each day and cumulative time in for length designated in the report.

2. Shall be provided to match IN and OUT reads and display cumulative time in for each day and cumulative time in for length designated in the report.

3. System software setup shall allow designation of selected access-control readers as time and attendance hardware to gather the clock-in and clock-out times of the users at these readers. a. Reports shall show in and out times for each day, total time in for each day, and a total time in for period specified by the user. b. Allow the operator to view and print the reports, or save the reports to a file. c. Alphabetically sort reports on the person's last name, by Location or location group. Include all credential holders or optionally select individual credential holders for the report.

U. Training Software: Enables operators to practice system operation, including alarm acknowledgment, alarm assessment, response force deployment, and response force communications. System shall continue normal operation during training exercises and shall terminate exercises when an alarm signal is received at the console.

V. Entry-Control Enrollment Software: Database management functions that allow operators to add, delete, and modify access data as needed.

1. The enrollment station shall not have alarm response or acknowledgment functions.

2. Provide multiple, password-protected access levels. Database management and modification functions shall require a higher operator access level than personnel enrollment functions.

3. The program shall provide means to disable the enrollment station when it is unattended, to prevent unauthorized use.

4. The program shall provide a method to enter personnel identifying information into the entry-control database files through enrollment stations. In the case of personnel identity-verification subsystems, this shall include biometric data. Allow entry of personnel identifying information into the system database using menu selections and data fields. The data field names shall be customized during setup to suit user and site needs. Personnel identity-verification subsystems selected for use with the system shall fully support the enrollment function and shall be compatible with the entry-control database files.

5. Cardholder Data: Provide 99 user-defined fields. System shall have the ability to run searches and reports using any combination of these fields. Each user-defined field shall be configurable, using any combination of the following features: a. MASK: Determines a specific format with which data must comply. b. REQUIRED: Operator is required to enter data into field before saving. c. UNIQUE: Data entered must be unique.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 13 00 - 20


10/14/2013

d. DEACTIVATE DATE: Data entered will be evaluated as an additional deactivates date for all cards assigned to this cardholder. e. NAME ID: Data entered will be considered a unique ID for the cardholder.

6. Personnel Search Engine: A report generator with capabilities such as search by last name, first name, group, or any predetermined user-defined data field; by codes not used in definable number of days; by skills; or by seven other methods.

7. Multiple Deactivate Dates for Cards: User-defined fields to be configured as additional stop dates to deactivate any cards assigned to the cardholder.

8. Batch card printing.

9. Default card data can be programmed to speed data entry for sites where most card data are similar.

10. Enhanced ASCII File Import Utility: Allows the importing of cardholder data and images.

11. Card Expire Function: Allows readers to be configured to deactivate cards when a card is used at selected devices.

A. Database and database management software shall define and modify each point in database using operator commands. Definition shall include parameters and constraints associated with each system device.

1. System data management shall be in a hierarchical menu-tree format, with navigation through expandable menu branches and manipulated with use of menus and icons in a main menu and system toolbar. a. Toolbar icons for add, delete, copy, print, capture image, activate, deactivate, and muster report. b. Point and click feature to facilitate data manipulation. c. Next and previous command buttons visible when editing database fields to facilitate navigation from one record to the next. d. Copy command and copy tool in the toolbar to copy data from one record to create a new similar record.

3. Data entry shall be automatically checked for duplicate and illegal data and shall be verified for valid format.

4. System shall generate a memo or note field for each item that is stored in database, allowing the storing of information about any defining characteristics of the item. Memo field is used for noting the purpose for which the item was entered, reasons for changes that were made, and the like.

1. File management shall include database backup and restoration system, allowing selection of storage media, including 3.5-inch floppy disk, Zip and Jaz drives, and designated network resources.

2. Operations shall be both manual and automatic modes. The number of automatic sequential backups before the oldest backup will be overwritten; FIFO mode shall be operator selectable.

3. Backup program shall provide manual operation from any PC on the LAN and shall operate while system remains operational.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 13 00 - 21


10/14/2013

1. Support up to 32,000 individual system operators, each with a unique password.

2. One to eight alphanumeric characters.

3. Allow passwords to be case sensitive.

4. Passwords shall not be displayed when entered.

5. Passwords shall have unique and customizable password profile, and allow several operators to share a password profile. Include the following features in the password profile: a. Predetermine the highest-level password profile for access to all functions and areas of program. b. Allow or disallow operator access to any program operation, including the functions of View, Add, Edit, and Delete. c. Restrict doors to which an operator can assign access.

6. Operators shall use a user name and password to log on to system. This user name and password shall be used to access database areas and programs as determined by the associated profile.

7. Make provision to allow the operator to log off without fully exiting program. User may be logged off but program will remain running while displaying the login window for the next operator.

E. Access Card/Code Operation and Management: Access authorization shall be by card, by a manually entered code (PIN), or by a combination of both (card plus PIN).

1. Access authorization shall verify the facility code first, the card or card-and-PIN validation second, and the access level (time of day, day of week, date), anti-passback status, and number of uses last.

2. Use data-entry windows to view, edit, and issue access levels. Access-authorization entry-management system shall maintain and coordinate all access levels to prevent duplication or the incorrect creation of levels.

3. Allow assignment of multiple cards/codes to a cardholder.

4. Allow assignment of up to four access levels for each Location to a cardholder. Each access level may contain any combination of doors.

5. Each door may be assigned four time zones.

6. Access codes may be up to 11 digits in length.

7. Software shall allow the grouping of locations so cardholder data can be shared by all locations in the group.

8. Visitor Access: Issue a visitor badge for data tracking or photo ID purposes without assigning that person a card or code.

9. Cardholder Tracing: Allow for selection of cardholder for tracing. Make a special audible and visible annunciation at control station when a selected card or code is used at a designated code reader. Annunciation shall include an automatic display of the cardholder image.

10. Allow each cardholder to be given either an unlimited number of uses or a number from one to 9999 that regulates the number of times the card can be used before it is automatically deactivated.

11. Provide for cards and codes to be activated and deactivated manually or automatically by date. Provide for multiple deactivate dates to be preprogrammed.

F. Security Access Integration:

1. Photo ID badging and photo verification shall use the same database as the security access and may query data from cardholder, group, and other personal information to build a custom ID badge.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 13 00 - 22


10/14/2013

2. Automatic or manual image recall and manual access based on photo verification shall also be a means of access verification and entry.

3. System shall allow sorting of cardholders together by group or other characteristic for a fast and efficient method of reporting on, and enabling or disabling, cards or codes.

G. Key control and tracking shall be an integrated function of cardholder data.

1. Provide the ability to store information about which conventional metal keys are issued and to whom, along with key construction information.

2. Reports shall be designed to list everyone who possesses a specified key.

H. Facility Codes: System shall accommodate up to 2048 facility codes per Location, with the option of allowing facility codes to work at all doors or only at particular doors.

1. With the press of one appropriate button on the toolbar, the user shall be permitted to enter operator comments into the history at any time.

2. Automatic prompting of operator comment shall occur before the resolution of each alarm.

3. Operator comments shall be recorded by time, date, and operator number.

4. Comments shall be sorted and viewed through reports and history.

5. The operator may enter comments in two ways; either or both may be used: a. Manually entered through keyboard data entry (typed), up to 65,000 characters per each alarm. b. Predefined and stored in database for retrieval on request.

6. System shall have a minimum of 999 predefined operator comments with up to 30 characters per comment.

J. Group:

1. Group names may be used to sort cardholders into groups that allow the operator to determine the tenant, vendor, contractor, department, division, or any other designation of a group to which the person belongs.

2. System software shall have the capacity to assign one of 32,000 group names to an access authorization.

3. Make provision in software to deactivate and reactivate all access authorizations assigned to a particular group.

4. Allow sorting of history reports and code list printouts by group name.

1. Each zone consists of a start and stop time for seven days of the week and three holiday schedules. A time zone is assigned to inputs, outputs, or access levels to determine when an input shall automatically arm or disarm, when an output automatically opens or secures, or when access authorization assigned to an access level will be denied or granted.

2. Up to four time zones may be assigned to inputs and outputs to allow up to four arm or disarm periods per day or four lock or unlock periods per day; up to three holiday override schedules may be assigned to a time zone.

3. Data-entry window shall display a dynamically linked bar graph showing active and inactive times for each day and holiday, as start and stop times are entered or edited.

4. System shall have the capacity for 2048 time zones for each Location.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 13 00 - 23


10/14/2013

L. Holidays:

1. Three different holiday schedules may be assigned to a time zone. Holiday schedule consists of date in format MM/DD/YYYY and a description. When the holiday date matches the current date of the time zone, the holiday schedule replaces the time-zone schedule for that 24-hour period.

2. System shall have the capacity for 32,000 holidays.

3. Three separate holiday schedules may be applied to a time zone.

4. Holidays have an option to be designated as occurring on the designated date each year.

These holidays remain in the system and will not be purged.

5. Holidays not designated to occur each year shall be automatically purged from the database after the date expires.

1. System shall allow for the creation of up to 32,000 access levels.

2. One level shall be predefined as the Master Access Level. The Master Access Level shall work at all doors at all times and override any anti-passback.

3. System shall allow for access to be restricted to any area by reader and by time. Access levels shall determine when and where an Identifier is authorized.

4. System shall be able to create multiple door and time-zone combinations under the same access level so that an Identifier may be valid during different time periods at different readers even if the readers are on the same controller.

1. System shall provide a minimum of 99 user-defined fields, each with up to 50 characters, for specific information about each credential holder.

2. System shall accommodate a title for each field; field length shall be 20 characters.

3. A "Required" option may be applied to each user-defined field that, when selected, forces the operator to enter data in the user-defined field before the credential can be saved.

4. A "Unique" option may be applied to each user-defined field that, when selected, will not allow duplicate data from different credential holders to be entered.

5. Data format option may be assigned to each user-defined field that will require the data to be entered with certain character types in specific spots in the field entry window.

6. A user-defined field, if selected, will define the field as a deactivate date. The selection shall automatically cause the data to be formatted with the windows MM/DD/YYYY date format. The credential of the holder will be deactivated on that date.

7. A search function shall allow any one user-defined field or combination of user-defined fields to be searched to find the appropriate cardholder. The search function shall include a search for a character string.

8. System shall have the ability to print cardholders based on and organized by the userdefined fields.

1. System shall perform code tracing selectable by cardholder and by reader.

2. Any code may be designated as a "traced code" with no limit to how many codes can be traced.

3. Any reader may be designated as a "trace reader" with no limit to which or how many readers can be used for code tracing.

4. When a traced code is used at a trace reader, the access-granted message that usually appears on the monitor window of the central station shall be highlighted with a different color than regular messages. A short singular beep shall occur at the same time the highlighted message is displayed on the window.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 13 00 - 24


10/14/2013

5. The traced cardholder image (if image exists) shall appear on workstations when used at a trace reader.

2.6 SURGE AND TAMPER PROTECTION

A. Surge Protection: Protect components from voltage surges originating external to equipment housing and entering through power, communication, signal, control, or sensing leads. Include surge protection for external wiring of each conductor-entry connection to components.

1. Minimum Protection for Power Connections 120 suppressors complying with requirements in Division 26 Section "Transient-Voltage

Suppression for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits."

2. Minimum Protection for Communication, Signal, Control, and Low-Voltage Power

Connections: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Transient-Voltage

Suppression for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits." as recommended by manufacturer for type of line being protected.

B. Tamper Protection: Tamper switches on enclosures, control units, pull boxes, junction boxes, cabinets, and other system components shall initiate a tamper-alarm signal when unit is opened or partially disassembled. Control-station control-unit alarm display shall identify tamper alarms and indicate locations.

A. Workstation shall consist of a standard unmodified PC with accessories and peripherals that configure the workstation for a specific duty.

B. Workstation Computer: Standard unmodified PC of modular design. The CPU word size shall be 32bytes or larger; the CPU operating speed shall be at least 4GHz.

1. Memory: 4GB of usable installed memory, expandable to a minimum of 8GB without additional chassis or power supplies.

2. Power Supply: Minimum capacity of 300W. a. Accuracy: Plus or minus one minute per month. b. Time-Keeping Format: 24-hour time format including seconds, minutes, hours, date, day, and month; resettable by software. c. Provide automatic time correction once every 24 hours by synchronizing clock with the central station.

4. Serial Ports: Provide two TIA 232-F USB serial ports for general use, with additional ports as required. Data transmission rates shall be selectable under program control.

5. Parallel Port: An enhanced parallel port.

6. Sound Card: For playback and recording of digital WMP sound files that are associated with audible warning and alarm functions.

7. Color Monitor: Not less than 17 inches (430 mm), with a minimum resolution of 1280 by

1024 pixels, noninterlaced, and a maximum dot pitch of 0.28 mm. The video card shall support at least 256 colors at a resolution of 1280 by 1024 at a minimum refresh rate of

70 Hz.

8. Keyboard: With a minimum of 64 characters, standard ASCII character set based on

ANSI INCITS 154.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 13 00 - 25


10/14/2013

9. Mouse: Standard, compatible with the installed software. Minimum resolution shall be

400 dpi.

10. Disk storage shall include the following, each with appropriate controller: a. Minimum 80GB hard disk, maximum average access time of 10ms. b. Floppy Disk Drive: High density, 3-1/2-inch (90-mm) size. a. Nominal Storage Capacity: 700MB. b. Data Transfer Rate: 3.6Mbps. c. Average Access Time: 150ms. d. Cache Memory: 512KB. e. Data Throughput: 3.6MB/second, minimum. f. Read Speed: 48x. g. Write Speed: 32x. a. Nominal Storage Capacity: 4.7GB. b. Data Transfer Rate: 3.6 Mbps. c. Cache Memory: 512 KB. d. Read Speed: 24x. e. Write Speed: 6x.

13. Printer: a. Connected to the central station and designated workstations. b. Laser printer with minimum resolution of 600dpi. c. RAM: 8MB, minimum. d. Printing Speed: Minimum 12 pages per minute. e. Paper Handling: Automatic sheet feeder with 250-sheet paper cassette and with automatic feed.

14. Interface: Bidirectional parallel, and universal serial bus.

15. LAN Adapter Card: 10/100 Mbps internal network interface card.

C. UPS: Self-contained, complying with requirements in Division 26 Section "Static Uninterruptible

Power Supply."

1. Size: Provide a minimum of six hours of operation of the central-station equipment, including two hours of alarm printer operation.

2. Batteries: Sealed, valve regulated, recombinant, lead calcium.

3. Accessories: a. Transient voltage suppression. c. Rectifier/charger. d. Battery disconnect device. e. Static bypass transfer switch. f. Internal maintenance bypass/isolation switch. g. External maintenance bypass/isolation switch. h. Output isolation transformer.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 13 00 - 26


10/14/2013

k. UPS operation monitoring. l. Abnormal operation. Visible and audible indication. m. Remote battery monitoring.

2.8 FIXED DISPLAY

A. A fixed map display shall show layout of the protected facilities. Zones corresponding to those monitored by the system shall be highlighted on the display. Status of each zone shall be displayed using digital displays as required within each designated zone. A digital display test switch shall be provided on the map display.

2.9 CONTROLLERS

A. Controllers: Intelligent peripheral control unit, complying with UL 294, that stores time, date, valid codes, access levels, and similar data downloaded from the central station or workstation for controlling its operation.

B. Subject to compliance with requirements in this article, manufacturers may use multipurpose controllers.

C. Battery Backup: Sealed, lead acid; sized to provide run time during a power outage of 90 minutes, complying with UL 924.

1. The controller shall automatically restore communication within 10 seconds after an interruption with the field device network, with dc line supervision on each of its alarm inputs. a. Inputs: Monitor dry contacts for changes of state that reflect alarm conditions.

Provides at least eight alarm inputs, which are suitable for wiring as normally open or normally closed contacts for alarm conditions.

1) Supervise the alarm lines by monitoring each circuit for changes or disturbances in the signal, and for conditions as described in UL 1076 for line security equipment by monitoring for abnormal open, grounded, or shorted conditions using dc change measurements. System shall initiate an alarm in response to an abnormal current, which is a dc change of

10]percent or more for longer than 500 ms.

2) Transmit alarm-line-supervision alarm to the central station during the next interrogation cycle after the abnormal current condition. c. Outputs: Managed by central-station software.

2. Auxiliary Equipment Power: A GFI service outlet inside the controller enclosure.

1. Function: Provide local entry-control functions including one- and two-way communications with access-control devices such as card readers, keypads, biometric personnel identity-verification devices, door strikes, magnetic latches, gate and door operators, and exit push buttons.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 13 00 - 27


10/14/2013

a. Operate as a stand-alone portal controller using the downloaded database during periods of communication loss between the controller and the field-device network. b. Accept information generated by the entry-control devices; automatically process this information to determine valid identification of the individual present at the portal:

1) On authentication of the credentials or information presented, check privileges of the identified individual, allowing only those actions granted as privileges.

2) Privileges shall include, but are not limited to, time of day control, day of week control, group control, and visitor escort control. c. Maintain a date-, time-, and Location-stamped record of each transaction. A transaction is defined as any successful or unsuccessful attempt to gain access through a controlled portal by the presentation of credentials or other identifying information.

2. Inputs: a. Data from entry-control devices; use this input to change modes between access and secure. b. Database downloads and updates from the central station that include enrollment and privilege information.

3. Outputs: a. Indicate success or failure of attempts to use entry-control devices and make comparisons of presented information with stored identification information. b. Grant or deny entry by sending control signals to portal-control devices and mask intrusion-alarm annunciation from sensors stimulated by authorized entries . c. Maintain a date-, time-, and Location-stamped record of each transaction and transmit transaction records to the central station. d. Door Prop Alarm: If a portal is held open for longer than [ 10 seconds ] [ time listed in a schedule ], alarm sounds.

4. With power supplies sufficient to power at voltage and frequency required for field devices and portal-control devices.

5. Data Line Problems: For periods of loss of communication with the central station, or when data transmission is degraded and generating continuous checksum errors, the controller shall continue to control entry by accepting identifying information, making authentication decisions, checking privileges, and controlling portal-control devices. a. Store up to [ 1000 ] transactions during periods of communication loss between the controller and access-control devices for subsequent upload to the central station on restoration of communication.

6. Controller Power: NFPA 70, Class II power-supply transformer, with 12- or 24-V ac secondary, backup battery and charger. a. Backup Battery: [ Premium, valve ]-regulated, recombinant-sealed, lead-calcium battery; spill proof; with a full one-year warranty and a pro rata [ 19 ] [ 9 ]-year warranty. With single-stage, constant-voltage-current, limited battery charger, comply with battery manufacturer's written instructions for battery terminal voltage and charging current recommendations for maximum battery life.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 13 00 - 28


10/14/2013

b. Backup Battery: Valve-regulated, recombinant-sealed, lead-acid battery; spill proof. With single-stage, constant-voltage-current, limited battery charger, comply with battery manufacturer's written instructions for battery terminal voltage and charging current recommendations for maximum battery life. c. Backup Power-Supply Capacity: 90 minutes of battery supply. Submit battery and charger calculations. d. Power Monitoring: Provide manual, dynamic battery-load test, initiated and monitored at the control center; with automatic disconnection of the controller when battery voltage drops below controller limits. Report by using local controller-mounted digital displays and by communicating status to central station.

Indicate normal power on and battery charger on trickle charge. Indicate and report the following:

1) Trouble Alarm: Normal power-off load assumed by battery.

2) Trouble Alarm: Low battery.

3) Alarm: Power off.

2.10 SECONDARY ALARM ANNUNCIATOR

A. Secondary Alarm Annunciation Site: A workstation with limited I/O capacity, consisting of a secondary alarm annunciation workstation to allow the operator to duplicate functions of the main operator interface and to show system status changes .

2.11 CARD READERS, CREDENTIAL CARDS, AND KEYPADS

A. Card-Reader Power: Powered from its associated controller, including its standby power source, and shall not dissipate more than 5 W.

B. Response Time: Card reader shall respond to passage requests by generating a signal that is sent to the controller. Response time shall be 800 ms or less, from the time the card reader finishes reading the credential card until a response signal is generated.

C. Enclosure: Suitable for surface, semi-flush, pedestal, or weatherproof mounting. Mounting types shall additionally be suitable for installation in the following locations:

1. Indoors, controlled environment.

3. Outdoors, with built-in heaters or other cold-weather equipment to extend the operating temperature range as needed for operation at the site.

D. Display: Digital visual indicator shall provide visible and audible status indications and user prompts. Indicate power on or off, whether user passage requests have been accepted or rejected, and whether the door is locked or unlocked.

E. Stripe Swipe Readers: Bidirectional, reading cards swiped in both directions, powered by the controller. Reader shall be set up for ABA Track .

1. ABA Track: Magnetic stripe that is encoded on track 2, at 75-bpi density in binary-coded decimal format; for example, 5-bit, 16-character set.

2. Readers for outdoors shall be in a polymeric plastic enclosure with all electronics potted in plastic. Rated for operation in ambient conditions of minus 40 to plus 160 deg F in a humidity range of 10 to 90 percent.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 13 00 - 29


10/14/2013

F. Wiegand Swipe Reader: Set up for [ 26 ]-bit data cards. Comply with SIA AC-01.

G. Wiegand Key-Insert Reader: Set up for [ 26 ]-bit data cards.

H. Bar-Code Reader: Set up for Code [ 128 ].

I. Insert Readers: Requiring the card to be inserted from the [ side ], powered by the controller.

J. Touch-Plate and Proximity Readers:

1. Active-detection proximity card readers shall provide power to compatible credential cards through magnetic induction, and shall receive and decode a unique identification code number transmitted from the credential card.

2. Passive-detection proximity card readers shall use a swept-frequency, RF field generator to read the resonant frequencies of tuned circuits laminated into compatible credential cards. The resonant frequencies read shall constitute a unique identification code number.

3. The card reader shall read proximity cards in a range from direct contact to at least 6 inches from the reader.

K. Keypads:

1. Entry-control keypads shall use a unique combination of alphanumeric and other symbols as an Identifier.

2. Keypads shall contain an integral alphanumeric/special symbols keyboard with symbols arranged in [ ascending ASCII-code ordinal sequence ] [ random scrambled order ].

3. Communication protocol shall be compatible with the local processor.

1. Keypads shall include a digital visual indicator and shall provide [ visible ] [ visible and audible ] status indications and user prompts.

2. Display shall indicate power on or off and whether user passage requests have been accepted or rejected.

3. Design of the keypad display or keypad enclosure shall limit viewing angles of the keypad as follows: a. Maximum Horizontal Viewing Angle: Plus or minus 5 degrees or less off a vertical plane perpendicular to the plane of the face of the keypad display. b. Maximum Vertical Viewing Angle: Plus or minus 15 degrees or less off a horizontal plane perpendicular to the plane of the face of the keypad display.

M. Keypad Response Time:

1. The keypad shall respond to passage requests by generating a signal to the local processor. The response time shall be 800 ms or less from the time the last alphanumeric symbol is entered until a response signal is generated.

1. The keypad shall be powered from the source as shown and shall not dissipate more than 150 W.

O. Keypad Mounting Method:

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 13 00 - 30


10/14/2013

1. Keypads shall be suitable for surface, semi-flush, pedestal, or weatherproof mounting as required.

1. Keypads shall provide a means for users to indicate a duress situation by entering a special code.

Q. Keypad and Wiegand-Swipe-Reader Combination: Designed to require an entry on the keypad before presenting the credential card.

1. Keypad: Allow the entry of four [ numeric digits ] [ alphanumeric characters ] that are associated with a specific credential. Keypads shall contain an integral alphanumeric/special symbol keyboard with symbols arranged in [ ascending ASCIIcode ordinal sequence ] [ random scrambled order ]. Keypad display or enclosure shall limit viewing angles of the keypad as follows: a. Maximum Horizontal Viewing Angle: Plus or minus 5 degrees or less off a vertical plane perpendicular to the plane of the face of the keypad display. b. Maximum Vertical Viewing Angle: Plus or minus 15 degrees or less off a horizontal plane perpendicular to the plane of the face of the keypad display.

2. Wiegand Swipe Reader: Set up for [ 33 ] [ 26 ]-bit data cards to generate a unique card identification code. Comply with SIA AC-01.

R. Communication Protocol: Compatible with local processor.

S. Touch-Plate and Contactless Card Reader: The reader shall have "flash" download capability to accommodate card format changes. The card reader shall have capability of transmitting data to security control panel and shall comply with ISO/IEC 7816.

T. Credential Card Modification: Entry-control cards shall be able to be modified by lamination direct print process during the enrollment process without reduction of readability. The design of the credential cards shall allow for the addition of at least one slot or hole to accommodate the attachment of a clip for affixing the credential card to the badge holder used at the site.

U. Card Size and Dimensional Stability: Credential cards shall be 2-1/8 by 3-3/8 inches. The credential card material shall be dimensionally stable so that an undamaged card with deformations resulting from normal use shall be readable by the card reader.

V. Card Material: Abrasion resistant, nonflammable, nontoxic, and impervious to solar radiation and effects of ultraviolet light.

1. Core and laminate or monolithic construction.

2. Lettering, logos, and other markings shall be hot stamped into the credential material or direct printed.

3. Incorporate ] [ phosphorous ink ] as a security enhancement.

4. Furnish equipment for on-site assembly and lamination of credential cards.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 13 00 - 31


10/14/2013

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the

Work include, but are not limited to, the following :


1. Autostar Technology Pte Ltd.

2. BioMet Partners Inc.

4. Control Module, Inc.

5. Ingersoll-Rand Company Limited; Recognition Systems.

6. L-1 Identity Solutions, Inc.

7. L-1 Identity Solutions, Inc.; Identix Incorporated Division.

C. Biometric identity-verification templates shall be stored as part of system database files and used as a comparative base by the identity-verification equipment to generate an appropriate signal to the associated controller.

D. Eye Retina Scanner: Designed to incorporate positive measures to establish that the eye retina being scanned by the device belongs to a living human being.

1. Retina scan device shall provide a means that does not require facial contact with the device for enrollees to align their eye for identification. A manual push button shall be provided to initiate the scan process when the enrollee's eye is aligned in front of the device.

2. The efficiency and accuracy of scanner shall not be affected by contact lenses.

3. Storage space for each eye template shall not exceed 512 8-bit bytes.

4. Light-emitting source used for retina scans may not use light levels exceeding 20 percent of the maximum safe level established in the American Conference of Governmental

Industrial Hygienists limit values.

5. Template Update: Eye scanner shall not automatically update an enrollee's template.

Significant changes in an individual's eye shall require re-enrollment.

6. Scan acceptance tolerance or template match criteria shall be under system manager/operator control. Eye scanner shall determine when multiple attempts are needed for retina verification and shall automatically prompt the enrollee for additional attempts up to a maximum of three. Three failed attempts shall generate an entry-control alarm.

7. Average Verification Time: Eye scanner shall respond to passage requests by generating an entry request signal to the controller. The verification time shall be 1.5 seconds or less from the moment eye scanner initiates the scan process until eye scanner generates a response signal.

8. Modes: Eye scanner shall provide an enrollment mode, a recognition mode, and a code/credential verification mode. a. In the enrollment mode, eye scanner shall create an eye template for new personnel and enter the template into the system database file created for that person. Template information shall be compatible with system application software. b. In the recognition mode, eye scanner shall allow passage when the eye scan data from the verification attempt match an eye template stored in database files. c. In the code/credential verification mode, eye scanner shall allow passage when the eye scan data from the verification attempt match the eye scan template

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 13 00 - 32


10/14/2013

associated with the identification code entered into a keypad, or they match the eye scan template associated with credential card data read by a card reader.

9. Reports: Eye scanner shall create and store template match scores for all transactions involving eye retinal scans. Template match scores shall be stored in the matching personnel data file used for report generation.

10. Power: Scanner shall be powered from its associated controller, requiring not more than

45 W.

11. Enclosure: Eye scanners shall be available with enclosures that are suitable for surface, semiflush, or pedestal mounting. Mounting types shall additionally be suitable for installation in the following locations: a. Indoors, controlled environment.

12. Display: Digital visual indicator shall provide visible [ and audible ] status indications and user prompts. Indicate power on or off and whether user passage requests have been accepted or rejected.

E. Hand Geometry: Use unique human hand measurements to identify authorized, enrolled personnel. The design of this device shall incorporate positive measures to establish that the hand being measured by the device belongs to a living human being.

1. The user's hand shall remain in full view of the user at all times. The scan process of the hand geometry device shall make three-dimensional measurements of the size and shape of the subject's hand. Scanning shall start automatically once the user's hand is properly positioned by the alignment system.

2. Hand geometry device shall be able to use either left or right hand for enrollment and verification.

3. Storage space for each hand template shall not exceed 50 8-bit bytes.

4. Template Update and Acceptance Tolerances: Hand geometry devices shall not automatically update a user's profile. Significant changes in an individual's hand geometry shall require re-enrollment. Hand geometry devices shall provide an adjustable acceptance tolerance or template match criteria under system manager/operator control.

Hand geometry device shall determine when multiple attempts are needed for hand geometry verification and shall automatically prompt the user for additional attempts up to a maximum of three. Three failed attempts shall generate an entry-control alarm.

5. Average Verification Time: Hand geometry device shall respond to passage requests by generating an entry request signal to the controller. The verification time shall be 1.5 seconds or less from the moment hand geometry device initiates the scan process until hand geometry device generates a response signal.

6. Modes: Hand geometry device shall provide an enrollment mode, a recognition mode, and a code/credential verification mode. a. In the enrollment mode, hand geometry device shall create a hand template for new personnel and enter the template into the system database file created for that person. Template information shall be compatible with system application software. b. In the recognition mode, hand geometry device shall allow passage when the hand scan data from the verification attempt match a hand geometry template stored in database files. c. In the code/credential verification mode, hand geometry device shall allow passage when the hand scan data from the verification attempt match the hand geometry template associated with the identification code entered into a keypad, or they match the hand geometry template associated with credential card data read by a card reader.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 13 00 - 33


10/14/2013

7. Reports: Hand geometry device shall create and store template match scores for all transactions involving hand geometry scans. Template match scores shall be stored in the matching personnel data file used for report generation.

8. Power: Hand geometry device shall be powered from its associated controller, requiring not more than 45 W.

9. Enclosure: Geometry readers shall be available with enclosures that are suitable for surface, semiflush, or pedestal mounting. Mounting types shall additionally be suitable for installation in the following locations: a. Indoors, controlled environment. c. Outdoors.

10. Display: Digital visual indicator shall provide visible [ and audible ] status indications and user prompts. Indicate power on or off and whether user passage requests have been accepted or rejected.

F. Fingerprint Analysis Scanner: Use a unique human fingerprint pattern to identify authorized, enrolled personnel. The design of this device shall incorporate positive measures to establish that the hand or fingers being scanned by the device belong to a living human being.

1. The user's hand shall remain in full view of the user at all times. The scan process of the fingerprint analysis scanner shall perform an optical or other type of scan of the enrollee's fingers. Scanning shall start automatically when the user's fingers are properly positioned.

2. Storage space for each fingerprint template shall not exceed 1250 8-bit bytes.

3. Template Update and Acceptance Tolerances: Fingerprint analysis scanners shall not automatically update an enrollee's profile. Significant changes in an individual's fingerprints shall require re-enrollment. Fingerprint analysis scanners shall provide an adjustable acceptance tolerance or template match criteria under system manager/operator control. Fingerprint analysis scanner shall determine when multiple attempts are needed for fingerprint verification and shall automatically prompt the user for additional attempts up to a maximum of three. Three failed attempts shall generate an entry-control alarm.

4. Average Verification Time: Fingerprint analysis scanner shall respond to passage requests by generating an entry request signal to the controller. The verification time shall be two seconds or less from the moment fingerprint analysis scanner initiates the scan process until fingerprint analysis scanner generates a response signal.

5. Modes: Fingerprint analysis scanner shall provide an enrollment mode, a recognition mode, and a code/credential verification mode. a. In the enrollment mode, fingerprint analysis scanner shall create a fingerprint template for new personnel and enter the template into the system database file created for that person. b. In the recognition mode, fingerprint analysis scanner shall allow passage when the fingerprint data from the verification attempt match a fingerprint template stored in database files. c. In the code/credential verification mode, fingerprint analysis scanner shall allow passage when the fingerprint data from the verification attempt match the fingerprint template associated with the identification code entered into a keypad, or they match the fingerprint template associated with credential card data read by a card reader.

6. Reports: Fingerprint analysis device shall create and store pattern match scores for all transactions involving fingerprint scans. Template match scores shall be stored in the matching personnel data file used for report generation.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 13 00 - 34


10/14/2013

7. Power: Fingerprint analysis scanner shall be powered from its associated controller, requiring not more than 45 W.

8. Enclosure: Scanners shall be available with enclosures that are suitable for surface, semiflush, or pedestal mounting. Mounting types shall additionally be suitable for installation in the following locations: a. Indoors, controlled environment. c. Outdoors.

9. Display: Digital visual indicator shall provide visible and audible status indications and user prompts. Indicate power on or off and whether user passage requests have been accepted or rejected.

G. Iris Scan Device: Use the unique patterns found in the iris of the human eye to identify authorized, enrolled personnel. The device shall use ambient light to capture an image of the iris of a person for identification. The resulting video image shall be compared against a stored template that was captured during the enrollment process. When the presented image is sufficiently similar to the stored image template, then the device shall authenticate the presenting individual as identified. The threshold of similarity shall be adjustable.

1. The efficiency and accuracy of the device shall not be affected by contact lenses or eyeglasses.

2. Iris scan device shall provide a means that does not require facial contact with the device for enrollees to align their eye for identification. A manual push button shall be provided to initiate the scan process when the user's eye is aligned in front of the device.

3. The device shall include adjustments to accommodate differences in enrollee height.

4. Template Update: Iris scanners shall not automatically update an enrollee's template.

Significant changes in an individual's eye shall require re-enrollment.

5. Scan acceptance tolerance or template match criteria shall be under system manager/operator control. Iris scanner shall determine when multiple attempts are needed for iris verification and shall automatically prompt the user for additional attempts up to a maximum of three. Three failed attempts shall generate an entry-control alarm.

6. Average Verification Time: Iris scanner shall respond to passage requests by generating an entry request signal to the controller. The verification time shall be 1.5 seconds or less from the moment iris scanner initiates the scan process until iris scanner generates a response signal.

7. Modes: Iris scanner shall provide an enrollment mode, a recognition mode, and a code/credential verification mode. a. In the enrollment mode, iris scanner shall create an iris template for new personnel and enter the template into the system database file created for that person.

Template information shall be compatible with system application software. b. In the recognition mode, iris scanner shall allow passage when the iris scan data from the verification attempt match an iris template stored in database files. c. In the code/credential verification mode, iris scanner shall allow passage when the iris scan data from the verification attempt match the iris scan template associated with the identification code entered into a keypad, or they match the iris scan template associated with credential card data read by a card reader.

8. Reports: Iris imaging shall create and store template match scores for all transactions involving iris scans. Template match scores shall be stored in the matching personnel data file used for report generation.

9. Power: Iris scanner shall be powered from its associated controller, requiring not more than 45 W.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 13 00 - 35


10/14/2013

10. Enclosure: Eye scanners shall be available with enclosures that are suitable for surface, semiflush, or pedestal mounting. Mounting types shall additionally be suitable for installation in the following locations: a. Indoors, controlled environment.

11. Display: Digital visual indicator shall provide visible and audible status indications and user prompts. Indicate power on or off and whether user passage requests have been accepted or rejected.




1. Applied Wireless Identifications Group, Inc.

2. Autostar Technology Pte Ltd.

3. Digital Monitoring Products.

C. Equipment for enrolling personnel into, and removing personnel from, system database, using a dedicated workstation PC .

1. Include equipment to enroll selected biometric credentials.

D. Enrollment equipment shall support encoding of credential cards including cryptographic and other internal security checks as required for system.

1. Allow only authorized entry-control enrollment personnel to access the enrollment equipment using passwords.

2. Include enrollment-subsystem configuration controls and electronic diagnostic aids for subsystem setup and troubleshooting with the central station.

3. Enrollment-station records printer shall meet requirements of the report printer.

E. Entry-Control Enrollment Software:

1. Shall include database management functions for the system, and shall allow an operator to change and modify the data entered in the system as needed.

2. Software shall not have alarm response or acknowledgment functions as a programmable function.

3. Multiple, password-protected access levels shall be provided at the enrollment station.

4. Database management and modification functions shall require a higher operator-access level than personnel enrollment functions.

5. Software shall provide a means for disabling the enrollment station when it is unattended, to prevent unauthorized use.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 13 00 - 36


10/14/2013

6. Software shall provide a method to enter personnel identifying information into the entrycontrol database files through enrollment stations to include a credential unit in use at the installation.

7. In the case of personnel identity-verification subsystems, this data shall include biometric data.

8. Software shall allow entry of this data into the system database files through the use of simple menu selections and data fields. The data field names shall be customized to suit user and site needs.

9. Personnel identity-verification subsystems selected for use with the system shall fully support the enrollment function and shall be compatible with the entry-control database files.

F. Accessories:

1. Steel desk-type console, swivel chair on casters, and equipment racks.

2. Console and Equipment Racks: Comply with EIA/ECA-310-E.

3. Equipment, with the exception of the printers, shall be rack mounted in the console and equipment racks.

4. Storage Cabinet: Locking cabinet approximately 72 inches high, 36 inches wide, and 24 inches deep, with three adjustable shelves and two storage racks for storage of disks, tapes, printouts, printer paper, ribbons, manuals, and other documentation.

G. System Capacity: Number of badges shall be limited only by hard disk space. Badge templates and images shall be in color, supporting the maximum color capability of Microsoft

Windows.

1. Software for badge template creation shall include a template consisting of background and predetermined locations of photographs, text objects and data fields for text, and barcode and biometric information. Include automatic sizing of data fields placed on a badge to compensate for names, which may otherwise be too large to fit in the area designated.

2. Allow different badge templates to be used for each department, tenant, or visitor.

3. As a setup option, templates shall be automatically selected for the badge, based on the group to which the credential holder is assigned. Allow the operator to override the automatic template selection and use a template chosen by the operator for creating a badge.

4. Setup shall determine which graphics and credential-holder information will be displayed and where on the card it will be placed. All data in the security access system, such as name, code, group, access level, and any of the 99 user-defined fields, shall be selectable, with the ability to place them anywhere on the card.

5. System shall include an importing, filing, and recall system of stored images and shapes that can be placed on the badge.

6. Allow multiple images on the same badge, including, but not limited to, bar codes, digital photos, and signatures.

7. Support transparent backgrounds so that image is only surrounded by the intended background and not by its immediate background.

I. Photo Imaging: Integral to security access.

1. Import images from bitmap file formats, digital cameras, TWAIN cameras, or scanners.

Allow image cropping and editing, WYSIWYG badge-building application, and badge print-preview and printing capabilities.

2. System shall support multiple images stored for each credential holder, including signatures, portrait views, and profile views.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 13 00 - 37


10/14/2013

J. Text Objects: Badge configuration shall provide for creation of custom text as an object, allowing font selection, typing, scaling, and formatting of the text object. Formatting options shall include changing font, font size, text flow, and text alignment; bending or curving the text object into a circle or semicircle; applying 3-D effects; and applying predefined effects such as tilt, extrusion, or beveling. Text shall be placed and optionally automatically centered within any region of the badge layout.

K. Badges and Credential Cards:

1. Badges are credential cards that do not contain data to be read by card readers.

2. Credential cards shall store uniquely coded data used by card readers as an Identifier.

ISO/IEC 7811-2, ISO/IEC 7811-6, and ISO/IEC 7811-7. Use single-layer magnetic tape material that is coated with a plastic, slick protective coat and affixed to the back of the credential card near the top. b. Wiegand Wire-Effect Cards: Ferromagnetic wires laminated into the credential card using binary digits specified for Wiegand readers to generate a unique credential card identification code. c. Proximity : Use proximity detection without physical contact with the reader for proper operation.

3. Allow entry-control card to be modified by lamination or direct print process during the enrollment process for use as a picture and identification badge without reduction of readability. The design shall allow for the addition of at least one slot or hole to accommodate the attachment of a clip for affixing the credential card to the type of badge holder used at the site. a. Card Size and Dimensional Stability: Standard size, 2-1/8 by 3-3/8 inches; dimensionally stable so that an undamaged card with deformations resulting from normal use shall be readable by the card reader. b. Card Material: Abrasion resistant, nonflammable, and nontoxic; and impervious to solar radiation and effects of ultraviolet light. c. Card Construction: Core and laminate or monolithic construction. Lettering, logos, and other markings shall be hot stamped into the credential material or direct printed.

1) Incorporate ] [ phosphorous ink ] as a security enhancement.

2) Furnish equipment for on-site assembly and lamination of credential cards. d. Card Durability and Maintainability: Designed and constructed to yield a useful lifetime of at least five years or 5000 insertions or swipes, whichever results in a longer period of time. Allow credential cards to be cleaned by wiping with a sponge or cloth wetted with soap and water.

L. Card-Making Equipment: Consisting of a workstation, video camera, video-imaging equipment, and a printer.

1. Camera: NTSC color standard, RGB video output, 470 lines minimum horizontal resolution, and automatic white balance with full rated output under illumination of 0.5 fc.

2. Video Imaging: Live-image capture software and hardware and a digital signature capture pad.

3. Standard workstation, modified as follows:

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 13 00 - 38


10/14/2013

a. Redundant workstation is not required. b. Printer is not required. c. UPS is not required. d. Sound card is not required.

4. Printer: Dye-sublimation resin thermal transfer, 300 dpi resolution, 16.7 million colors, accepting cards ranging in size from 2.1 by 3 inches to 2.6 by 3.7 inches and having card thickness ranging from 0.020 to 0.060 inch. Printer shall have options for encoding magnetic stripe using tracks 1, 2, and 3. Throughput shall be not less than 60 seconds per card.




1. Securitron Magnalock Corporation; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

2. Dortronics

C. Push-Button Switches: Momentary-contact back-lighted push buttons with stainless-steel switch enclosures.

1. Minimum continuous current rating of 10 A at 120-V ac or 5 A at 240-V ac.

2. Contacts that will make 720 VA at 60 A and that will break at 720 VA at 10 A.

E. Enclosures: Flush or surface mounting. Push buttons shall be suitable for flush mounting in the switch enclosures.

F. Enclosures shall additionally be suitable for installation in the following locations:

1. Indoors, controlled environment.

3. Outdoors.

G. Power: Push-button switches shall be powered from their associated controller, using dc control.

2.15 DOOR AND GATE HARDWARE INTERFACE

A. Exit Device with Alarm: Operation of the exit device shall generate an alarm and annunciate a local alarm . Exit device and alarm contacts are specified in Division 08 Section "Door

Hardware."

B. Exit Alarm: Operation of a monitored door shall generate an alarm. Exit devices and alarm contacts are specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 13 00 - 39


10/14/2013

C. Electric Door Strikes: Use end-of-line resistors to provide power-line supervision. Signal switches shall transmit data to controller to indicate when the bolt is not engaged and the strike mechanism is unlocked, and they shall report a forced entry. Power and signal shall be from the controller. Electric strikes are specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."

D. Electromagnetic Locks: End-of-line resistors shall provide power-line supervision. Lock status sensing signal shall positively indicate door is secure. Power and signal shall be from the controller. Electromagnetic locks are specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."

E. Vehicle Gate Operator: Interface electrical operation of gate with controls in this Section.

Vehicle gate operators shall be connected, monitored, and controlled by the security access controllers. Vehicle gate and accessories are specified in Division 32 Section "Chain Link

Fences and Gates."

1. Local processors shall contain an operating system that controls and schedules that local processor's activities in real time.

2. Local processor shall maintain a point database in its memory that includes parameters, constraints, and the latest value or status of all points connected to that local processor.

3. Execution of local processor application programs shall utilize the data in memory resident files.

4. Operating system shall include a real-time clock function that maintains the seconds, minutes, hours, date, and month, including day of the week. station at least once per day to plus or minus 10 seconds (the time synchronization shall be accomplished automatically, without operator action and without requiring system shutdown).

1. Causes automatic commencement of operation without human intervention, including startup of all connected I/O functions.

2. Local processor restart program based on detection of power failure at the local processor shall be included in the local processor software.

3. Initiates operation of self-test diagnostic routines.

4. Upon failure of the local processor, if the database and application software are no longer resident, the local processor shall not restart and systems shall remain in the failure mode indicated until the necessary repairs are made.

5. If the database and application programs are resident, the local processor shall immediately resume operation.

1. Local processors shall control and monitor inputs and outputs as specified independent of communications with the central station or designated workstations.

2. Alarms, status changes, and other data shall be transmitted to the central station or designated workstations when communications circuits are operable.

3. If communications are not available, each local processor shall function in a stand-alone mode and operational data, including the status and alarm data normally transmitted to the central station or designated workstations, shall be stored for later transmission to the central station or designated workstations.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 13 00 - 40


10/14/2013

4. Storage for the latest 4000 events shall be provided at local processors, as a minimum.

5. Local processors shall accept software downloaded from the central station.

6. Panel shall support flash ROM technology to accomplish firmware downloads from a central location.

D. Failure Mode: Upon failure for any reason, each local processor shall perform an orderly shutdown and force all local processor outputs to a predetermined (failure-mode) state, consistent with the failure modes shown and the associated control device.

E. Functions:

1. Monitoring of inputs.

2. Control of outputs.

3. Reporting of alarms automatically to the central station.

4. Reporting of sensor and output status to central station upon request.

5. Maintenance of real time, automatically updated by the central station at least once a day.

6. Communication with the central station.

7. Execution of local processor resident programs.

8. Diagnostics.

9. Download and upload data to and from the central station.

A. Alarm Annunciation Local Processor:

1. Respond to interrogations from the field device network, recognize and store alarm status inputs until they are transmitted to the central station, and change outputs based on commands received from the central station.

2. Local processor shall also automatically restore communication within 10 seconds after an interruption with the field device network and provide dc line supervision on each of its alarm inputs.

3. Local processor inputs shall monitor dry contacts for changes of state that reflect alarm conditions.

4. Local processor shall have at least eight alarm inputs which allow wiring contacts as normally open or normally closed for alarm conditions; and shall provide line supervision for each input by monitoring each input for abnormal open, grounded, or shorted conditions using dc current change measurements.

5. Local processor shall report line supervision alarms to the central station.

6. Alarms shall be reported for any condition that remains abnormal at an input for longer than 500 milliseconds.

7. Alarm condition shall be transmitted to the central computer during the next interrogation cycle.

8. Local processor outputs shall reflect the state of commands issued by the central station.

9. Outputs shall be a form C contact and shall include normally open and normally closed contacts.

10. Local processor shall have at least four command outputs.

11. Local processor shall be able to communicate with the central station via RS-485 or

TCP/IP as a minimum.

B. Processor Power Supply:

1. Local processor and sensors shall be powered from an uninterruptible power source.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 13 00 - 41


10/14/2013

2. Uninterruptible power source shall provide eight hours of battery back-up power in the event of primary power failure and shall automatically fully recharge the batteries within

12 hours after primary power is restored.

3. If the facility is without an emergency generator, the uninterruptible power source shall provide 24 hours of battery backup power.

4. There shall be no equipment malfunctions or perturbations or loss of data during the switch from primary to battery power and vice versa.

5. Batteries shall be sealed, non-outgassing type.

6. Power supply shall be equipped with an indicator for ac input power and an indicator for dc output power.

7. Loss of primary power shall be reported to the central station as an alarm.

C. Auxiliary Equipment Power: A GFI service outlet shall be furnished inside the local processor's enclosure.

D. Entry-Control Local Processor:

1. Entry-control local processor shall respond to interrogations from the field device network, recognize and store alarm status inputs until they are transmitted to the central station, and change outputs based on commands received from the central station.

2. Local processor shall also automatically restore communication within 10 seconds after an interruption with the field device network and provide dc line supervision on each of its alarm inputs.

3. Entry-control local processor shall provide local entry-control functions including communicating with field devices such as card readers, keypads, biometric personnel identity-verification devices, door strikes, magnetic latches, gate and door operators, and exit push buttons.

4. Processor shall also accept data from entry-control field devices as well as database downloads and updates from the central station that include enrollment and privilege information.

5. Processor shall send indications of successful or failed attempts to use entry-control field devices and shall make comparisons of presented information with stored identification information.

6. Processor shall grant or deny entry by sending control signals to portal-control devices and mask intrusion-alarm annunciation from sensors stimulated by authorized entries.

7. Entry-control local processor shall use inputs from entry-control devices to change modes between access and secure.

8. Local processor shall maintain a date-time- and location-stamped record of each transaction and transmit transaction records to the central station.

9. Processor shall operate as a stand-alone portal controller using the downloaded database during periods of communication loss between the local processor and the central station.

10. Processor shall store a minimum of 4000 transactions during periods of communication loss between the local processor and the central station for subsequent upload to the central station upon restoration of communication.

11. Local processor inputs shall monitor dry contacts for changes of state that reflect alarm conditions.

12. Local processor shall have at least eight alarm inputs which allow wiring contacts as normally open or normally closed for alarm conditions; and shall also provide line supervision for each input by monitoring each input for abnormal open, grounded, or shorted conditions using dc current change measurements.

13. Local processor shall report line supervision alarms to the central station.

14. Alarms shall be reported for any condition that remains abnormal at an input for longer than 500 ms.

15. Alarm condition shall be transmitted to the central station during the next interrogation cycle.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 13 00 - 42


10/14/2013

16. Entry-control local processor shall include the necessary software drivers to communicate with entry-control field devices. Information generated by the entry-control field devices shall be accepted by the local processor and automatically processed to determine valid identification of the individual present at the portal.

17. Upon authentication of the credentials or information presented, the local processor shall automatically check privileges of the identified individual, allowing only those actions granted as privileges.

18. Privileges shall include, but are not limited to, time of day control, day of week control, group control, and visitor escort control. The local processor shall maintain a date-time- and location-stamped record of each transaction.

19. Transaction is defined as any successful or unsuccessful attempt to gain access through a controlled portal by the presentation of credentials or other identifying information.

20. Local processor outputs shall reflect the state of commands issued by the central station.

21. Outputs shall be a form C contact and shall include normally open and normally closed contacts.

22. Local processor shall have at least four addressable outputs.

23. The entry-control local processor shall also provide control outputs to portal-control devices.

24. Local processor shall be able to communicate with the central station via RS-485 or

TCP/IP as a minimum.

25. The system manufacturer shall provide strategies for downloading database information for panel configurations and cardholder data to minimize the required download time when using IP connectivity.

2.18 TIA 232-F ASCII INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS

A. ASCII interface shall allow TIA 232-F connections to be made between the control station operating as the host PC and any equipment that will accept TIA 232-F ASCII command strings, such as CCTV switches, intercoms, and paging systems.

1. Alarm inputs in system shall allow for individual programming to output up to four unique

ASCII character strings through two different COM ports on the host PC.

2. Inputs shall have the ability to be defined to transmit a unique ASCII string for alarm and one for restore through one COM port, and a unique ASCII string for a nonalarm, abnormal condition and one for a normal condition through the same or different COM port.

3. Predefined ASCII character strings shall have the ability to be up to 420 characters long with full use of all the ASCII control characters, such as return or line feed. Character strings shall be defined in the system database and then assigned to the appropriate inputs.

4. COM ports of the host PC used to interface with external equipment shall be defined in the setup portion of the software. COM port's baud rate, word length, stop bits, and parity shall be definable in the software to match that of the external equipment.

B. Pager-System Interface: Alarms shall be able to activate a pager system with customized message for each input alarm.

1. TIA 232-F output shall be capable of connection to a pager interface that can be used to call a paging system or service and send a signal to a portable pager. System shall allow an individual alphanumeric message per alarm input to be sent to the paging system.

This interface shall support both numeric and alphanumeric pagers.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 13 00 - 43


10/14/2013

1. TIA 232-F output shall be capable of transmitting alarms from other monitoring and alarm systems to central-station automation software.

2. Alternatively, alarms that are received by this access-control system are to be transferred to the alarm automation system as if they were sent through a digital alarm receiver. a. System shall be able to transmit an individual message from any alarm input to a burglar-alarm automation monitoring system. b. System shall be able to append to each message a predefined set of character strings as a prefix and a suffix.

2.19 FLOOR-SELECT ELEVATOR CONTROL

A. Elevator access control shall be integral to security access.

1. System shall be capable of providing full elevator security and control through dedicated controllers without relying on the control-station host PC for elevator control decisions.

2. Access-control system shall enable and disable car calls on each floor and floor-select buttons in each elevator car, restricting passengers' access to the floors where they have been given access.

3. System setup shall, through programming, automatically and individually secure and unsecure each floor-select button of a car by time and day. Each floor-select button within a car shall be separately controlled so that some floors may be secure while others remain unsecure.

4. When a floor-select button is secure, it shall require the passenger to use his or her access code and gain access to that floor before the floor-select button will operate. The passenger's credential shall determine which car call and floor-select buttons are to be enabled, restricting access to floors unless authorized by the system's access code database. Floor-select button shall be enabled only in the car where the credential holder is the passenger.

B. Security access system shall record which call button is pressed, along with credential and time information.

1. System controller shall record elevator access data.

2. The controller shall reset all additional call buttons that may have been enabled by the user's credential.

3. The floor-select elevator control shall allow for manual override from a workstation PC either by individual floor or by cab.

A. Guard tour module shall provide the ability to plan, track, and route tours. Module shall input an alarm during tour if guard fails to make a station. Tours can be programmed for sequential or random tour-station order.

1. Guard tour setup shall define specific routes or tours for the guard to take, with time restrictions in which to reach every predefined tour station.

2. Guard tour activity shall be automatically logged to the central-station PC's hard drive.

3. If the guard is early or late to a tour station, a unique alarm per station shall appear at the central station to indicate the time and station.

4. Guard tour setup shall allow the tours to be executed sequentially or in a random order with an overall time limit set for the entire tour instead of individual times for each tour station.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 13 00 - 44


10/14/2013

5. Setup shall allow recording of predefined responses that will display for the operator at the control station should a "Failed to Check In" alarm occur.

B. Guard tour module shall allow proprietary direct-connected systems to use security accesscontrol hardware to perform guard tour management in real time.

C. A tour station is a physical location where a guard shall go and perform an action indicating that he or she has arrived. This action, performed at the tour station, shall be one of 13 different events with any combination of station types within the same tour. An event at a tour station shall be one of the following types:

2. Access Denied Code.

3. Access Denied Card plus PIN.

4. Access Denied Time Zone.

5. Access Denied Level.

6. Access Denied Facility.

7. Access Denied Code Timer.

8. Access Denied Anti-Passback.

9. Access Granted Passback Violation.

10. Alarm.

11. Restored.

D. Guard tour and other system features shall operate simultaneously with no interference.

E. Guard Tour Module Capacity: 999 possible guard tour definitions with each tour having up to

99 tour stations. System shall allow all 999 tours to be running at the same time.

2.21 VIDEO AND CAMERA CONTROL

A. Control station or designated workstation displays live video from a CCTV source.

1. Control Buttons: On the display window, with separate control buttons to represent Left,

Right, Up, Down, Zoom In, Zoom Out, Scan, and a minimum of two custom-command auxiliary controls.

2. Provide at least seven icons to represent different types of cameras, with ability to import custom icons. Provide option for display of icons on graphic maps to represent their physical location.

3. Provide the alarm-handling window with a command button that will display the camera associated with the alarm point.

B. Display mouse-selectable icons representing each camera source, to select source to be displayed. For CCTV sources that are connected to a video switcher, control station shall automatically send control commands through a COM port to display the requested camera when the camera icon is selected.

C. Allow cameras with preset positioning to be defined by displaying a different icon for each of the presets. Provide control with Next and Previous buttons to allow operator to cycle quickly through the preset positions.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 13 00 - 45


10/14/2013

2.22 TRANSFORMERS

A. NFPA 70, Class II control transformers, NRTL listed. Transformers for security access-control system shall not be shared with any other system.

2.23 CABLE AND ASSET MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE




1. Greenlee Textron Inc.; a subsidiary of Textron Inc.

2. Total Wire Software Company, Inc.

3. GE

4. Honeywell

C. Computer-based cable and asset management system, with fully integrated database and graphic capabilities, complying with requirements in TIA/EIA 606-A.

1. Document physical characteristics by recording the network, asset, user, TIA/EIA details, device configurations, and exact connections between equipment and cabling. a. Manage the physical layer of security system. b. List device configurations. c. List and display circuit connections. d. Record firestopping data. e. Record grounding and bonding connections and test data.

2. Information shall be presented in database view, schematic plans, or technical drawings. a. Microsoft Visio Technical Drawing shall be used as drawing and schematic plans software. Drawing symbols, system layout, and design shall comply with

SIA/IAPSC AG-01.

3. System shall interface with the following testing and recording devices: a. Direct-upload tests from circuit testing instrument into the PC. b. Direct-download circuit labeling into labeling printer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine pathway elements intended for cables. Check raceways, cable trays, and other elements for compliance with space allocations, installation tolerances, hazards to cable installation, and other conditions affecting installation.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 13 00 - 46


10/14/2013

B. Examine roughing-in for LAN and control cable conduit systems to PCs, controllers, card readers, and other cable-connected devices to verify actual locations of conduit and back boxes before device installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with recommendations in SIA CP-01.

B. Comply with TIA/EIA 606-A, "Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications

Infrastructure."

C. Obtain detailed Project planning forms from manufacturer of access-control system; develop custom forms to suit Project. Fill in all data available from Project plans and specifications and publish as Project planning documents for review and approval.

1. Record setup data for control station and workstations.

2. For each Location, record setup of controller features and access requirements.

3. Propose start and stop times for time zones and holidays, and match up access levels for doors.

4. Set up groups, facility codes, linking, and list inputs and outputs for each controller.

5. Assign action message names and compose messages.

6. Set up alarms. Establish interlocks between alarms, intruder detection, and video surveillance features.

7. Prepare and install alarm graphic maps.

8. Develop user-defined fields.

9. Develop screen layout formats.

10. Propose setups for guard tours and key control.

11. Discuss badge layout options; design badges.

12. Complete system diagnostics and operation verification.

13. Prepare a specific plan for system testing, startup, and demonstration.

14. Develop acceptance test concept and, on approval, develop specifics of the test.

15. Develop cable and asset-management system details; input data from construction documents. Include system schematics and Visio Technical Drawings in electronic format.

D. In meetings with Architect and Owner, present Project planning documents and review, adjust, and prepare final setup documents. Use final documents to set up system software.

3.3 CABLING

A. Comply with NECA 1, "Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction."

B. Install cables and wiring according to requirements in Division 28 Section "Conductors and

Cables for Electronic Safety and Security."

C. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway and cable tray except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters. Conceal raceway and wiring except in unfinished spaces.

D. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway and cable tray except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters and except in accessible ceiling spaces and in gypsum board partitions where

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 13 00 - 47


10/14/2013

unenclosed wiring method may be used. Use NRTL-listed plenum cable in environmental airspaces, including plenum ceilings. Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces.

E. Install LAN cables using techniques, practices, and methods that are consistent with

Category 5E rating of components and fiber-optic rating of components, and that ensure

Category 6 and fiber-optic performance of completed and linked signal paths, end to end.

F. Boxes and enclosures containing security-system components or cabling, and which are easily accessible to employees or to the public, shall be provided with a lock. Boxes above ceiling level in occupied areas of the building shall not be considered accessible. Junction boxes and small device enclosures below ceiling level and easily accessible to employees or the public shall be covered with a suitable cover plate and secured with tamperproof screws.

G. Install end-of-line resistors at the field device location and not at the controller or panel location.

A. Comply with TIA 569-B, "Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and

Spaces."

B. Cable application requirements are minimum requirements and shall be exceeded if recommended or required by manufacturer of system hardware.

C. TIA 232-F Cabling: Install at a maximum distance of 50 ft.

D. TIA 485-A Cabling: Install at a maximum distance of 4000 ft.

3.5 GROUNDING

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Comply with IEEE

Equipment."

C. Ground cable shields, drain conductors, and equipment to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize ground loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments.

D. Bond shields and drain conductors to ground at only one point in each circuit.

1. Terminal: Locate in each equipment room and wiring closet; isolate from power system and equipment grounding.

2. Bus: Mount on wall of main equipment room with standoff insulators.

3. Backbone Cable: Extend from signal ground bus to signal ground terminal in each equipment room and wiring closet.

3.6 INSTALLATION

A. Push Buttons: Where multiple push buttons are housed within a single switch enclosure, they shall be stacked vertically with each push-button switch labeled with 1/4-inch- high text and symbols as required. Push-button switches shall be connected to the controller associated with

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 13 00 - 48


10/14/2013

the portal to which they are applied, and shall operate the appropriate electric strike, electric bolt, or other facility release device.

B. Install card readers, keypads, push buttons, and biometric readers.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. In addition to requirements in this article, comply with applicable requirements in Division 26

Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" and with TIA/EIA 606-A.

B. Using software specified in "Cable and Asset Management Software" Article, develop cable administration drawings for system identification, testing, and management. Use unique, alphanumeric designation for each cable, and label cable and jacks, connectors, and terminals to which it connects with the same designation. Use logical and systematic designations for facility's architectural arrangement.

C. Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel.

1. All wiring conductors connected to terminal strips shall be individually numbered, and each cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or cabinet to a building-mounted device shall be identified with the name and number of the particular device as shown.

2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered at the device if the color of the wire is consistent with the associated wire connected and numbered within the panel or cabinet.

D. At completion, cable and asset management software shall reflect as-built conditions.

3.8 SYSTEM SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE

A. Develop, install, and test software and hardware, and perform database tests for the complete and proper operation of systems involved. Assign all required software license(s) to Owner.


A. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. LAN Cable Procedures: Inspect for physical damage and test each conductor signal path for continuity and shorts. Use Class 2, bidirectional, Category 5 tester. Test for faulty connectors, splices, and terminations. Test according to TIA/EIA 568-B.1, "Commercial

Building Telecommunications Cabling Standards - Part 1: General Requirements." Link performance for UTP cables must comply with minimum criteria in TIA/EIA 568-B.1.

2. Test each circuit and component of each system. Tests shall include, but are not limited to, measurements of power-supply output under maximum load, signal loop resistance, and leakage to ground where applicable. System components with battery backup shall be operated on battery power for a period of not less than 10 percent of the calculated battery operating time. Provide special equipment and software if testing requires special or dedicated equipment.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 13 00 - 49


10/14/2013

3. Operational Test: After installation of cables and connectors, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements. Test each signal path for end-to-end performance from each end of all pairs installed. Remove temporary connections when tests have been satisfactorily completed.

C. Devices and circuits will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to supervise and assist with startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to approved procedures that were developed in "Preparation" Article and with manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Enroll and prepare badges and access cards for Owner's operators, management, and security personnel.

3.11 PROTECTION

A. Maintain strict security during the installation of equipment and software. Rooms housing the control station, and workstations that have been powered up shall be locked and secured with an activated burglar alarm and access-control system reporting to a central station complying with UL 1610, "Central-Station Burglar-Alarm Units," during periods when a qualified operator in the employ of Contractor is not present.

3.12 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain security access system. See Division 01 Section

"Demonstration and Training." All testing and training shall be videotaped and shall accommodate no less than 8 attendees from the RTC all training shall be on-site. Training shall include demonstrations of the key elements and components of the CCTV system, including videotaping and all related features. The Contractor shall submit, for review and approval a listing of all demonstration and training that is to take place. This listing shall include subject matter and time frames for each of the recommended subjects. This training shall be compliant with the General Requirements, Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

B. Develop separate training modules for the following:

1. Computer system administration personnel to manage and repair the LAN and databases and to update and maintain software.

2. Operators who prepare and input credentials to man the control station and workstations and to enroll personnel.

4. Hardware maintenance personnel.


RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 13 00 - 50


10/14/2013

SECTION 281500

ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS

PART 1 GENERAL




1.02 SUMMARY

A. Related Sections:

1. 260533

2. 271100

3. 271300

4. 271500

5. 280500

6. 280513

7. 280514

8.

9.

280526

280528

10. 281300

11. 281650

12. 282300







Fiber Optics


Raceways and Boxes


Duress Alarm System


B. Section Includes

1. Door/Gate Monitoring and Control

2. Power Supplies (24 VDC, UPS)

3. Terminal Blocks, Fuses, and Snubbers

4. Relays

5. Security Screws

6. Tone Generators

7. Call Made Light

8. Intercom/Pedestal

9. Connectors

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

281500 - 1


08/07/2013

10. Loop Detectors

11. Intercom/Camera/Card Reader Pedestal

12. Site Vehicle Gate Intercom


A. Door/Gate Position Alarm Monitoring

1. Provide low voltage power to door/gate position and latch monitoring switches as indicated on the Drawings. All door position and bolt monitoring switches at each door are to be connected in series such that an open at any one of the switch contacts shall break the circuit to the control electronics and provide an unsecured door indication on the designated operator interface. Losing the indicating signal power by cutting the circuit (circuit failure) shall also initiate an unsecured door.

B. Door/Gate Remote Control

1. Provide remotely controlled operating power to all electric locks, deadbolt locks, electro-mechanical locks, electric deadbolts and door/gate operating devices as indicated on the Drawings.

C. Power Supplies a. Provide power supplies as required for each system. b. Low voltage systems shall operate on 24 VDC or 24 VAC or as determined by each section. Size all power supplies to maintain Class 2 ratings and operation of each system at 150% of the maximum loaded condition. c. Unless otherwise indicated, 24 volt door hardware including locks, strikes, and latches shall be supplied by external power supplies with over-voltage and short circuit protection. d. Acceptable products: Power One, Lamda, or approved equal from other manufacturers.

D. Uninterruptible Power Supplies (UPS)

1. Provide UPS back up for all Security Electronics, and computer CPU’s where shown on the drawings.

2. Size the security equipment UPS with sufficient capacity to support and maintain all added security equipment and devices for a minimum of 15 minutes after the loss of power. Provide (1) UPS per group per group of racks in the Security

Electronics Room.

3. Size the radio equipment UPS with sufficient capacity to support and maintain all devices for a minimum of 2 hours after the loss of power.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

281500 - 2


08/07/2013

4. Submit UPS power calculations indicating power consumption by each major equipment component.

E. Terminal blocks, Fuses and Snubbers

1. Provide DIN mounted terminal blocks for field and miscellaneous wiring.

2. Provide fused terminal blocks for power distribution circuit protection.

3. Provide circuit snubbers at all electric strike door locks for EMF protection.

F. Relays

1. Provide relays for use as interposing relays, timer relays, audio relay, one shots, or other applications as shown on plans.

2. Provide EMF circuit protection diode across all relay coils.

G. Security Screws:

1. Submit various types of security screws for approval.

2. Screws shall be suitable for outdoor locations.

H. Tone Generators

1. Provide 24 VDC solid state piezoelectric alarms.

2. Provide one tone generator for each tone or a multi-tone unit. Provide a tone generator for each tone required at each control panel Refer to the Software

Development Section for tone types.

I. Call Made Light

1. Provide an amber light at each intercom pedestal which will illuminate when the loop detector is activated.

J. Intercom Pedestal

1. Provide a pedestal for the card reader and intercom where shown on the drawings.

K. Camera Pedestal

1. Provide a custom pedestal for the license plate reader camera where shown on drawings. Custom pedestals shall be submitted and approved prior to purchase and field installation.

L. Provide all necessary interconnecting wiring and terminations including, but not limited to, junction boxes, terminal strips, lead wires, internal contacts, connectors, etc., from new or existing terminations to the new terminations in the control electronics cabinets.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

281500 - 3


08/07/2013

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Calculations

1. DC power supply sizing.

2. AC power supply sizing.

3. UPS system load and battery sizing.

C. UPS installation drawings: Show UPS size and physical mounting. Design and show power source, and branch circuit and load wiring to/from UPS units.




A. Deliver the following spare parts:

1. DC power supply

2. AC power supply

3. Relays

4. Tone Generators

1 ea. size used.

1 ea size used.

5 ea type used.

5 ea type used.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS

A. Provide equipment and components including but not limited to the following or approved equal from other manufactures. All products shall have the features described herein. The materials listed below establish the minimum quality and standards that are to be met:

1. Power Supplies

2. Uninterruptible Power Supplies

3. Electrical Relays

4. Audio Relays

5. Fuses

6. Snubbers

7. Terminal Blocks

Altronix, Pelco, Rauland,

IDEC. Lambda

APC, Best

IDEC RU Series

IDEC RY2S Series

Phoenix, Entrelec

Square D, Rifa

Phoenix, Entrelec

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

281500 - 4


08/07/2013

8. Tone Generators

9. Call Made

10. Pedestal

2.02 POWER SUPPLIES

A. DC and AC Power Supplies

Floyd Bell (Columbus, OH)

Industrial Traffic Solutions

Talk-A-Phone ETP-PM, Custom

1. Power supply outputs to integrated circuit devices shall be regulated to within +/- one percent of the rated voltage output

2. Size as required for each location with a capacity of 150 percent of the intended maximum load.

3. Class 2 power supplies shall be power limited to 100 watts with over-voltage and short circuit protection.

4. Where required provide power supply with battery backup. The power supply shall include battery-charging circuit, power loss switching circuit, low battery, trouble and power loss output contact. Size battery to accommodate calculated load for the specified time period.

2.03 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLIES (UPS)

A. Provide solid state inverter/charger and static bypass switch with less than 1/4 cycle, static transfer time, and frequency stability of 60 Hz + 1 Hz, voltage regulation of +8%, total harmonic distortion less than 5% and minimum output capacity and voltage as indicated in the drawings.

B. Provide sealed lead/acid type batteries.

C. Acceptable products: TOPAZ, BEST, Exide, or approved equal from other manufacturers.

2.04 ELECTRICAL RELAYS

A. Rate relays appropriate for the application or as shown on plans.

B. Provide relay sockets for ease of replacement.

C. Provide mounting hardware (i.e. bracket, DIN rail, etc.) UON.

2.05 AUDIO RELAYS

A. The audio switching relays shall connect intercom stations to intercom amplifiers.

B. Relay switch contacts shall be DTDT bifurcated gold plated contacts, rated for 2 amperes inductive and operate on 24 volts DC.

C. The relays shall be rated for at least 1 million operations.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

281500 - 5


08/07/2013

D. The relays shall be removable socket mounted on DIN rail. All field terminations shall be landed on screw terminals rated to accommodate the required field wires.

E. Provide mounting hardware (i.e. bracket for rack mount, DIN rail, etc.) UON.

2.06 TONE GENERATORS

A. Solid State Piezoelectric

B. Screw or quick connect terminals.

2.07 CALL MADE LIGHTS

A. Provide waterproof polycarbonate housing

B. LED light source.

C. View angle shall not be less than 30 degrees.

D. Operating temperature shall be between 0 deg F to 165 deg F.

2.08 VEHICLE LOOP DETECTOR SYSTEM:

A. Provide self-tuning electronic detector with adjustable detection patterns, adjustable sensitivity and frequency settings, and panel indicator light designed to detect presence or transit of a vehicle over an embedded loop of wire and to emit signal activating security gate operator. Include automatic closing timer with adjustable time delay before closing, timer cut-off switch, vehicle loop detector designed to hold gate panels open until traffic clears, and continuous or single signal selectable. Provide number of loops consisting of multiple strands of wire, number of turns, loop size, and method of placement at location shown on Drawings, as recommended in writing by detection system manufacturer for function indicated.

B. Field-Assembled Loop: Wire, in size indicated for field assembly, and sealant; style for pave-over installation or,

C. Factory-Formed Loop: Wire, preformed in size indicated; style for pave-over installation.

D. System Performance – Capable of the following:

1. Recognize two vehicles within 6 inches of each other on standard-sized loop.

2. Continuous diagnostic monitoring for intermittently operating and failed loops.

3. Crosstalk test between adjacent loops.

2.09 PEDESTAL

A. Provide a custom modified pedestal and faceplate to mount intercom station, camera and card reader where shown on the drawings.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

281500 - 6


08/07/2013

B. Provide 1/4 inch thick steel construction with multi-coat rust inhibiting coating.

C. Color to be selected by Owner.



B. Provide components as required for Shop Testing and Demonstration

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION


B. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations, procedures, and standards for each product.

C. All Class-1 wiring and their conduits shall only be routed to the designated Class-1 gutter or duct. All Class-2 wiring, unless otherwise noted, and their conduits shall only be routed to the designated Class-2 gutter or duct.

D. Provide sufficient quantity of power supplies of SNEC, Class 2 capacity, to power the associated equipment. Furnish power supplies with over voltage and short circuit protection.

E. Mount individual components to removable rear panels in wall-mounted cabinets using

DIN rails, snap track or stand off-mounted PC boards, or properly sized mounting hardware.

F. Fuses: Provide over-current protection for control relay outputs and associated wiring.

3.02 WIRE AND CABLE INSTALLATION:


3.03 WIRE TERMINATION, DRESSING, AND IDENTIFICATION:

A. Comply with Section 280513 and Section 280500.


A. Comply with Section 280500, General Requirements

3.05 TRAINING


RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

END OF SECTION

281500 - 7


08/07/2013

SECTION 281650

DURESS ALARM SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Duress Alarm Stations

2. Speaker/Horn

3. Tone Generator

4. Amplifier


1. 260533 Identification for Electrical Systems

2. 271100 Cabinets, Enclosures and Racks

3. 271300 Communications Backbone Cabling


5. 280500 General Requirements

6. 280513 Conductors and Cables

7. 280514 Fiber Optics

8. 280526 System Signal Grounding

9. 280528 Raceways and Boxes

10. 281300 Access Control System

11. 281500 Electronic Components

12. 282300 Video Surveillance (CCTV) System


A. Duress Alarm Equipment and System Operations:

1. Wall mounted or under counter duress stations shall be provided where shown on drawings. Activation of an alarm shall annunciate a flashing message and audio tone at the Access Control Server and the Access Control Monitoring

Station as identified.

B. Wall Mounted Station:

1. Provide a 40mm red mushroom button with Pushlock and Turn Reset.

2. In default mode, the button is unlatched and non-depressed.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

281650 - 1

DURESS ALARM SYSTEM

08/07/2013

3. To alarm, the button is depressed and the button latches (maintained). In order to restore the button to its default mode, it must be turned to unlatch itself.

C. Under Counter Station:

1. Provide a lever activated switch that can be mounted and easily activated under a counter.

2. In default mode, the lever is latched (flushed into its housing).

3. To alarm, the lever is unlatched, and maintains in the unlatched position. In order to restore the lever, it must be returned to its default mode.

1.03 SUBMITTALS




B. SNEC Compliance.

1.05 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate with the Owner for all programmable system functions and features using matrix forms to gather user’s inputs. Make all necessary program changes at no additional cost prior to final acceptance.


A. Deliver the following spare parts to the Owner at a location to be designated:

1. (2) of each type of duress alarm stations.

2. Number in parenthesis denotes quantity required.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Provide equipment and components including, but not limited to, the following or approved equal (where applicable) from other approved manufacturers. The

Contractor will be responsible for the design and operability of all system components of the final approved system.

1. Duress Alarm Station, wall-mounted…………………Idec Mushroom HW Series

2. Duress Alarm Station, under desk-mounted…………………………Sentrol 3055



RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

281650 - 2

DURESS ALARM SYSTEM

08/07/2013

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION


B. Coordinate with casework the exact locations of all under desk/counter duress alarm stations prior to installation.


A. Point-by-Point Performance Testing:

1. Perform a thorough, device-by-device operational test including system integration to all related systems and interfaces. Demonstrate system operations and performance in accordance with Owner’s requirements and all previous Owners’ review comments. Demonstrate complete functionality of all alarms, annunciations, and other system functions.

2. If test results are not in compliance with requirements, make necessary changes, corrections, repairs or adjustments at no additional cost and arrange for another point-by-point performance test. This process shall continue until the systems are acceptable to the Owner.

B. Continuous Operational/Functional Testing: Comply with Section 280500.

3.03 TRAINING

A. Provide training in accordance with Section 280500.

END OF SECTION

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

281650 - 3

DURESS ALARM SYSTEM

08/07/2013

SECTION 28 23 00

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE (CCTV) SYSTEM

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

Provide and install a complete Video Surveillance System, which is identified as the Closed

Circuit Television System hereinafter referred to as the CCTV System as specified in this section.

1.2 RELATED WORK/SECTION

For firestopping application and use latest code requirements. A.

B. For connection of high voltage use latest code requirements.

C. For power cables, Section 28 05 13, LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES (600 VOLTS AND BELOW).

D. For grounding of equipment, Section 28 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.

E. For infrastructure, Section 28 05 28, RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL

SYSTEMS.

F.

G.

H.

For infrastructure, Section 27 11 00, CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.

For perimeter lighting use latest code requirements.

For access control, Section 28 13 00, PHYSICAL ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS

(PACS).

I. For screening of personnel and shipments, Section 28 16 50, SECURITY ACCESS

DETECTION.

J.

K.

For alarm systems, Section 28 16 50, INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEM (IDS).

B.

For control and operation of all security systems, Section 28 13 00, ACCESS CONTROL

SYSTEM AND DATABASE MANAGEMENT.

L. For emergency and interior communications, Section 28 05 13, ELECTRONIC

PERSONAL PROTECTION SYSTEM (EPPS).

For Warranty of Construction, Section 28 05 13.

N. For General Requirements, Section 28 05 13.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

M.

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing, installing, and the operation of the

CCTV System as shown. The Contractor shall also provide certification as required.

The security system shall be installed and tested to ensure all components are fully compatible as a system and can be integrated with all associated security subsystems,

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 23 00 - 1

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE (CCTV) SYSTEM

10/14/2013

B.

C. whether the security system is stand-alone or a part of a complete Information

Technology (IT) computer network.

C. The Contractor or security sub-contractor shall be a licensed security Contractor as required within the state or jurisdiction of where the installation work is being conducted.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit below items in conjunction with Master Specification Sections 01 33 23, Shop

Drawings, Product Data, and Samples, and Section 02 41 00, Demolition Drawings.

Provide certificates of compliance with Section 1.3, Quality Assurance.

Provide a pre-installation and as-built design package in both electronic format and on paper, minimum size 48 x 48 inches (1220 x 1220 millimeters); drawing submittals shall be per the established project schedule.

D. Pre-installation design and as-built packages shall include, but not be limited to:

1. Index Sheet that shall: a. Define each page of the design package to include facility name, building name, floor, and sheet number. b. Provide a list of all security abbreviations and symbols.

2. c. Reference all general notes that are utilized within the design package. d. Specification and scope of work pages for all security systems that are applicable to the design package that will:

1) Outline all general and job specific work required within the design package.

2) Provide a device identification table outlining device Identification (ID) and use for all security systems equipment utilized in the design package.

Drawing sheets that will be plotted on the individual floor plans or site plans shall: a. Include a title block as defined above. b. Define the drawings scale in both standard and metric measurements. c. Provide device identification and location. d. Address all signal and power conduit runs and sizes that are associated with the design of the electronic security system and other security elements

(e.g., barriers, etc.). e. Identify all pull box and conduit locations, sizes, and fill capacities.

3.

4. f. Address all general and drawing specific notes for a particular drawing sheet.

A riser drawing for each applicable security subsystem shall: a. Indicate the sequence of operation. b. Relationship of integrated components on one diagram. c. Include the number, size, identification, and maximum lengths of interconnecting wires. d. Wire/cable types shall be defined by a wire and cable schedule. The schedule shall utilize a lettering system that will correspond to the wire/cable it represents (example: A = 18 AWG/1 Pair Twisted, Unshielded). This schedule shall also provide the manufacturer’s name and part number for the wire/cable being installed.

A system drawing for each applicable security system shall: a. Identify how all equipment within the system, from main panel to device, shall be laid out and connected. b. Provide full detail of all system components wiring from point-to-point. c. Identify wire types utilized for connection, interconnection with associate security subsystems. d. Show device locations that correspond to the floor plans.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 23 00 - 2


10/14/2013

E.

5.

6. e. All general and drawing specific notes shall be included with the system drawings.

A schedule for all of the applicable security subsystems shall be included. All schedules shall provide the following information: b. Device Location (e.g. site, building, floor, room number, location, and description). c. Mounting type (e.g. flush, wall, surface, etc.). d. Power supply or circuit breaker and power panel number. e. In addition, for the CCTV Systems, provide the camera ID, camera type (e.g. fixed or pan/tilt/zoom (P/T/Z), lens type (e.g. for fixed cameras only) and housing model number.

Detail and elevation drawings for all devices that define how they were installed and mounted.

Pre-installation design packages shall be reviewed by the Contractor along with an End

User/ General Contractor/ Consultant representative to ensure all work has been clearly defined and completed. All reviews shall be conducted in accordance with the project schedule. There shall be four (4) stages to the review process: days prior to commencement of formal testing, a Security System Operational Test Plan.

Include procedures for operational testing of each component and security subsystem, to include performance of an integrated system test. specified. Provide all maintenance and operating manuals per the General

Requirements, Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.

1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS

A. The publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplement, and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA):

330 ................................ Electrical Performance Standards for CCTV Cameras

375A .............................. Electrical Performance Standards for CCTV Monitors

C. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE):

C62.41 ........................... IEEE Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage

AC Power Circuits

802.3af .......................... Power over Ethernet Standard

D. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA):

303-2005 ....................... Installing Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) Systems

E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

70-05 ............................. Article 780-National Electrical Code

F. Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS):

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 23 00 - 3


10/14/2013

140-2 ............................. Security Requirements for Cryptographic Modules

G. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

983-06 ........................... Standard for Surveillance Camera Units

3044-01 ......................... Standard for Surveillance Closed Circuit Television Equipment

1.6 WARRANTY OF CONSTRUCTION.

Provide as a minimum a 24 month parts and labor warranty on all CCTV components and systems installed.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS.

Provide to the Owner prior to Substantial Completion, the following

- Camera – additional type of each camera 1 new of each installed

- Camera lens – additional type of each

- Camera heater/blower – additional type of each

1 new of each installed

1 new of each installed

- Workstation, that shall include keyboard, rack mounted server 2 new of each installed

PART 2 – PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide video surveillance system equipment and components including, but not limited to, the following OR approved equal from other manufacturers, model numbers will be provided by owner and/or architect:

1. Color Miniature Dome Camera (H1)……………..…Axis, Bosch, Geovision

2. All surface mount (H1A) ……………………………… Axis, Bosch, Geovision

3. Indoor Pan/Tilt/Zoom (H2)...................................... Axis, Bosch, Geovision

4. Indoor Pan/Tilt/Zoom (H2A).................................... Axis, Bosch, Geovision

5. Outdoor Pan/Tilt/Zoom (H3)..................................... Axis, Bosch, Geovision

6. Outdoor Prepackaged Camera (H3A)…….…….. Axis, Bosch, Geovision

7. TCP/IP Communications Module……………………………..Bosch

8. Dome Wall Mount………………………….…….…...… Axis, Bosch, Geovision

9. Rack Mountable LCD and KVM…....…...SmartVM 19" KVM Drawer/ PS2 Switch

10. Programming Workstation……………………………………………...Dell, IBM, HP

11. Monitoring Workstation…………………………………….……………Dell, IBM, HP

12. Monitoring Station Software…………………..Lenel SkyPoint, Bosch Video

Management System version V.2.3

13. Color LCD Video Monitor 22”…….…………..……………….Sony, View sonic, Dell

14. Programmable Keyboard Controller…….……………..Axis, Lenel, Bosch Intuikey

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 23 00 - 4


10/14/2013

15. iSCSI Video Recorder………….……....……Lenel SkyPoint, Bosch DiBos Series

16. Video Encoder…………………………………. Axis, Bosch, Geovision

17. Video Storage …………………………………….Bosch

18. MVM-BVRM Video Recording Manager …............ Lenel SkyPoint, Bosch Series

19. Camera Power Supply………….……….. Altronix ALTV-2416-CB, Bosch TC1334

20. Network Switch……………………………………….Cisco Catalyst 3850E Series

21. Network Switch Remote Power…………………………C3K-PWR-115WAC

C. Compatibility;

When combining equipment and components of different systems specified above, the

Contractor shall verify integratibility and compatibility of the proposed system to all existing RTC systems prior to submitting bid. It is the sole responsibility of the contractor to provide a fully compatible and integratible system(s) as part of this contract. Note;

There have been known incompatibilities between Axis PTZ cameras and the Bosch recording system.

2.2 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

A. All equipment associated within the CCTV System shall be UL 3004 compliant and rated for continuous operation. Environmental conditions (i.e. temperature, humidity, wind, and seismic activity) shall be taken under consideration at each facility and site location prior to installation of the equipment.

B. All equipment shall operate on a 120 or 240 volts alternating current (VAC); 50 Hz or 60

Hz AC power system unless documented otherwise in subsequent sections listed within this specification. All equipment shall have a back-up source of power that will provide a minimum of 96 hours of run time in the event of a loss of primary power to the facility.

C. The system shall be designed, installed, and programmed in a manner that will allow for ease of operation, programming, servicing, maintenance, testing, and upgrading of the system.

D. All CCTV System components located in designated “HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENT” areas where fire or explosion could occur due to the presence of natural gases or vapors, flammable liquids, combustible residue, or ignitable fibers or debris, shall be rated Class

II, Division I, Group F, and installed in accordance with NFPA 70, Chapter 5.

E. All equipment and materials for the system will be compatible to ensure correct operation.

2.3 EQUIPMENT ITEMS

A. CCTV system shall meet following requirements:

B. All Cameras will be EIA 330 and UL 983 compliant as well as:

1. Will be charge coupled device (CCD) cameras and shall conform to National

Television System Committee (NTSC) formatting.

2. Fixed cameras shall be color and the primary choice for monitoring following the activities described below. Pan/Tilt/Zoom (P/T/Z) cameras shall be color and are to be utilized to compliment the fixed cameras.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 23 00 - 5


10/14/2013

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Shall be powered by either 12 volts direct current (VDC) or 24 VAC. Power supplies shall be Class 2 and UL compliant and have a back-up power source to ensure cameras are still operational in the event of loss of primary power to the

CCTV System.

Shall be rated for continuous operation under the following environmental conditions: a. Ambient temperatures of minus 10 degrees C (14 degrees F) to 55 degrees

C (131 degrees F) utilizing equipment that will provide automatic heating and cooling. b. Humidity, wind gusts, ice loading, and seismic conditions specified or encountered for locations where CCTV cameras will be utilized.

Wiring will be home run to a monitoring and recording device via a controlling device such as a matrix switcher or network server and monitored on a 24 hour basis at a designated Access Control System and Database Management location.

Each function and activity shall be addressed within the system by a unique twenty (20) character user defined name. The use of codes or mnemonics identifying the CCTV action shall not be accepted.

Shall come with built-in video motion detection that shall automatically monitor and process information from each camera. The camera motion detection shall detect motion within the camera's field of view and provide automatic visual, remote alarms and motion-artifacts as a result of detected motion as follows: a. Motion-detection settings shall include adjustable object size and velocity, as well as a selectable detection area of 132 zones in a twelve (12) x eleven

(11) grid. b. Sensors shall accept video signals from CCTV cameras and when synchronizing is required, it shall be in composite synchronization. c. Sensor processors shall detect motion by digitizing multiple pixels within each video scene and by comparing the gray scale of the pixels to a previously stored reference. The number of pixels digitized depends on the

8. application. The designer of the system shall consider cost effectiveness as a factor since digitizing a large number of pixels could increase cost dramatically with little additional actual detection capability for a specific application. d. An alarm shall be initiated when the comparison varies by six (6) percent or more.

Appropriate signage shall be designed, provided, and posted that notifies people that an area is under camera surveillance.

9. Dummy or fake cameras will not be utilized at any time.

10. Shall be programmed to digitally flip from color to black and white at dusk and vice versa at dawn.

11. Will be fitted with auto-iris lenses to ensure the image is maintained in low light.

12. Lightning protection shall be IEEE C62.41 compliant and provided for all cameras. Either surge protectors or a lightning grid may be utilized. Ensure all lightning protection equipment is compliant with Article 780 of the National

Electrical Code (NEC). The use of Fuses and Circuit Breakers as a means of lightning protection shall not be allowed.

13. If using the camera as part of a CCTV network a video encoder shall be used to convert the signal from National Television System(s) Committee (NTSC) to

Moving Picture Experts Group (MPEG) format.

14. P/T/Z cameras shall be utilized in a manner that they complement fixed cameras and shall not be used as a primary means of monitoring activity.

15. Power over Ethernet (PoE) Cameras a. Shall be IEEE 802.3af compliant only be utilized as part of a CCTV Network and should not be integrated with standard analog or digital CCTV System equipment.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 23 00 - 6


10/14/2013

b. Shall be utilized for interior and exterior purposes. c. A Category (CAT)-V cable will be the primary source for carrying signals up to 300 ft. (100 m) from a switch hub or network server. If any camera is installed greater than 300 ft. (100 m) from the controlling device then the following will be required:

1) A remote 12 VDC or 24 VAC power source will be required from a Class

2, UL compliant power supply.

2) A signal converter will be required to convert from a CAT-V cable over to a fiber optic or standard signal cable. The signal will need to be converted back to a CAT-V cable at the controlling device using a signal d. Shall: converter card.

1) Be routed to a controlling device via a network switcher or direct connection to a network server.

2) Be of hybrid design with both an Internet Protocol (IP) output and a monitor video output which produces a picture equivalent to an analog camera, and allows simultaneous output of both.

3) Provide at a minimum 1.3 Megapixel with built-in complementary color filter for accurate color with no image lag or distortion.

4) Be a programmable IP address that allows for installation of multiple units in the same Local Area Network (LAN) environment.

5) Incorporate a minimum of Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)/IP, User

Datagram Protocol (UDP), Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP), File

Transfer Protocol (FTP), Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP0,

Address Resolution Protocol (ARP), Real-Time Transport Protocol

(RTP), Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP), Network Time

Protocol (NTP), Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP), Internet Group

Management Protocol (IGMP), and Differentiated Service Code Point

(DSCP) protocols for various network applications.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

Video Standards

Video Data Rate

Image Resolution

Video Resolution

Select Frame Rate

Network Protocols

Software Update

Configuration

Video Out

Sensitivity

Alarm In

Input Voltage

Minimum Illumination

Video Signal-to-Noise Ratio

Video Signal Gain

H.264; MPEG-4; M-JPEG

9.6 Kbps - 10 Mbps Constant & variable

768x494 (NTSC)

704 x 576/480 (4CIF: 25/30 IPS) 704 x

288/240 (2CIF: 25/30 IPS) 352 x

288/240 (CIF: 25/30 IPS) 176 x

144/120 (QCIF: 25/30 IPS)

1-25/30 IPS (PAL/NTSC);Field/frame based coding

RTP, Telnet, UDP, TCP, IP, HTTP,

IGMP, ICMP

Remote programmable

Via web browser, built-in web server interfaces

1x Analog composite: NTSC or PAL;

BNC connector 75 Ohm

1 0.5 lux (color) 0.25 lux (Night Sense)

0.30 lux (color)0.12 lux(Night Sense)

50 dB

21 dB, (max) Electronic Shutter

Automatic, up to 1/150000 sec.

(NTSC)

Automatic sensing (2500 - 9000 K)

+5 V nominal, +40 VDC max

28 23 00 - 7


10/14/2013

VDC: 11-36 V (700 mA) VAC: 12-

28 V (700 mA) PoE: IEEE

802.3af compilant

C.

D.

E.

F.

Lenses: Shall be utilized in a manner that provides maximum coverage of the area being monitored by the camera. The lenses shall:

1. Be 1/3” to fit CCD fixed camera.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Be all glass with coated optics.

Have mounts that are compatible with the camera selected.

Be packaged, back focused, and supplied with the camera.

Have a maximum f-stop of f/1.3 for fixed lenses, and a maximum f-stop of f/1.6

6.

7.

8. for variable focus lenses.

Be equipped with an auto-iris mechanism.

Have sufficient circle of illumination to cover the image sensor evenly.

Not be used on a camera with an image format larger than the lens is designed

9. to cover.

Be provided with pre-set capability.

Two types of lenses shall be utilized for both interior and exterior fixed cameras:

1. Manual Variable Focus

2. Auto Iris Fixed

Manual Variable Focus:

1. Shall be utilized in large areas that are being monitored by the camera.

Examples of this are perimeter fence lines, vehicle entry points, parking areas,

2. etc.

Shall allow for setting virtually any angle of field, which maximizes surveillance effects.

Image format

Focal length

Iris range

Focus range

Back focus distance

Angle view Wide (1/3 in)

Angle view Tele (1/3 in)

Iris control

Focus ctrl

Zoom ctrl

1/3 inch

5–50mm

F1.4 to close

1m (3.3 ft.)

10.05 mm (0.4 in)

53.4 x 40.1

5.3 x 4.1 manual manual manual

Auto Iris Fixed

1. Shall be utilized in areas where a small specific point of reference is to be

2. monitored. Examples of this are doorways, elevators, cashier booths, etc.

To determine the exact size of the fixed lens required, complete a focal length calculation using either a focal length calculator or a focal length chart provided by the product manufacturer.

Image format

Focal length

Iris range

Min. Object

1/3 inch

2.8 mm

F1.2 – 200

0.3 m (1 ft.)

1/3 inch

4 mm

F1.2 – 200

0.3 m (1 ft.)

1/3 inch

8 mm

F1.2 - 200

0.3 m (1 ft.)

33 x 25 manual

Angle of view

Focus control

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

94 X 72

Manual

64 X 49

Manual

28 23 00 - 8


10/14/2013

G. Video Display Equipment

1. Will consist of color monitors and shall be EIA 375A compliant.

2. Shall be able to display analog, digital, and other images in either NTSC or

MPEG format associated with the operation of the Security Management System

(SMS).

3. Shall: a. Have front panel controls that provide for power on/off, horizontal and vertical hold, brightness, and contrast. b. Accept multiple inputs, either directly or indirectly. c. Have the capabilities to observe and program the CCTV System. d. Be installed in a manner that they cannot be witnessed by the general public.

4. Color Video Monitors Technical Characteristics:

Sync Format

Display Tube

Horizontal Resolution

Video Input

PAL/NTSC

90° deflection angle

250 TVL minimum, 300 TVL typical

1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ohm

Front Panel Controls Volume, Contrast, Brightness, Color

Connectors BNC;

5. Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) Flat Panel Display Monitor

Sync Format

LCD Panel

Resolution

Dynamic Contrast Ratio (CR)

Viewing Angle

Video Input

Video 1

Video 2

Y/C (S-video)

PAL/NTSC

TFT LCD

1920 x 1080 pixels; 500 TV

100,000:1

140° horizontal, 130° vertical

(CVBS) 1.0 Vp-p (0.5–1.5 Vp-p),

75 Ohm Y/C (S-video) 0.7 Vp-p,

0.3 Vp-p, 75 Ohm

DVI-D; HDMI

Composite video two (2) BNC (1 in, 1 out) two (2) mini-dins, 4-pin (1 in, 1 out)

H. Camera Housings and Mounts:

1. This section pertains to all interior and exterior housings, domes, and applicable wall, ceiling, corner, pole, and rooftop mounts associated with the housing.

Housings and mounts shall be specified in accordance to the type of cameras used.

2.

3.

4.

All cameras and lenses shall be enclosed in a tamper resistant housing. Any additional mounting hardware required to install the camera housing at its specified location shall be provided along with the housing. All mounting bolts, nuts, or screws shall be tamperproof.

The camera and lens contained inside the housing shall be installed on a camera mount. All additional mounting hardware required to install the camera housing at its specified location shall be provided along with the housing.

Shall be manufactured in a manner that are capable of supporting a maximum of three (3) cameras with housings, and meet environmental requirements for the

5. a. Shall: geographical area the camera support equipment is being installed on or within.

Environmentally Sealed

1) Be designed in manner that it provides a condensation free environment for correct camera operation.

2) Operate in a 100 percent condensing humidity atmosphere.

3) Be constructed in a manner that:

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 23 00 - 9


10/14/2013

b. All electrical and signal cables required for correct operations shall be supplied in a hardened carrier system from the controller to the camera. c. The mounting bracket shall be adjustable to allow for the housing weight of the camera and the housing unit it is placed in. d. Accessibility to the camera and mounts shall be taken into consideration for maintenance and service purposes.

6. Indoor Mounts

1) This enclosure and mount shall be installed in a finished or suspended ceiling.

2) The enclosure and mount shall be fastened to the finished ceiling, and shall not depend on the ceiling tile grid for complete support.

3) Suspended ceiling mounts shall be low profile, and shall be suitable for replacement of 2 foot by 2 foot (610mm x 610mm) ceiling tiles.

1) The enclosure shall be installed in manner that it matches the existing décor and placed at a height that it will be unobtrusive, unable to cause personal harm, and prevents tampering and vandalism.

2) The mount shall contain a manual pan/tilt head that will provide 360 degrees of horizontal and vertical positioning from a horizontal position, and has a locking bar or screw to maintain its fixed position once it has been adjusted. a. The interior dome shall be a pendant mount, pole mount, ceiling mount, surface mount, or corner mounted equipment. b. The lower portion of the dome that provides camera viewing shall be made of black opaque acrylic and shall have a light attenuation factor of no more than

.5 f-stop. c. The housing shall be equipped with integral pan/tilt capabilities complete with wiring, wiring harness, connectors, receiver/driver, pan/tilt control system, pre-position cards, or any other hardware and equipment as needed to fully provide a fully functional pan/tilt dome. d. The pan/tilt mechanism shall be:

1) Constructed of heavy duty bearings and hardened steel gears.

2) Permanently lubricated to ensure smooth and consistent movement of all parts throughout the life of the product.

3) Equipped with motors that are thermally or impedance protected against overload damage. e. Pan movements shall be 360 degrees and tilt movement shall not be less than +/- 90 degrees. f. Pan speed shall be a minimum of 10 degrees per second.

9. a. The exterior dome shall meet all requirements outlined in the interior dome paragraph above. b. The housing shall be constructed to be dust and water tight, and fully operational in 100 percent condensing humidity.

Exterior Wall Mounts a. Shall have an adjustable head for mounting the camera. b. Shall be constructed of aluminum, stainless steel, or steel with a corrosionresistant finish. c. The head shall be adjustable for not less than plus and minus 90 degrees of pan, and not less than plus and minus 45 degrees of tilt. If the bracket is to be used in conjunction with a pan/tilt, the bracket shall be supplied without the adjustable mounting head, and shall have a bolt-hole pattern to match the pan/tilt base. d. Shall be installed at a height that allows for maximum coverage of the area being monitored.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 23 00 - 10


10/14/2013

1.

2.

3.

4.

Shall be utilized to call up, operate, and program all cameras associated CCTV

System components.

Will have the ability to operate the cameras locally and remotely. A matrix switcher or a network server shall be utilized as the CCTV System controller.

The controller shall be able to fit into a standard 19” (47.5 cm) equipment rack.

Control and programming keyboards shall be provided with its own type of switcher. All keyboards shall: a. Be located at each monitoring station. b. Be addressable for programming purposes. c. Provide interface between the operator and the CCTV System. d. Provide full control and programming of the switcher. e. Have the minimum following controls:

1) Programming

2) Switching

3) Lens function

4) P/T/Z

5. b. c. d. e.

6) Annotation

Matrix Switcher: The matrix switcher shall meet the following minimum requirements: a. Take multiple camera inputs and route them to multiple monitoring stations.

Allow for centralized user management controlling configurations.

Provide live viewing of all cameras.

Provide P/T/Z, focus, and iris control of all unitized cameras. f.

Be expandable to allow for the addition of multiple cameras and monitoring stations over the life of the system visual identification system by utilizing input and output video and controller cards.

Input cards shall allow for the addition of a minimum of four (4) camera g. h. i. j. k. inputs per card.

Output cards shall allow for the addition of a minimum of eight (8) outputs per card.

Have the ability to be programmed either locally or remotely.

Remotely operate multiple cameras from multiple stations.

Be able to fully interface with a digital video recorder (DVR) for recording of all events.

Utilize RS-232 or fiber optic connections for integration with the SMS l. m. computer station via a remote port on a network hub.

Shall have an alarm interface that is compatible with all associated security subsystems. Alarm inputs shall be via either a relay or an EIA

ANSI/EIA/TIA-232-F interface. The interface shall allow for a minimum of

24 alarm inputs and 12 alarm outputs.

The switcher response time to an alarm input shall not be less than 200 milliseconds from the time an alarm is sensed until a picture is displayed on a monitor. n.

0. p. q.

The switcher shall have a built in buffer to allow for back-log of alarms.

These alarms shall be viewable by an operator.

Be addressable in the event multiple matrix switchers are connected to the SMS.

Be configured, i.e. camera names, monitor names, sequences, alarms and alarm actions, etc. utilizing the configuration program and tools provided by the matrix manufacturer.

The matrix switcher shall meet the following minimum input/output requirements:

Camera inputs 16

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 23 00 - 11


10/14/2013

Video outputs

Keyboard/Controller Outputs

Alarm inputs

4

4

323 r. The matrix switcher will have the following components and technical characteristics:

Functions

Alarm control

RS-485

(Camera)Port

Extension Port

Extension Port

Extension Port

Monitor control Camera selection, tour sequence, group sequence, group preset, OSD display,

Camera/Receiver control via coaxial or RS-485 cable communication, Recorder control

Alarm event, Alarm Acknowledge, Alarm reset, Alarm suspension, Alarm History Display, Timer event, and

Camera event

6-conductor modular jack x 12 (2- wire or 4-wire communication, With termination switches (MODE 1 to

4))

6-conductor modular jack x 2(With a (EXTENSION 1 IN,

OUT) termination switch (TERM: ON, OFF))

37-pin D-sub connector x 2(EXTENSION IN 2 or 3)

37-pin D-sub connector x 2(EXTENSION OUT 2 or 3)

Camera Input

Alarm Input

Monitor Output

Alarm Output

Extension Port

Serial Port

1 V [P-P]/75 Ohm (BNC), composite video signal 0.5 V [P-

P]/75 Ohm data signal and 2.5 V [P-P]/75 Ohm (25 pin

D sub connector x 4)

N.O. (Normally Open contact) or N.C. (Normally Close contact) selectable x 32 (37 pin D sub connector)

1 V [P-P]/75 Ohm (BNC)

Open collector output x 32, Max. 24 VDC, 100 mA

6-conductor modular jack x 2

9-pin D-sub connector x 2 a. Allow for the transmission of live video, data, and audio over either an existing Ethernet network or a dedicated security system network, requiring an IP address or Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher, or shall work as an analogto-Ethernet “bridge” controlling matrices, multiplexers, and pan/tilt/zoom cameras. The network shall operate in a box-to-box configuration allowing for encoded video to be decoded and displayed on an analog monitor. b. If a CCTV System network is going to be utilized as the primary means of monitoring, operating, and recording cameras then the following equipment shall be required as part of the system:

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

4) Encoder/Decoder

5) Monitor

6) Hub/Switch

7) Router

8) Encryptor

28 23 00 - 12


10/14/2013

c. Shall provide overall control, programming, monitoring, and recording of all cameras and associated devices within the CCTV System. d. All equipment on the network shall be IP addressable. e. The CCTV System network shall meet or exceed the following design and performance specifications:

1) Two MPEG-4 video streams for a total of 40 images per second will be provided.

2) PC Software that manages the installation and maintenance of all hardware transmitters and receivers on the network shall be provided.

3) Video Source that supports any NTSC video source to the computer network shall be addressed.

4) Receivers that could be used to display the video on a standard analog

NTSC or PAL monitor will be addressed. f. The system shall support the following network protocols:

1) Internet connections: RTP, Real Time Control Protocol (RTCP), UDP, IP,

TCP, ICMP, HTTP, Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP),

IGMP, DHCP, and ARP.

2) Video Display: H.264, MPEG-4, M-JPEG in server push mode only.

3) Have the ability to adjust bandwidth, image quality and image rate.

4) Support image sizes of either 704 x 576 pixels or 352 x 288 pixels.

5) Have an audio coding format of G.711 or G.728.

6) Provide a video frame rate of at least 30 images per second.

7) Support LAN Interface Ethernet 10/100/1000 BaseT and be auto sensing.

8) Have a LAN Data Rate of 9.6 Kbps to 10.0 Mbps.

9) Utilize data interface RS-232/RS-422/RS-485. g. All connections within the system shall be via CAT-V cable and RJ-45 jacks.

If analog equipment is used as part of the system, then either an encoder or a decoder will be utilized to convert the analog signal to a digital one. h. The CCTV network system shall conform to wide security standards for administrator and operator use. i. Server Technical Characteristics:

Hardware

CPU

Hard Disk Interface

RAM

OS

Graphic Card

Ethernet Card

Software

Free Memory

Personal Computer

Pentium IV, 4.0 GHz or better

SCATA or better

16 GB

Windows 2003/XP Professional/Vista

NVIDIA Quadro FX 4600

100 Mb

DirectX 9.0c

120 MB j. Network Switch Technical Characteristics

Protocol and standard IEEE802.3

IEEE802.3u

Ports

IEEE802.3ab

24 10/100/1000M auto-negotiation RJ-45 ports with auto MDI/MDI-X

Network media

Transmission method

LED

Cat 6 UTP for 1,000Mbps store-and-forward indicator power, act/link, speed k. Router Technical Characteristics

Network Standards IEEE 802.3, 802.3u 10Base-T

Ethernet (WAN) 100Base-T Ethernet

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 23 00 - 13


10/14/2013

Protocol

VPN Supported

Management

Ports

LEDs

(LAN) IEEE 802.3x Flow Control

IEEE802.1p Priority Queue ANS/IEEE

802.3 NWay auto-negotiation

CSMA/CD, TCP, IP, UDP, PPPoE, AND

DHCP (client and server)

PPTP, IPSec pass-through

Browser

4 x 10/100/1000Base-T Auto sensing

RJ45 ports, and an auto uplink RJ45port(s)

1x 10Base-T RJ45 port, WAN

Power, WAN Activity, LAN Link (10/100), LAN

Activity

Cryptography

Performance

Key Management

Physical Interfaces

Device Management

Security Features

Management

Security Certifications

Regulatory

Standard - Triple DES 168-bit (ANSI 9.52)

Rijndael - AES (128, 192, 256)

Throughput (end-to-end) @ 100 Mbps line speed: >188 Mbps full duplex (large frames) >200 kfps full duplex (small frames) Latency (end-to-end) @ 100

Mbps

Automatic KEK/DEK Exchange Using Signed

Diffie-Hellman Unit Authentication Using

X.509 Certificates

10BaseT or 10/100BaseT Ethernet (Host and

Network Ports) 10BaseT Ethernet

Management Port Back and Front-Panel

Serial Control Port

THALES Element Manager, Front Panel

Viewer, and Certificate Manager 10Base

T (RJ-45) or 9-pin Serial Control Port

SNMP Network Monitoring

Tamper Proof Cryptographic Envelope

Tamper Evident Chassis Hardware

Random Number Generator

Channel Encrypted Using Same Algorithm as

Data Traffic

FIPS 140-2 Level 3 CAPS Baseline and

Enhanced Grades Common Criteria EAL4 and EAL5 (under evaluation)

EN60950, FCC, UL, CE, EN 50082-1, and EN

55022

1.

2.

3.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

All cameras on the CCTV System shall be recorded in real time using a Digital

Video Recorder (DVR), Network Video Recorder (NVR). The type of recording device utilized should be determined by the size and type of CCTV System designed and installed, and to what extent the system is to be utilized.

All recording devices shall be 19“(47.5 cm) rack-mountable.

All DVR’s and NVR’s that are viewable over an Intranet or Internet will be routed through an encryptor. Encryptors shall: a. Comply with FIPS PUB 140-2. c. Directly interfaces to low-cost commercial routers.

28 23 00 - 14


10/14/2013

4. d. Provide packet-based crypto synchronization. e. Encrypt source and destination IP addresses. f. Support web browser based management requiring no additional software. g. Have a high data sustained throughput — 1.544 Mbps (T1) full duplex data rate. h. Provide for both bridging and routing network architecture support. i. Support Electronic Key Management System (EKMS) compatible. j. Have remote management ability. k. Automatically reconfigure when secure network or wide area network changes.

Digital Video Recorder (DVR): a. Shall record video to a hard drive-based digital storage medium in either

NTSC or MPEG format. b. Shall meet the following minimum requirements:

1) Record at minimum rate of 10 images per second (IPS) per video input.

2) Have a minimum of sixteen (16) looping inputs.

3) Have a minimum of sixteen (16) alarm inputs and two (2) relay outputs.

4) Shall provide instantaneous playback of all recorded images.

5) Be IP addressable.

6) Have built-in digital motion detection with masking and sensitivity adjustments.

7) Provide easy playback and forward/reverse search capabilities.

8) Complete audit trail database, with minimum of a six-month history that tracks all events related to the alarm; specifically who, what, where and when.

9) DVR management capability providing automatic video routing to a back-up spare recorder in case of failure.

10) Accessible locally and remotely via the Internet, Intranet, or a personal digital assistant (PDA).

11) Records all alarm events in real time, ensuring 60 seconds before and after the event are included in the recording.

12) Utilize RS-232 or fiber optic connections for integration with the SMS computer station via a remote port on a network hub.

13) Allow for independently adjustable frame rate settings.

14) Be compatible with the matrix switcher utilized to operate the cameras.

The DVR could be utilized as a matrix switcher only if it meets all of the requirements listed in the matrix switcher section.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

Processor

Memory

Operating System

Video Card

Free Hard Disk

Space

Network Card

Archiving

Video Input

Video Output Level

Impedance

Network Interface

Network Protocol

Intel Pentium III 750 MHz

256 MB RAM

Windows 98, NT, ME, 2000, and XP

8 MB of RAM capable of 32-bit true color display

160 MB for software installation

10Base-T network for LAN operation

80 GB, 160 GB, 320 GB and 640 GB Hard

Drive; CD-RW

1.0 Vpp (signal 714mV, sync 286mV) 75 ohms

(BNC unbalanced)

1.0 Vpp +/-10%,75 ohms(BNC unbalanced)

75 ohms/Hi- impedance x 16 switchable

Ethernet (RJ-45, 10/100M)

TCP/IP, DHCP, HTTP, UDP

28 23 00 - 15


10/14/2013

5.

Network Capabilities

Recording Rate

Password Protection

Recording Capacity

Power Interrupt

Live/Playback/P/T/Z control

30 ips for 720 x 240 (NTSC)

Menu Setup, Remote Access

160 (1 or 2 fixed HDD) 1 CD-RW

Auto recovered to recording mode

Network Video Recorder (NVR) a. Shall record video to a hard drive-based digital storage medium in MPEG format. b. Shall meet the following minimum requirements:

1) Record at minimum rate of 30 IPS.

2) Have a minimum of 1 looping input per video source.

3) Have a minimum of 16 alarm inputs and two (2) relay outputs.

4) Shall provide instantaneous playback of all recorded images.

5) Be IP addressable.

6) Have built-in digital motion detection with masking and sensitivity adjustments.

7) Easy playback and forward/reverse search capabilities.

8) Complete audit trail database, with minimum of a six-month history that tracks all events related to the alarm; specifically who, what, where and when.

9) NVR management capability providing automatic video routing to a backup spare recorder in case of failure.

10) Accessible locally and remotely via the internet, intranet, or a personal digital assistant (PDA).

11) Records all alarm events in real time, ensuring 60 seconds before and after the event are included in the recording.

12) Utilize RS-232 or fiber optic connections for integration with the SMS computer station via a remote port on a network hub.

13) Allow for independently adjustable frame rate settings.

14) Be compatible with the matrix switcher utilized to operate the cameras.

Hardware/CPU

HDD Interface

RAM

Operating System

Graphic

Ethernet Card

Memory

Software Setup

Storage Media

Storage Mode

Recording Configuration

Recording Content

Search Parameters

Playback

Network Interface

Network Protocol

Network Capabilities

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

Pentium III Xeon or IV, 1.8 GHz

IDE or better; optional: SCSI II, SCSI Ultra, or Fiber

Channel

1024

Windows 2000/XP Professional/Server 2003 Standard

Card VGA

100/1000 MB

20 MB

Centralized setup from each authorized PC; access via

VIDOS or integrated web server

All storage media possible (e.g., HD, RAID), depending on operating system

Linear mode, ring mode (capacity-based)

Camera name assignment, bandwidth limit, frame rate, video quality

Video and/or audio data

Time, date, event

Playback via VIDOS over any IP network (LAN/WAN) simultaneous recording, playback, and backup

Ethernet (RJ-45, 10/100M)

TCP/IP, DHCP, HTTP, UDP

Live/Playback/P/T/Z control

28 23 00 - 16


10/14/2013

Recording Rate

Password Protection

Recording Capacity

Power Interrupt

30 ips for 720 x 240 (NTSC)

Menu Setup, Remote Access

160 (1 or 2 fixed HDD) 1 CD-RW

Auto recovered to recording mode

K. Wires and Cables

1.

2.

Shall meet or exceed the manufactures recommendation for power and signal.

Will be carried in an enclosed conduit system, utilizing electromagnetic tubing

(EMT) to include the equivalent in flexible metal, rigid galvanized steel (RGS) to include the equivalent of liquid tight, polyvinylchloride (PVC) schedule 40 or 80.

3.

4.

5.

6.

All conduits will be sized and installed per the NEC. All security system signal and power cables that traverse or originate in a high security office space will contained in either EMT or RGS conduit.

All conduit, pull boxes, and junction boxes shall be clearly marked with colored permanent tape or paint that will allow it to be distinguished from all other conduit and infrastructure.

Conduit fills shall not exceed 40 percent unless otherwise documented.

A pull string shall be pulled along and provided with signal and power cables to

7.

8.

9. assist in future installations.

At all locations where there is a wall penetration or core drilling is conducted to allow for conduit to be installed, fire stopping materials shall be applied to that area

High voltage and signal cables shall not share the same conduit and shall be kept separate up to the point of connection. High voltage for the security system shall be defined as any cable or sets of cables carrying 30 VDC/VAC or higher.

For all equipment that is carrying digital data between the Access Control System and Database Management or at a remote monitoring station, shall not be less that 20 AWG and stranded copper wire for each conductor. The cable or each individual conductor within the cable shall have a shield that provides 100% coverage. Cables with a single overall shield shall have a tinned copper shield drain wire.

10. All cables and conductors, except fiber optic cables, that act as a control, communication, or signal lines shall include surge protection. Surge protection shall be furnished at the equipment end and additional triple electrode gas surge protectors rated for the application on each wire line circuit shall be installed within three (3) ft. (one (1) m.) of the building cable entrance. The inputs and outputs shall be tested in both normal and common mode using the following wave forms: a. A 10 microsecond rise time by 1000 microsecond pulse width waveform with a peak voltage of 1500 watts and peak current of 60 amperes. b. An 8 microsecond rise time by 20 microsecond pulse width wave form with a peak voltage of 1000 volts and peak current of 500 amperes.

11. The surge suppression device shall not attenuate or reduce the video or sync signal under normal conditions. Fuses and relays shall not be used as a means of surge protection. a. Signal wiring for PoE cameras depends on the distance the camera is being installed from either a hub or the server. b. If the camera is up to 300 ft. from a hub or the server, then use a shielded

UTP category 6. The cable with comply with the Power over Ethernet,

IEEE802.3af, Standard. c. If the camera is over 300 ft. from a hub or server then utilize a multimode fiber optic cable with a minimum size of 50 microns. d. Provide a separate cable for power.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 23 00 - 17


10/14/2013

a. Will be sized accordingly and shall comply with the NEC. High voltage power cables will be a minimum of three conductors, 14 AWG, stranded, and coated with a non-conductive polyvinylchloride (PVC) jacket. Low voltage cables will be a minimum of 18 AWG, stranded and non-conductive polyvinylchloride (PVC) jacket. b. Will be utilized for all components of the CCTV System that require either a

110 VAC 60 Hz or 220 VAC 50 Hz input. Each feed will be connected to a dedicated circuit breaker at a power panel that is primarily for the security system. c. All equipment connected to AC power shall be protected from surges.

Equipment protection shall withstand surge test waveforms described in

IEEE C62.41. Fuses shall not be used as a means of surge protection. d. Shall be rated for either 110 or 220 VAC, 50 or 60 Hz, and shall comply with

Master Spec 26 05 21 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables

(600 Volts and Below). e. Low Voltage Power Cables

1) Shall be a minimum of 16 AWG, Stranded and have a polyvinylchloride outer jacket.

2) Cable size shall be determined using a basic voltage over distance calculation and shall comply with the NEC’s requirements for low voltage cables.


A. General:

1. The kit shall be provided that, at a minimum, includes all connectors and terminals, labeling systems, audio spade lugs, barrier strips, punch blocks or wire wrap terminals, heat shrink tubing, cable ties, solder, hangers, clamps, bolts, conduit, cable duct, and/or cable tray, etc., required to accomplish a neat and secure installation. All wires shall terminate in a spade lug and barrier strip, wire wrap terminal or punch block. Unfinished or unlabeled wire connections shall not be allowed. All unused and partially opened installation kit boxes, coaxial, fiber-optic, and twisted pair cable reels, conduit, cable tray, and/or cable duct bundles, wire rolls, physical installation hardware shall be turned over to the Contracting Officer. The following sections outline the minimum required installation sub-kits to be used: a. The grounding kit shall include all cable and installation hardware required. All head end equipment and power supplies shall be connected to earth ground via internal building wiring, according to the NEC. b. This includes, but is not limited to:

1) Control Cable Shields

2) Data Cable Shields

5) Conduits

6) Cable Duct blocks

9) Grounding

3. Wire and Cable: The wire and cable kit shall include all connectors and terminals, audio spade lugs, barrier straps, punch blocks, wire wrap strips, heat shrink tubing, tie wraps, solder, hangers, clamps, labels etc., required to accomplish a neat and orderly installation.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 23 00 - 18


10/14/2013

4.

5.

Conduit, Cable Duct, and Cable Tray: The kit shall include all conduit, duct, trays, junction boxes, back boxes, cover plates, feed through nipples, hangers, clamps, other hardware required to accomplish a neat and secure conduit, cable duct, and/or cable tray installation in accordance with the NEC and this document.

Equipment Interface: The equipment kit shall include any item or quantity of equipment, cable, mounting hardware and materials needed to interface the

6.

7. systems with the identified sub-system(s) according to the OEM requirements and this document.

Labels: The labeling kit shall include any item or quantity of labels, tools, stencils, and materials needed to correctly label each subsystem according to the OEM requirements, as-installed drawings, and this document.

Documentation: The documentation kit shall include any item or quantity of items, computer discs, as installed drawings, equipment, maintenance, and operation manuals, and OEM materials needed to correctly provide the system documentation as required by this document and explained herein.

PART 3


A. System installation shall be in accordance with NECA 303, manufacturer and related documents and references, for each type of security subsystem designed, engineered and installed.

B. Components shall be configured with appropriate “service points” to pinpoint system trouble in less than 30 minutes.

C. The Contractor shall install all system components including Government furnished equipment, and appurtenances in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, documentation listed in

Sections 1.4 and 1.5 of this document, and shall furnish all necessary connectors, terminators, interconnections, services, and adjustments required for a complete and operable system.

D. The CCTV System will be designed, engineered, installed, and tested to ensure all components are fully compatible as a system and can be integrated with all associated security subsystems, whether the system is a standalone or a complete network.

E. For integration purposes, the CCTV System shall be integrated where appropriate with the following associated security subsystems:

1. PACS: a. Provide 24 hour coverage of all entry points to the perimeter and agency buildings. As well as all emergency exits utilizing a fixed color camera. b. Record cameras on a 24 hours basis. c. Be programmed go into an alarm state when an emergency exit is opened, and notify the

Access Control System and Database Management of an alarm event. d. For additional CCTV System requirements as they relate to the PACS, refer to Section 28

13 11, PHYSICAL ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS.

2. IDS: a. Provide a recorded alarm event via a color camera that is connected to the IDS system by either direct hardwire or a security system computer network. b. Record cameras on a 24 hours basis. c. Be programmed to go into an alarm state when an IDS device is put into an alarm state, and notify the. d. For additional CCTV System requirements as they relate to the IDS, refer to Master

Specification 28 16 11. a. Provide full coverage of all vehicle and lobby entrance screening areas utilizing a fixed color camera.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 23 00 - 19


10/14/2013

b. Record cameras on a 24 hours basis. c. The CCTV System should have facial recognition software to assist in identifying individuals for current and future purposes. d. For additional CCTV System requirements as they relate to the Security Access

Detection, refer to Master Specification 28 13 53.

4. EPPS: a. Provide a recorded alarm event via a color camera that is connected to the EPPS system by either direct hardwire or a security system computer network. b. Record cameras on a 24 hours basis. c. Be programmed to go into an alarm state when an emergency call box or duress alarm/panic device is activated, and notify the Access Control System and Database

Management of an alarm event. d. For additional CCTV System requirements as they relate to the EPPS, refer to Master

Specification 28 26 00.

F. Integration with these security subsystems shall be achieved by computer programming or the direct hardwiring of the systems.

G. For programming purposes refer to the manufacturers requirements for correct system operations. Ensure computers being utilized for system integration meet or exceed the minimum system requirements outlined on the systems software packages.

H. A complete CCTV System shall be comprised of, but not limited to, the following components:

1. Cameras

2. Lenses

3. Video Display Equipment

4. Camera Housings and Mounts

I. The Contractor shall visit the site and verify that site conditions are in agreement/compliance with the design package. The Contractor shall report all changes to the site or conditions that will affect performance of the system to the Contracting Officer in the form of a report. The Contractor shall not take any corrective action without written permission received from the Contracting

Officer.

J. Enclosure Penetrations: All enclosure penetrations shall be from the bottom of the enclosure unless the system design requires penetrations from other directions. Penetrations of interior enclosures involving transitions of conduit from interior to exterior, and all penetrations on exterior enclosures shall be sealed with rubber silicone sealant to preclude the entry of water and will comply with Master Specification 07 84 00, Firestopping. The conduit riser shall terminate in a hot-dipped galvanized metal cable terminator. The terminator shall be filled with an approved sealant as recommended by the cable manufacturer and in such a manner that the cable is not damaged.

K. Cold Galvanizing: All field welds and brazing on factory galvanized boxes, enclosures, and conduits shall be coated with a cold galvanized paint containing at least 95 percent zinc by weight.

L. Interconnection of Console Video Equipment: The Contractor shall connect signal paths between video equipment as specified by the OEM. Cables shall be as short as practicable for each signal path without causing strain at the connectors. Rack mounted equipment on slide mounts shall have cables of sufficient length to allow full extension of the slide rails from the rack.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 23 00 - 20


10/14/2013

M. Cameras:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Install the cameras with the focal length lens as indicated for each zone.

Connect power and signal lines to the camera.

Set cameras with fixed iris lenses to the f-stop to give full video level.

Aim camera to give field of view as needed to cover the alarm zone.

Aim fixed mounted cameras installed outdoors facing the rising or setting sun

6. sufficiently below the horizon to preclude the camera looking directly at the sun.

Focus the lens to give a sharp picture (to include checking for day and night focus and image quality) over the entire field of view; and synchronize all cameras so the picture does not roll on the monitor when cameras are selected.

Dome cameras shall have all preset positions defined and installed.

N. Monitors:

1.

2.

3.

4.

Install the monitors as shown and specified in design and construction documents.

Connect all signal inputs and outputs as shown and specified.

Terminate video input signals as required.

Connect the monitor to AC power.

O. Video Recording Equipment:

1. Install the video recording equipment as shown in the design and construction documents, and as specified by the OEM.

2.

3.

4.

Connect video signal inputs and outputs as shown and specified.

Connect alarm signal inputs and outputs as shown and specified.

Connect video recording equipment to AC power.

P. Video Signal Equipment:

1. Install the video signal equipment as shown in the design and construction

2. documents, and as specified by the OEM.

Connect video or signal inputs and outputs as shown and specified.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Terminate video inputs as required.

Connect alarm signal inputs and outputs as required.

Connect control signal inputs and outputs as required

Connect electrically powered equipment to AC power.

Q. Camera Housings, Mounts, and Poles:

1. Install the camera housings and mounts as specified by the manufacturer and as shown, provide mounting hardware sized appropriately to secure each camera,

2.

3.

4.

5.

6. housing and mount with maximum wind and ice loading encountered at the site.

Provide a foundation for each camera pole as specified and shown.

Provide a ground rod for each camera pole and connect the camera pole to the ground rod as specified in Division 26 of the Master Specification and the

Electrical Manual 730.

Provide electrical and signal transmission cabling to the mount location via a hardened carrier system from the Access Control System and Database

Management to the device.

Connect signal lines and AC power to the housing interfaces.

Connect pole wiring harness to camera.

1. The Contractor shall not apply power to the CCTV System until the following items have been completed: a. CCTV System equipment items and have been set up in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. b. A visual inspection of the CCTV System has been conducted to ensure that defective equipment items have not been installed and that there are no loose connections.

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 23 00 - 21


10/14/2013

c. System wiring has been tested and verified as correctly connected as indicated. d. All system grounding and transient protection systems have been verified as installed and connected as indicated. e. Power supplies to be connected to the CCTV System have been verified as the correct voltage, phasing, and frequency as indicated.

2. Satisfaction of the above requirements shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for incorrect installation, defective equipment items, or collateral damage as a result of Contractor work efforts.

U. Supplemental Contractor Quality Control

1.

2.

The Contractor shall provide the services of technical representatives who are familiar with all components and installation procedures of the installed CCTV

System; and are approved by the Contracting Officer.

The Contractor will be present on the job site during the preparatory and initial

3.

4. shall provide certification that the system installed is fully operational as all construction document requirements have been fulfilled.

3.2 TESTING AND TRAINING phases of quality control to provide technical assistance.

The Contractor shall also be available on an as needed basis to provide assistance with follow-up phases of quality control.

The Contractor shall participate in the testing and validation of the system and

All testing and training shall be videotaped and shall accommodate no less than 8 attendees and all training shall be on-site. Training shall include demonstrations of the key elements and components of the CCTV system, including videotaping and all related features. The Contractor shall submit, for review and approval a listing of all demonstration and training that is to take place. This listing shall include subject matter and time frames for each of the recommended subjects. This training shall be compliant with the General Requirements, Section 01 00 00,

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.

END OF SECTION

RTC IBMF SOGR

Las Vegas, NV

28 23 00 - 22


10/14/2013

ibmf state of good repair upgrades

IBMF STATE OF GOOD REPAIR UPGRADES

City of North Las Vegas, Nevada

SPECIFICATIONS

For

14-092

December 26, 2013

TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

(CONTINUED)

IBMF Fixed Route Equipment Operation Checklist

IBMF FIXED ROUTE BUILDING

ASPHALT AND CONCRETE AREAS

IBMF FIXED ROUTE BUILDING

ASPHALT AND CONCRETE AREAS

PHOTO NO. 1

All lift options must be compatible with base model lift. If not, then entire lift is not

ALI/ETL certified. Each proposal shall contain a list of certified options from ETL testing labs.

Related documents

Add this document to collection(s)

Add this document to saved

Suggest us how to improve StudyLib